government of jharkhand -...

GOVERNMENT OF JHARKHAND

Engineer-in-Chief-cum-Member Secretary Programme Management Unit

State Water & Sanitation Mission Drinking Water & Sanitation Department

Ranchi, Jharkhand

Doranda Market (Pani Tanki Campus), Doranda, Ranchi Phone: 0651-240920, 9431171291

Environmental Assessment &

Environmental Management Framework For the World Bank Assisted Water Supply Project

in Selected Districts of Jharkhand

FINAL REPORT

JULY-2013

ENV Developmental Assistance Systems (India) Pvt Ltd B-5/131, Indira Nagar, Lucknow- 226018

Phone: 0522-2310576/77 E-mail: [email protected],

Website: www.dasindia.org

mailto:[email protected]

Page | i

Study on Environment Assessment and Environment Management Framework for The World Bank assisted water supply project in the selected Districts of Jharkhand

Environmental Assessment & Environmental Management Framework for The World Bank Assisted Water Supply Project in Selected Districts of Jharkhand

TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION SUBJECT PAGE NO EXECUTIVE SUMMARY A - G 44TUCHAPTER - 1U44T 1 - 6 1 44TINTRODUCTION 44T 1 1.1 BACKGROUND 1 1.2 JHARKHAND STATE WATER AND SANITATION MISSION 1 1.2.1 MAIN OBJECTS 2 1.3 SCOPE OF STUDY 2 1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL ANALYSIS 2 1.5 THE STUDY AREA 3 1.6 APPROACH & METHODOLOGY 3 1.6.1 APPROACH 3 1.6.2 METHODOLOGY 3 1.6.2.1 DATA COLLECTION AND REVIEW 3 1.6.2.2 SAMPLE HABITATIONS FOR FIELD STUDY 4 1.6.2.3 SITE VISITS 5 1.6.3 METHODS FOR DATA COLLECTION 5 1.6.4 TOOLS FOR DATA COLLECTION 5 1.6.5 CONSULTATIONS 6 1.6.5.1 FOCUS GROUP DISCUSSION 6 1.6.5.2 PUBLIC CONSULTATION / DISCLOSURE WORKSHOPS 6 44TUCHAPTER - 2U44T 7 - 22 2 RURAL WATER SUPPLY & SANITATION IN JHARKHAND : POLICY, REGULATORY

FRAMEWORK & PROGRAM 7

2.1 RWSS AT THE NATIONAL CONTEXT 7 2.2 SECTOR REFORM PROJECTS 8 2.3 SWAJALADHARA 8 2.4 SUB – MISSION PROJECT (SMP) 9 2.5 TOTAL SANITATION CAMPAIGN 11 2.6 REGULATORY AND POLICY FRAMEWORK 12 2.6.1 THE 73P

RDP AMENDEMENT TO THE CONSTITUTION OF INDIA AND JHARKHAND

PANCHAYAT RAJ ACT 2001 12

2.6.2 NATIONAL WATER POLICY 13 2.6.3 NATIONAL WATER MISSION ON CLIMATE CHANGE 13 2.6.4 JHARKHAND STATE WATER POLICY 2011 13 2.6.5 GUIDELINES FOR GROUND WATER USE 14 2.6.6 THE WATER (PREVENTION & CONTROL OF POLLUTION) ACT, 1974 14 2.6.7 THE WATER (PREVENTION AND CONTROL OF POLLUTION) CESS ACT, 1977 14 2.6.8 THE AIR (PREVENTION & CONTROL OF POLLUTION) ACT 1981 14 2.6.9 THE ENVIRONMENT (PROTECTION) ACT, 1986 14 2.6.10 THE EIA NOTIFICATION OF 2006 15 2.6.11 THE WETLANDS (CONSERVATION NAD MANAGEMENT) RULES, 2010 15 2.6.12 THE HAZARDOUS WASTES ( MANAGEMENT, HANDLING & TRANSBOUNDARY

MOVEMENT) RULES, 2008 15

2.6.13 BIO MEDICAL WASTE (MANAGEMENT & HANDLING) RULES, 1998 15

Page | ii

Study on Environment Assessment and Environment Management Framework for The World Bank assisted water supply projects in the selected Districts of Jharkhand

2.6.14 MUNCIPAL SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT AND HANDLING RULES 2000 15 2.6.15 E WASTE (MANAGEMENT & HANDLING) RULES, 2011 16 2.6.16 EIA MECHANISM AND WILDLIFE CLEARANCES 16 2.6.17 WILDLIFE PROTECTION ACT, 1972 16 2.6.18 FOREST CONSERVATION ACT, 1980 16 2.6.19 THE INDIAN FOREST ACT, 1927 16 2.6.20 THE BIOLOGICAL DIVERSITY ACT, 2002 17 2.6.21 WORLD BANK SAFEGAURD POLICIES 17 2.6.22 PERMISSIONS, CLEARANCES AND INSTITUTIONS 19 2.7 SECTOR INSTITUTIONS 20 2.7.1 CONVERGING INSTITUTIONS 20 2.7.1.1 NODAL INSTITUTIONS: DRINKING WATER AND SANITATION DEPARTMENT (DWSD OR

DDWS) 21

2.7.1.2 PROPOSED WORLD BANK ASSISTED PROJECT 21 44TUCHAPTER - 3U44T 23 - 70 3 BASELINE ENVIRONMENTAL STATUS 23 3.1 INTRODUCTION 23 3.2 AN OVERVIEW OF JHARKHAND: HISTORY 23 3.3 GEOGRAPHY OF JHARKHAND 23 3.3.1 PHYSICAL ENVIRONMENT 23 3.3.1.1 LOCATION 23 3.3.1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE SETUP 24 3.3.1.3 DEMOGRAPHY 25 3.3.1.3.1 POPULATION (CENSUS 2001) IN LAKHS 25 3.3.1.3.2 ADMINISTRATIVE DETAILS 25 3.3.1.4 IRRIGATION POTENTIAL 26 3.3.1.5 NATURAL RESOURCES 26 3.3.1.5.1 FOREST & WILDLIFE 26 3.3.1.5.1.1 INTRODUCTION 26 3.3.1.5.1.2 LAND USE PATTERN OF THE STATE 26 3.3.1.5.1.3 FOREST COVER 26 3.3.1.5.1.4 FOREST COVER IN TRIBAL DISTRICTS IN JHARKHAND 27 3.3.1.5.1.5 REASONS FOR CHANGE DETECTED IN 2011 ASSESSMENT 28 3.3.1.5.1.6 FOREST COVER OF THE STATE IN DIFFERENT ALTITUDE ZONE 28 3.3.1.5.1.7 FOREST COVER IN DIFFERENT FOREST TYPES 28 3.3.1.5.1.8 TREE COVER 29 3.3.1.5.1.9 GROWING STOCK 29 3.3.1.5.1.10 BAMBOO 29 3.3.1.5.2 IMPORTANT PLANTS 29 3.3.1.5.3 WILDLIFE 29 3.3.1.6 MINES & GEOLOGY 30 3.3.1.7 INFRASTRUCTURE 30 3.3.1.7.1 ROAD 30 3.3.1.7.2 ALL WEATHER AND METAL ROADS 30 3.3.1.7.3 HEALTH 30 3.3.1.8 INDUSTRIALISATION 31 3.3.2 GEOMORPHOLOGY 31 3.3.2.1 FORMATION 31 3.3.2.2 DIVISIONS 31

Page | iii


3.3.3 PHYSIOGRAPHY 31 3.3.3.1 RANCHI PLATEAU 31 3.3.3.2 PAT REGION 31 3.3.3.3 HAZARIBAGH PLATEAU 32 3.3.3.4 KODERMA PLATEAU 32 3.3.3.5 SIMDEGA-SINGHMBHUM UPLANDS 32 3.3.4.6 MANBHUM AREA 32 3.3.3.7 PALAMU PLATEAU 32 3.3.3.8 RAJMAHAL PLATEAU 32 3.3.3.9 DAMODAR VALLEY 33 3.3.4 RIVER BASINS OF JHARKHAND 33 3.3.4.1 EAST FLOWING RIVERS: 33 3.3.4.2 NORTH FLOWING RIVERS: 33 3.3.4.3 SOUTH EAST FLOWING RIVERS: 33 3.3.5 GEOLOGICAL HISTORY OF JHARKHAND 34 3.3.6 GEOLOGY AND MINERAL RESOURCES 34 3.3.7 CLIMATE 36 3.3.8 ECOLOGY 36 3.3.8.1 ECOLOGICALLY SENSITIVE AREAS 37 3.3.8.2 DROUGHT AND OTHER HAZARDS 37 3.3.8.3 WILD LIFE SANCTUARIES RESERVE FORESTS 38 (A) HAZARIBAGH WILDLIFE SANCTUARY 38 (B) PALAMU NATIONAL PARK 38 (C) BETLA NATIONAL PARK 38 (D) DALMA WILDLIFE SANCTUARY 39 (E) PALAMAU TIGER RESERVE 39 (F) TOPCHANCHI WILDLIFE SANCTUARY 39 3.4 AGRICULTURE 40 3.4.1 AGRICULTURAL & LAND HOLDINGS 41 3.4.2 SOILS 41 3.4.3 LANDUSE PATTERN 42 3.5 WATER RESOURCES IN JHARKHAND – AN INTRODUCTION 43 3.5.1 STATUS OF SURFACE WATER IN JHARKHAND 43 3.5.1.1 MAJOR STREAMS OF JHARKHAND 43 3.5.1.1.1 BRAHMANI RIVER SYSTEM 43 3.5.1.1.2 SUBARNAREKHA RIVER SYSTEM 43 3.5.1.1.3 DAMODAR RIVER SYSTEM 44 3.5.1.1.4 AMANAT & ANURANGA RIVER SYSTEM 44 3.5.1.1.5 BARAKAR AJOY & MAYURAKSHI RIVERS 44 3.5.1.1.6 WETLANDS OF JHARKHAND 44 3.5.1.1.7 MAJOR WETLAND TYPES OF JHARKHAND 44 3.5.1.1.8 DISTRICT WISE WETLAND STATISTICS & MAPS 45 3.5.1.1.9 IMPORTANT WETLANDS OF JHARKHAND 46 a. UDHWA LAKE (BIRD SANCTUARY) 47 b. GETALSUD RESERVOIR 47 c. TILAIYA RESERVOIR 48 d. KONAR RESERVOIR 48 e. TENUGHAT RESERVOIR 49 f. MASSANJOR RESERVOIR 49

Page | iv


3.5.2 STATUS OF GROUND WATER HYDROLOGY 49 3.5.3 DISTRICT WISE STATUS OF AVAILABILITY & QUALITY OF GROUND WATER 50 3.5.3.1 AVAILABILITY AND QUALITY 50 3.5.3.2 DEPTH OF WATER & DISCHARGE 53 3.5.3.3 GROUND WATER MAPS OF JSAC 55 3.5.3.4 SUMMARY 55 3.5.4 DRINKING WATER & SANITATION 56 3.5.4.1 RURAL WATER SUPPLY THROUGH PIPE LINE 56 3.5.4.2 URBAN WATER SUPPLY THROUGH PIPE LINE 56 3.5.4.3 ARSENIC AND FLUORIDE TREATMENT 56 3.5.4.4 COVERAGE & TYPES OF SOURCES 56 3.5.4.5 CURRENT WATER SUPPLY AND TREATEMENT PLAN 57 3.6 SANITATION 58 3.6.1 QUALITY OF DRINKING WATER SOURCES 59 3.6.2 TOTAL SANITATION CAMPAIGN 60 3.6.3 ISSUES IN SANITATION 60 3.6.4 PROFILE OF DISEASES CAUSED BY POLLUTANTS IN JHARKHAND 60 3.6.4.1 THE POLLUTANTS 60 3.6.4.2 PROBLEM OF ARSENIC: 61 3.6.4.3 CONTAMINATION OF AGRICULTURAL PRODUCE 62 3.6.4.4 INCREASING POLLUTION IN THE RIVERS 62 3.7 THE PRIMARY VILLAGE LEVEL DATA 63 3.7.1 INTRODUCTION 63 3.7.2 DRINKING WATER 63 3.7.3 WATER TREATEMENT 64 3.7.4 DEFECATION PRACTICES 65 3.7.5 HAND CLEANING 65 3.7.6 SOLID WASTE DISPOSAL 66 3.7.7 WASTE WATER DISPOSAL 67 3.7.8 SALIENT POINTS OF VILLAGE DATA 67 3.7.9 CONCLUSION OF FOCUSED GROUP DISCUSSION / PUBLIC CONSULTAION 69 44TUCHAPTER - 4U44T 71 - 82 4 ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT APPRAISAL & ASSESSMENT 71 4.1 KEY PARAMETERS 71 4.2 APPRAISAL 71 4.3 MAJOR ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS 73 4.3.1 IMPACT OF MINING ON THE ENVIRONMENT OF JHARKHAND 73 4.4 THE PRIMARY DATA 74 4.4.1 ANALYSIS AND ASSESSMENT – ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES 74 4.4.1.1 DRINKING WATER 75 4.4.1.2 SANITATION 77 4.4.1.3 AVAILABILITY OF DATA 78 4.4.1.4 INSTITUTIONAL CAPACITY 79 4.5 MAJOR ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS 79 4.5.1 THE ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS IDENTIFIED 79 4.5.1.1 POTENTIAL POSITIVE OR BENEFICIAL IMPACTS 79 4.5.1.2 POTENTIAL NEGATIVE IMPACTS 80 4.5.1.3 POSSIBLE SOURCES OF ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS 80 4.5.2 ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS 81

Page | v


44TUCHAPTER – 5U44T 83-106 5. ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT FRAMEWORK 83 5.1 ENVIRONMENTAL ANALYSIS 83 5.1.1 KEY ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES 83 5.1.1.1 WATER AVAILABILITY 83 5.1.1.1.1 ESTIMATION OF ADDITIONAL WATER REQUIREMENT 83 5.1.1.1.2 ADDITIONAL WATER REQUIREMENT 84 5.1.1.1.3 MEASURES TO AUGMENT WATER SUPPLIES 86 5.1.1.2 WATER QUALITY 87 5.1.1.2.1 SURFACE WATER QUALITY 87 5.1.1.2.2 ENVIRONMENTAL CONCERNS 87 5.1.1.2.3 GROUND WATER QUALITY 87 5.1.1.2.4 ENVIRONMENTAL CONCERNS 87 5.1.2 IMPLICATIONS FOR THE DESIGN & IMPLEMENTATION 87 5.1.3 ENVIRONMENTAL SANITATION 88 5.1.3.1 ENVIRONMENTAL CONCERNS 89 5.1.3.2 SUGGESTIONS FOR DESIGN & IMPLEMENTATION 89 5.1.4 CONSTRUCTION STAGE ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS 89 5.1.4.1 MITIGATION MEASURES 90 5.1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT FRAMEWORK 90 5.1.5.1 OBJECTIVES OF EMF 90 5.1.5.2 KEY ELEMENTS OF THE EMF 91 1. COLLECTION OF BASIC ENVIRONMENTAL DATA 91 2. CLASSIFICATION OF SCHEMES FOR ENVIRONMENTAL SCREENING 91 3. ENVIRONMENTAL APPRAISAL AND APPROVAL 91 4. ENVIRONMENTAL COMPLIANCE MONITORING DURING IMPLEMENTATION AND O&M

PHASES 91

5.1.6 APPLICATION OF EMF TO PROJECT 92 5.1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL SUPERVISION AND MONITORING 94 5.1.8 INSTITUTIONAL ARRANGEMENTS 95 5.1.8.1 VILLAGE LEVEL GPWSC AND SOS 95 5.1.8.2 SCHEME LEVEL COMMITTEE (SLC) FOR MVSS 96 5.1.8.3 DISRTICT LEVEL 96 5.1.8.4 STATE LEVEL 96 5.1.9 PERFORMANCE INDICATORS 98 5.1.10 TRAINING AND CAPACITY BUILDING 98 5.1.10.1 OBJECTIVES 99 5.1.10.2 APPROACH 99 5.1.10.3 INSTITUTIONS FOR TRAINING 99 5.1.10.4 DETAILS OF TRAINING PROGRAMMES 99 5.1.10.5 TRAINING ON THE ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT FRAMEWORK 99 5.1.10.5.1 PURPOSE OF THE TRAINING 99 5.1.10.5.2 PARTICIPANTS 99 5.1.10.5.3 SCHEDULE 100 5.1.10.6 DETAILS OF TRAINING PROGRAMMES 100 5.1.10.7 BUDGET 102 5.1.11 GUIDELINES / ENVIRONMENTAL CODE OF PRACTICES 102 5.2 SUMMARY GENERIC ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN 104 A. DESCRIPTION OF THE PROJECT AND KEY COMPONENTS 104

REVISED PROJECT OUTLINE 22 6. ADMINISTRATIVE DETAILS 25 7. DISTRICT-WISE FOREST COVER AREA IN JHARKHAND 27 8. FOREST COVER CHANGE MATRIX 28 9. MINES & GEOLOGY IN JHARKHAND STATE 30 10. HEALTH 30 11. MINERAL AVAILABILITY AT A GLANCE 35 12. STATUS OF IMPORTANT MINERAL RESOURCES OF JHARKHAND 35 13. STATUS LIST OF DISTRICTS AFFECTED BY HAZARDS OF VARIOUS KINDS 37 14. SUMMARY OF THE NATIONAL PARKS AND WILD LIFE SANCTUARIES 39 15. LANDUSE PATTERN 42 16. AREA ESTIMATES OF WETLANDS IN JHARKHAND 44 17. DISTRICT-WISE WETLAND AREA 45 18. STATUS OF GROUND WATER HYDROGEOLOGY 50 19. STATUS OF GROUND WATER IN SELECTED DISTRICTS OF JHARKHAND: SUMMARY 51 20. MAJOR GROUNDWATER PROBLEMS 55 21. ARSENIC AND FLUORIDE TREATMENT 56 22. DISTRICT WISE TYPES OF DRINKING WATER SOURCES 57 23. HOUSEHOLDS BY AVAILABILITY OF TYPE OF LATRINE FACILITY: IN THE RURAL AREAS 58 24. TYPES OF PROBLEMS RELATED TO QUALITY IN VARIOUS DISTRICTS 59 25. TOTAL SANITATION CAMPAIGN 60 26. CONCLUSIONS OF FOCUSED GROUP DISCUSSIONS / PUBLIC CONSULTATION 69 27. AUGMENTATION, REHABILITATION AND IMPLEMENTATION OF SINGLE VILLAGE

SCHEMES (SVS) AND MULTI VILLAGE SCHEMES (MVS) 83

28. ADDITIONAL WATER REQUIREMENT 84 29. ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT FRAMEWORK 92 30. ROLE AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE MAJOR PLAYERS IN IMPLEMENTING THE EMF 96 31. NUMBER OF TRAINING PROGRAMS 101 32. ESTIMATED COST OF TRAINING 101 33. BUDGET FOR ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT 102

Page | vi


B. MAJOR ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS 104 C. THE ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT FRAMEWORK 105 D. MITIGATION MEASURES 105 E. MONITORING AND AUDITS 106 F. IMPLEMENTATION SCHEDULE AND REPORTING 106 G. CONCLUSION AND RECOMMENDATIONS 106

LIST OF TABLES TABLES SUBJECT PAGE NO TABLES

1. METHODS OF DATA COLLECTION FOR THREE DIFFERENT LEVELS OF ASSESSMENTS 5 2. TOOLS OF DATA COLLECTION FOR THREE DIFFERENT LEVELS OF ASSESSMENTS 5 3. PROGRESS OF RWSS PROGRAMME, GOVERNMENT OF INDIA 7 4. WORLD BANK SAFEGUARD POLICIES 17 5.

Page | vii


LIST OF BOXES BOXES SUBJECT PAGE NO BOXES

1. NIRMAL BHARAT ABHIYAN 11 2. SOME KEY FEATURES OF THE SWSM, JHARKHAND 21 3. SINGHBHUM SHEAR ZONE 35 4. RECOMMENDATIONS ON QUANTITY & QUALITY 76 5. ISSUES OF DRINKING WATER IN JHARKHAND 86 6. ISSUES OF SANITATION IN JHARKHAND 88 7. POSSIBLE SOURCES OF ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS 90

Page | viii


LIST OF ANNEXURES ANNEXURES SUBJECT PAGE NO 107-311 Annexure 1 QUESTIONNAIRE FOR FIELD DATA COLLECTION 107-112 Annexure 2 DRINKING WATER QUALITY STANDARDS 10500 113-128 Annexure 3 GUIDELINES FOR WQM&S 129-132 Annexure 4 DISPOSAL OF REJECT BRINE FROM RO PLANT 133-134 Annexure 5 GUIDELINES FOR THE IDENTIFICATION AND SELECTION OF WATER SUPPLY SOURCES 135-137 Annexure 6 SANITARY SURVEY OF WATER SUPPLY SOURCES 138-139 Annexure 7 SANITARY SURVEY FOR THE ASSESSMENT OF RISKS OF CONTAMINATIONOF DRINKING WATER

SOURCES 140-141

Annexure 8 SANITARY SURVEY FOR THE ASSESSMENT OF RISKSOF CONTAMINATION OF DRINKING WATER SOURCES

142-143

Annexure 9 SANITARY SURVEY FOR THE ASSESSMENT OF RISKSOF CONTAMINATION OF DRINKING WATER SOURCES

144-145

Annexure 10 SANITARY SURVEY FOR THE ASSESSMENT OF RISKSOF CONTAMINATION OF DRINKING WATERSOURCES

146-147

Annexure 11 SANITARY PROTECTION OF WATER SUPPLY SOURCES 148-149 Annexure 12 FLUORIDE MITIGATION: EFFECTS OF EXCESS FLUORIDE IN WATER 150-153 Annexure 13 GUIDELINES FOR SUSTAINABILITY OF GROUNDWATER SOURCES 154-158 Annexure 14 SELECTION OF SAFE SANITATION TECHNOLOGIES AND ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS IN

LOCATION OF TOILETS 159-161

Annexure 15 RECOMMENDED CONSTRUCTION PRACTICE AND POLLUTION SAFEGUARDS FOR TWIN PIT POUR FLUSH LATRINES

162-165

Annexure 16 GUIDELINES FOR SAFE SULLAGE DISPOSAL AT HOUSEHOLD AND COMMUNITY LEVELS 166-169 Annexure 17 GUIDELINES FOR COMMUNITY SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT 170-175 Annexure 18 FORMATS FOR ENVIRONMENTAL DATA SHEETS (EDS) 176-184 Annexure 19 SCREENING TOOL FOR CATEGORIZING SCHEMES 185-186 Annexure 19A FORM 1A, EIA NOTIFICATION 187-192 Annexure 20 GUIDELINES FOR INTERNAL SUPERVISION 193-194 Annexure 21 CHECK LIST FOR ENVIRONMENTAL SUPERVISION/AUDIT 195-199 Annexure 22 SAMPLE FIELD VISIT REPORTS FOR INTERNAL SUPERVISION / EXTERNAL AUDIT 200-201 Annexure 23 ENVIRONMENTAL PERFORMANCE INDICATORS 202-203 Annexure 24 SAFETY PROVISIONS (BUILDING) CONVENTION, 1937 (NO. 62) 204-207 Annexure 25 FORMAT FOR DECLARATION BY CONTRACTOR/ CONSULTANT 208-209 Annexure 26 WORLD BANK OPERATIONAL MANUAL: 4.01 210-219 Annexure 27 STATUS OF HEALTH & HEALTH SERVICES 220-226 Annexure 28 NATIONAL RWSS- LS PROGRAMME FOR FOUR STATES

TERMS OF REFERENCE FOR STUDY ON ENVIRONMENT ASSESSMENT AND ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT FRAMEWORK

227-235

Annexure 29 LIST OF PROJECT DISTRICTS AND PUBLIC HEALTH ENGG. DIVISIONS FOR SELECTION OF SCHEMES 236-237 Annexure 30 THE LIST OF SAMPLE HABITATIONS FOR FIELD STUDY 238-239 Annexure 31 POLICY & REGULATORY FRAMEWORK RELATED TO MANAGEMENT OF ENVIRONMENT 240-260 Annexure 32 DISEASES, AILMENTS AND DISABILITIES CAUSED BY POLLUTANTS 261-265 Annexure 33 IMPACT OF MINING ON THE ENVIRONMENT OF JHARKHAND 266-272 Annexure 34 THE PRIMARY VILLAGE LEVEL DATA – SALIENT FEATURES & ANALYSIS 273-312 Annexure 35 MANAGEMENT ACTION PLAN 313-316 Annexure 36 GUIDELINES FOR PUBLIC AND WORKER’S HEALTH AND SAFETY 317-319 Annexure 37 BRIEF REPORT ON CONSULTATION PUBLIC HEARING FOR WORD BANK ASSISTED WATER SUPPLY

PROJECTS IN SELECTED DISTRICTS OF JHARKHAND 320-326

Page | ix


ABBREVATIONS AND ACRONYMS AE Assistant Engineer EE Executive Engineer ARWSP Accelerated Rural Water Supply Programme BCM Billion Cubic Meter CGWB Central Ground Water Board CRSP Central Rural Sanitation Programme DDWS Department of Water Supply & Sanitation (Jharkhand) DPR Detailed Project Report DPSU District Project Support Unit DRP District Resource Person DSR Detailed Scheme Report DSU District Support Unit DWSC District Water and Sanitation Committee DWSM District Water and Sanitation Mission DWSD Department of Drinking Water & Sanitation EA Environmental Analysis ECOPs Environmental Codes of Practices EDS Environmental Data Sheet EE Executive Engineer EIA Environmental Impact Assessment EMF Environmental Management Framework FC Fully Covered GP Gram Panchayat GPWSC Gram Panchayat Water & Sanitation Committee ICR Implementation Completion Report IEC Information, Education and Communication IHHL Individual Household Latrines ISL Individual Sanitary Latrines JE Junior Engineer MCM Million Cubic Metre MNP Minimum Need Programme MoEF Ministry of Environment & Forests MVS Multi Village Scheme NGO Non-Governmental Organization O&M Operation and Maintenance OHT Over Head Tank PC Partially Covered PCs Production Centres PSU Project Support Unit RO Reverse Osmosis RSM Rural Sanitary Mart RWSS Rural Water Supply and Sanitation SA Support Agency SLC Scheme Level Committee SLWM Solid and Liquid Waste Management SMP Sub Mission Project SOs Support Organizations SPCB State Pollution Control Board

Page | x


SRP Sector Reform Project SSHE School Sanitation and Hygiene Education SVS Single Village Scheme SWSM State Water Supply and Sanitation Mission ToR Terms of Reference TPPF Twin Pit Pour Flush TSC Total Sanitation Campaign UGD Under Ground Drainage UNICEF United Nations International Children’s Emergency Fund VWSC Village Water Supply and Sanitation Committee WB World Bank ZP Zila Parishad

Page | xi


STRUCTURE OF THE REPORT

The report is presented in five chapters: • Chapter-1: Introductory chapter presents salient features of the project, the methodology followed, and criteria for selection of sample habitations for preliminary site visits, schedule and the procedure followed for public consultations. • Chapter-2: This chapter provides status of rural water supply and sanitation in Jharkhand and includes information on the rural water policy and relevant legal and regulatory framework of the proposed project. The contents briefly discuss the present rural water and sanitation institutions in the state, their roles and responsibilities with special focus on rural water supply and sanitation. The profile of the proposed project and the rules for participation of the beneficiary community in the project are also briefly discussed. • Chapter-3: This chapter presents the baseline data on relevant environmental components in the State and and identifies the issues of environmental concern after critical review and analysis of the data. • Chapter-4: Fourth chapter outlines the environmental management framework and analyses the potential environmental risks associated with the proposed project activities during the design, preparation, construction and operation phases as well as the mitigation measures for removing/ reducing the adverse impacts and enhancing the beneficial impacts of the project. • Chapter-5: Presents the Environmental Management Framework which provides a systematic approach for identifying the various possible environmental impacts at the different stages of the scheme, identify appropriate mitigation measures for addressing the identified environmental impacts and devise an institutional arrangement for mainstreaming environmental management in project implementation processes. The institutional and capacity building arrangements, monitoring and supervision arrangements and the financial arrangements for the implementation of the EMF are also presented in this chapter. Appropriate environmental performance indicators have been proposed for proper integration with other indicators as tools to facilitate periodic assessment of the project performance. • Annexures: This report has 37 Annexures including detailed tools for screening and environmental assessment, detailed guidelines and codes of practice for improvement in environmental management and related areas.


EXECUTIVE SUMMARY

Page | A


EXECUTIVE SUMMARY

INTRODUCTION The Government of India has introduced the National Rural Drinking Water Supply Program in order to address water supply and sanitation problems in rural areas. The present project will use this NRDWP to address the water and sanitation needs of the 4 Low Income States; Assam, Bihar, Jharkhand & Uttar Pradesh. The Jharkhand component of this project will be implemented in 6 selected districts of the state. This task is to be carried out through the State Drinking Water and Sanitation Mission under the Department of Drinking Water and Sanitation. This RWSS Project for Low Income States will promote decentralized service delivery arrangements with increased Panchayati Raj Institution (PRI) and community participation, improved financial sustainability and enhanced accountability at all levels. EA-EMF STUDY This proposed project falls under environmental category 'B' as per the World Bank’s OP 4.01. At this stage, the exact size and scope of various sub-projets to be taken up under the Project is not decided. Hence an Environmental Assessment is conducted and an Environment Managmnet Framework is prepared. This EA-EMF study, comprised i). Baseline Environment Assessment, ii). Policy and Legal Environment Analysis, iii). Institutional Assessment, iv). Environmental Issues and Impacts Identification, v). Proposing Mitigation Measures vi) Environmental Management Framework and vii). Institutional and Monitoring Arrangement and viii). Capacity Building. The Baseline Environment Assessment assesses the current status of rural water supply, availability of both groundwater and surface water sources and their quality and environmental sanitation status in the state along with status of other monitorable environmental parameters in the project area. The Policy and Legal Analysis identifies various policies and legal procedures to be followed by the proposed Project. The Institutional Assessment lists the various institutions involved in provision of rural water and sanitation services, their functions and lists their strengths, weaknesses, opportunities and threats. Environmental Issues and Impacts Identification lists all the issues related to environment identified through analysis of primary and secondary information, field visits and consultations and, the possible environmental impacts due to the proposed Project. Proposing Mitigation Measures recommend some generic environmental impact mitigation measures to manage the negative impacts and advocates some enhancement measures. Environmental Management Framework sets the procedures for sub-project impact assessment, screening, categorization, management and monitoring. Institutional and Monitoring Arrangements details the human resource requirements, functions and responsibilities for implementation along with identifying a set of monitorable indicators and their monitoring protocol. Capacity Building lists the actions required to build institutional capacity and training requirements of the involved personnel. This study was conducted using both participatory and consultative approaches. The methodology comprised collection and collation of secondary data and primary data. A review and analysis of this information led to the delineation of the baseline status of relevant environmental components pertaining to the State and provided the basis for assessment of the potential environmental impacts due to the proposed project and preparation of Environmental Management Framework (EMF) for mitigating negative impacts and enhancing positive impacts. POLICY AND LEGAL FRAMEWORK This project is guided by policies and regulations enunciated by the Government of India and Government of Jharkhand. These include:

• 73rd Constitutional Amendment • The National Water Policy of 2012 • National Water Mission

Safeguard Policy Applicability to this project

OP/BP 4.01 Environmental Assessment

Applicable to this project. Hence an EMF is prepared including a detailed description of assessment procedures for each of the activities proposed under the project.

OP/BP 4.04 Natural Habitats

Not applicable. As the schemes to be taken up under the project would not convert or degrade natural habitats.

OP/BP 4.36 Forestry Applicable to the project. Some of the sub-projects under the Project could be located in forest areas. Assessment procedures and mitigation measures are included in the EMP. These include procedures for obtaining approvals from Forest Department and guidelines for compensatory afforestation.

OP 4.09 Pest Management

Not Applicable. Vector control measures, if undertaken in the project will be in accordance with the OP 4.09 avoiding use of insecticides in classes 1a, 1b and 2.

OP/BP 4.12 Involuntary Resettlement

Not Applicable. The project will ensure that people are not displaced.

OP/BP 4.20 Indigenous Peoples

Applicable to the project. To be decided based on the Social Assessment Study.

OP/BP 4.11 Physical Cultural Resources

Not Applicable to the project. No existing cultural property will be damaged.

OP/BP 4.37 Safety of Dams

Not applicable. Since the project does not involve construction of dams.

OP/BP 7.50 Projects on International Waterways

Not Applicable to the project. There are no cross boundary rivers in the state.

OP/BP 7.60 Projects in Disputed Areas

Not applicable. As no project components will be proposed in disputed areas.

BASELINE DATA ANALYSIS The annual replenishable ground water resources in Jharkhand are estimated to be 5.58 BCM out of which about 20% is being utilized. Major rivers/ streams of Jharkhand include Brahmani, Subarnarekha, Damodar,

Page | B


• Jharkhand State Water Policy • National Rural Sanitation & Hygiene strategy 2012-2022. • Guidelines for ground water use. • The Environment (Protection) Act, No.29 of 1986 • Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1974 (Central Act 6 of 1974) as amended in1988 • Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Cess Act No 36 of 1977 • The Air (Prevention and Control of pollution) Act 1981 • The Wetlands Conservation and Management rules 2010 • EIA Mechanism and Wildlife Clearances • Wildlife protection Act, 1972 • Indian Forest Act 1927 • The Biological Biodiversity Act 2002 • Forest (Conservation) Act No. 69 of 1980 as amended in l988 • The Wildlife (Protection) Act 1972 as Amended in 1991 • EIA Notification of 2006

In addition to the above, the following World Bank Safeguards policies are analysed.

Page | C


Amanat, Anuranga, Barakar Ajoy and Mayurakshi. Extraction of groundwater is an issue due to the rocky terrain. Frequent drying of sources is also an issue reported. There are no zones classified as over e xploited, critical or semi-critical in Jharkhand. Water quality of shallow hand pumps is considered poor by the villagers. Groundwater in Jharkhand is affected in many districts with excess Fluoride, Iron, Nitrate and Arsenic. Bacterial contamination is found in surface water in many places in Jharkhand, in addition to increase in turbidity levels due to mining activities. There is reported radioactive contamination of water in East Singhbhum district. The presence of fissured rocks below top soil allows percolation of waste water into the ground. About 80% of rural areas in Jharkhand suffer water quality problems. The types of drinking water sources and the type of schemes existing in the rural areas of Jharkhand Open wells (Dug wells), Hand pumps, Tube wells, Surface sources (rivers, infiltration structures, dams etc) and Wetlands (ponds, lakes). The types of schemes are Single village schemes, Multi-village schemes, Piped water supply schemes and Mini water supply schemes. It may be observed that a majority (more than 75%) of the rural population of Jharkhand is dependent on hand pumps. The total requirement of water for the proposed schemes is approximately 66 MCM per annum which is roughly 2.8 % of annual replenishable groundwater and 1.5% of the available surface water resources available in Jharkhand. The status of sanitation in Jharkhand is very dismal, with only about 8% households having access to sanitation in the rural areas and the balance defecating in the open. Solid and Liquid Waste Management does not exist in most parts of rural Jharkhand. While the solid waste management is absent, the liquid waste management is limited to building of a few meters of isolated non-functional drains. Jharkhand has 22,894 SqKm of forest, which is 29% of the total geographic areas of the state, this is amongst the highest in India. There are 11 wildlife sanctuaries and reserves in Jharkhand. Wetlands constitute an area of 170,000 ha. in the state. However forest lands are being increasingly designated as mines in Jharkhand thus reducing forest cover. Jharkhand is famous for its rich mineral resources like Uranium, Mica, Bauxite, Granite, Gold, Silver, Graphite, Magnetite, Dolomite, Fireclay, Quartz, Fieldspar, Coal (32% of India), Iron, Copper (25%of India) etc. The mining of these resources affects the groundwater availability and quality in addition to affecting streams and water bodies due to ore-waste, coal washeries and detritus. IMPACTS AND ISSUES The proposed project is likely to result in positive environmental impacts, owing to benefits such as improved access to safe water, enhanced availability of water, better sanitation, etc., due to investments in water supply systems, groundwater management, water harvesting, capacity building. etc. Some of the significant environmental issues are: (i) Water Availability, (ii) Water quality, (iii) Lack of Environmental sanitation, (iv) Near absence of Solid and liquid waste management and (v) Possibility of sub-projects in forest areas. However there are risks of potential adverse impacts due to improper location, planning, execution and management of schemes are listed below:

a) There are no known over-exploited blocks in the state. However, there is a possibility of local source being rendered dry due to over exploitation.

b) Locational impacts, if sub-projects are located near natural heritage site, protected forests, cultural heritage sites and archaeological monuments.

c) Inappropriately and poorly designed water treatment plants could cause contamination of water sources and water supplies resulting in negative health impacts.

Page | D


d) Occupational, health and public safety risks during construction and during operation and maintenance.

e) Safety and health issues due to storage of chemicals such as chlorine. f) Long term public health risks from use of materials such as Asbestos Cement pipes. g) Ill maintained water supply systems could result in water wastage and contamination. h) The impacts of mining activities are on forests, soil erosion, land subsidence, loss of biodiversity and

the impacts on water quantity and quality. The specific issues related to water and sanitation are enumerated below: Water The sources of water available in the rural areas of Jharkhand, as already listed earlier are open or dug wells, hand pumps, tube wells, rivers, lakes ponds or dams.

1. According to the results of tests of the water samples under the RGNDWM 7 out of 12 districts selected for the study are afflicted with quality problems.

2. According to the reports of the CGWB there are quality problems of one or more kinds in almost all districts. Therefore there is discrepancy between the results of the two agencies.

3. Most of the rural population is covered by hand pumps. There are few piped water supply schemes. 4. The hand pumps installed in areas where fluoride levels are high are not provided any facility to treat

excess fluoride. 5. In spite of the fact the forest cover in Jharkhand, even after continued denudation for decades, is still

the maximum amongst the states of India and there is plenty of rainfall in Jharkhand ground water exploitation is very little. This is said to be because the geological formation at most places is rocky, water percolates into the ground through fissures and cracks and stored in voids, small in size, that hold limited quantities of water and yield small discharges. Bores are successful if these voids are hit. Otherwise they fail.

6. The quality of ground water is affected by the natural geological formations and have minerals of various kinds present in them. The quality of ground water is also aggravated by the leachates from mines.

7. One remarkable fact about the quality of ground water, as it appears from the test results of the RGNDWM, is that water obtained from hundreds of deep tube wells (in local terminology a tube well deeper than 50 m is called a deep tube well) the MPN count is very high. It is necessary to carry out a detailed and thorough investigation into the causes of the MPN being so high and in such a large no of tube wells.

8. The test reports on record, of deep tube wells, also reveal abnormally high turbidity contents. It also needs detailed investigation because if turbidity is contributed by partially soluble minerals within the strata, that form colloidal solutions in water, such as those of iron, the turbidity will have to be treated and iron, if it is in excess of permissible limits, will have to be brought within acceptable limits.

9. Because of uncertainty of success and short life of, and unsatisfactory quality of water in, tube wells there is reason for surface water to be preferred. The durability of source is certainly an advantage in case of river waters provided rivers are perennial. But there are hardly any perennial rivers in Jharkhand. The quality of river water is, however, much worse than the quality of tube well water. Provided that there is no chemical pollution, water from tube well requires only disinfection while river water requires complete treatment including sedimentation and filtration. The limited availability of power in rural areas is an equal demerit in both cases. The capital cost as well as the maintenance cost is likely to be higher for the river water than for the tube well water.

10. There are several dams and natural lakes in Jharkhand that can be used for supplying drinking water after treatment to sizeable chunks of rural population nearby. There also smaller wetlands that can be used, perhaps for single village schemes.

11. It was observed that the perception people had of the quality of water was limited to the water being physically clean, without colour or turbidity. The devices used for storage of water were often unclean, particularly in places of public utility.

Page | E


12. The laboratories that were established at district levels are reported to be mostly non-functional and all tests are either done at the few functional laboratories or are not done at all.

Sanitation

1. More than 90% households in rural areas defecate in the open. It is not only because people do not have sanitary latrines or cannot afford sanitary latrines but because it has become a matter of liking or a habit or kind of tradition for men to go out and far away from home for defecation, particularly if there is a river nearby. This is learnt from interaction, mostly with women folk available at homes during day time, on visit to an adivasi village in district Khunti.

2. Most people, men and women, adivasis and Muslims included, want sanitary latrines within their property, at least for female members of their family. Some people are willing as well as able to pay Rs 1000 to1500 for the latrines. Others are only willing and do not seem to be able to pay.

3. As data suggest where latrines have been constructed arrangement for proper disposal of effluent is not available at most places. The disposal is either in a nearby drain or in a pond or out in the open.

4. Septic tanks are generally not constructed in rural areas. People do not seem to be familiar with septic tanks. Soak pits are thus means of disposing effluent from latrines toilets. As geological formation underlying the surface of earth in most part of Jharkhand is rock with fissures and cracks that may often be continuous over long distances to establish connection between the crust and the ground water table, it can only be conjectured for the time being, that these latrines along with the ones that do not even have soak pits, could be a factor causing bacterial pollution of ground water.

5. It was observed that sanitation programs launched earlier, with the assistance of the central government, like the ILCS (Integrated Low Cost Sanitation) did not take off well in spite of the fact that nearly half the cost of unit was available to beneficiaries as subsidy. It was not only in Jharkhand but in many other states also that the assistance of the government was poorly utilized. Analysis of performance of the program suggested following major factors being responsible:

• Cumbersome accounting of the subsidy component • Requirement of cumbersome documentation in case of loan component for which there

was provision • Lack of hassle-free and efficient delivery system • A large part of the unit was to be constructed in situ and people were not very confident

about the quality • Lack of awareness about sanitation

6. There are no standard, officially accepted, authenticated designs for latrines for different soils and geological and hydrological conditions (or geo-climatic conditions) available for people and implementers of the program to be assured of the credibility of the product quality.

ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT FRAMEWORK The findings of the EA study indicate that while the proposed project interventions are expected to result in overall environmental and public health improvements in the state, potential adverse impacts could occur if the schemes are not properly designed, sited, implemented, and maintained. To ensure that the identified environmental issues are addressed in the various stages of the implementation of the sub-projects an EMF has been developed for this project. In order to mainstream environmental management and to ensure that the EMF is systematically implemented for all the project sponsored schemes, the EMF needs to be integrated in the scheme cycle. This EMF proposes the following actions:

• Filling the EDS • Screening of Sub-Projects • Classification of sub-projects • Conducting an EA and preparation of specific EMP in case of sub-projects with significant impacts • Implementation of the EMP given in the EMF for all sub-projects

Page | F


• Monitoring of identified Environmental Indicators • Reporting

At the Detailed Project Report (DPR) preparation stage, the available environmental information in the EDS will be evaluated and based on the level of expected environmental and public health impacts, the proposed scheme would be classified as Category 1 and Category 2, based on the potential impacts, whether limited or significant. The environmental classification of schemes by using the screening tool is done by the ES of the DPMU and submitted to Project Manager DPMU and then to EE of the concerned division of DDWS, who will also ensure that the scheme is evaluated in terms of applicability of the various policies, laws and guidelines and necessary procedures followed to ensure compliance and obtain necessary clearances and permissions should also be obtained. The screening of schemes will identify scheme specific issues and based on OP 4.01 on Environmental Assessment, relevant Bank policies will be triggered to develop a mitigation plan which will be an Environmental Management Plan for a particular scheme. Appropriate institutional and implementation arrangements associated with capacity building and capacity support also require focused attention. As part of the generic Environment Management Plan this EMF has provided several Environmental Codes of Practice (ECoPs) with technical specification required for effective implementation. These ECoPs respond to the environmental priorities analyzed as part of the EA.

1. ECoPs for Identification of Sources of Water Supply 2. ECoPs on Protecting Surface Water Supply Source and Ensuring Sustainability 3. ECoPs on Protecting Ground Water Supply Sources and in Ensuring Sustainability 4. ECoPs on Water Quality Monitoring 5. ECoPs on selection of Safe Sanitation Technology Options (Including Drainage) at Individual

Household and Community Level 6. ECoPs on Selection of Location for Community Toilets 7. ECoPs on Safe Sullage Disposal and Organic Waste Management 8. ECoPs on Safe Solid Waste Management at Individual Household and Community Level

INSTIUTIONAL ARRANGEMENTS At the State level the Empowered Committee prepares the environment policy and sets the guidelines for the EMF implementation, monitoring and evaluation. This committee also liaises with other departments with regard to environmental issues. The Project Director, SWSM will be responsible for ensuring the implementation of the EMF across the state. One State Level Environmental Expert in the state SPMU will ensure that environmental management activities are in conformity with the EMF and that necessary guidance and budget is provided to implement these plans. A capacity building program has been outlined as part of the EMF, aiming at building environmental awareness and environmental management capacity in the project implementation structure at all levels including communities. Capacity building for environmental management will be integrated with overall capacity building component of the project. For the achievement of the EMF related capacity building a budget of Rs. 4 crore has been proposed. PRELIMINARY CONSULTATION Public Consultations were organized at 3 levels; as part of the environmental screening in the 29 sample habitations, four Regional Consultations & one State Level Consultation. The objective of these consultations was to introduce the proposed project and identify environmental issues, emanating from the proposed activities under the project that need to be addressed. The consultation groups consisted mainly of local villagers, PRI representatives etc.

Page | G


During the Regional Public Consultations, the participation of select target population, elected representatives of the GP, local NGOs were involved. The participants to the consultations were briefed on the proposed project, its objectives, scope and the specific features. The participants' opinions were solicited on the following main issues: 1. Status of current water supply 2. Quality of water 3. Household sanitation facilities 4. Sullage disposal & Solid Waste Management 5. Expectations from the proposed project A summary of the preliminary village level public consultation is furnished at Annexure 34. SECOND PUBLIC CONSULTATION / DISCLOSURE WORKSHOPS Regional and State Level public consultation process was undertaken following the drafting of Environmental Management Framework in consultation with Drinking Water and Sanitation Department, Jharkhand. Four regional level and one state level public consultation / disclosure workshops were organized to invite suggestions/ inputs of the stakeholders to finalize the EMF document. The executive summary of EMF in Hindi language was circulated to PRI representatives, SHGs, line department staff etc., and in advance of the consultation workshop (The regional public consultation workshops were held in Khunti, Garhwa, Jamshedpur and Dumka on 6 P

thP, 8P

thP, 10P

thP and 12P

thP of May 2013). The State level public consultation workshop was held in

Ranchi on 26P

thP June 2013. Inputs from stakeholders have been incorporated following the consultation

process. A report on the public consultation / disclosure workshops is furnished in Annexure 37.


CHAPTER-1

INTRODUCTION


1. INTRODUCTION The State of Jharkhand, carved out from the State of Bihar in the year 2000, is spread over an area of about 79,700 square kilometre (skm) with population of about 27 million in 2001 (Census of India, 2001). More recent estimates (2007) have reported population of about 30 million in the State. According to the Census of India, 2001, urbanization levels are low as only about 22 percent of the State population resides in its urban centres. Administratively, the State is organized into 24 districts, 33 sub-divisions, 211 community development (CD) blocks and over 32,500 villages. Two notable features of Jharkhand are its high proportion of Scheduled Tribe population (about 28 percent in Jharkhand in comparison to 8 percent in India) and the high percentage of area under forest cover (about 29 percent in Jharkhand in comparison to 23 percent in India). Poverty levels in Jharkhand are among the highest in the country. As per the official records, in 2004-05 about 40 percent of the population was classified below the poverty line (BPL) in comparison to 28 percent in India. According to the Planning Commission Report, 2007, in rural areas poverty ratio is about 46 percent BPL in comparison to 28 percent in India, which is significantly higher than urban poverty (about 20 percent of the urban population BPL in comparison to 26 percent in India). (These figures are based on the Uniform Recall Period (URP) consumption, whereas those based on Mixed Recall Period (MRP) expenditure are lower overall both at the State and India. The data set substantiates the relatively higher levels of poverty in Jharkhand. 1.1 BACKGROUND A Brief Overview of the RWSS Sector in Jharkhand It is estimated that about 99,000 out of 120,000 (approximately 82 percent) of rural habitations in Jharkhand are Fully Covered (FC), indicating the proportion of FC habitations in the State is significantly higher than the all India level of about 57 percent. The number of Partly Covered (PC) and Not Covered (NC) habitations in Jharkhand is estimated at about 5,500 and 15,300 respectively (about 5 percent and 13 percent of the total number of rural habitations in the State). The figure is a significant contrast with the corresponding all India figures of 27 percent and 16 percent respectively. Notably, as per other estimates, even with only about 51 percent of the data for the State, which is available online, the estimated number of slipped back habitations between 1999-2005 in Jharkhand is about 10,000 (with about 7,700 rural habitations having slipped to the PC and about 2,300 habitations having slipped to the NC category). In a further indication of the challenges in ensuring sustainability and O&M, it is reported that about a quarter of the handpumps being non-functional at any point of time. The problem is compounded due to late reportage (concerned DW&SD Junior Engineers are often intimated of complaints three-four weeks later) and shortage of field staff (XLRI, 2005). The Census of India, 2001, indicates that in terms of household level arrangements, the majority of rural households depend on wells (about 58 percent) and handpumps (about 30 percent). Further, only about 10 percent of the rural households report water supply. Sanitation remains another significant challenge with the proportion of rural households. The Census of India, 2001 indicates that latrines being as low as 7% (in comparison to 22% in India). The Jharkhand Rural Water Supply & Sanitation sector assessment has pointed to issues relating to drainage and waste disposal (XLRI, 2005). The vision of the Jharkhand Rural Water Supply & Sanitation Sector is to ensure safe, adequate and sustainable drinking water and sanitation services cost effectively to all households, establishments and institutions in Jharkhand with a view to ensure a healthy and dignified life to all citizens of the state through community population at all levels. 1.2 JHARKHAND STATE WATER AND SANITATION MISSION The Government of India resolved to address the problems of sustainable water supply and sanitation in rural areas by focusing a strategic programme on the 4 worst affected states of the country - Assam, Bihar, Jharkhand & Uttar Pradesh. The Jharkhand component of the project shall be implemented in selected districts

Page | 1


of the state, namely Garhwa, Palamu, Giridih, Dumka, Godda, Sahibganj, Pakur, Jamtara, Dhanbad, Saraikela, East Singhbhum (Jamshedpur) and Khunti. This task is to be carried out in the aforesaid selected districts through the State Drinking Water Mission under the Department of Drinking Water and Sanitation. 1.2.1 MAIN OBJECTS

The main objectives of this project are:

• Assessment of the existing status of environment in the state. • Identification of environmental concern threats and issues related to the RWSS sector. • Identification of the environmental issues associated with all phases of implementation. • Development of the environmental codes of practices needed at various stages such as planning,

construction and operation and maintenance. • Identification of the generic environmental issues beyond the scope of RWSS and suggestion on

remedial measures. • Identification of household and environmental sanitation issues. • Asessment of pollution level with regard to water supply and its usages and propose appropriate

sanitation technology options. • Preparation of Environment Management Framework including well-defined performance

indicators. • Identification of good practices in conservation of water and recycling of waste material.

1.3 SCOPE OF STUDY The scope of the study includes: 1. Conduct an analysis of the environmental status and issues in the program area for the state. 2. Identify the potential environmental impacts of range of activities to be undertaken through the state

projects and review the effectiveness of environmental management through the program systems. 3. Assess the country and state policy, present legal and regulatory requirements relevant to the WSS

program, the performance of the program and identification of provisions to ensure compliance. 4. Review of the existing capacity and institutional arrangements for environmental management in the

program in the programe area of the state. 5. Develop an Environmental Management Framework for the state.

1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL ANALYSIS The proposed project falls under environmental category 'B' as per the World Bank’s OP 4.01 (Annexure-26). Accordingly, an Environmental Analysis (EA) of the project has been commissioned by the Department of Drinking Water & Sanitation (DDWS) of the Govt of Jharkhand. This EA intends to provide insight into the environmental challenges facing the project, including source sustainability, water quality management, drainage, waste disposal and household sanitation issues. The project is under formulation. Presently, whereas the project activities and number of districts/villages have been tentatively determined, the specific sub-projects to be taken up in the project villages have yet to be identified. It is, therefore, decided to undertake EA and prepare Environmental Management Framework (EMF). The EMF shall provide detailed guidance for conducting screening and environmental assessment for sub-projects to be undertaken up under the DDWS. As such, the Terms of Reference (ToR) for the study have been formulated as in Annexure-27. The purpose of the EA is to identify upfront the potential environmental risks and impacts in its area of influence of the DDWS; examine project alternatives; identify methods of improving project selection, siting, planning, design and implementation by preventing, minimizing, mitigating, or compensating for adverse environmental impacts and enhancing positive impacts during project implementation. EA in the districts has taken into consideration the natural environment (air, water and land), human health and safety; country's

Page | 2


overall policy framework, national legislation, institutional capabilities related to the environment and obligations of the country under relevant international environmental treaties and agreements. 1.5 THE STUDY AREA:

The consultants have covered the entire State of Jharkhand for secondary data analysis. However, primary (Village Level) data collection is focused on the following 12 selected districts of the proposed project:

1. GARHWA 2. GIRIDIH 3. GODDA 4. SAHIBGANJ

5. PAKUR 6. DHANBAD 7. PURBI SIGHBHUM 8. PALAMU

9. DUMKA 10. JAMTARA 11. KHUNTI 12. SARAIKELA

The project areas and investigation sites to be included under EA have been finalized in consultation with the PMU Jharkhand. The list of Divisions & indicative schemes to be covered as a part of EA study are enclosed as ANNEXURE-29. 1.6 APPROACH AND METHODOLOGY

1.6.1 Approach

As suggested in the Terms of Reference and in the World Bank’s OP 4.01, the approach to this assignment is both participatory and consultative. The approach makes use of combination of both field study and desk study. In order to be specific the study made use of quantitative methods of research and these methods were duly supported by qualitative methods of research. Further the assignment used Triangulation and Feedback as tools for verification and validation of the findings of the study.

1.6.2 Methodology

The methodology followed in conducting the Environmental Assessment Study is depicted in the figure and brief description below:

1.6.2.1 Data Collection and Review

The methodology comprised collection and collation of secondary data on water resources availability, their utilization, problems of water availability and quality as relevant in the context of the proposed Project, demographic, socioeconomic and health aspects, water supply and sanitation coverage and service levels and problems in O&M of existing water supply systems. The study also included an analysis of policy, legal and institutional framework related to water and sanitation with specific focus onJharkhand. A review and analysis of this information led to the delineation of the baseline status of relevant environmental components pertaining to the State and provided the basis for assessment of the potential environmental impacts due to the proposed project and preparation of Environmental Management Framework (EMF) for mitigating negative impacts and enhancing positive impacts.

The present study has primarily relied upon the available secondary sources of data relevant to the proposed project. The main sources of such information comprised the DDWS, the Jharkhand State Ground Water Board, Central Ground Water Board and the Jharkhand State Pollution Control Board. The DDWS, as the nodal agency for the provision of rural water supply and Sanitation in the state, has generated over the years, data pertaining to water services to rural areas. Such data includes water supply coverage in the State, sources of water supply, water quality of rural schemes, etc.

Page | 3


Figure: Methodology Flow Chart

1.6.2.2 Sample Habitations for Field Study

2 sample villages were selected from 12 districts of Jharkhand to assess the existing status of water supply, sanitation, public health and personal and environmental hygiene. The selection of villages for village level and household survey was done in consultation with SWSM based on the guidelines given in the Terms of Reference. The villages were selected in such a way that each selected village matches at least one parameter of the environmental issues so as to represent in the best possible manner the typical conditions in the state. The parameters governing the selection of villages are given below:

• Presence/ Absence of functional water supply scheme • Canal/ River water source/ Ground water source

Page | 4


• Adequate/ Inadequate canal water supply (dry season) • Adequate/ Inadequate/ Declining yield of ground water • Adequate/ Inadequate water works infrastructure • Potable water available (deep aquifer greater than 60 m) • Shallow Ground water not potable due to quality problems • Deep ground water non potable due to Arsenic/ Fluoride/ Iron/ Nitrate/ MPN (E-coli) • High incidence of disease related to water supply and sanitation • Inadequate O & M of water supply by Gram Panchayat (GP) • Other considerations such as mining and radiation from Uranium mining

The list of sample habitations for field study is furnished in Annexure.

1.6.2.3 Site Visits

Site visits were undertaken for field assessment, using Participatory Rural Appraisal (PRA), household surveys and for conducting Focus Group Discussions (FGDs). During the field visits the local DDWS personnel were contacted regarding water and sanitation status in the sampled villages and the area in general. The Gram Panchayat President and prominant members of the village were asked to list the issues relating to water supply, environmental and sanitation. The site visits were conducted in participatory manner like transect walks, field observations, mapping and FGDs. The detailed questionare designed for the purpose is attached (ANNEXURE-1) 1.6.3 Methods of data collection:

Methods of data collection for three different levels of assessments are given below:

Table-1

S. No. Assessment particulars Method of data collection

1 Village Level Assessment Using Transect Technique. 24 Villages

Collection of information from Gram Pradhan, other members of Gram Panchayat, and other informed citizens of the village with the help of format

2 Community level assessment (30 Assesments)

Participatory Rural Appraisal tools and techniques, Focus Group Discussions

3 Household survey 20 Household per village (480 Households)

Direct interview of sample of beneficiaries with the help of a pre-tested interview schedule to cover water supply, sanitation and waste management.

1.6.4 Tools of data collection:

Tools of data collection for three different levels of assessments are given below:

Table-2

S. No. Assessment particulars Tools of data collection

1 Household survey A pre-tested structured interview schedule in 20 Household of every village.

2 Village level assessment Using a transect format 3 Community level assessment Focus Groups and Participatory Rural Appraisal tools and

techniques and Focus Group Discussions. The list of sample habitations for field study is furnished in Annexure-30

Page | 5


A format for Pre-Feasibility for Village Transect Walk (from source to stand) is placed as Annexure-1 1.6.5 Consultations

1.6.5.1 Focus Group Discussion

In compliance with with the World Bank's OP 4.01, Public Focus Group Discussions (FGD) was organized in the 24 sample villages, as part of the environmental screening. The object was to identify the environmental issues related to the proposed activities under the DDWS. The consultation groups included local villagers, PRI representatives and line department staff. In the public FGDs, the participants included representatives of target population, GP, local NGOs, economically/socially weaker sections, informed public. They were briefed on the objectives, scope and the rules of the proposed project and their queries answered. The participants' opinions were solicited on the following main issues:

1. Quantity of current water supply. 2. Household sanitation facilities. 3. Sullage disposal. 4. Prevailing diseases.

1.6.5.2 Public Consultation by Disclosure Workshops

A state levl public consultation/disclosure workshop was organized at Ranchi after drafting the Environmental Management Framework in consultation with DDWS for inviting suggestions/inputs of the stakeholders in the villages to finalize the EMF document. The executive summary of EMF was circulated to the important stakeholders one week in advance of the consultation workshop. The suggestions/opinion received from the stakeholders is incorporated in the EMF suitably revised.

Page | 6


CHAPTER-2

RURAL WATER SUPPLY & SANITATION IN JHARKHAND: POLICY, REGULATORY FRAMEWORK & PROGRAM

Table-3 Progress of RWSS Programme, Government of India1 Development Stage Year Major Thrust The first government-installed rural water supply schemes

1952 Basic drinking water supply facilities to the rural population

Government of India’s effective role

1972-73 Launch of Accelerated Rural Water Supply Programme (ARWSP).

The First generation programme 1972-1986 Provision of adequate drinking water supply to the rural community through the Public Health Engineering System.

The second generation programme 1986-87, 1991-92

Technology Mission renamed in 1991-92 as Rajiv Gandhi National Drinking Water Mission Stress on water quality, appropriate technology intervention, human resource development support and other related activities

The third generation programme 1999-2000, 2002

Sector Reform Projects evolved to involve community in planning, implementation and management of drinking water related schemes, later scaled up as Swajaldhara in 2002

Fourth phase 2012-13 Ensuring sustainability of water availability in terms of potability, adequacy, convenience, affordability and equity while also adopting decentralized approach involving PRIs and community organizations. Decentralization & conjunctive use of water etc.

Article 245(2) of the Constitution of India empowers the State to legislate on matters relating to water (enumerated in the State List of the Seventh Schedule). State Governments are, therefore, responsible for providing drinking water and sanitation facilities for the population. The 73rd and 74th Constitutional Amendments have, however, empowered the State Governments to delegate and power and assign the responsibility of water and sanitation to the Panchayati Raj institutions (PRIs) and Urban Local Bodies (ULBs). The First Five Year Plan, introduced the 'National Water Supply and Sanitation Program’ in 1954 and provided funds for development of Social Welfare Sector. The programme initially focused on construction of open wells to provide drinking water in the water scarcity ares with the involvement of local population. During the sixties, wells were constructed in comparatilvely easy locations, leaving out the difficult locations. The availability of drinking water further deterioriated during recurring droughts due to falling level of ground water and drying up of open wells. In the early seventies, the State Government realized the need for developing deep bore wells, particularly in difficult habitations. Consequently, `bore wells programme’ was started by the State Government with assistance from UNICEF. This marked a shift in emphasis from construction of open wells to bore wells. With the introduction of the Accelerated Rural Water Supply Programme (ARWSP) in 1972-73 by the Government of India (GOI) with 100% grant-in-aid to the states, greater emphasis was placed on coverage of difficult habitations in the state. The programme was withdrawn after 1973-74, following the introduction of

1 National Rural Drinking Water Programme: Framework for Implementation, Department of Drinking Water

Supply, Ministry of Rural Development, Government of India http://rural.nic.in/sites/downloads/pura/National%20Rural%20Drinking%20Water%20Programme.pdf

Page | 7


2. RURAL WATER SUPPLY & SANITATION IN JHARKHAND: POLICY, REGULATORY FRAMEWORK & PROGRAM

2.1 RWSS AT THE NATIONAL CONTEXT

http://rural.nic.in/sites/downloads/pura/National%20Rural%20Drinking%20Water%20Programme.pdf

Page | 8


Minimum Needs Programme (MNP) under the Fifth Five Year Plan. However, the slow progress in the supply of safe drinking water to the rural population under the MNP led to the reintroduction of ARWSP in 1977-78. The approach to water supply and sanitation in the Eighth, Ninth, Tenth and Eleventh Plans broadly followed the guiding principles of the New Delhi declaration, adopted by the United Nations General Assembly in December 1990. Thes guiding principles include:

(a) protection of the environment and safeguarding of health through integrated management of water resources and liquid and solid waste;

(b) organisation of reforms, promoting an integrated approach including changes in procedures,

attitudes, and behaviour, and the full participation of women at all levels;

(c) community management of services, backed by measures to strengthen local institutions in implementing and sustaining water and sanitation programmes; and

(d) sound financial practices, achieved by better management of existing assets and extensive use of

appropriate technologies. The Eleventh Five Year Plan targeted to ‘provide clean drinking water for all by 2009 and ensure that there are no slip-backs. The Plan also targets to complete 7.29 crore individual toilets for achieving universal sanitation coverage in rural areas. The twelth Five Year Plan (2012-2017) targets to cover 25% of the Rural population under the piped water scheme against a present average of 7% and to check the depletion of ground water by constructing RWH/purchasing structures and a substantial increase in the coverage of BPL houses, school and Anganbadi Toilets. It also proposes to provide 100% coverage of piped water supply and sewage in urban areas and bring down the extent of non reserve water to 15%. 2.2 SECTOR REFORM PROJECTS Sector Reform Project (SRP) was the beginning of the reforms in the rural water supply and sanitation sector initiated in 1999 covering 67 districts in 26 states. The program was a paradigm shift from the regular supply based approach to demand based approach. Benefits from the sector reforms project include:

• Improved public facilities for drainage • Reduction in incidence of water borne diseases amongst children • Reduction on time spent, predominantly by women, in collecting water • Introduction of appropriate technology and designs for water supply systems

These in turn would increase the health and productivity standards in the rural areas of India. 2.3 SWAJALADHARA Sector Reform Project (SRP) has been scaled up throughout the country in the form of centrally sponsored Swajaladhara launched on 25th December 2002. This programme is a paradigm shift from supply driven to demand driven, centralized to decentralized implementation and Government's role from service provider to facilitator. A fundamental reform principle of Swajaladhara is the empowerment of villagers to ensure their full participation in the project through a decision making role in the choice of the drinking water scheme, planning, design, implementation, control of finances, management arrangements including full ownership of drinking water assets. The community has to share partial capital cost either in cash or kind or both as well as 100% responsibility of operation and maintenance (O&M). An integrated service delivery mechanism is also

Page | 9


promoted which includes taking up conservation measures through rainwater harvesting and ground water recharge systems for sustained drinking water supply. Lessons learnt from “Swajaladhara” program are:

1. The empowerment of the PRIs is a viable and sustainable option for scaling up the decentralized service delivery model.

2. There is a need for consistent policy throughout the state, irrespective of the sources of financing. 3. The PRIs need to be well integrated into the institutional design of the project and organic links

between user committees and GPs are essential for institutional sustainability. 4. The partial financing of capital cost by the users as well as user management and financing of O&M is

a viable development concept. 5. The sustainability issue is best addressed by emphasis on beneficiary involvement and empowerment,

and capacity building of state/ local governments and communities, along with promotion of cost recovery.

Guidelines for environmental safety as per Swajaldhara Projects

• States need to enact and implement law on effective ground water extraction control, regulation and recharge.

• State Government to integrate water conservation and rain water harvesting schemes with the drinking water supply schemes.

• Rural drinking water, sanitation, health, and hygiene programmes to be integrated at the State, District, Block and GP levels.

• DWSM and the SWSM to arrange for periodic monitoring and review of the functioning of completed water supply schemes by officers, experts, NGOs, Institutions etc. Suitable monitoring mechanism and systems may be put in place in this regard by the state government.

2.4 SUB – MISSION PROJECTS (SMP), RGNDWM AND NRDWP Sub Mission projects are taken up particularly for providing safe drinking water to the rural habitations facing water quality problems like fluorosis and brackishness and for ensuring source sustainability through rain water harvesting and artificial recharge. The program is funded in the ratio of 75:25 by the GOI and the State Governments respectively. The first major thrust to rural water supply came with the Accelerated Rural Water Supply Programme (ARWSP) in the 1970s, which gave full grant to the State Governments for implementing water supply schemes in problem villages. As a result, by March 1981, the coverage of rural water supply improved to 30.8 per cent. Following the International Drinking Water Supply & Sanitation Decade (IDWSSD-1981-91), the second major thrust came with the launching of the National Drinking Water Mission (NDWM) that was later renamed as Rajiv Gandhi National Drinking Water Mission (RGNDWM). The Mission issued comprehensive guidelines for ARWSP (1986), helped formulate National Water Policies (1987 and 2002) and introduced the sector Reform Project (SRP) in 1999. The focus of the RGNDWM was to adopt a community based demand-driven approach instead of the prevailing government forced supply driven approach. The approach ensures that the projects under RGNDWM are basically oriented towards community participation with a part (minimum of 10%) of the capital cost required to be borne by the community themselves. The balance amount is contributed by the Central Government. (Evaluation Study on Rajiv Gandhi National Drinking Water Mission (RGNDWM), Programme Evaluation Organisation, Planning Commission Report No-210, Nov 2010) The National Rural Drinking Water Programme (NRDWP) functions under the Ministry of Drinking Water & Sanitation (MDWS) of the Central Government and provides financial and technical support to supplement the

Page | 10


efforts of States to provide adequate potable drinking water to the rural population. Rural drinking water supply is a State subject and has been included in the Eleventh Schedule of the Constitution among the subjects that may be entrusted to Panchayats by the States. The Vision of the NRDWP is "Safe drinking water for all, at all times, in rural India." The goals /objectives of the NRDWP are:

• To ensure provision of safe and adequate drinking water supply to all uncovered, partially covered and quality affected habitations in the rural areas of the country.

• To ensure that all schools and anganwadis have access to safe drinking water. • To enable GPs/ VWSCs to plan, manage, operate and maintain local water sources and water supply.

to provide enabling support and environment for PRIs and local communities for this purpose. • Enable rural communities to monitor and keep surveillance on their drinking water sources, water

supply and initiate corrective action to have contaminants free water. • Ensure equity - high priority in coverage/ investment habitations with high SCs/ STs and minority

population. • Promote participatory integrated water resources management with a view to ensure drinking water

security - water availability, supply and consumption to be measured. • Provide access to information through online reporting system with information in public domain to

bring in transparency and informed decision making. • Ensure household level drinking water security through water budgeting and preparation of village

water security plans. • Consciously move away from high cost treatment technologies for tackling arsenic and fluoride

contamination to development of alternative sources in respect of arsenic and alternate sources/dilution of aquifers through rainwater harvesting for tackling fluoride contamination.

• Encourage handing over of management of rural drinking water schemes (RWS) to the Panchayati Raj Institutions.

The Department of Drinking Water and Sanitation (DDWS), Ministry of Rural Development in 2009, issued new guidelines for rural water supply namely the National Rural Drinking Water Programme (NRDWP). The guidelines reflected a change in the philosophy and implementation strategy with respect to the earlier programmes. The aim was to provide safe and adequate water for drinking, cooking and other domestic needs on a sustainable basis to every rural person by 2012. Major emphasis has been on ensuring sustainability of water availability in terms of potability, adequacy, convenience, affordability and equity while also adopting decentralised approach involving Panchayati Raj Institutions (PRIs) and community organisations. (DRINKING WATER FOR THE LAST PERSON, A programme of capacity building on rural drinking water supply August – September 2011 Jharkhand, Centre for Science and Environment)

Page | 11


2.5 TOTAL SANITATION CAMPAIGN A direct relationship exists between water, sanitation and health that, consumption of unsafe drinking water, improper disposal of human excreta and lack of personal and food hygiene have been the major causes of many diseases in developing countries like India. High infant mortality rates are also attributable largely to poor sanitation. It was in this context the Central Rural Sanitation Programme (CRSP) was launched in 1986 with the objective of improving the quality of life of the rural people and to provide privacy and dignity to women. The concept of sanitation apart from disposal of human excreta includes liquid and solid waste disposal, food hygiene, and personal, domestic as well as environmental hygiene. The CRSP was restructured in 1999 to introduce the Total Sanitation Campaign (TSC). TSC is a comprehensive programme to ensure sanitation facilities in rural areas with a broader goal to eradicate the practice of open defecation. It follows a principle of "low to no subsidy" where a nominal subsidy in the form of incentive is given to rural poor households for construction of toilets. TSC which has now been renamed as “Nirmal Bharat Abhiyan” giving strong emphasis on Information, Education and Communication (IEC), Capacity Building and Hygiene Education for effective behavior change with involvement of PRIs, Support Organizations (SOs), and NGOs, etc. The key intervention areas are individual household latrines (IHHL), School Sanitation and Hygiene Education (SSHE), Community Sanitary Complex, Anganwadi toilets, Rural Sanitary Marts (RSMs) and Production Centres (PCs). The main goal of the GOI is to eradicate the practice of open defecation by 2017. To give fillip to this endeavour, GOI has launched Nirmal Gram Puraskar to recognize the efforts in terms of cash awards for fully covered PRIs and those individuals and institutions who have contributed significantly in ensuring full sanitation coverage in their area of operation. The project is being implemented in rural areas with Gram Panchayats as the unit.

Nirmal Bharat Abhiyan

• Provision of Individual Household Latrine (IHHL) of both Below Poverty Line (BPL) and Identified Above Poverty Line (APL) [identified APL HHs such as SCs/STs, Small & Marginal farmers, landless labourers with homestead, Physically handicapped and Women headed households] households within a Gram Panchayat.

• Incentive amount now stands at RS. 5100/- only w.e.f. April 2012(Central Share=3700 + State Share=1400).

• School toilet unit cost will be Rs. Rs. 38500/- in the ratio of 70:30 central and State share respectively.

• Anganwadi toilet unit cost will be Rs. 10000/- in the ratio of 70:30 Central and State share respectively.

• Capacity Building component to be a part of IEC which is up to 15% of the project outlay and 2% of that to be earmarked for Capacity Building. Unlike past individual specific approach implementation of NBA is proposed with ‘Gram Panchayat ‘as the base unit.

• Project under NBA will be forwarded to the GoI as State Plan unlike District specific projects in the past.

• Administrative component will be up to 4% of the project outlay.

• NBA made a part of CSR for encouraging corporate houses to participate in the sanitation campaign.

• All the Gram Panchayats habitations will have access to water. Priority may be given to Gram Panchayats having functional piped water supply (Conjoint approach to be followed).

• Extensive capacity building of the stake holders like Panchayati Raj Institutions (PRIs), Village Water and Sanitation Committees (VWSCs) and field functionaries for sustainable sanitation.

• Solid and Liquid Waste Management (SLWM) for proposed and existing Nirmal Grams.

Up to 150 HHs 07 Lacs

151 to 300 HHs 12 Lacs

301 to 500 HHs 15 Lacs

More than 500 HHs 20 Lacs

Appropriate convergence with MGNREGS with unskilled man- days and skilled man-days.

Box-1

Page | 12


2.6 REGULATORY AND POLICY FRAMEWORK (For Details See Annexure. 31)

Rural water supply is a state subject under the Constitution of India. However, Jharkhand state is also guided by policies and regulations enunciated by the State Government as well as the Government of India. These include:

• 73rd Constitutional Amendment • The National Water Policy of 2012 • National Water Mission • Climate Change • Jharkhand State Water Policy • National Rural Sanitation & Hygiene strategy 2012-2022. • Guidelines for ground water use. • The Environment (Protection) Act, No.29 of 1986 • Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1974 (Central Act 6 of 1974) as amended in1988 • Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Cess Act No 36 of 1977 • The Air (Prevention and Control of pollution) Act 1981 • The Wetlands Conservation and Management rules 2010 • The Hazardous Wastes (Management, Handling and Transportation rules) 2008 • Bio Medical Waste Management and Handling Rules. • Municipal Solid Waste Management and Handling rules, 2000 • E-Waste (Management & Handling) Rules, 2011 • EIA Mechanism and Wildlife Clearances • Wildlife protection Act, 1972 • Indian Forest Act 1927 • The Biological Biodiversity Act 2002 • Forest (Conservation) Act No. 69 of 1980 as amended in l988 • The Wildlife (Protection) Act 1972 as Amended in 1991 • EIA Notification of 2006 • World Bank Safeguards

2.6.1 The 73rd Amendment to the ‘Constitution of India’ and The Jharkhand Panchayat Raj Act

2001

The 73P

rdP Amendment to the Constitution of India in 1992 institutionalized the three-tier Panchayati Raj System

(the Gram Panchayat, the Panchayat Samiti and the Zila Panchayat). Article 243-B has provided for the Constitution of Panchayat at the village, intermediate and district levels in all states of India with a population of more than 20 lakh. The State Legislature under Article 243-C has been entrusted the responsibility of making provisions for composition of such Panchayats by Law. The Amendment Act of 1992 contains provisions for devolution of Powers and responsibilities to the Panchayats both for the preparation of economic development plans and social justice as well as for the implementation in relation to 29 subjects listed under Powers, Authorities and functions of the Panchayat in the eleventh schedule of the Constitution. Drinking water (S. No. 11), Health and Sanitation (S. No. 23) and Maintenance of Community assets (S. No. 29) are included in this schedule.

The Jharkhand Panchayati Raj Act, 2001, provides for constitution of Panchayati Raj institutions in the State of Jharkhand except areas covered under the Patna Municipal Corporation Act, 1951, Bihar and Orissa Municipal Act, 1922 and Cantonment Act, 1924. The Act specifies the Powers and Functions of the Panchayati Raj Institutions, set up in three tiers as corporate entities, at the village, block and district levels, which include the management of natural resources, keeping a watch over local schemes, making drinking water available for domestic use and also sanitation and conservancy. In terms of delegation of functions, all the three tiers of

Page | 13


PRIs appear to be adequately assigned the duties of managing and maintaining drinking water sources and managing and maintaining rural water supply and sanitation schemes.

2.6.2 National Water Policy

The Draft National Water Policy 2012 has been adopted in December 2012 by the National Water Resources Ministry. The policy recognizes that water is a scarce resource and supplies need to be conserved and augmented. It also encourages scientific inter basin transfer of water and the necessity of ensuring supply of potable drinking water to all citizens, preferably through locally available sources, discourages transporting water from long distances, advocates for framework legislation and differential pricing policy regimes, provides for community participation and establishes a role for Panchayats. It also suggests that least water intensive sanitation systems with decentralized sewage treatment plants should be incentivized.

2.6.3 National Water Mission on Climate Change

The National Water Mission has been constituted under the Prime Ministers National Action Plan on Climate Change, to ensure integrated water management helping to conserve water, minimize wastage and ensure a more equitable distribution of water, both within and across the states. It seeks to develop a framework to optimize water use by increasing water use efficiency by 20% through regulatory mechanisms with differential entitlements and pricing. The Mission will also seek to ensure that a considerable share of the water needs of urban areas is met through recycling of wastewater. It also makes a provision for policy interventions to promote enhanced storage of water both above and below ground, rainwater harvesting etc.

The Mission aims at optimizing the efficiency of existing irrigation systems, including rehabilitation of system that have been run down and also expand irrigation where feasible with a special effort to increase storage capacity. Incentive structures will be designed to promote water–neutral or water–positive technologies, recharging of underground water sources and adoption of large scale irrigation programs which rely on sprinklers, drip irrigation and furrow irrigation.

2.6.4 Jharkhand State Water Policy 2011

The Jharkhand State Water Policy recognizes water as ”a scarce resource, the right of every citizen to equitable access to water for the fulfillment of basic needs and the necessity for state policy, legislative and program initiatives in protection and enforcement of such rights”.

The policy provides for adopting a new framework, restricting the fundamental relationships of the state and water users, creating entitlements of water and incentives for water user organizations for greater involvemen abd participation in management, creating new institutional arrangement at the State Level and at the river basin level to guide and regulate water resources planning and development, reviewing the existing institutional arrangement in the water sector and appropriately restructuring and adjusting them, promoting water efficient technologies and formulating appropriate legislation, rules and notifications to achieve these strategy options.

The Policy for domestic water ue aims at ensuring drinking water for all. It provides for adequate domestic water facilities for the entire population, both in urban and in rural areas, to meet their needs. The Government also intends to work out a time bound action plan to augment the live capacity of existing reservoirs by de-siltation or use of other water efficient technologies and management options. The State, through the Pollution Control Board shall draw up a plan for control of pollutant discharges.

It emerges that the policy plans for a very robust system of water resource management to achieve the objection of quality, quantity and equitable distribution. It gives priority to domestic water supplies, puts in place a system of tariffs and regulation and also seeks to promote community involvement and people’s participation in planning and implementation of water sector projects including drinking water and sanitation.

Page | 14


2.6.5 Guidelines For Ground Water Use

The Central Ground Water Authority (CGWA) has notified 82 areas for regulation of ground water development. The District Administrative Heads (DC or DM), in case of Administrative Block or Taluka, or the Head of the Municipality (in case of Municipal Area) of the notified areas, have been appointed as ‘Authorized Officers’ by Central Ground Water Authority under Section 4 of the Environmental Protection Act,1986(EPA). Further, Section 4 of the EPA, 1986, provides for regulation of Ground Water development in the Notified areas through district administrative heads, who are assisted by Advisory Committees. The respective Authorized Officers are responsible for issues pertaining to granting of NOC's for ground water withdrawal, checking violations, sealing of groundwater abstraction structures, launching of prosecution against offenders and resolution ofcomplaints. The guidelines provide for abstraction of ground water in Notified and Non-Notified areas for various users. 2.6.6 The Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1974

Section 24 of the Act provides that no person shall discharge any sewage or trade effluents beyond the standards as prescribed by the Board into any stream, river, and well or on land. It also provides that no person shall knowingly add any other substance which is likely to cause an impediment in the flow of any stream leading to aggravation of Pollution. Sections25 and 26 of the Act establishe a mechanism for obtaining the consent of the Pollution Control Board for establish and operating or taking steps to establish any industry, operation or process or any treatment and disposal system, which is likely to discharge sewage or trade effluents into a stream, river, well or land or to begin to make a new discharge of sewage or alter the existing discharge. Waste water has to be treated to the prescribed standards before discharge into water bodies. Sludge from water treatment plants and sewage treatment plants must be properly processed and disposed. 2.6.7 The Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Cess Act, 1974

The Act provides that the State Pollution Control Boards and Committees shall levy and collect cess from persons carrying on any industrial activities or local concerned authorities supplying water. The cess shall be assessed on the basis of water consumed by the person or local authority and would also include supply of water. Local Bodies are required to furnish monthly cess returns to the Pollution Control Board and ensure timely payments to avoid interest payment and other penal provisions. 2.6.8 The Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act 1981

The Act provides for the consent of the State Pollution Control Board for establishing or operating any industrial plant inthe air pollution control area. The Act also prescribes that 2T 2Tno person having any industrial plant in an air pollution control area shall discharge emissions of any air pollutants in excess of the standards prescribed by the State Pollution Control Boards. An Industrial plant under the Act is defined as any plantfor industrial or trade purposes and emitting any air pollutants in the environment. The Act also requires compliance of the prescribed standards by project proponents, diesel generating sets and other building construction equipment.

2.6.9 The Environment (Protection) Act, 1986

The Act lays down the procedure for the prevention, control and abatement of environmental pollution by regulating the discharge or emission of any environmental pollutant in excess of the standards as may be prescribed from time to time. Contravention of provisions of the Act is punishable by imprisonment up to seven years or fine up to Rs 1 lakh and additional fine up to Rs. 5,000 for every day.

Page | 15


2.6.10 The EIA Notification of 2006

All projects listed under Schedule-I of the notification dated 14.09.2006 require environmental clearance from the MoEF. Accordingly, river valley projects, common effluent treatment plants, common hazardous waste management, common municipal waste disposal facilities, building and construction projects and area development projects as specified in the schedule to the notification, need an environmental clearance. Theindividual project components are also examined to ensure that environmental safety measures are integrated into the project. 2.6.11 The Wetlands (Conservation and Management) Rules 2010

The Rules prohinit reclamation of wetlands, setting up of new industries, handling hazardous chemicals and wastes, using genetically engineered organisms, solid waste dumping, disposal of untreated effluents, constructions of permanent nature within 50 meters or any other adversely impacting within the wetlands. The Rules also classify wetlands for conservation and list a series of activities that can be undertaken with the prior approval of the state government within the wetlands. In terms of water supply and sanitation, these include withdrawal of water or impoundment, diversion or interruption of water sources within the local catchment area of the wetland ecosystem and treated effluent discharges. The state government is required to ensure that as per the E.I.A. Notification of 2006, an E.I.A is conducted before granting the necessary permissions. 2.6.12 The Hazardous Wastes (Management, Handling and Transboundary Movement) Rules,

2008

The Rules prescribe that every person who is engaged in generation, processing, treatment, package, storage, transportation, use, collection, destruction, conversion, and offering for sale, transfer or activities pertaining to hazardous waste is required to obtain an authorization from State Pollution Control Board. Accordingly, sanitation projects involving the handling of hazardous wastes will have to comply with the Rules. 2.6.13 Bio-Medical Waste (Management and Handling) Rules, 1998

The Rules apply to all persons who generate, collect, receive, store, transport, treat, dispose, or handle bio- medical waste in any form and prescribe the duty of every occupier of an institution generating bio-medical waste (which includes a hospital, nursing home, clinic, dispensary, veterinary institution, animal house, pathological laboratory and blood bank) by whatever name called, to ensure that such waste is handled without any adverse effect to human health and environment after obtaining thenecessary authorization from the Pollution Control Board. The Rules are also applicable to sanitation projects, involving handling of biomedical wastes. 2.6.14 Municipal Solid Waste Management and Handling Rules 2000

These Rules prescribe the procedures for waste collection, segregation, storage, transportation, processing and disposal of Municipal Solid Wastes and for seeking an authorization from the Pollution Control Boards for the same. The Rules makes it mandatory for all cities to set up suitable waste treatment and disposal facilities by December 31, 2003. The Rules also specify the standards for compost quality, health control and management and closure of land-fills. The Rules are complied by the sanitation projects involving the handling of Municipal wastes. Presently, the Rules are applicable to notified areas only (cities, villages or towns notified as municipalities or notified town areas) but in future may also apply to rural areas, if integrated waste handling facilities are proposed.

Page | 16


2.6.15 E- Waste (Management and Handling) Rules 2011

The Rules notified by the Ministry of Environment and Forests, Government of India, have come into effect from 01.05.2012.

The Rules apply to every producer, consumer or bulk consumer involved in the manufacture, sale, purchase and processing of electrical and electronic equipment or components specified in Schedule-1 of the Rules, collection centre, dismantler and recycler of e-waste. The Rules prescribe the responsibilities of the different stakeholders including producers for obtaining an Authorisation from the Pollution Control Boards. The Rules also fix responsibilities of the collection centers, bulk consumers, dismantlers, transporters and recyclers who are required to to obtain necessary authorization and registration from the SPCB/PCC and ensure that no damage is caused to the environment during storage and transportation of e-waste.

The Rules, however, do not apply to batteries, covered under the Batteries (Management and Handling) Rules, 2001, micro and small enterprises defined in the Micro, Small and Medium Enterprises Development Act, 2006 and radio active wastes covered under the provisions of Atomic Energy Act, 1962.

2.6.16 EIA Mechanism and Wild Life Clearances

The MOEF vide its letter no. F. No. 6-10/2011 WL dated 15.03.2011 prescribed the procedure to be followed for environmental clearances of all projects falling inside National Parks and Wildlife Sanctuaries and Conservation Reserves and within 10 km from boundaries of such areas from. The necessary approval has to be obtained from the Standing Committee of the National Board for Wildlife, which is generally subject to recommendation of the State Board for Wildlife granted under the Wildlife Protection Act, 1972 (Act).

This Act provides protection to provided to listed species of Flora and Fauna in the declared network of ecologically important protected areas such as wild life sanctuaries and national parks and regulation of activities within or outside the protected areas, which may have an adverse impact on the ecology of the areas. Ecologically sensitive areas, wild life sanctuaries and national parks are prohibited while selecting sites for project components, failing which permission is mandatory from the National Board for Wild Life and the Forest Department with appropriate safeguards. 2.6.17 Wildlife Protection Act, 1972

Section 2 of the Act requires prior approval of the Central Government, before a state government or any other authority issues direction for de-reservation of reserved forests (which have been reserved under the Indian Forest Act 1927), use of forest land for non-forest purpose, assigning forest land by way of lease or otherwise to any private person or to any authority, corporation, agency or any other organization not owned, managed or controlled by the government and falling of naturally grown trees. Permission has also to be obtained from the Forest Department when forest land is required for the project activities.

2.6.18 Forest Conservation Act, 1980

Section 2 of the Act requires prior approval of the Central Government, before a state government or any other authority issues direction for de-reservation of reserved forests (which have been reserved under the Indian Forest Act 1927), use of forest land for non-forest purpose, assigning forest land by way of lease or otherwise to any private person or to any authority, corporation, agency or any other organization not owned, managed or controlled by the government and falling of naturally grown trees. Permission has also to be obtained from the Forest Department when forest land is required for the project activities.

2.6.19 The Indian Forest Act, 1927

The Act deals with reserved forest, village forest, protected forest, control over forests and lands not being property of government, the duty on timber and other forest produce, regulation transit of forest products, collection of timber, penalties and procedures, cattle-trespass, forest officers and other miscellaneous

Page | 17


provisions. Section 26 of the Act prohibits a number of activities including fresh clearings, tree felling, lopping, burning, grazing, quarrying, manufacturing activities, hunting and shooting in the forest and protected areas.

2.6.20 The Biological Diversity Act 2002

The Act aims at providing for conservation of biological diversity, sustainable use of its components and a fair and equitable sharing of the benefits arising out of the use of biological resources, knowledge and the related matters. The Act provides for a system of prior approvals of the National Biodiversity Authority on application for intellectual property rights or patents on biological research or information. The Act also provides for establishment of the State Biodiversity Board to regulate the transfer of any biological resource or knowledge.

2.6.21 World Bank Safeguard Policies

The World Bank has formulated 10 environmental, social and legal safeguard policies. Amongst the Environmental Safeguard Policies, Operational Policy (O.P.) / Bank Procedure 4.01: Environmental Assessment is an umbrella policy for the Banks Environmental ‘Safeguard Policies’ which among others also include: Natural Habitats, Pest Management, Physical Cultural resources , Safety of dams, International Waterways etc.

Table-4

Sl. Relevant Policy/Regulations

/ Act

Scope Implication for the EMF

1. OP/BP 4.01 Environmental Assessment World Bank Safegaurd Policy

This policy is used by the World Bank to identify, avoid and mitigate the potential negative environmental impacts associate with the Bank lending operations. In the World Bank operations, the purpose of Environmental assessment is to improve decision making to ensure that project options under consideration are sound and sustainable and that potentially affected people have been properly consulted.

Applicable to this project. This Environmental Assessment Policy provides for screening of projects according to their impact potential and prescribes the extent of detailing required in the assessment process.

2. OP/BP 4.04 NaturalHabitats World Bank Safegaurd Policy

The policy prohibits Bank support for projects which would lead to the significant loss or degradation of any critical natural habitat which include legally protected, officially proposed for protection and unprotected but of known high conservation value habitats. In other non critical areas, projects can only be considered when there are no feasible alternatives to achieve the projects substantial overall net benefits and acceptable mitigation measures such as compensatory protected areas are included within the project.

Applicable, i f schemes tobe taken under the project involve critical natural habitat.

3. OP/BP 4.36 Forestry World Bank Safegaurd Policy

The Bank does not finance projects that in its opinion would involve significant conversion of critical forest areas or related critical natural habitats. For areas that are not critical, adequate mitigation measures have to be incorporated. The Bank also does not finance projects that contravene applicable international environmental agreements.

Some of the schemes taken up under the Project may be located inforest areas and hence may require detailed cosiderations and management.

4. OP 4.09 Pest Management World Bank Safegaurd Policy

Rural development and health sector projects have to avoid using harmful pesticides. If pesticides have to be used in crop protection or in the fight against vector borne diseases, the Bank funded project should include a Pest Management Plan (PMP) prepared by the borrower either as a stand alone document or as part of the Environmental Assessment.

Applicable if sanitation projects involve the use of pesticides for control of vector borne diseases.

Page | 18


5. OP/BP 4.12 Involuntary Resettlement World Bank Safegaurd Policy

Implemented in projects which displace people. Requires public participation in resettlement planning as part of EA for project. Intended t o restore or improve income earning capacity of displaced populations.

Applicable to the project only if displacement is involved.

6. OP/BP 4.20 Indigenous World Bank Safegaurd Policy Peoples

Purpose Is to ensure indigenous peoples benefit from Bank financed development and to avoid or mitigate adverse affects on indigenous peoples. Applies to projects that might adversely affect indigenous peoples or when they are targeted beneficiaries. Requires participation of indigenous peoples in Creation of “indigenous peoples development” plans”.

Applicable to the project. Adverse effects on the indigenous people will be avoided. Indigenous people will be benefited with access to water supply and sanitation.

7. OP/BP 4.11 PhysicalCultural Resources World Bank Safegaurd Policy

The objective of the policy is to avoid; or mitigate adverse impacts on cultural resources from development projects that the World Bank finances. The borrower addresses impacts on Physical Cultural Resources in projects, proposed for Bank Financing, as an integral part of the Environmental Appraisal process. Projects are classified during the screening process as Category A or B. As an integral part of the Environmental Appraisal process the borrower develops a physical cultural management plan which is consistent with the country’s overall policy framework and National Legislation. Physical Cultural Resources have to be included in the baseline data collection phase of the Environmental Assessment.

Applicable to the project if existing physical and cultural property is being impacted.

8. OP/BP 4.37 Safety of Dams World Bank Safegaurd Policy

The policy requires that the borrower adopt and implement certain dam safety measures for the design, bill tendering, construction, operation and maintenance of the dam and associated works. Dams smaller than 15 meters in height are classified as ‘small’ and dams more than 15 meters high as ‘large’ but dams under 10 meters high are regarded as large dams if they are expected to become large dams during the operation of the facility. Dams that are between 10 and 15 meters are also regarded large if they present special design complexities e.g. flood handling, toxicity management, high sensitivity etc. Different procedures are prescribed for small and large dams. For small dams, generic dam safety measures designed by qualified Engineers are sufficient but detailed plans have to be drawn up for large dams.

Applicable only if the project involves construction of dams.

Bank projects involving dams are processed according to the procedures set forth in B.P. 10.00. Investment leading Identification to Board Presentation. Dam Safety reports may involve plans for construction, supervision and quality assurance, instrumentation plan, operation and maintenance plan, emergency procedures plan.

Page | 19


9 Operational Policy 7.50: Projects on International Waterways

This policy revised in 2012, applies to any river, canal, lake, or similar body of water that forms a boundary between, or any river or body of surface water that flows through, two or more states or any tributary or other body of surface water that is a component of any waterway as above. It also applies toany bay, gulf, strait, or channel bounded by two or more states or, if within one state, recognized as a necessary channel of communication between the open sea and other states--and any river flowing into such waters.

Hydroelectric, irrigation, flood control, navigation, drainage, water and sewerage, industrial, and similar projects that involve the potential pollution of international waterways are regulated under this operational policy.

2.6.22 Permissions, Clearances and Institutions

It appears from the above that the construction and operation phases of water supply and sanitation activities of sub-projects are properly regulated so as to minimize the environmental impacts from the project activities. The key regulatory institutions are the Environment Department of the State Pollution Control Boards, Directorate of Environment, Forest Department and National Board for Wildlife. The requisite permissions and safeguards with reference to waste disposal (solid, liquid, gaseous, hazardous, bio – medical, plastics etc.) has to be obtained from the State Pollution Control Boards and the State Environmental Impact Assessment Authority according to the applicable provisions of law and policy. The necessary permissions are also required from the Forest Department and the National Board for Wildlife for projects coming under the guidelines of the Central Groundwater Board and the Central Groundwater Authority. All technologies involved should be water efficient, climate change resilient and aim at minimizing losses of water. The project management schemes should be community based and promote water storage capacities where project activities involve the use of forestland or any disturbance to wildlife or biodiversity.

Page | 20


2.7 SECTOR INSTITUTIONS

Jharkhand has the Department of Drinking Water and Sanitation as the nodal organisation for rural water supply and sanitation, while four other institutions have a converging impact on water supply and sanitation. These institutions are as under:

2.7.1 Converging Institutions

• Panchayat Raj and Rural Development Department • Department of Irrigation • Department of Agriculture • Jharkhand Pollution Control Board

Apart from the above there are ahost of other institutions and organisations that will have alink with the rural drinking water and sanitation in the state. The organization of the state set up and its linkages have been shown in the chart below:

The functions of these institutions (as relevant to the project context) are discussed in detail in the following sections.

EMF FORTHE WB PROJECTFOR DRINKING WATER& SANITATIONIN RURAL AREASOF JHARKHAND

Government ofJharkhand

Drinking Water& SanitationDepartment

State Water &SanitationMission

Societyregistered underState laws

Chairman(Ex-officio:Secretary to theGovt,Department ofDrinking water

MemberSecretary

Member Member Member Member Member Member Member

CEDWSD

Representativeof RGNDWMGOI

SecretaryRam KrishnaMission,

PrincipalSt Xavier'sInstitute ofSocial Science,Ranchi

Representativeof IndianWaterWorksAssociation

ProjectOfficerUNICEFPatna

ED-HRD/CE, DWSD

WORLDBANK

GOI:MINISTRYOFEXTERNALAFFAIRS

DEPT OFENVIRONMENT& FORESTS,JHARKHAND

DEPT OFENVIRONMENT& FORESTS,GOI

MINISTRY OFDRINKINGWATER &SANITATION,(MDWS) GOI

CENTRALGROUNDWATER BOARD

CENTRALPOLLUTIONCONTROLBOARD

STATEPOLLUTIONCONTROLBOARD

JHARKHANDSPACEAPPLICATIONSCENTRE(JSAC)

PROJECTMANAGEMENTUNIT (PMU)

DEPT OFAGRICULTUREJHARKHAND

DEPT OFIRRIGATIONJHARKHAND

DEPT OFPANCHAYATRAJ & RURALDEVELOPMENTJHARKHAND

Page | 21


Box-2

Some key features of the SWSM, Jharkhand are as follows: (a) Sustainability of the initiative: VWSC as incubator of Good Governance initiative and as implementing authority sustains on peoples demand. Professional back up and financial independence are two key issues in sustainability. VWSC are mandated to get professional back up from DPMU (District Project Management Unit) and BRC (Block resource Centers). and as independent standing body of Panchayats they are mandated to receive assistance from central and state agencies as well as from donor agencies. Also regularly they are free to collect revenue through water supply and associated services. Considering professionally managed SWSM as key to the changed scenario Department has decided to go for DWSM (District Water & Sanitation Mission) in a similar manner. Process for appointment of domain experts and Subject matter specialists in DPMU has been instituted. As the key to success is establishment of transparent people centric governance mechanism up to the last mile, sustainability of SWSM and VWSC are ensured.

(b) Impact /Benefit Resulting from the Initiative:

Comprehensive analysis of the key result area, key performance indicators and other socio economic Impact Indicators before and after the implementation of initiative is given below in terms of improvement in delivery time of services, better beneficiary feedback, improvement in measurable indicators and simplified procedures;

i. Improvement in delivery Times of Services

Tube well repairing time improved from 15 Days to 5 Days (As feedback received from the field); Project Conceptualization to O& M transfer time reduced to 6 to 8 Months (Compared between VWSC involved project supported by PRADAN and normal projects); Improvement in construction time of Toilet and sanitation facility (From demand to supply cycle used to take more than a year while presently it is completed in three months). Any Complain is addressed electronically on the same day and physically within 3 working days.

ii. Better Beneficiary Feedback

Focused intervention by SWSM through VWSC has received positive response from participant villagers. This is reflected in terms of Accounts opening, regularization of VWSC meetings, increased participation, demand registration for sanitation facilities and complain registration during the period. As on June, 2012 10768VWSC has opened their account in bank. Restoration of Service Level was achieved in 8965 no of habitations during 2011-12. Increased Enthusiasm about sanitation sector activity is also reported by international agencies like GSF, and World Support Program. At State Project Management Unit, SWSM representatives receive regular call from the participant villagers, GP representatives and other individuals/institutions. In a recently held meeting with World Bank representatives VWSC leaders from 20 Panchayet shared their enriching experience of engagement with SWSM. Some exemplary case lets as shared by VWSC representatives are enclosed in annexure for reference.

iii. Improvement in Measurable Indicators

The effort made by SWSM e team is reflected in movement of NRDWP indicators as per the parameter fixed by Government of India. Key Result area is given below;

Particulars of the Indicator Achievement in 2011-12

(Quantity and Percentage)

Remarks

Partially Covered habitation 17010 92.92 Highest in Number in the Eastern Zone

Coverage of quality affected habitations

415 51.62 Increased over previous period

Coverage of School 1946 98.08 Increased over previous period

Coverage of PWSS (New ) 5205 - Radically increased previous period

Availability of Drinking Water

(Near & Within the premises)

- 63.6 Increased over previous period

Population covered with PWSS 4614540 - Increased over previous period

Total Expenditure 169.84 Cr 70.83 The state has least opening balance among the Eastern States for 2012-12

Program Fund Utilization 167.40 Cr 73.37 Increased over previous period

PWS Scheme Completion 5383 91.93 Highest among Eastern Zone PRI members trained 1208 - Most number of PRI members

trained as per IMIS during the period

2.7.1.1 Nodal Institutions: Drinking Water and Sanitation Department (DWSD or DDWS)

The DDWS has its units at the state capital at Ranchi and most of the district head quarters. Its presence at the village level is not strong enough to make a substantial dent on the present status of lagging behind in areas of rural drinking water and sanitation. The DDWS has, therefore, taken initiative to set up the State Water & Sanitation Mission (SWSM) predominantly led by local village women to provide effective policy making and extension support and to drive a transparent local governance system within PRI framework to address issues of water and sanitation.

2.7.1.2 Proposed World Bank Assisted Project

The proposed World Bank assisted project would aim to scale up demand responsive and decentralized service delivery approach across the state in the medium term. The project will initially cover the selected 12 districts in Jharkhand. The different key components of the project are as given in Chapter 1. A unique feature of the proposed project is its bottom up planning process in which the beneficiary community is actively involved in all stages of development of the project and its implementation including O&M of facilities created under the project. The key objectives of the proposed project are: a) To improve the quality of rural water supply and sanitation services and to achieve

• Sustainable development, • Poverty reduction,

Table-5 Revised Project Outline (as proposed in December 2012)

Sl. No.

Name of District

Name of DDWS Division

Schemes Proposed (In no.) Population (In lakh) SVS MSVS MVS MMVS Total

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 Garhwa * Garhwa 476 22 5 2 505 5.99

2 Giridih Giridih 1 111 68 10 2 191 3.09 Giridih 2 285 19 18 2 324 3.91

3 Godda Godda 18 458 31 0 507 11.04 4 Sahibganj Sahibganj 72 42 16 14 144 7.68 5 Pakur Pakur 134 228 19 10 391 8.27

6 Dha’bad Dha’bad 1 430 0 0 2 432 5.37 Dha’bad 2 15 47 5 5 72 3.60

7 E.S’bhum * Jamshedpur 889 51 7 2 949 10.76 8 Palamu * Palamu 455 5 16 12 488 8.31 9 Dumka* Dumka 72 334 64 27 497 10.77

10 Jamtara Jamtara 146 162 24 10 342 3.09 11 Khunti* Khunti 308 224 56 2 590 4.91 12 Saraikela* Saraikela 78 29 23 1 131 2.75

Total 3489 1689 294 91 5563 89.53 * Tentative Proposed Project Districts


CHAPTER-3

BASELINE ENVIRONMENTAL STATUS

Page | 23


3 BASELINE ENVIRONMENTAL STATUS

3.1 INTRODUCTION

This chapter provides an overview of the physical geography of the state, with special emphasis on water resources. This environmental baseline has been developed mainly on the basis of data collected through secondary sources, and has been supplemented by public consultations and field surveys in sample villages. 3.2 AN OVERVIEW OF HISTORY OF JHARKHAND

The new state of Jharkhand was bifurcated from Bihar on 15th November, 2000, the birth anniversary of the legendary Bhagwan Birsa Munda. However, according to some historians there was already a distinct geo-political, cultural entity called Jharkhand even before the period of Magadha Empire. According to legend, Raja Jai Singh Deo of Orissa had declared himself as the ruler of Jharkhand in the 13th century. The local tribal heads had developed into barbaric dictators who could not govern the province fairly and justly. Consequently, the people of this state approached the more powerful rulers of Jharkhand's neighbouring states, who were perceived more fair and just in governance. This became the turning point in the history of the region where rulers from Orissa moved in with their armies and created states that were governed for the benefit of the people and involved their participation, thus ending the barbarism that had marked the region for centuries. Later, during the Mughal period, the Jharkhand was known as Kukara. After 1765, it came under the control of the British Empire and was formally known as Jharkhand, the Land of forests and bushes. In post-Independence era, the Jharkhand Mukti Morcha started a regular agitation which forced the government to establish the Jharkhand Area Autonomous Council in 1995 and finally as a full-fledged state. On 2nd August 2000, the Parliament of India passed the Bihar Reorganisation Bill to create the state of Jharkhand and thus 18 districts were carved out of Bihar to form Jharkhand on 15th November, 2000.

3.3 GEOGRAPHY OF JHARKHAND

3.3.1 Physical Environment

3.3.1.1 Location

The state of Jharkhand is flanked by Bihar in the north, Uttar Pradesh and Chhattisgarg in the west and Orissa in the south. The state mainly comprises of the forest tracks of Chhotanagpur plateau and Santhal Pargana. The area, in and around the districts of Chotanagpur and Santhal Parganas, was formerly Southern Bihar, thickly wooded and consisting of various hills. The Chotanagpur plateau is one of the most beautiful areas. This area is studded with hills of 300 to 900 m in altitude and covered with verdant virgin forests. This area comprises of rivers, lakes, meadows and valleys and is rich in wildlife and an ideal retreat of peace and beauty.

Jharhkand is bordered by the states of Bihar to the north, Uttar Pradesh and Chhattisgarh to the west, Orissa to the south, and West Bengal to the east. The industrial city of Ranchi is its capital. The other major cities and highly industrialised cities of in tge east are Jamshedpur, Bokaro, and Dhanbad. Jharkhand is also popularly known as 'Vananchal' means a land mass covered with forests. Jharkhand is known for its mineral wealth and forestry products together with excellent human resources. Forest preserves support populations of tigers and Indian elephants. Most of the state lies on the Chota Nagpur Plateau, which is the source of the Koel, Damodar, Brahmani, Kharkai, and Subarnarekha rivers, whose upper watersheds lie within Jharkhand. Jharkhand has a rich variety of flora and fauna. The National Parks and the Zoological Gardens located in the state of Jharkhand present a panorama of this variety.

Jharhkand is bordered by the states of Bihar to the north, Uttar Pradesh and Chhattisgarh to the west, Orissa to the south, and West Bengal to the east. The industrial city of Ranchi is its capital. The other

Page | 24


major cities, all highly industrialised cities of eastern India, are Jamshedpur, Bokaro, and Dhanbad. Jharkhand is also popularly known as 'Vananchal' means a land mass covered with forests. Jharkhand is known for its mineral wealth and forest products together with excellent human resources. Forest reserves support populations of tigers and Indian elephants. Most of the state lies on the Chota Nagpur Plateau, which is the source of the Koel, Damodar, Brahmani, Kharkai, and Subarnarekha rivers, whose upper watersheds lie within Jharkhand. Jharkhand has a rich variety of flora and fauna. The National Parks and the Zoological Gardens located in the state of Jharkhand present a panorama of this variety. The State covers 79.70 lakh ha. area (2.42% of the geographical area of the country) with a population of 269 million (as per Census 2001), the state accounts for 2.6% of the total population of the country. It has sizeable Tribal population (26.3%). Topography of the State is mostly undulating, hilly and sloping with mountains, forests, river basins and valleys.

It has a rich endowment of forest and mineral resources. It has some of the richest deposits of coal and iron Ore in the world. It is the largest producer of coal, copper, kynite and mica in the country. It is blessed with rich fauna and flora.

3.3.1.2 Administrative Setup

The state consists of 5 Administrative Divisions namely: I. South Chhotanagpur comprising 5 districts - Ranchi, Khunti, Simdega, Gumla and Lohardaga. II. North Chhotanagpur comprising 7 districts - Hazaribagh, Ramgarh, Chatra, Koderma, Giridih,

Bokaro and Dhanbad. III. Kolhan comprising 3 districts - East Singhbhum, West Singhbhum and Saraikela-Kharsawan. IV. Palamu comprising 3 districts - Palamu, Garhwa and Latehar. V. Santhal Parganas comprising 6 districts - Sahebganj, Pakur, Jamtara, Deoghar, Dumka and

Godda.

District 24 Sub-Division 36 Developmental Blocks 259 Panchayats 4423 Villages 32615 Towns 149 Corporations 3 Nagar Parshad/ Nagar Panchayat 37

Page | 25


3.3.1.3 Demography

3.3.1.3.1 Population (Census 2001) In Lakhs

Male Female Total

State 138.85 130.60 269.45 Urban 32.06 27.88 59.94 Rural 106.79 102.72 209.51 ST 35.66 35.21 70.87 SC 16.40 15.48 31.88 Population (0-6 yrs.)

25.22

24.34 49.56

Jharkhand National Avg.

Urban 22.24% 27.8 Rural 77.76% 72.2% ST 26.3% 8.1% SC 11.8% 16.2% Population (0-6 yrs.) 18.4% 15.9% Population density /sq. km 338 313 Sex Ratio Total 941 933 0-6 years 965 927 ST 987 978 SC 974 936 (The census of 2011 provisional results are withheld for administrative reasons)

3.3.1.3.2 Administrative Details

The number of blocks, villages and habitations in the state are as shown in the Table-6.

Table-6

S.No. District Blocks Panchayats Villages Habitations 1 BOKARO 9 248 692 4077 2 CHATRA 10 159 1315 7644 3 DEOGHAR 10 201 2329 8497 4 DHANBAD 8 383 1289 3661 5 DUMKA * 10 206 2572 7384 6 GARHWA * 19 196 859 4371 7 GIRIDIH 12 359 2546 4573 8 GODDA 9 200 1610 5827 9 GUMLA 12 159 945 4532 10 HAZARIBAG 10 227 1105 4556 11 JAMTARA 4 118 1066 5260 12 KHUTI * 6 91 743 2995 13 KODERMA 6 109 581 1850 14 LATEHAR 7 115 738 4309 15 LOHARDAGA 6 67 353 1645 16 PAKUR 6 128 1132 3644

Page | 26


17 PALAMU * 18 289 1700 6804 18 PASCHIM SINGHBHUM 16 214 1651 8803 19 PURBI SINGHBHUM * 11 231 1670 6697 20 RAMGARH 4 143 358 1955 21 RANCHI 13 275 1192 5967 22 SAHIBGANJ 9 166 1266 2912 23 SAREIKELA KHARSAWAN * 9 135 1113 4835 24 SIMDEGA 10 94 448 6393 Total 234 4513 29273 119191

* Tentative Proposed Project Districts 3.3.1.4 Irrigation Potential

The irrigation potential of the state of Jharkhand is as follows: Total irrigation potential created upto March, 2009 : 7.31 lakh ha. Major and Medium irrigation: 2.34 lakh ha. Minor irrigation : 4.96 lakh ha. (Source: Water Resources Deptt.) 3.3.1.5 Natural Resources

3.3.1.5.1 Forest & Wildlife

3.3.1.5.1.1 Introduction

The geographical area of the state is 79,714 Km2 which accounts for 2.42% of the country’s area. The state falls between 22000’ N – 24037’ N latitude and 83015’ E – 87001’ E longitude. The important rivers of the state are Sone, Keol and Damodar. Jharkhand has a tropical climate with annual average rainfall of about 900 mm. The temperature varies between 40c to 470c.

The population of the state is 32.97 million (Census 2011) which constitutes 2.72% of the country’s population. Of this, rural population is 75.95% and urban population 24.05%. The population density is 414 persons per Km2. The livestock population is 18.10 million (Livestock Census 2007).

3.3.1.5.1.2 Land Use Pattern of the State

Land Use Area in ‘000 ha Percentage Total geographical area 7,972 Reporting area for land utilization 7,970 100.00 Forests 2,239 28.09 Not available for cultivation 1,332 16.71 Permanent pasture and other grazing lands

110 1.38

Land under misc. tree crops and groves 93 1.17 Culturable wasteland 336 4.22 Fallow lands other than current fallows 962 12.07 Current fallows 1,394 17.49 Net area sown 1,504 18.87

3.3.1.5.1.3 Forest Cover

The Forest cover in the state, based on interpretation of satellite data of November 2008- January 2009, is 22,977 Km2 which is 28.82% of the state’s geographical area. In terms of forest canopy density classes, the state has 2,590 Km2 area under very dense forest, 9,917 Km2 area under moderately dense forest and 10,470 Km2 area under open forest. The forest cover of the state is shown in below table.

Page | 27


Recorded forest Area in Jharkhand (Area in km2

) Geo. Area(GA)

Total Forest Area as in ‘ISFR 2009’

Recorded Forest Area Total Forest Area

% of GA

Reserved Forests

Protected Forests

Unclassed Forests

79,714 23,605 4,387 19,185 33 23,605 29.61

Table-7

District-wise Forest Cover Area in Jharkhand (Area in KmP

2P)

District Geographical Area

2011 Assessment

% of GA

Change Scrub

Very Dense Forest

Mod. Dense Forest

Open Forest

Total

Bokaro 1,929 64 244 560 252 29.03 0 48

Chatra 3,732 251 863 663 1,777 47.62 -5 15

Deoghar 2,479 0 84 85 169 6.82 0 5

Dhanbad 2,996 0 50 155 205 6.84 0 17

Dumka 6,212 0 314 323 637 10.25 0 58

Garhwa* 4,092 124 406 835 1,365 33.36 0 55

Giridih 4,963 98 422 344 864 17.41 10 8

Godda 2,110 15 268 116 399 18.91 0 25

Gumla 9,077 324 919 1,414 2,657 29.27 0 33

Hazaribagh 5,998 272 626 1,164 2,062 34.38 9 44

Koderma 1,435 68 321 207 596 41.53 -4 0

Lohardaga 1,491 174 219 110 503 33.74 0 10

Pakur 1,571 3 172 108 283 18.01 0 19

Palamu* 8,657 529 1,809 1,189 3,527 40.74 0 88

Paschimi Singhbhum

9,907 453 1,559 1,829 3,841 38.77 6 81

Purbi Singhbhum*

3,533 53 621 404 1,078 30.51 67 38

Ranchi 7,698 141 684 1,079 1,904 24.73 0 67

Sahebganj 1,834 21 336 193 550 29.99 0 72

Grand Total 79,714 2,590 9,917 10,470 22,977 28.82 83 683

* Tentative Proposed project Districts 3.3.1.5.1.4 Forest Cover in Tribal Districts in Jharkhand

Forest Cover in Tribal Districts – Jharkhand (Area in KmP

2P)

No. of Tribal Districts

Geo. Area Forest Cover 2011 % of GA

Change* Scrub

Very Dense

Mod. Dense

Open Forest

Total Forest

Page | 28


Forest Forest 8 44,413 1,677 6.67 6,218 13,962 31.44 73 341

3.3.1.5.1.5 Reasons for change detected in 2011 Assessment

Changes reported in current assessment which have been validated through ground truthing of selected sample points in the field, are mainly due to plantation activities and regeneration of forests owing to protection measures taken by the SFD. The change matrix reveals that there has been an increase of 18 km2 in the moderately dense forest and 65 km2 in open forest whereas there is no change reported in the very dense category.

Table-8

Forest Cover Change Matrix (Area in km2) 2009 Assessment 2011 Assessment Total 2009

VDF MDF OF Scrub NF Very Dense Forest 2,590 0 0 0 0 2590 Moderately Dense Forest

0 9,899 0 0 0 9,899

Open Forest 0 2 10,398 0 5 10,405 Scrub 0 0 2 680 1 683 Non – Forest 0 16 70 3 56,048 56,137 Total 2011 2,590 9,917 10,470 683 56,054 79,714 Net Change 0 18 65 0 -83

3.3.1.5.1.6 Forest cover of the state in different altitude zones

Altitude Zone-wise Forest Cover (Area in km2) Altitude Zone VDF MDF OF Total 0-500m 1,038 6,978 7,684 15,700 500-1000m 1,493 2,807 2,754 7,054 1000-2000m 59 132 32 223 Total 2,590 9,917 10,470 22,977

3.3.1.5.1.7 Forest Cover in Different Forest Types

Forest type mapping using satellite data has been undertaken by Forest Survey of India with reference to Champion & Seth Classification. As per this assessment, the state has five forest types which belong to two forest type groups, viz. Tropical Moist Deciduous and Tropical Dry Deciduous Forests. Percentage-wise distribution of forest cover in different forest type groups found in the state is given in the pie diagram.

Page | 29


3.3.1.5.1.8 Tree cover

Tree cover of the state has been estimated using TOF inventory data collected over a period of six years, i.e. 2004-10. The estimated tree cover in the state is 2,914 km2 which is 3.66% of its geographical area. Six districts of the state (Deoghar, Dhanbad, Giridih, Gumla, Koderma and Ranchi) have been inventoried.

Forest and Tree Cover Category Area % of Geographical Area Tree Cover 2,914 3.66 Forest Cover 22,977 28.82 Forest & Tree Cover 25,891 32.48

3.3.1.5.1.9 Growing Stock

The growing stock in the recorded forest area has been estimated on the basis of the current forest cover map, forest type map and forest inventory data. For trees outside forests (TOF), the same has been estimated using TOF inventory data.

Growing Stock (million cum) Forest TOF Total 116.308 51.308 167.616

3.3.1.5.1.10 Bamboo

The extent of bamboo bearing area in the forests of the state is 3,603 km2. Density-wise details, number of culms by soundness and equivalent green weight are given below.

Bamboo bearing area by density in recorded forest area (Area in km2) Recorded Forest Area

Pure bamboo

Dense bamboo

Scattered bamboo

Clumps hacked

Bamboo regeneration

No bamboo

23,605 14 898 1,571 509 611 20,002

Source: INDIA STATE OF FOREST REPORT 2011 (Forest Survey of India Dheradun) 3.3.1.5.2 Important Plants:

Sal, Asan, Gamhar, Karam, Harre, Bahera, Sidha, Arjuan, Sissoo, Sagwan, Khair, Kend, Kusum, Mahulan, Pier, Palas, Semal, Salai, Bamboo, Jamun, Karanj, Imli, Mahuan, Kanod etc.

3.3.1.5.3 Wild Life:

Tiger, Leopard, Elephant, Cheetal, Sambhar, Barking Deer, Black Buck, Gaur, Neelgai, Wild Boar, Wolf, Wild Dog, Sloth Bear, Hyena, Langur, Rhesus, Monkey, Porcupine etc. Wildlife Sanctuary: 11 National Park : 1

Jharkhand has 28.10% of total geographical area of the State as forest against the National Average of 23.57%. (Source: Forest Deptt.)

Estimated number of bamboo culms and equivalent green weight Number of culms (in millions) Equivalent Green Weight (in 000’ tones) Green Dry Decayed Total Green Dry Total 181 49 8 238 736 357 1093

Page | 30


3.3.1.6 Mines & Geology

Table-9

S NO

MINERAL JHARKHAND’S SHARE WRT INDIA

S NO

MINERAL JHARKHAND’S SHARE WRT INDIA

1 Coal 29.17 15 Black Granite 23.64 2 Iron Ore (Haematite) 27.58 16 Coloured Granite 3 Magnetite 0.10 17 Apatite rock

phosphate 27.07

4 Limestone 0.43 18 Asbestos 0.69 5 Copper ore 16.21 19 Barytes 0.04 6 Bauxite 3.57 20 Cromite 0.35 7 Kyanite 5.56 21 Cobalt 20.04 8 Fireclay 9.48 22 Felspar 1.82 9 Graphite 6.13 23 Garnet 0.0016

10 Quartz & Silica 4.78 24 Gold Ore 0.09 11 China Clay/Kaolin 7.33 25 Manganese Ore 1.98 12 Dolomite 0.68 26 Mica 1.42 13 Bentonite 0.15 27 Nickel 4.77 14 Talc/ Soap Stone 0.11 28 Ochre 0.26

3.3.1.7 Infrastructure

3.3.1.7.1 Road

National Highways 1844 KM State Highways & PWD Roads including Major District roads (including urban roads) 6880 KM. Rural roads including classified rural roads & Minor District Roads 24300 KM (Approx)

3.3.1.7.2 All Weather and Metal Roads

Jharkhand India Villages having access to all weather roads 36% 57% Villages having access to all metal roads 25% 45% Road Length per 100 square km 21.4 km 74.2km 3.3.1.7.3 Health

Table-10

INDICATORS JHARKHAND (2009) INDIA (2009) SOURCE IMR per 1000 44 50 SRS, 2009 Child Mortality Rate (CMR) 26.1 18.4 NFHS-III (2005-2006) MMR (Per one lakh) 312 254 MMR 2004-06 Spl

Survey TFR 3.2 2.6 HMIS-2008 Full immunization 54.1 59.7 HMIS-2009 Birth rate 25.6 22.5 SRS, 2009 Death rate 7.0 7.3 SRS, 2009 % of birth in institutional delivery 40.1 72.9 CES, 2009

Birth/ Death rate/IMR is per 1000 population. MMR is per lakh live birth

Page | 31


3.3.1.8 Industrialisation

No of industrial development Authorities: 4 (Ranchi, Adityapur, Bokaro, Dumka) No of mega industries (Sept 2010): 24 No of Large & medium industries: 106 No of small and micro-industries: 1335

3.3.2 Geomorphology

3.3.2.1 Formation

The Chota Nagpur Plateau is a continental plateau - an extensive area of land thrust above the general land. The plateau has been formed by continental uplift from forces acting deep inside the earth. The Gondwana substrates attest to the plateau's ancient origin. It is part of the Deccan Plate, which broke free from the southern continent during the Cretaceous to embark on a 50-million-year journey that was violently interrupted by the northern Eurasian continent. The northeastern part of the Deccan Plateau, where this ecoregion sits, was the first area of contact with Eurasia. 3.3.2.2 Divisions

The Chota Nagpur Plateau consists of three steps. The highest step is in the western part of the plateau, where pats, as a plateau is locally called, are 3,000 feet (910 m) - 3,500 feet (1,100 m) above sea level. The highest point is 3,819 feet (1,164 m). The next part contains larger portions of the old Ranchi and Hazaribagh districts and some parts of old Palamu district, before these were broken up into smaller administrative units. The general height is 2,000 feet (610 m). The topography is undulating with prominent gneissic hills, often dome-like in outline. The lowest step of the plateau is at an average level of around 1,000 feet (300 m). It covers the old Manbhum and Singhbhum districts. High hills are a striking part of this section - Parasnath Hills rise to a height of 4,480 feet (1,370 m) and Dalma Hills to 3,407 feet (1,038 m). The large plateau is subdivided into several small plateaux or sub plateaux. 3.3.3 Physiography

The physiography of Jharkhand is largely defined by the Chhotanagpur Plateau (CNP) region and other distinct geomorphic domains. The Chhotanagpur Plateau (CNP) region extending from the western part of state to the border of West Bengal in the east is characterized by distinct steps i.e. level of planation. This has been further divided into a number of 2nd and 3rd order division based on variation in relief, drainage and geology. Based on broad geomorphic parameters, Jharkhand may be divided into the following geomorphic domains:- 3.3.3.1 Ranchi Plateau

This is the largest part of the Chhotanagpur Plateau having an average elevation of about 700 meters above msl. There are many waterfalls at the edges of Ranchi Plateau where rivers form waterfalls when they descend through the escarpments of the plateau down to the area of significantly lower height. That is the reason the plateau is highly dissected at the edges. Hundru Falls (75m) on Subarnarekha River, Dassam Falls (39m) on Kanchi River and Sadni Falls (60 m) on Sankh River are some of the examples of scarp falls.

3.3.3.2 Pat Region

The western higher plateau with an average elevation of 1,000 metres (3,300 ft) above mean sea level merges into the plateau of Surguja district of Chattisgarh. The flat topped plateaux, locally known as pats are characterized by level surface and accordance of their summit levels shows they are part of one large plateau. The area is also referred to as Western Ranchi Plateau. It is believed to be composed of Deccan lava. The Netarhat Planation Surface locally known as PATS has also been referred to as Western Ranchi Plateau. This is the highest plateau region of the Chhotanagpur Plateau with an average height of 1000 meters the highest point being 1164 meters. Pat Region is characterized by level surface. The denudation and secondary enrichment of Granite Gneiss of this region has given rise to some of the best Bauxite deposits.

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Gondwana

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cretaceous

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Deccan_Plateau

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Parasnath_Hills

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Parasnath_Hills

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dalma_Hills

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Surguja_district

Page | 32


3.3.3.3 Hazaribagh Plateau

This lies to the north of Ranchi Plateau and is separated by E-W running Damuda valley in which deposition of Gondwana sediments took place. The Hazaribagh Plateau measures about 64 km (east-west) and 24 km (north-south) with an average elevation of 610 m. The north-eastern and southern faces of this plateau are mostly abrupt but to the west it narrows and descends to the south and connects with the Ranchi Plateau through Tori Pargana. As the plateau is highly dissected at the edges, seen from the north, the edge of this plateau has the appearance of a range of hills.

3.3.3.4 Koderma Plateau

The Koderma Plateau is also referred to as the Hazaribagh Lower Plateau. The northern face of this plateau, elevated 800 ft above the plains of Bihar has the appearance of a range of hills but in reality it is the edge of a plateau. The slope of this plateau to the east is uniform and gentle. The western boundary of the plateau is formed by the deep bed of the Lilajan River. The southern boundary consists of the face of the higher plateau comprising Parasnath Hills. 3.3.3.5 Simdega-Singhbhum Uplands

The Ranchi Plateau gradually slopes down towards south east into Singhbhum region. This region is characterized by highly dissected high (600-900 m) rugged hills, steep hill sides, cliffs and narrow valleys; the reason of this high dissection being the type of rock more susceptible to erosion and structurally highly disturbed area. The prominent tectonic feature, the Singhbhum Shear Zone (SSZ) runs south of Dalma Range arcuately for a length of 150 km in this region. To the

north of Tatanagar, the Dalma hills (500-600m) form a prominent east-west trending hill range.

3.3.3.6 Manbhum Area

The lowest step of the Chotanagpur Plateau, the Manbhum area covers Dhanbad and part of Bokaro district. This area has a general elevation of 300 meter and it consists of undulating land with scattered hills.

3.3.3.7 Palamu Plateau

It lies at a lower height then the surrounding areas of Chotnagpur Plateau. This upland intrudes the Ranchi plateau on the east and merges with the Pat Region in the south. On the west are the Surguja highlands of Chhattishgarh and Sonbhadra district of Uttar Pradesh. On the north-western corner, the Son River forms the state boundary.

3.3.3.8 Rajmahal Plateau

The Rajmahal hills composed primarily of Mesozoic volcanic basaltic traps along with Gondwana sediments in the form of Intra Trappean Beds form a plateau (150-200m) above msl in Shaebganj and Pakur districts of the eastern part of the state of Jharkhand. The Rajmahal plateau trends N-S with a slope towards east possibly as a result of uplift in the west. The subsidence of the eastern region had led to the deposition of Recent Ganga sediments on this part.

Page | 33


Sections across Jharkhand (from North to South) showing Physiography of Chhotanagpur Plateau (Arrows indicate direction of movement)

3.3.3.9 Damodar Valley

The Damodar Valley is a trough between the Ranchi and Hazaribagh plateaus resulting from enormous fracture. This basin had been the place of deposition of several hundred meters of Gondwana sediments ranging in age from late Carboniferous to early Cretaceous, later constituting the great belt of Damodar Valley Gondwana Coalfields.

3.3.4 River Basins of Jharkhand

Damodar Basin : Damodar, Barakar, Bokaro, Konar, Jamunia, Khadia and Bhera/Subarnarekha Basin : Subarnarekha, Kharkai, Raru, Kanchi, Damra, Karru, Chinguru, Garra Brahmani Basin (Orissa & Jharkhand) : Deo, Koina, North karo, Sankh, South karo, South koel Son Basin : Amanat, Auranga, Burha, Kanhar, North koel, Son

3.3.4.1 East Flowing Rivers:

• Bakreshwar River: It is a tributary of the Mayurakshi River. It originates in Santhal Parganas division of Jharkhand, flows in to the Mayurakshi River in Murshidabad district.

• Dwarka River: It originates in Santhal Parganas, flows through Birbhum district and then flows through Murshidabad district where it joins the Bhagirathi.

• Ajay River: Originates on a small hill in Munger district of Bihar, forms the border between Bardhaman District of West Bengal & Jharkhand. It’s main tributaries are Pathro and Jayanti

• Mayurakshi: Rises from Trikut Pahar in Deoghar district, flows across Godda, Deoghar, Dumka and Sahebganj districts. There is Massanjore Dam across this river at 30 km NE of Dumka

• Bansloi: River: Originates in Bans Hills in Sahebganj distt, flows through Pakur distt and eventually flows into Bhagirathi.

3.3.4.2 North Flowing Rivers:

• Kiul River: The Kiul originates from the Tisri Hill Range in Giridih district. It first flows through Jamui and Lakhisarai districts. It falls into the Ganges near Surajgarha.

• Lilajan River: The Lilajan originates north of Simaria in Chatra district on the Hazaribagh plateau, south of Gaya it unites with the Mohana River to form Falgu River.

• Punpun River: It originates in Palamu district at an elevation of 300 metres, flows in a north-east direction through Chatra, Aurangabad, Gaya and Patna districts and joins the Ganges at Fatuha.

3.3.4.3 South East Flowing Rivers:

Baitarani River: The Baitarani originates from the Guptaganga hills in Gonasika of Keonjhar district in Orissa. The beginning portion of Baitarani acts as the boundary between Orissa and Jharkhand. A major portion of the river basin lies within the state of Orissa while a small patch of the upper reach lies in Jharkhand state.

Singhbhum

D i s s e c t e d R e g i o n R a n c h i P l a t e a u 2 0 0 0'

1250' 250'

Dam

odar

Val

ley

Haz

arib

agh

Pla

teau

Dis

sect

ed b

elt

Kod

erm

a

Dis

sect

ed b

elt

Page | 34


3.3.5 Geological History of Jharkhand

The Older Metamorphics of Singhbhum region is believed to be the oldest rock exposed in the state constituting the basement of the Iron Ore Series. The Older Metamorphic Group Orogenic Cycle continued to operate till 3000 Ma whereas the Iron Ore Orogeny Cycle continued up to 2000 Ma in the Southern Singhbhum. The Singhbhum Orogeny continued up to 905-934 Ma in the Northern Singhbhum. The low and high grade facies rocks in the Northern Singhbhum are the strtigraphic equivalent and their juxtaposition had been brought about by the Singhbhum Thrust. The end of Iron Ore Orogeny was marked by intrusion of Singhbhum Granite, polyphase deformation and metamorphism in the Northern Singhbhum. This phase of polyphase deformation, metamorphism and igneous intrusion culminated in upliftment of the Precambrian rocks of the state. This resulted in to development of a stable and cratonized Precambrian terrain. This was followed by a prolonged period of denudation and sedimentation. A number of sedimentary groups have formed during this period. The Kolhan Group and the Vindhyan Group are such examples in South Singhbhum and in Garhwa districts respectively. After this there was a big pause in the geological history of the state. At the end of the Palaeozoic era, i.e. towards the Upper Carboniferous a new series of changes took place manifested by gravity block faulting of the Chhotanagpur Granite Gneiss terrain. This resulted in development of a number of basins in which deposition of sediments in glacial condition (Talchir), fluvial and lacustrine conditions with intercalated plant remains (Damudas), flood plains and shallow lakes (Panchets) and arid condition (Mahadevas) took place. The post-Panchet and pre-Mahadeva period witnessed transverse faulting in the Gondwana basin. After this the crust of the earth is appeared to have experienced regional tension resulting in outpouring of vast quantity of basaltic lava and volcanic material forming Rajmahal Traps. After the Rajmahal period, the Jharkhand region did not experience any major geological activity. A number of eminent Geoscientists have contributed significantly in exploring the geology of Jharkhand. H. W. Voysey, Lieut. Tickells, Col. J. C. Haudhton, Emil Stoeher and V. Ball were amongst the earliest workers to have worked in the region between 1844-1868. The work of Sri P. N. Bose led to the discovery of Gorumahisani iron ore deposit which eventually gave birth to the first iron ore company TISCO in 1904. H. C Jones (1918-1932), J. A. Dunn (1940) and Dunn and Day (1942) were the pioneer workers who had done the regional geological mapping of Singhbhum and surrounding region. Detail geological work in the region was done by Holmes, Sarkar and Saha. 3.3.6 Geology and Mineral Resources

Jharkhand state a part of the Indian Peninsular Shield is a stable cratonic block of the earth’s crust. Jharkhand is known for its diversified geological set up. The whole of Singhbhum region is considered as a natural geological museum. Geologically, Jharkhand consists of different types of rock formations ranging from Pre-Cambrian to Cenozoic era. The most predominant hard rocks in the state comprise of the Archaean metamorphics with associated intrusives and sedimentaries belonging to Vindhyan and Gondwana Super Group with associated igneous rocks. The Raj Mahal hills, lying in the north-eastern extremity of the Chotanagpur Plateau consists of Jurassic volcanic lava flows. The Archaean metamorphics occur in East and West Singhbhum, Ranchi, Gumla, Lohardaga, Palamu, Giridih, Hazaribagh, Chatra, Ramgarh, Dhanbad, Godda, Deoghar and Dumka districts. They are represented by various types of Schists, Gneisses, Granulities, Quartzites, Meta basics and other basic intrusives and Granites. The Archaean formation of West Singhbhum district possesses the iron bearing Iron Ore Group. The Vindhyans comprising chiefly of Khenjua-shales, Procelanite, Limestone and Sandstones occupy a small area in the north-western part of Garhwa district. The Gondwanas are represented by alteration of agrillaceous and arenaceous sediment & intervened with numerous coal seams. They are located in Palamu, Ranchi, Hazaribagh, Bokaro, Chatra, Dumka, Giridih, Dhanbad and Godda districts.

Page | 35


Box-3 Singhbhum Shear Zone:

The most spectacular structural element of the Singhbhum Craton in the southern part of the state is a 1-10 km wide and over 160 km long arcuate belt of shear zone called Singhbhum Shear Zone (SSZ). It separates the North Singhbhum Mobile Belt in the north from the Iron Ore Group and the Singhbhum Granite in the south. The SSZ consists of a number of thrust planes with variable upward displacement of the northern block. A number of cross faults are also known to have displaced the shear zone.

The SSZ is host to mineral occurrences of economic importance. This belt hosts several copper, uranium and apatite-magnetite and several other deposits. Besides these, nickel, gold, molybdenum, silver, tellurium and selenium are also extracted as by-products from the copper and uranium ores. The mineralized sections are Baharagora, Badia-Mosabani, Pathargarah-Surda, Kendadih-Chapri, Roam-Rakha Mines-Tamapahar, Ramchandra Pahar-Nandup-Turamdih etc.

Structurally the state can be divided into “Southern Singhbhum Province” and “Northern Chotanagpur Province” devided by Tamar – Khatra Fault (TKF) popularly known as the “Northern Singhbhum Shear Zone”. The famous “Singhbhum Thrust Zone” is the store house of several important minerals traversing East Singhbhum, West Singhbhum and Saraikela-Kharsawan district

Jharkhand is one of the richest areas in the whole country, rich in minerals with huge reserves of coal, iron ore, mica, bauxite and limestone and considerable reserves of copper, chromite, asbestos, kyanite, china clay, fire clay, steatite, uranium, manganese, dolomite, tungsten, gold, etc. The distribution of these minerals is mostly localized. Coal is found in the Gondwana rocks of the Damodar basin. The well known coalfields of the area are Raniganj, Jharia, east and west Bokaro, Ramgarh, and south and north Karanpura. If Damodar valley is the repository of coal resources, Singhbhum is a veritable museum of non-fuel minerals with huge deposits of iron ore and sizeable deposits of copper, uranium, chromite, asbestos, kyanite, china clay, manganese, etc. The Kolhan series of iron ore in Singhbhum is one of the richest iron belts in the world. The Singhbhum copper-uranium belt contains the largest deposits of copper and uranium in the country today. The world's largest deposit of high grade kyanite occurs at Lapsa Buru in the Singhbhum shear zone. Mica is an important mineral for whose deposits the Jharkhand area leads all countries in the world. The mica belt covering about 3,800 sq km lies in the northern parts of the districts of Hazaribagh and Giridih. Bauxite is found in and around the Pat region in north-west Ranchi district. Thus, Jharkhand area has rich endowments of both metallic and non-metallic minerals.

Table-11 Mineral availability at A Glance Available Mineral Resources in PLENTY China Clay, Fireclay, Magnetite, Graphite, Kyanite, Copper,

Bauxite, Feldspar, Mica & Decorative Stones. Available Mineral Resources SUFFICIENT Coal, Iron Ore, Limestone, Quartz Quartzite, Dolomite,

Pyroxenite Available Mineral Resources INSUFFICIENT andalusite, Manganese, Chromite, Beryl, Talc, Gold, Bentonite

Table-12 Status of Important Mineral Resources of Jharkhand

Sl. No. Mineral Reserve/resource (In Million tonnes)

Available grade

1 COAL (C) * 76711.96 All Grades. 2 HAEMATITE (FeR2R OR3R ) # 4035.74 >58% to 67% of Fe. 3 LIME STONE (Ca Mg)COR3 745.77 Cement to Sub Cement Grade. 4 QUARTZ SILICA SAND (SiOR2R ) 154.76 SiOR2R 96%

2 5 CHINA CLAY (AIR2R OR3R SiOR3R ,2HR2R O) 190.140 Superior Quality (Except Ranchi Deposits)

Page | 36


6 COPPER ORE (Cu,FeSR2R ) 226.08 1.00% to 1.85% Cu (Approx) 7 CBM © 300 Billion m3* 8 BAUXITE (AIR2R OR3R 2HR2R O) 117.54 Al (40.55%) 9 DOLOMITE (CaCOR3R MgCOR3R ) 51.09 Mostly of all aualities

10 KYANITE (AIR2R Si0R5R ) 5.70 Lapsaburu->60% Alumina at other place - 30% to 37%

11 FIRE CLAY 66.80 Good quality 12 GRAPHITE (C) 10.34 Carbon contacts 3.74 to 25% 13 ANDALUSITE (AIR2R Si0R5R ) 4.00 Low grade. 14 APATITE (CaR4R (POR4R )3F) 7.27 9.60% as PR2R OR3 15 MAGNESITE (MgCOR3R ) 2.30 39% Magnesite rest talc.

16

BENTONITE (Al, Mg)R2R (SiR4R OR10R ) (OH)R10R 12HR2R O

0.81

Mostly of all qualities.

17 FELSPAR (KNaCa) NAIR2R OR3R NSiO 1.65 Ceramic Grade. 18 CHROMITE (FeCrR2R OR4R ) 0.73 All Grade. CrR2ROR3R -50% Max 19 ASBESTOS (MGR6R {SiOR10R )OHR8R ) 0.15 0.034 as Chrysotile & 0.362 as amphibole variety. 20 BARYTES (BaSOR4R ) 0.03 0.014 of High Quality in Palamu District.

21

TALC/STEATITE, SOAPSTONE, (Mg R3RSiR4R OR10R )

0.34

N.A.

22 VERMICULITE (Mg Si O ) 0.03 N.A. 23 GOLD (Au) 0.34 N.A. 24 PYROXENITE 30.00 >30%MgO. 34.35% SiOR2R and <1% Chrome. 25 MAGANESE ORE (MnOR4R ) 7.47 High Magnetic Content. 26 MICA HR2R KalR2R (Si0R4R )R2 16,65,130 kg. All Grades. 27 MAGNETITE FeR3R OR4 10.26 High Magnetic Content. 28 OCHRE 0.24 High Grade 29 QUARTZITE 40.23 High to Medium Grade 30 ROCK PHOSPHATE 107.37 Average Grade

* Source: IBM (As on 1.4.2009), # Source: IBM (As on 1.4.2009), © Source: CMPDI (As on 1.4.2009) 3.3.7 Climate

The Chota Nagpur Plateau has an attractive climate. For five or six months of the year, from October onwards the days are sunny and bracing. The mean temperature in December is 73 °F (23 °C). The nights are cool and temperatures in winter may drop below freezing point in many places. In April and May the day temperature may cross 100 °F (38 °C) but it is very dry and not sultry as in the adjacent plains. The rainy season (June to September) is pleasant. The Chota Nagpur Plateau receives an annual average rainfall of around 1400 mm, which is less than the rainforested areas of much of India and almost all of it in the monsoon months between June and August.

3.3.8 Ecology

Jharkhand in the eastwhile Bihar, comprised the southern uplands of the state. The plateau has been defined as the Chota Nagpur dry deciduous forest, a tropical and subtropical dry broadleaf forests ecoregion drier than surrounding areas such as the Eastern Ghats and the Satpura Range that encroach on it to the south. The plateau is covered with a variety of different habitats of which Sal forest is predominant. The plateau is home

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Monsoon

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tropical_and_subtropical_dry_broadleaf_forests

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ecoregion

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Eastern_Ghats

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Satpura_Range

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Shorea_robusta

Page | 37


to the Palamau Tiger Reserve and other large blocks of natural habitat which are among the few remaining refuges left in India for large populations of tiger and Asian Elephants.

Forests range from dry to wet and reach up to 25m tall. The plateau is also swampy in some places and in other parts is covered with bamboo grasslands and shrubs such as Holarrhena and Dodonaea. The flora of the plateau is distinct from the wetter parts of India that surround it and includes a number of endemic plants such as Aglaia haslettiana and endangered plant species including Madhuca longifolia and Butea monosperma.

Tigers, Asian elephants, Four-horned Antelope (Tetracerus quadricornis), blackbuck (Antilope cervicapra), and chinkara (Gazella bennettii), dhole wild dog (Cuon alpinus) and sloth bear (Melursus ursinus) are some of the animals found here while birds include the threatened Lesser Florican(Eupodotis indica), Indian Grey Hornbill and other hornbills.

More than half of the natural forest on the plateau has been cleared for grazing land and the scale of the mining operations on the plateau is disturbing to the movement and therefore the survival of wildlife including elephants and tigers. About 5% of the plateau is protected area the largest of which are Palamau Tiger reserve and Sanjay National Park.

3.3.8.1 Ecologically Sensitive Areas

The ecologically sensitive areas include:

• Drought Prone Districts • Wild Life Sanctuaries • Reserved Forests • National Parks

3.3.8.2 Drought and other Hazards

The State of Jharkhand is prone to the following hazards that affct the ecological balance and environment: • Drought • Mining Accidents • Chemical and Industrial Hazards • Lightning • Bird Flu • Flood • Earthquake • Fire / Forest Fire • Elephant Attacks • Climate Change • Biodiversity loss • Naxalism/ Landmine Blasts

Table-13 Status List of Districts Affected by Hazards of Various Kinds

S.No. Name of Hazards No. of Districts affected Name of the District 1 Drought All the 24 Districts -2010 2 Flood 1 (Sahibgunj) 3 Flash Flood 3 (Jamshedpur , Saraikela , Ranchi) 4 Forest Fire 9 (Garhwa, Palamau, Latehar, Chatra, Hazaribagh, E. &

W. Singhbhum, Simdega,Gumla) 5 Lightening 9 (Palamau, Chatra, Latehar, Koderma, Ranchi, Giridih,

Hazaribagh, Lohardagga, Dumka) 6 Mining Hazards 9 (Latehar, Ramgarh, Dhanbad, Lohardagga, Giridih, E.

& W. Singhbhum,Koderma)

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Palamau_Tiger_Reserve

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tiger

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Asian_Elephant

http://en.wikipedia.org/w/index.php?title=Holarrhena&action=edit&redlink=1

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dodonaea

http://en.wikipedia.org/w/index.php?title=Aglaia_haslettiana&action=edit&redlink=1

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Madhuca_longifolia

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Butea_monosperma

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Four-horned_Antelope

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Blackbuck

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Chinkara

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dhole

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sloth_bear

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Lesser_Florican

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Indian_Grey_Hornbill

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Indian_Grey_Hornbill

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sanjay_National_Park

Page | 38


7 Earthquake Hazard Zone –IV 2 (Godda & Sahibgunj - Partially) Zone –III 15 (Godda , Sahibgunj, Garhwa, Palamau, Chatra,

Hazaribagh, Koderma, Giridih, Bokaro, Dhanbad, Deoghar, Dumka, Godda, Pakur, Jamtara)

Zone – II 7 (Lohardagga, Ranchi, Ramgarh, Khunti, Gumla, E. & W. Singhbhum,)

3.3.8.3 Wild Life Sanctuaries Reserve Forests

Most of the Jharkhand forest, as much as 79% was privately owned until the Zamindari system was abolished under the Bihar Land Reforms Act, 1950. Before acquisition of these Zamindari forests, indiscriminate exploitation of these forests was a common practice. However circumstances changed with time and with greater awareness of the significance of forest cover. Presently the State is having 29.61% of its total land under forest cover. Jharkhand is bestowed with a huge variety of plant and animal species. A panorama of this rich variety of wildlife in Jharkhand is visible in its national parks and zoological gardens. The Betla National Park and the Hazaribagh Wildlife Sanctuary are main wildlife sanctuaries of Jharkhand. Situated 25 km away from Daltonganj, the Betla National Park spreads over an area of around 250 sq. km. In the year 1974, the Betla National Park was declared Project Tiger Reserve. In Betla National Park you can see wildlife such as tigers, elephants, bisons (gaurs), sambars, wildboars, langurs, rhesus, blue bulls, spotted deers, antelopes, rabbits and foxes. The Hazaribagh Wildlife Sanctuary is situated 135 km away from Ranchi and it is set in an ecosystem very much similar to Betla National Park. Apart from these, a Zoological Garden is also located at a distance of 16 km from Ranchi, which houses a number of mammalian species. (a) Hazaribagh wildlife sanctuary

Nestling in low hilly terrain, at an average altitude of 1800 ft. this 183.89 sq. km National Park has an abundance of wild animals like wild Boar, Sambar, Nilgai, Chital, Sloth Bear, tiger and Panthar. The 1970 census has established the presence of 14 tigers, 25 Panthers and 400 Sambars. Hazaribagh means “Thousand tigers”. Hazaribagh is famous for its wildlife sanctuary. The place is situated in the ascending and descending slopes of Chhota Nagpur Plateau. The Hazaribagh Wildlife Sanctuary was established in 1954, is 190 sq km. The Santuary is vying for a place in the international heritage list for its recent findings of rock paintings, caves, Stone Age tools and smelted iron slag that show a much early advent of the Iron Age than the theorized Chalcolithic age. Wild boar, sambar, nilgai, cheetal, and kakar can be sighted near waterholes at dusk here.. The sanctuary is home to animals like wild boar, nilgai and leopard. The sanctuary the the dense forest is safe place for birds to live. The Best Season to visit the sanctuary is from October to March as the climate is pleasant at that time. Prior permission from the divisional forest officer (west division) is required to enter the sanctuary. Canari Hill is 5 km and can be visited by Cycle Rickshaws available from the Hazaribagh town.

(b) Palamau National park The Palamau National Park is located in the western part of the Chotanagpur plateau. The park is spread over a core area of 250 square kilometers and is also known as the Betla National Park. The Palamau National Park was brought under Project Tiger in the year 1973. It is among the first nine Tiger Reserves of the country. The core area of the park was declared as a National Park in September 1989. Best Time to visit the national park is from February-April. (c) Betla National Park Palamau's Betla National Park offers a fascinating study of wild life in natural surroundings studded with forests, hills and valleys. The national park has a large variety of wild life. Once Betla had 2 tigers, 50 elephants, 800 sambhars, hundreds of wild boar and pythons as big as 15 to 20 feet. Most popular are the spotted deer seen moving in herds. The most coveted sight is a majestic gaur popularly known as bison. The elephants are also seen in the region. The other mammalian fauna to be seen at Betla include langur, rhesus,

Page | 39


cheetal (spotted deer), blue bulls and wild boars. The lesser mammals are the porcupine hare junglee cat, honey badger, jackal, malabar giant squirrel and mangoose wolf, antelope etc. The park was declared in 1974 a tiger project reserve.

(d) Dalma Wildlife Sanctuary Dalma Mountain Range is at an altitude of 3000 feet. Lurking in the thick cover of its jungle (193 sq. km.) are elephants, barking deer, sloth beer, porcupines, leopard, tigers etc. The steep slope of Dalma is a trekker’s delight. Small hideouts have been made at several places in the sanctuary where one can see wilds animals in their natural habitat. A look from the mountaintop at the city is so visually appealing at the night that it looks as if millions stars twinkling. Dalma provides natural air condition to the fuming steel city and is an important source of fresh oxygen to the citizens. Late Sanjay Gandhi inaugurated the sanctuary in 1975. On the mountaintop are the guesthouse of Tata Steel and Forest Department.

(e) Palamau tiger reserve The Palamau Tiger Reserve lies in the western part of the Chhotanagpur plateau. The forest stretches from the edge of the Netarhat hill range in the south to the Auranga River in the north and from the Latehar-Sarju road in the east to Madhya Pradesh border in the west. The forest of Palamau is the catchment of the river North Koel. Flora includes Shorea robusta, Acacia catechu, and Butea monosperma, Madhuca indica, Terminalia tomentosa, Pterocarpus marsupium, Adina cardifolia, Anogeisus latifolia, Indigofera pulchela, Moghania spp, Mallotus phillipinensis, Holarrhena antidysentrica, Bothriochloa Montana, Apluda mutica and many others. Fauna includes Tiger, Leopard, Cheetal, Sambar, Barking Deer, Wolf, Wild Dog, Elephant, Mouse Deer, Pangolin, Fourhorned Antelope and Indian Ratel.

(f) Topchanchi wildlife sanctuary This sanctuary is noted for the flow of migratory birds including pochards, red crested pochards and coots. Resident birds include bronze winged jacanas, pond herons, egrets, swamp partridges, etc. The Nagi Dam Sanctuary (1.9sq km) near Jhajha is the smallest sanctuary in the state and also a place to spot migratory birds. Fifteen km from Patna, Danapur is also a significant shelter for migratory birds, especially janghils (open billed storks).

Table-14 Summary of the National Parks and Wild Life Sanctuaries Sl. No.

Name District Legal Status

Year of Notification

Area (Sq. km.)

Principal Wildlife Nearest Rly Station

Nearest Airport

1 Palamau Tiger Reserve, Betla

Latehar NP 1976 1026 Tiger, Leopard, Elephantm,Gaur, Cheetal, Sambhar, Barking Deer, Sloth Bear, Nilgai, Wild Dog, Wolf, Hyaena

Chhipadohar, 12 km

Ranchi, 170 km

2 Hazaribag Wildlife Sanctuary

Hazaribag WLS 1976 186.25 Tiger, Leopard, Elephantm,Cheetal, Barking Deer, Sloth Bear, Nilgai, Wild Boar, Hyaena

Ranchi Road,65 km

Ranchi, 110 km

3 Mahuadanr Wolf Sanctuary

Latehar WLS 1976 63.25 Wolf Spotted Deer, Wild Boar, Hares, Mongoose, Rats, Squirrels, Ground Birds

Chhipadohar, 60 km

Ranchi, 240 km

4 Dalma Wildlife Sanctuary

Singhbhum (East)

WLS 1976 193.22 Elephant Leopard, Mouse Deer, Barking Deer, Wild Boar

Tata Nagar, 12 km

Ranchi, 110 km

Page | 40


5 Topchanchi Wildlife Sanctuary

Dhanbad WLS 1978 8.75 Leopard, Jungle Cat, Cheetal, Barking Deer, Langur, Wild Boar, Mongoose, Jackal, Fox, Wild Dog

Dhanbad, 25 km

Ranchi, 140 km

6 Lawalong Wildlife Sanctuary

Chatra WLS 1978 207 Tiger, Leopard, Cheetal, Barking Deer, Nilgai, Wild Boar, Hyaena, Langur

Chandwa, (Tori) 76 km

Ranchi, 100 km

7 Koderma Wildlife Sanctuary

Koderma WLS 1985 150.62 Tiger, Leopard, Sloth Bear, Sambhar, Cheetal, Barking Deer, Nilgai, Wild Boar, Gaint Squirrel, Jackal, Fox, Hyaena, Langur, Porcupine

Koderma, 10 km

Ranchi, 170 km

8 Parasnath Wildlife Sanctuary

Giridih WLS 1981 49.33 Leopard, Sloth Bear, Sambhar, Cheetal, Barking Deer, Wild Boar, Gaint Squirrel, Hyaena, Langur, Porcupine, Mongoose, Jungle Cat, Monkey

Parasnath, 16 km

Ranchi, 160 km

9 Palkot Wildlife Sanctuary

Gumla WLS 1990 183.18 Leopard, Sloth Bear, Jackal, Monkey, Procupine, Hare, Jungle Fowl, Patridges, Koel, Parakeet, Owl, Pheasants

Ranchi, 115 km Bano 55 km

Ranchi, 115 km

10 Udhwa Lake Birds Sanctuary

Sahebganj WLS 1991 5.65 Gull, Jacana, Teal, Cormorant, Dabchick, Darter, Lapwing, Plover, Wagtail, Egret, Heron, Ibies, Stork, Blue Rock Pigeon, Lark, Bee-eater, Sparrow, Myna (six spp.) Pipit, Bulbul etc. Birds of prey like tern, Brahminy Kite, Fishing Eagle, Hawak and vulture. Others like swift, Swallow, Kingfisher, Drongo, Indian Foller, Parakeet etc.

Sahebganj, 42 km

Ranch/ Patna

11 Gautam Budha Wildlife Sanctuary

Koderma WLS 1976 121.142 Sloth Beer, Sambhar, Cheetal, Barking Deer, Nilgai, Wild Boar, giant Squirrel

Koderma, 60 km

Ranchi

3.4 AGRICULTURE:

Nearly 80% of population in Jharkhand is engaged in agriculture. This implies that agriculture has a very significant role to play in the social and economic realm in this state. The total geographical area of Jharkhand is 79 lakh hectares. The net cultivated area is 22 lakh hectares approx. 23 lakh hectares is covered with forests.

Page | 41


The climate of Jharkhand is moderate and crops like paddy(cultivated on terraced/valley lands), bajra, sugarcane, wheat, pulses, til, maize, oilseeds(niger crop) etc. grow well here. Varieties of vegetables and fruits like tomato, brinjal, ladies finger, cabbage, gourd, mango, litchi, papaya, lemons etc. are available for people to relish. The farmers follow the traditional ways of cultivation and now government efforts have brought in technology in their fields for better yield.

Crop Coverage Area under different crops is: Crop Coverage Rice 16.92 lakh ha Wheat 1.10 lakh ha Maize 2.80 lakh ha Pulses 3.60 lakh ha Fruit 0.42 lakh ha. Vegetables 2.25 lakh ha Cropping Intensity is 117%, per capita net sown area (0.083hectare) is quite low in relation to the per capita land holding (0.14 ha approx.) in the State. All these factors converge into a vicious circle of low agricultural productivity, low farm income, low investment, low capital formation & subsequently stagnant rural economy. Contribution of Agriculture to GSDP is 11%. 3.4.1 Agriculture and Land Holdings:

• 83% of the land holdings belong to small and marginal farmers. Less than 1% of holdings are above 10 hectares which covers 9% of cultivable area. Agricultural operations are primarily of subsistence type due to the adverse land: man ratio.

• There is predominance of cereal crops in the state. About 92% cropped area is covered under food grains and hardly 3-5% area is under cash crops. 40% of the total cropped area remains largely mono-cropped under rice. Lack of diversity in the cropping pattern makes the farmers more vulnerable to any downward deviation in rainfall.

• Agricultural operations are not profitable because they are primarily of subsistence type due to large number of fragmented holdings.

• Large tracts of land are left uncultivated by poor farmers due to lack of capital. They have little or no resources of their own to provide for high cost of inputs needed to increase agricultural productivity. The institutional credit flow to the agriculture sector is negligible and agricultural extension activities are minimal.

• 49% of the soils have high concentration of toxicity. Therefore the productivity of soil is very low. • Agriculture is basically dependent on rain. • The State does not have a perennial river system. All rivers in the State are seasonal. They receive

water during monsoon. 80% of the rainfall is received during the monsoon months (June to Sept.). Due to undulating topography, the water run off rate is very high.

• Inadequate or non-existent post harvest management infrastructure at farm level, lack of price incentives, low access to credit and high transaction cost involved in institutional credit are some of the reasons which have affected productivity.

• All these factors converge into a vicious circle of low agricultural productivity, low farm income, low investment, low capital formation & subsequently stagnant rural economy. Contribution of Agriculture to GSDP is less than 10% though a large population (approx. 60%) depends on it for livelihood support.

3.4.2 Soils

Soil content of Jharkhand state mainly consist of soil formed from disintegration of rocks and stones, and soil composition is further divided into:

1. Red soil, found mostly in the Damodar valley, and Rajmahal area

Page | 42


2. Micacious soil (containing particles of mica), found in Koderma, Jhumeritilaiya, Barkagaon, and areas around the Mandar hill

3. Sandy soil, generally found in Hazaribagh and Dhanbad 4. Black soil, found in Rajmahal area 5. Laterite soil, found in western part of Ranchi, Palamu, and parts of Santhal Parganas and Singhbhum

3.4.3 Landuse Pattern

The pattern of use of land in Jharkhand has been shown in the table below:

Table-15

S.N. Category Areas in Lakh Hectare Areas in Percentage

1 Cultivable Area

29.74 37.30%

2 Forest Area 23.92 30.00% 3 Waterbodies 1.59 2.00% 4 Waste Land 7.17 9.00% 5 Scrub forest 4.38 5.50% 6 Builtup Area 3.99 5.00% 7 Other 8.93 11.20%

Total 79.72 100.00% (Source: http://wrdjharkhand.nic.in/land_pattern_state.html)

Page | 43


3.5 WATER RESOURCES IN JHARKHAND – An Introduction

Water resources available in Jharkhand and in the selected districts are:

• Dug wells • Hand pump • Tube wells • Rivers • Dams • Infiltration structures • Other wetlands: Reservoirs/ Ponds/

lakes Details of the quality of water from various sources have been discussed earlier in the. The types of problems encountered in respect of quality of water or extraction of water or otherwise the human environments are:

• Occurrence of iron beyond permissible limits • Occurrence of fluoride beyond permissible limits • Occurrence of arsenic beyond permissible limits • Occurrence of turbidity beyond permissible limits • Occurrence of nitrates beyond permissible limits • Occurrence of manganese and zinc beyond permissible limits • Occurrence of radioactivity • Occurrence of biological pollution • Short life of hand pumps and tube wells because of lowering of discharge • Failure of tube wells because of absence of water bearing strata • Failure of tube wells because of caving in of assembly

3.5.1 Status of Surface Water In Jharkhand

River system in Jharkhand is the principal resource of surface water other than rain water. One of the most important features of the river system in the state is the dominant role of Ganga, which provides water for day to day use by habitants, for drinking purposes, irrigation, industry, commercial uses and recharge the underground water. 3.5.1.1 Major Streams of Jharkhand

3.5.1.1.1 Brahmani River System

The numerous subsidiaries divides radiating from the Palamu-Ranchi uplands give rise to a landscape, when then on a large number of small but youthful independent river basins, the main streams emerging from which either merge to form large more mature river or themselves mature as they reach the plains. Along the southern slopes are the Sankh and south Koel river system cutting back deeply into the central upland and emerging out and joining to form the Brahmani River.

3.5.1.1.2 Subarnarekha River System

The Subarnrekha emerges from the eastern slopes near Nagari (Ranchi upland) and has more or less southeasterly course. Enlarged by several tributaries it directly drains into the Bay of Bengal, east of Balasore. It is the largest river in Jharkhand.

Page | 44


The Subarnrekha River flows eastwards upto Muri flowing down the Hirni, Dasam, Johna and Hundru falls. It then takes a sharp turn to the south and flows into the gap between the Bhagmundi hills on the east and the Ranchi uplanlds in the west. South of Chandil the river cuts through the Dalma range and turns south east and flows along the valley between the Dama and Dhanjori range towards Baharagora. Here it leaves the state, meanders eastward. Sapghara, Gurma, Bhagalduba, Dimnajhore, the Garra, Sanjal, the Karkai are tributaries of river Subarnrekha. 3.5.1.1.3 Damodar River system

It rises from the eastern slope of the Balumath divides, east of Latehar near a place called Chulhapani in near the boundary of Lohardaga and Latehar districts. Later on the downstream it is joined by the Bakaro, Kunar, and Jamunia and Barakar rivers in its eastward course. It reaches by and large at mature stage before passing the state boundary. At Asansole the Damodar turns south east and enters the Bengal alluvial basin. Before the year 1770 the Damodar used to drain into the Hoogly, some 63 km north of Kolkatta. Since 1770 it joins the Hoogly some 65 km south of Kolkatta. This change in the course is characteristic that the river shares with the drainage of the Gangetic plains. 3.5.1.1.4 Amanat and Anuranga River systems

Emerging from the Western flanks of the Balumath high, north east of Lohardaga are the west flowing Amanat and Auranga rivers which join the noth flowing North Koel and drain into the Sone. The east flowing Damodar and the west flowing Amanat-Auranga system thus separated by the Balumath high drain the east west trending Gondwana coal basins and have a distant ancestry. 3.5.1.1.5 Barakar Ajoy and Mayurakshi Rivers

The region between the northern slopes of Hazaribagh plateau and the Kodarma-Rajmahal divides are drain by the Barakar, Ajoy and Mayurakshi rivers which flow to the south east through the Santal Pargana plains. Dwaraka, Brahmani, Pagala, Gumani, Chandan and Chira rivers:- These rivers have originated from Rajmahal plateau. Dwaraka, Brahmini, Pagala and Gumani drain down the Rajmahal plateau towards eastward slop. The western slopes of the Rajmahal ridge are drained by the Chandan and Chira rivers. 3.5.1.1.6 Wetlands of Jharkhand

The important wetlands of Jharkhand are Udhwa lake bird sanctuary, Getalsud Kansjor dam, Konar dam, Tilaiya dam, Massanjore dam, Maithon dam and Tenughat dam. 3.5.1.1.7 Major Wetland Types of Jharkhand

Major wetland types observed in the state are River/Stream, Reservoirs, Tanks/ Ponds, Lakes, Riverine wetlands, Waterlogged-Natural, Ox-bow Lakes, Waterlogged-Man-Made and Aquaculture Ponds.

Table-16 Area Estimates of Wetlands in Jharkhand

Sr. No. Wet code No.

Wetland Category Number of Wetlands

Total Wetland Area (Ha)

% of wetland area

Open Water (Sq km) Post- monsoon area

Pre- monsoon area

1100 Inland Wetlands - Natural

1 1101 Lakes/Ponds 16 3204 1.88 1343 385 2 1102 Ox-bow lakes/ Cut-off 18 83 0.05 71 70

Page | 45


Sr. No. Wet code No.

Wetland Category Number of Wetlands

Total Wetland Area (Ha)

% of wetland area

Open Water (Sq km) Post- monsoon area

Pre- monsoon area

meanders 3 1103 High altitude

wetlands - - - - -

4 1104 Riverine wetlands 42 1629 0.96 781 552 5 1105 Waterlogged 58 231 0.14 231 16 6 1106 River/Stream 344 97743 57.48 97743 63442

1200 Inland Wetlands -Man-made 7 1201 Reservoirs/Barrages 1062 48177 28.33 47386 34476 8 1202 Tanks/Ponds 910 5688 3.34 5266 4241 9 1203 Waterlogged 11 61 0.04 50 35

10 1204 Salt pans 2 8 0.00 8 8 Sub-Total 2463 156824 92.22 152879 103225 Wetlands (<2.25 ha) 13227 13227 7.78 - - Total 15690 170051 100.00 152879 103225 Area under Aquatic Vegetation

3437 7244 (Ha)

Area under turbidity levels

Low 21014 12774 (Ha) Moderate 88410 64127 (Ha) High 43455 26324 (Ha) 3.5.1.1.8 District-Wise Wetland (Maps and) Statistics

The state has 22 districts. Pashchimi Sighbhum district ranks first in terms of area (18939 ha) followed by Sahibganj (16118 ha) and others. In terms of per cent area under wetlands of total wetland extent, Pashchimi Sighbhum also ranks first (11 %). Interestingly, 50 % of the wetland area is concentrated in five districts i.e. Ranchi (9 %), Dumka (9 %), Palamu (10 %), Sahibganj (9 %) and Pashchimi Sighbhum (11 %) and rest of the wetlands are distributed in the remaining 13 districts. In terms of per cent area of wetlands of the geographical area of the districts, the wetlands account for about 2.1 %. Jharkhand state has shown a significant reduction in the extent of open water from post-monsoon (152879ha) to pre- monsoon (103225 ha), which amounts to approximately 35 %. Minimum seasonal variation (11 %) in open water extent is observed in Sahibganj district while maximum in Lohardaga (69 %). On an average the state has shown a decrease of 35 % of open water extent. District-wise wetland area estimates is given in table below.

Table-17 District-Wise Wetland Area

Sr. No. District Total Geographical

area (Ha)

Wetland area (ha)

% of wetland

area

% of geographical

area

Open Water

Post- monsoon

(2006)

Pre- monsoon

(2007) 1 Garhwa* 4044 9362 6 0.12 9052 5073

2 Palamu* 8705 16348 10 0.21 14948 7781

3 Chatra 3706 5253 3 0.07 4751 2117

Page | 46


Sr. No. District Total Geographical

area (Ha)

Wetland area (ha)

% of wetland

area

% of geographical

area

Open Water

Post- monsoon

(2006)

Pre- monsoon

(2007) 4 Hazaribagh 6147 11307 7 0.14 10635 5896

5 Kodarma 1312 3160 2 0.04 2971 1382

6 Giridih 4975 7845 5 0.10 7021 3839

7 Deoghar 2479 4046 2 0.05 3661 3008

8 Godda 2110 2445 1 0.03 2028 1475

9 Sahibganj 1599 16118 9 0.20 12979 11504

10 Pakur 1806 2734 2 0.03 2047 1463

11 Dumka* 6212 15824 9 0.20 14939 11659

12 Dhanbad 2052 9438 6 0.12 8296 6108

13 Bokaro 2861 11222 7 0.14 9800 8621

14 Ranchi 7698 14728 9 0.18 13709 10165

15 Lohardaga 1491 2110 1 0.03 1809 568

16 Gumla 9077 12423 7 0.16 11729 6147

17 Pashchimi Singhbhum 9907 18939 11 0.24 16732 12354

18 Purbi Singhbhum* 3533 6749 4 0.08 5772 4065

Total 79714 170051 100 2.13 152879 103225

* Tentative Proposed Project Districts 3.5.1.1.9 Important Wetlands of Jharkhand

Udhwa lake (Bird Sanctuary), Getalsud, Tenughat, Panchet, Konar, Tilaiya, Maithon, Masanjore, Malay, Kansjore, and Hatia reservoirs are most important wetland areas of Jharkhand state. Extensive field work was carried out for these wetland areas. Wetland maps have been prepared for 5km buffer area of each wetland sites.

Udhuwa lake Bird Sanctuary which is the single Bird Sanctuary of Jharkhand State is situated at about 42 km from Sahibgunj. It is situated on the bank of the Ganges about 10 kms southeast of Rajmahal. Two water bodies, namely Pataura and Barhale constitute the 5.65 km2 Udhuwa lake bird sanctuary. Pataura Lake is perennial and the average depth is about 2 meter. (Kumar et al, 2004)

Damodar River comprises five reservoirs (Konar, Tilaiya, Maithon, Panchet, and Durgapur) at different stretches to store the rain water and protect the lower valley from floods. Out of five major reservoirs, Tenughat and Panchet are located on Damodar River, Tilaiya and Maithon on Barakar and one on Konar River, a tributary of Damodar River. Tenughat reservoir is mainly constructed to meet the water requirements of Bokaro Steel Plant while Durgapur barrage was constructed on Damodar River to meet the irrigation water requirements of West Bengal. Some important lakes also exist to provide surface water for drinking and industrial purposes out of which Topchanchi and Nalkari lakes are prominent. Topchanchi Lake serves as source of drinking water for Jharia coalfields whereas water from Nalkari is used for Patratu Thermal Power Plant.

Getalsud reservoir is located at 23° 27' N and 85° 33' E, across the river Subarnarekha, 40 km east of Ranchi River Subarnarekha, the main source of inflow, originates at Nagari, in the Chhotanagpur plateau of Jharkhand, about 50 km upstream of Getlasud dam. Konar dam is situated in the Hazaribagh district. The inflowing river

Page | 47


Konar is a seasonal stream joining the river Damodar. Tilaiya dam is constructed across the river Barakar which is rising from the hilly forests of Hazaribagh district, at an elevation of 610 m.

Tenughat Reservoir is situated near Tenu village about 8 miles west to the Bokaro thermal power station in Giridih district of Jharkhand State. It was constructed on Damodar river in the year 1971, to utilize the water resources of river in Damodar and its tributaries to fulfill the needs of Bokaro thermal power station, steel plant and its employees.

Masanjore dam (also known as Canada dam) was constructed on the river Mayurakshi. The dam was constructed with two primary objectives (a) to generate hydro-electricity and (b) to facilitate irrigation in Jharkhand and West Bengal.

a. Udhwa Lake ( Bird Sanctuary)

1 Name : Udhwa Lake ( Bird Sanctuary)

2

Location: 87° 48' 55.500" E, 24° 58' 6.400" N Sahibganj known as “Udhwa lake bird sanctuary” in the year 1991. The Sanctuary is situated at about 42 km from Sahibganj. It is situated on the bank of the Ganga about 10 kms southeast of Rajmahal. Two water bodies, namely Pataura and Barhale institute the 5.65 km2 Udhwa lake bird Sanctuary.

3 Area: 1605 ha 4 Wetland type : Lake (Bird Sanctuary)

5

Flora: The lake is infested with aquatic macrophytes comprising emergent, free floating and submerged forms. Water hyacinth was found to be the dominant form. Over all 50% of the lake surface was covered with aquatic weeds.

6

Fauna: It is a home to a variety of birds including different mynas, brahminy kites, Cattel Egret, Pond Heron, Purple Heron, Egret , Open Billed stock, White Ibis, Dab chick or little Grebe, fishing eagles, hose swifts and palm swifts flying at dizzying speeds. A speciality of the sanctuary is Siberian birds flocking from different parts of the world.

7 Major fish species: Udhwa lake seems to be rich in fish and fish spawn.Some common fishes of the lake are Rohu(Labeo rohita), Catla (Catla catla) , Tengra,(Mystus cavasius) Bata(L. bata), reba(C. retra) , Mirka (Cirrihinus mrigala) etc.

b. Getalsud Reservoir

Name : Getalsud 1 Location : 85°31'17.874"E,

23°26'38.601"N Getalsud reservoir is situated in 40 km east of Ranchi city.

2 Name of the River: Subernarekha 3 Area: 2302 ha 4 Wetland type : Reservoir 5 Average Annual Rainfall : 100 to 1198 cm 6 Plankton: Diatoms have the maximum species diversity, followed by Chlorophyceae and blue- greens.

Desmids and Dinophyceae (Ceratium sp.) are also present. Zooplankton is represented by 12 genera of rotifers, 6 of protozoa, 5 cladocerans and 2 of copepods.

7 Fauna: Fish, insects and algae are a rich source of food for migratory birds, notable among which are Little Grebe, Bank Myna, Pied Myna, Common Crane, Cattle Egret, Tufted Pochard , Cotton Teal, Shoveller, Little Grebe, Palm Swift etc

Page | 48


8 Major fish Species: Rohu( L. Rohita), Catla (Catla catla), Mirka (Cirrhinus mrigala),Reba (Cirrhinus reba) etc.

9 Soil Type: The bottom soil is acidic and poor in organic carbon (0.46 to 0.60 %). Available phosphorus and nitrogen are present in modest quantities (2.45 to 6.08 mg 100 g-1 and 24.38 to 35.06 mg 100 g-1). The morphometric and edaphic indicators of productivity and the estimates on the standing crop send conflicting signals on the status of the water body.

10 Benthic fauna: Bottom substrate in the lotic sector is soft and rich in organic matter, comprising decaying vegetation, but during monsoons, silt deposition is reported to blanket the organic matter. Density of benthic organisms is high in the lotic sector, their number attenuating towards the lentic sector.

c. Tilaiya Reservoir

Name: Tilaiya 1 Location : 85°25'56.201"E 24°20'38.8"N

Tilaiya Dam is situated in Hazaribagh district 2 Name of the River: Barakar 3 Area: 4865 ha 4 Wetland type : Reservoir 5 Average Annual Rainfall : 127 cm. 6 Major Fish Species: The major fish species were Catla (Catla catla), Mirka (Cirrhinus mrigala),

Labeo calbasu, Rohu (L.rohita), Bata (L.bata), L. dyocheilus,Puntius sarana, Cyprinus carpio, Notopterus notopterus and Ompok bimaculatus etc.

7 Soil Characteristics: The bottom soil is acidic (pH 5.6 to 5.9) and silty clay loam with low organic carbon (0.31 to 0.50%) and available phosphorus (3.0 mg P2O5 100 g-1). Organic nitrogen is in medium productivity range (0.073 to 0.101%). Water is rich in ionic concentration. Alkalinity (53.5 mg 1-1) and specific conductivity (98.7 to 211 μmhos) are indicative of the the reservoir's proclivity to good organic productivity. Values of nitrate (0.25 mg 1-1) and phosphate (0.03 mg 1-1) are satisfactory. Gross primary productivity is estimated at 199 to 300 mg C m3 day-1.

d. Konar Reservoir

Name : Konar 1 Location : 85°45'50.731"E 23°55'50.85"N Konar Dam is situated in Hazaribagh district. 2 Name of the River: Konar 3 Area: 2149ha 4 Wetland type : Reservoir 5 Plankton: The plankton in Konar is characterised by a poor species diversity and an overwhelming

dominance of Microcystis aeruginosa and Diaptomus sp. among the phyto- and zooplankton respectively. 6 Major fish: The constituent species were Catla (Catla catla), Mirka (Cirrhinus mrigala), Labeo calbasu,

Rohu (L. rohita), Bata (L. bata), L. dyocheilus, Puntius sarana, Cyprinus carpio, Notopterus notopterus and Ompok bimaculatus etc.

7 Ionic Concentration: Konar is the richest in ionic concentration. The total alkalinity varies in the range of 43.5 to 83.0 mg 1-1 and specific conductivity within 81.20 to 147.6μmos during different seasons of the year.

8 Soil Type: Basin soil of Konar reservoir is organic carbon. The concentration of available phosphorus is a low 1.2 to 8.0 mg P2O4 100 g-1. Organic nitrogen of 0.069 to 0.101% is medium to high and pH of soil is acidic (5.4 to 6.0).

Page | 49


e. Tenughat Reservoir

Name : Tenughat

1 Location : 85°50'1.091" E 23°43'51.677" N Tenughat Dam is situated in Bokaro district.

2 Name of the river: Damodar 3 Area: 3814 ha 4 Wetland type : Reservoir 5 Average Annual Rainfall: 1320mm 6 Plankton: In the Reservoir free floating phytoplanktons and zooplanktons were having a good growth.

The phytoplanktons found in the reservoir were Spirogyra, Chlamydomonas lemna, Ajola, Hydrilla, Vacillinaria,Chara, and potamojiton. This vegetation was good food for major craps.

7 Major Fish Species: Catla (C. catla), Mirka (C. mrigala), Rohu (L. rohita), L. calbasu, Bata(L. bata), C. carpio ,P. sarana, M. aor, W. attu, B. bagarius etc.

8 Irrigation: Considering the necessity of irrigation in the region, cultivable land between Tenu-Bokaro canal and river Damodar is being irrigated. Only an area of 800 hectares is being irrigated now.

f. Massanjor Reservoir

Name : Massanjor 1 Location : 87°18’39.3”E, 24°6’29.9”N

Masanjore reservoir is situated in Dumka District of Jharkhand. 2 Name of the River: Mayurakshi 3 Area: 5027 4 Wetland type : Reservoir 5 Average Annual Rainfall : 1447mm 6 Plankton: Agmenellum sp., Anabena sp. Ceratophyllum sp., Dentella sp. Diatomella sp. 7 Major Fish Species: W. attu, C. catla, N. chitala, H. fossilus, Papda, C.mirgala, L. rohita , M.aor etc. 8 Major Functions: To generate hydro- electricity and to facilitate irrigation in Jharkhand and West

Bengal. 9 Major Weeds found were: Ipomia aquatica, Myriophyllum, Limnathemu, Potamogetan, Hydrilla and

Ceratophyllum. 3.5.2 Status of Ground Water Hydrogeology

Area (Sq.km) 79,714 Rainfall (mm) 917 Total Districts 24 Sub- Divisions 36 Blocks 259

The state is underlain by variety of rock formations from Pre-Cambrian to recent age. A major part of the state is underlain by formations comprising of granites, granite gneisses, meta- sedimentaries and a variety of volcanic rocks. The volcanic formation represented by Rajmahal traps are exposed as patches in a linear fashion in the north-eastern part. The sediments belonging to Vindhayan system are seen exposed in the north- western part of the state. The lateritic capping is invariably seen in the south western part. Recent alluvial formations are mostly confined to the valleys along major rivers of the state. The ground water exploration has revealed presence of 3 to 4 potential fractured zones at variable levels within a depth of 200

Page | 50


m from the ground level. The discharge of the exploratory wells is highly variable ranging between 3.6 to 54 mP

3P/hr. In some of the pockets higher discharge wells has also been constructed.

Table-18

Dynamic Ground Water Resources Annual Replenishable Ground water Resource 5.58 BCM Net Annual Ground Water Availability 5.25 BCM Annual Ground Water Draft 1.06 BCM Stage of Ground Water Development 20 % Ground Water Development & Management Over Exploited NIL Critical NIL Semi- critical NIL Ground Water User Maps 22 districts Artificial Recharge to Ground Water (AR) • Area identified for AR: 2450

• Quantity of Surface Water to be Recharged: 546 MCM

• Feasible AR structures: 500 Nala Bunds, 336 Revival of Kandi Ponds, RWH in Urban Areas for 1.5 Lakhs houses.

Ground Water Quality Problems Contaminants Districts affected (in part) Fluoride (>1.5 mg/l) Bokaro, Giridih, Godda, Gumla, Palamu, Ranchi Iron (>1.0 mg/l) Chatra, Deoghar, East Singhbhum, Giridih, Ranchi,

West Singhbhum Nitrate (>45 mg/l) Chatra, Garhwa, Godda, Gumla, Lohardega, Pakur,

Palamu, Paschimi Singhbhum, Purbi Singhbhum, Ranchi, Sahibganj

3.5.3 District Wise Status of Ground Water

3.5.3.1 Availability and Quality

Data on quality of water of some selected districts of Jharkhand is available with the Central Ground Water Board and a summary of this data is presented in Table 19:

Page | 51


Table-19 Status of Ground Water in Selected Districts of Jharkhand: Summary (Source: CGWB)

S no District Geographical Area (Sq km.)

Population (As on 2001 Census)

Average Annual Rainfall (mm)

Major Drainages Forest area:

GROUND WATWER QUALITY

Type of Water

GW dev. %

Number of Over Exploited Blocks

No. of Critical Blocks

No. of Blocks notified

MAJOR GROUND WATER PROBLEMS AND ISSUES

FOREST COVER %

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 Bokaro 2861 1777662 1198 Damodar, Konar and

Bokaro 722.3 Potable Alkaline 16% NIL NIL NIL Fluoride, Iron, Mn, Zn, above

desirable limit around Industrial area.

25.25

2 Deoghar 2479 1165000 1162 River Ajay and its tributaries viz Bhagdura, Partho, Dama, and Jayanti

346.3 Potable 23% NIL NIL NIL Iron concentration above permissible limit (1 mg/l) in Palajori and Sarawan block

13.97

3 Dhanbad 2041.6 2393423 1241 Damodar and Barakar

189.3 Potable

Calcium Bicarbonate type

18%

NIL NIL NIL 1. Sporadic nitrate occurrence at few places and Fluoride value above permissible limit at Mahuda More (2.1ppm) hand pump 2. Lowering of water table near active colliery mining areas. .

9.27

4 Garhwa* 4044.1 1035464 1193 North Koel, Banki, Son and Dhorara

1911.5 Potable Slightly Alkaline

29.42% NIL NIL NIL Fluoride 47.27

5 Godda 2110 1047000 1063.1 Ganga,Kajhia, Harna, Sunder Sapin, Kao, Cheer and Geura Rivers

313.7 41% Nil Nil Nil Fluoride and Nitrate above permissible limit in patches

14.87

6 Hazaribagh 6046 2277475 1234 Barakar, Konar, Bokaro and Damodar

2566 Potable Ca - HCO3 Type

28% Nil Nil Nil Low discharge of bore wells in Gondwana Formations

42.44

Page | 52


7 Jamtara 1791.7 653081 1293.7 Brahmani, Mayurakshi, Ajoy and their tributaries

302 Potable 16% Nil Nil Nil 16.86

8 Koderma 1500 499403 1192 Barakar and Sakri 552.3 Calcium-Magnesium bicarbonate

20% NIL NIL NIL FLUORIDE PROBLEM IN KODERMA & SATGAWAN BLOCK

36.82

9 Pakur 1805 701616 1399 Damro. Torai, Bansloi and Tripti.

207.9 Good Potable 13.17% Nil Nil Nil Fluoride concentration found more than permissible limit in some of the villages

11.52

10 Palamu* 5246.8 16 00000 1163.4 Koel, Auranga and Amanat

2268.5 3619 Nil Nil Nil Fluoride and Nitrate concentration above permissible limit in patches

43.24

11 Ranchi 7698 27,85,064 1316 Subarnarekha, South koel, Karkari

1591.4 Good Calcium Bicarbonate

24% Nil Nil Nil Declining trend of deeper Aquifers in urban area of Ranchi township Sporadic fluoride contamination in Ormanjhi, Ranchi sadar and Silli blocks

20.67

12 Sahebganj 1600 1575 Ganga, Gumani and Morang

427.4 Good Nil Nil Nil Arsenic occurs more than permissible limits in ground water in some of the villages.

26.71

* Tentative Proposed Project Districts

Page | 53


3.5.3.2 Depth of Water and Discharge

The CGWB has worked on detailed mapping of the occurrence (location) of ground water as well as the yield at different places in the districts of Jharkhand. Scans of some of the maps are given below:

PALAMU: DEPTH OF WATER TABLE

GARHWA: YIELD OF TUBE WELLS

Page | 54


Page | 55


3.5.3.3 Ground Water Maps of the JSAC

Ground water prospect maps, which are digital and employ remote sensing techniques, have also been prepared by the Jharkhand Space Applications Centre (JSAC) at Ranchi. In these maps even village level details are available.

3.5.3.4 Summary

Salient features of the data presented above are as follows:

• There is ample rainfall in all districts: min 1063 mm in Godda to maximum 1575 mm in Sahebganj.

• There is good forest cover in all districts, minimum being 9.27% in Dhanbad to maximum 47.27% in Garhwa

• The stage of development of ground water is amere 13.17% in Pakur to a maximum of 36.19% in Palamu.

• There are no Over Exploited blocks in any district

• There are no Critical blocks in any district

• There are no Notified blocks in any district

• Major ground water problems reported are:

Table-20

1 Bokaro Fluoride, Iron, Mn, Zn, above desirable limit around Industrial area. 2 Deoghar Iron concentration above permissible limit (1 mg/l) in Palajori and

Sarawan block 3 Dhanbad 1. Sporadic nitrate occurrence at few places and Fluoride value above

permissible limit at Mahuda More (2.1ppm) hand pump 2. Lowering of water table near active colliery mining areas..

4 Garhwa* Fluoride 5 Godda Fluoride and Nitrate above permissible limit in patches 6 Hazaribagh Low discharge of bore wells in Gondwana Formations 7 Jamtara 8 Koderma Fluoride Problem In Koderma & Satgawan Block 9 Pakur Fluoride concentration found more than permissible limit in some of the

villages 10 Palamu* Fluoride and Nitrate concentration above permissible limit in patches

11 Ranchi Declining trend of deeper Aquifers in urban area of Ranchi township Sporadic fluoride contamination in Ormanjhi, Ranchi sadar and Silli blocks

12 Sahebganj Arsenic occurs more than permissible limits in ground water in some of the villages.


Page | 56


3.5.4 Drinking Water & Sanitation

3.5.4.1 Rural Water Supply Through Pipe Line

ITEMS SCHEMES (NO) ONGOING SCHEMES

NEW SCHEMES

Rural Water Supply through pipe line 304 279 25 Length of pipe line (metres) 1010120 1035120 75000

3.5.4.2 Urban water supply through pipe line

No of wards covered: 818 No of water towers in the state: 160 Population covered: 3741080 (2001 census) Proposed population covered (2010): 4721134 (2010) 3.5.4.3 Arsenic and Fluoride Treatment

Table-21

Arsenic/Fluoride Villages affected Treatment Area affected Arsenic 27 27 Sahebganj Fluoride 2439

(Through tube wells) 2437 (Through tube wells)

Palamu Division (Medininagar, Garhwa, Latehar)

• For Arsenic Treatment Mega scheme proposed in Sahebganj district • For Floride Treatment Medium & Small scheme proposed in Palamu Division.

3.5.4.4 Coverage & Types of Sources

The distribution of types of drinking water sources over various districts of the state of Jharkhand is as shown in the table on the following page. An abstract is given below: TYPE OF SCHEME NO OF

HABITATIONS OPEN WELL 2043 PWS 9031 HP 70050 SURFACE WATER 194 ROOF TOP 444 OTHERS 11965 TOTAL 93727 It would be seen that even though the coverage is of the order of nearly 79% (93727 out of 119191 habitations) the percentage of coverage by piped water supply is very low, only about 7.6%.

Page | 57


* Tentative Proposed Project Districts (Source: DW & S Dept)

3.5.4.5 Current Water Supply and Treatment Practices

The existing rural water supply schemes essentially have two sources: tube well and river. About 75% schemes are tube well based. The tube well schemes constitute a bore well fitted with a submersible pump. A chlorination unit is connected to the pumping main for the disinfection of water. The water, after being chlorinated, is pumped to the overhead tank where it is stored and subsequently supplied to the users through the distribution network and public stand posts. This may be for either SVSs or MVSs.

The remaining 25% schemes are surface water (river) based. The raw water is transmitted through an intake point in the source to a water treatment plant. Water treatment is provided by means of slow sand filters followed by chlorination in the ground level clear water storage reservoir. The water is then pumped to an overhead tank. The canal based water schemes are dependent on Irrigation Department for release of water

Table-22

District wise types of drinking water sources

Figures are for the number of habitations covered by various types of sources S.No. District PWS Other

Tota

l

Ground Water Schemes SurfaceWater Schemes Rain Water

Schemes

Trad

ition

al

Oth

er

Open Well

Tube Well In

filtr

atio

n G

alar

y/ W

ell Pond River Lake Stream Canal Spring

Trea

ted

Surf

ace

Wat

er

Rivu

let N

aula

G

adhe

ra

Roof

Top

Gro

und

Colle

ctio

n Kh

adin

s/ N

adis

/ Ta

nkas

/ Po

nds/

W

ells

/ O

oran

is N

on C

onv HP Other

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 1 BOKARO 817 123 3803 261 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 5005 2 CHATRA 256 11 6152 268 7 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 6696 3 DEOGHAR 467 97 5138 831 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 14 1 0 0 6551 4 DHANBAD 293 40 3531 704 16 0 116 0 0 0 0 1 0 2 0 0 0 4703 5 DUMKA * 1274 30 3408 724 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 5445 6 GARHWA * 380 32 2260 182 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 11 1 0 0 9 0 2875 7 GIRIDIH 539 24 2341 593 2 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 268 18 0 71 3860 8 GODDA 436 125 2704 761 27 1 7 0 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 0 0 4067 9 GUMLA 417 85 2250 124 8 0 17 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2901

10 HAZARIBAG 315 38 1617 276 22 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2268 11 JAMTARA 118 172 5072 343 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 5707 12 KHUTI * 256 26 1911 274 5 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 31 0 12 2 2526 13 KODERMA 105 77 1401 445 12 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2040 14 LATEHAR 143 24 1279 92 1 2 8 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1550 15 LOHARDAGA 189 14 845 165 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 1215 16 PAKUR 244 98 2587 498 9 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 27 22 3485 17 PALAMU * 420 5 2076 27 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2528 18 PASCHIM

SINGHBHUM 655 524 3074 226 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 40 16 0 0 4535

19 PURBI * SINGHBHUM

262 45 3037 589 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 3937

20 RAMGARH 143 19 1900 173 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2241 21 RANCHI 503 41 3297 2367 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 6217 22 SAHIBGANJ 322 239 2687 159 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3407 23 SAREIKELA *

KHARSAWAN

208 116 4626 1355 24 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 86 1 12 0 6430

24 SIMDEGA 269 38 3054 174 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 3538 25 Total 9031 2043 70050 11611 158 10 156 1 0 0 0 23 4 444 36 65 95 93727

Page | 58


flow in the canal. Normally, canals receive water on a rotational basis. However, during harvesting season, the canal water supply is only once a month. There are certain issues faced during the operation and maintenance of the schemes:

1. Inadequate cleaning of filters, and OHTs. 2. Improper disposal of sludge from treatment plants. 3. Non flushing of pipelines. 4. Reduced duration of pumping due to reduced duration of electrical power availability. These actions severely impact drinking water supply. Implications for EMF Incidence of Water and Sanitation – Related Diseases 3.6 Sanitation

Lack of toilets and poor sanitation in Jharkhand causes 7.5 crore man-day loss every year and results into an estimated loss of Rs 1200-odd crore annually. Bharat Singh Solanki, Union minister of state with independent charge of the ministry of drinking water and sanitation, recently informed Rajya Sabha that Jharkhand has performed far below the national average in achieving total sanitation. Jharkhand is among the states that have performed the worst in terms of achieving total sanitation under the ministry's Nirmal Bharat Abhiyan. The performance has been poor on the front of constructing individual household toilets for BPL families and also on the front of APL families. The status of sanitation in Jharkhand is very dismal, with only about 8% households having access to sanitation in the rural areas and the balance still resorting to open defecation. The district wise figures of the no of households by type of sanitation facilities used, for the selected 12 districts is furnished in the table below: The figures in the table have been graphically depicted in the diagrams below:

Table-23 Households by Availability of Type of Latrine Facility: In the Rural Areas

S NO STATE/ DISTRICT

NO OF HOUSEHOLDS TYPE OF LATRINE FACILITY WITHIN THE PREMISES NO OF HOUSEHOLDS NOT HAVING LATRINE FACILITY WITHIN THE PREMISES

NO LATRINE WITHIN THE PREMISES: ALTERNATIVE SOURCE

TOTAL HAVING LATRINE WITHIN CAMPUS

FLUSH/ POUR FLUSH LATRINE CONNECTED TO

PIT LATRINE NIGHT SOIL DISPOSED INTO OPEN DRAIN

SERVICE LATRINE

PIPED SEWER SYSTEM

SEPTIC TANK

OTHER SYSTEM

WITH SLAB/VENTILATED IMPROVED

WITHOUT SLAB/ OPEN PIT

NIGHT SOIL REMOVED BY HUMAN

NIGHT SOIL REMOVED BY ANIMAL

PUBLIC LATRINE

OPEN

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 JHARKHAND 4685965 357289 21065 232161 37708 44334 144

66 3615 106

1 2879 4328676 32864 4295812

1 GARHWA * 241497 11897 622 7109 1125 1976 781 102 27 155 229600 919 228681 2 GIRIDIH 356247 20703 1164 14393 1920 2099 698 236 63 130 335544 2432 333112 3 GODDA 239500 18870 836 13409 2094 2005 224 158 33 111 220630 1968 218662 4 SAHIBGANJ 193809 17774 534 10350 3336 2534 890 81 0 49 176035 920 175115 5 PAKUR 167362 12244 330 6515 1592 2887 828 70 0 22 155118 1474 153644 6 DHANBAD 207157 25325 1637 21391 895 644 198 134 258 168 181832 1242 180590 7 PURBI *

SIGHBHUM 215676 29437 2038 15835 2675 6982 171

9 93 23 72 186239 851 185388

8 PALAMU * 316135 23502 1881 14710 3286 2047 623 469 152 334 292633 866 291767 9 DUMKA * 255926 15965 748 8245 2282 2869 131

6 208 59 238 239961 1925 238036

10 JAMTARA * 135540 5964 192 3911 555 812 372 96 0 26 129576 714 128862 11 KHUNTI * 93762 3789 236 2553 503 289 97 83 0 28 89973 728 89245 12 SARAIKELA * 165883 10697 839 7469 983 886 313 137 32 38 155186 1405 153781 * Tentative Proposed Project Districts

Page | 59


Environmental factors account for about 20 per cent of all the diseases in Jharkhand. More than 90 per cent of this is associated with traditional environmental problems such as lack of access to protected water supply and sanitation, and indoor air pollution resulting from the use of biomass fuels. One fifth of the total ailments in the State are due to environmental causes. Water supply and sanitation related diseases emerge as largest influenced by environmental causes. The prevalence of diarrhea clearly indicates a seasonal variation mainly due to lack of water (premonsoon) and poor availability of safe drinking water during the monsoon peak when protozoan and bacterial agents are rampant and overflow from sewers and latrines contaminating drinking water sources. Outbreaks of cholera, dysentery, typhoid, hepatitis and E.coli are all attributed to exposure to waterborne pathogens.

3.6.1 Quality of Drinking Water Sources

As per the NRDWP statistics the types of problems related to quality in various districts is as shown in the Table-24:

Table-24 NO OF VILLAGES WITH EXCESSIVE Total number of

IRO

N

FLU

ORI

DE

NIT

RATE

ARSE

NIC

OTH

ER

E-CO

LI

MU

LTIP

LE

Blocks Panchayats Villages Habitations

1 DHANBAD 8 383 1289 3661 2 DUMKA* 10 206 2572 7384 3 GARHWA* 19 196 859 4371 2 11 2 19 26 4 GIRIDIH 12 359 2546 4573 1 5 GODDA 9 200 1610 5827 6 JAMTARA 4 118 1066 5260 7 KHUNTI* 6 91 743 299 8 PAKUR 66 18 148 843 9 PALAMU* 18 289 1700 6804 10 EAST SINGHBHUM* 11 231 1670 6697 838 160 228 0 91 0 52 11 SAHIBGANJ 9 166 1266 2912 9 12 0 5 65 50 0 12 SARAIKELA* 9 135 1113 4835 12 GRAND TOTAL 2502 17566 56267 849 183 230 5 176 50 78 * Tentative Proposed Project Districts A graphical representation of the summary of all 12 districts has been shown in the Figure alongside, indication that the maximum occurrence of chemical pollution relates to iron. Arsenic is limited to a block in district Sahibganj. Also, from the table it can be seen that pollution in question is limited only to three districts, namely Garhwa, East Singhbhum and Sahibganj.

Page | 60


3.6.2 Total Sanitation Campaign

Table-25 Coverage Area Target Project Performance IHHL BPL 2327306 1298892 IHHL APL 1402189 166608 IHHL Total 3729495 1465500 Sanitation Complex for Women (SCW) 1203 151 School Toilets 42687 37098 Anganwari Toilets 11472 5421 Rural Sanitary Mart (RSM) 249 226 Production Centre (PC) 516 (Sources: DW & S Deptt.) 3.6.3 Issues In Sanitation

In addition to the unsanitary disposal of human waste, the issues concerning the sanitation situation in rural areas are:

• Wastewater generated by households including cattle sheds flows into open surface drains that are often choked, leading to stagnation of wastewater in the lanes and bylanes. Presence of stagnant water in open drains and open areas is a breeding ground for mosquitoes and other harmful organisms, which lead to water related diseases.

• Facilities and practices for more efficient and hygienic conversion of animal dung and agriculture residues into manure/ compost are absent.

• Construction of dry pits to discharge sullage is done without any consideration to sanitary aspects. • Discharge of septic tank effluents into the open drains instead of disposing to soak pits, creates

unsanitary conditions. • Lack of proper sanitation facilities for disposal of various wastes results in seepage into shallow

aquifers which are sources of water supply through hand pumps, open dug wells, and percolation wells.

• Contamination of village ponds by wastewater and dumping of other wastes on its periphery.

3.6.4 Profile of Diseases Caused by Pollutants in Jharkhand

3.6.4.1 The Pollutants

The Uranium Corporation of India Ltd. (UCIL) recently completed its project of uranium Mining and Mill at Narwapahar, Jharkhand. Adequate resources of uranium have been identified to meet large part of requirements of India's nuclear power program. The uranium deposit at Jaduguda, Singhbhum district, Jharkhand, has been under exploitation since 1962. The uranium deposits at Bhatin and Narwapahar are currently being exploited. Ore from the three deposits is treated in a mill at Jaduguda in the Singhbhum region, and the yield is 300 tons of uranium per year, which is more than sufficient to meet expected requirements for years. The Narwapahar mine, 12 km North West of Jaduguda, is another, one of the most modern mines in the country. Jadugoda was an aborigines' land originally. After mining of uranium was undertaken there residents were deprived of their

Page | 61


farm land and shifted to other nearby villages like Dungridih or Chatiko- cha. At Jadugora as well as these and other villages even if the radiation dose may be very low, there is always a risk since radioactivity is present on the earth’s surface and we cannot escape the exposure completely. There are areas around where the content of the uranium or thorium in soil are high, and people receive exposure of 10 times or more. The aborigines work with the mining enterprise: They work with radioactivity and they live in radioactivity. The contamination of the Uranium has spread in Jadugoda. The amount of Air Gamma dose exceeds 1 m Sv/y in the villages and reaches 10 m Sv/y around the tailing ponds. The circumference of the tailing ponds is polluted with Uranium. The strength of pollution in the tailing ponds is 10 to 100 times higher than the place without contamination. (KOIDE Hiroaki, Kyoto University, 2004) The quantities of Fluoride and Arsenic are reported to be far above the acceptable limits in many districts including Sahebganj, Dumka, Dhanbad, Hajaribagh, Chatra, Garhwa, Simdega, Bokaro etc. The underground water in most of the districts has already been reported to contain high percentage of iron. Increasing number of deep bore wells show high concentrations of mineral content. It is important to note that the state is already under short supply of ground water due to its specific geology. Areas with high concentration of Iron in Ground Water are: (Standard acceptable limit 2PPM) Dhanbad 2.92 Bokaro 21.31 Simdega 19.77 Singhbhoom 4.6 Dumka 4.95 Garhwa 25.2 3.6.4.2 Problem of Arsenic:

In Sahebgunj district blocks, namely, Sahebgunj, Rajmahal and Udhawa have been found to be alarmingly contaminated with arsenic present at or above 10 ppb. The presence of arsenic has been also reported from districts like Pakur, Godda, Dumka etc. Rivers flowing through the coal fields of Jharkhand have been reported to carry arsenic responsible for arsenic poisoning in downstream areas of West Bengal. The coal fields of Bachara and Piprawar areas of Jharkhand have contaminated the waters of the Damodar and its tributary, the Safi. According to author, arsenic contamination arises mainly due to the dumping of waste from the coal mines along the river bed. Coals of the area mentioned contains sufficient amount of arsenic. Even river water of Jharkhand is not safe: In water of Damodar and Panchet river basins, iron content has exceeded at Sindri, Chasnala, Jaridih Bazar Rajrappa, Ramgarh, Giddi and Piparwar. The presence of iron in the drinking water supply is unhealthy for number of reasons. Beyond desirable limit tase/ appearance are affected. The iron that settles out in the distribution systems gradually reduces the flow of water. Iron also promotes the growth of iron bacteria.

Page | 62


The content of lead has exceeded at Chasnala, Chandrapura, Jaridih bazar, Rajrappa, Ramgarh, Giddi and Piparwar. Lead high dose has been recognized as metabolic poison. Some of the symptoms of acute poisoning are tiredness, abdominal irritability, anaemia, behavior change in children. The content of cobalt has exceeded at Rajrappa and Giddi. Although cobalt is an essential element for life in minute amount, at higher levels of exposure it shows mutagenic and carcinogenic effects. After nickel and chromium cobalt is a major cause of contact dermatitis. The water of Subarnrekha river basin has also been polluted. Ph of water has exceeded from BIS norms at Muri, Chandil, and Maubhandar. Dissolved oxygen of water is lower from BIS norms at Muri, Chandil, Lupungdih, Gopivalbhpur, Jamshola, and Jaleshwar. Excessive lead has been reported from Chandil, Domuhani, Jamshola and Jaleshwar. Cadmium has exceeded the permissible limit of BIS AT Chandil, Lupungdih, Gopivalbhpur and Jaleshwar. 3.6.4.3 Contamination of Agricultural Produce

About 70 percent of farmers depend on ground water for irrigation in this area. As per the surveys conducted by Central Groundwater Board and the Jharkhand Groundwater Board there is a considerable fall in the ground water level. The deep bore wells are supplying chemical water containing high percentage of iron, fluoride and arsenic. A study conducted recently reveals that food grains produced by crops irrigated with such water containi high percentage of these chemicals. Ground water pollution is intrinsically difficult to detect, since problem may well be concealed below the surface and monitoring is costly, time consuming and somewhat hit-or-miss by nature.

Studies suggest that even deep bore wells are failing in the state. More than one hundred deep bore wells are being dug in the state. The water level in Godda area of the state has been reported to fall up to 25 m. The exploitation of ground water has gone up to 30 times since last three years. On the other hand about 90 percent facilities of ground water recharge have been stopped completely. The availability of drinking water in the state has reduced to 1200cubic meter from 5200 cubic meter. On an average the fall of ground water level has been recorded to be about 52 feet. In the city area of Ranchi, the water level is reported to have gone deeper up to 13 meters. Under these conditions an acute water crisis is awaiting in this state if correct and sincere measures are not taken up on priority basis. 3.6.4.4 Increasing Pollution In The Rivers

Further, effluents discharged from mine sites have seriously polluted the streams and underground waters of the area. Acid mine drainage, liquid effluents from coal handling plants, colliery workshops and mine sites and suspended solids from coal washeries have caused serious water pollution in the region, adversely affecting fish and aquatic life. The Damodar River, the major source of water in the region, is perhaps the most polluted river in India. It receives wastes from the many industries situated on its banks. A study of the area showed that a single coal washery was discharging about 40 tonnes of fine coal into the Damodar every day. There are as many as eleven coal washeries in the region with an annual installed capacity of 20.52 million tonnes. Today the Damodar or Damuda, considered a sacred river by the Santal tribals, is quite like a sewage canal shrunken and filled with filth and rubbish, emanating obnoxious odours. Other major rivers of the region are also seriously polluted. The Karo river in west Singhbhum is polluted with red oxide from the iron ore mines of Noamundi, Gua and Chiria. The Subarnarekha shows a different type of pollution, even more hazardous than this. Metallic and dissolved toxic wastes from TISCO, Jamshedpur and HCL, Ghatsila and radioactive wastes from the uranium mill and tailings ponds of the UCIL at Jaduguda flow into Subarnarekha and its tributaries.

Page | 63


3.7 THE PRIMARY VILLAGE LEVEL DATA – SALIENT FEATURES & ANALYSIS 3.7.1 Introduction

The primary Village data collected from 27 habitations in 24 villages in the 12 initially proposed districts has been organized on two (2) parameters:

a. Water Quality b. Geographical Proximity & Economic Parameters

Therefore, data from Dumka, Godda & Jamtara reflects Ethnic/Tribal population and iron content problems, data from Palamu, Garhwa & Giridih covers fluoride affected areas, and Pakur & Sahibganj reflects the North East part of the State. Dhanbad, East Singhbhum & Saraikela are coal, iron & manganese affected mining areas, district Khunti situated on the Ranchi plateau has heterogeneous populations and primary sector economy.

Village selection has been purposive with one Pipe Water Supply Scheme village in each district and one non pipe water supply proximal village. The parameters of enquiry area; preferred or available water source, water treatment incidence & practice, sanitation infrastructure & practices, solid waste & sullage management practices. Data has been collected on Structured Schedules and through Focus Group Discussions and has been collated statistically & by qualitative analysis respectively.

3.7.2 Drinking Water

RWS in the State of Jharkhand at present is substantially dependent on Hand Pumps. Only the south central region (East Singhbhum, Saraikela, Dhanbad & Khunti) show a relatively higher incidence of PIPE WATER SUPPLY SCHEME as a source. However, it should be highlighted that the puposive sample includes 50% pipe water supply scheme villages, which are in actuality less than 8% in the state. Open wells & untreated surface source are also minimally preferred options during lean periods.

During the discussion it was highlighted that, while Pipe Water Supply Scheme could be a preferred source, it is not available 24x7 because of technical and energy factors. Despite problems during the lean seasons, hand pumps are the most easily accessible source of potable water.

2043

9031

70050

194 444 11965

Coverage & Types of Water Supply Sources in Jharkhand

OPEN WELL

PWS - 444 is 8%

HP

SURFACE WATER

ROOF TOP

OTHERS

Page | 64


A - Dumka, Godda & Jamtara B - Palamau, Garhwa & Giridih C - Pakur & Sahibganj D - Dhanbad, East Singhbhum & Saraikela E - Khunti

3.7.3 Water Treatment

Water drawn from various sources is minimally treated. The most common method is cloth filtering, less than 10% of the household practice, boiling of water for domestic use and, approximately 40% households reported filtering with the cloth to address turbidity & color problems.

10.8

21 12.5

37

27

55.0

69 63.75

47 52

13.3

32

14 13 4.2

0 3

16.7

0 0.0

10.0

20.0

30.0

40.0

50.0

60.0

70.0

80.0

90.0

100.0

A B C D E

Drinking Water

OHT Supply Hand Pump Open Wells Nearby River Artesian Well

50

62 60

41.7 44.2

34.4 38.75

48.3

5.8 3.6 1.25

10

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

A B C D

No Treatment Cloth Filtering Boiling

Water Treatement

Page | 65


3.7.4 Defecation Practices

The primary data on defecation practices indicates over 70% household’s practicing open defecation in the studied villages. Only the villages in district Khunti reported a higher %age of 65%. However, this is primarily because the selected village turned out to be a small town with a high %age of literacy & lesser %age of population dependent on the primary sector.

The analysis of the primary data compared to sanitation statistics of Jharkhand (8% ISL use), indicate a possible correlation between Pipe Water Supply Scheme and ISL use, as access to water and privacy are substantial considerations in defecation practices.

3.7.5 Hand Cleaning

70% of the households reported hand washing with sand and 30% use soap as a disinfectant. Ash is the third most prevalent option prevalent notably in the Garhwa, Palamau & Giridih region, which is arguably the most backward region of the state.

13%

35% 35% 27%

65%

87%

68% 65% 73%

35%

0%10%20%30%40%50%60%70%80%90%

100%

A B C D E

Perc

ent u

sers

Defecation Practices

ISL OPEN

Page | 66


3.7.6 Solid Waste Disposal

The solid waste generation is limited in quantity & quality. The average household generates less than 750Gm of domestic waste per day. The contents are domestic dust, food waste & minimal packaging. The most common disposal method is dumping in the backyard or front streets. Compositing is the prevalent option with 35% household in Khunti reporting use of compost pits. Agriculture waste, however, is a major management issue which is invariably dumped in the backyard or in the fields. The focus group discussions reveal Agri waste management as a potential area for capacity building and environment management.

30.8

20

31.25 39.2

78.5

65.8

45

58.75 55.8

29.75

3.3

24

2.5 5 11.5

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

A B C D E

Soap Mud Ash

Hand Cleaning

0102030405060708090

100

A C D E

Solid Waste Disposal

Outside on lane In front of house In Compost Pit Backyards

Page | 67


3.7.7 Waste Water Disposal

None of the area studied has sewage systems or ISL linked to sewage. Domestic sullage which mostly consists of kitchen and bathing liquid waste, is drained into the unpaved drains of the village. Less than 15% households reported disposal of sullage in soak pits. No planned sullage outfall or treatment has been reported or observed. Sullage disposal follows the natural gradient and is unscientifically collected in local ponds or depressions leading to unsanitary conditions.

3.7.8 Salient Points of Village Data

Palamu, Garwa and Giridih:

Water supply in the region is affected by quality (iron and fluoride) and quantity (summer seasons).

Depending on terrain, construction of small catchments and dams can prove beneficial and they can also reduce pressure on existing water supply schemes.

Location points and, timings of water supply must be planned according to the population needs.

Villagers are willing to pay for the development and maintenance of the systems.

Community level latrines can also be beneficial and they should be built in common places such as bus stops and key market areas.

Dumka, Godda and Jamtara:

100% of the water supply schemes are ground water based.

50% respondents consume water after further treatment at household level.

Only 13% of sample household have latrines.

Most (99%) wash hands both after defection and before eating food.

0%

10%

20%

30%

40%

50%

60%

70%

80%

90%

A B C D

Drain Soak Pit

Waste Water

Page | 68


10% households have soak pits for wastewater disposal.

A significant number of households (85%) are aware of waterborne diseases.

45% households throw solid waste in their backyards.

Pakur and Sahibganj:

Overall observation indicates good quality groundwater in both the districts, apart from the summer season. Another problem faced by villages of Sahibganj is that of Arsenic contamination.

There is acute shortage of Individual Sanitary latrines.

There is no sewerage and drainage system in any of the villages. Kucchha drains help in only draining the household water into the roads and backyard.

Composting has been observed in some households, for cowdung, but proper composting for organic waste is basically absent.

Dhanbad, East Singbhum and Saraikela:

100% of the water supply schemes are ground water based.

50% respondents consume water after further treatment at household level.

Only 20% of sample household have latrines.

Most (99%) wash hands both after defection and before eating food.

A significant number of households (85%) are aware of waterborne diseases.

Water supply in both the existing and proposed village is based on mine pit water.

Water quality in the existing village is good whereas water quality tests needs to be conducted in the proposed village.

Sewarage system is absent

Villagers are willing to pay for HH level ISL and drinking water points.

Good hygiene practices observed in all the 3 districts.

45% household throws solid waste outside in the lane.

20% households have soak pits for wastewater disposal.

Khunti:

There are multiple sources of water supply in the PWS schemes.

100% of the schemes are ground water based.

Most respondents consume water without further treatment at household level.

Villagers are willing to use ISLs therefore the scheme of building them should be expanded.

Hygiene status is good.

Drainage is negligible in the region.

Solid waste is dumped openly in Tapkara and no compost pits are seen.

Dung waste is used in agricultural areas whereas food waste is given to animal as feed in Kocha.

Page | 69


3.7.9 Conclusions of Focus Group Discussions / Public Consultation

Table-26

GARHWA, PALAMAU & GIRIDIH DUMKA, GODDA & JAMTARA PAKUR & SAHIBGANJ DHANBAD, EAST SINGHBHUM & SARAIKELA

KHUNTI

WAT

ER S

UPP

LY

1. Groundwater major source 2. Mostly dependent on Hand

Pumps 3. Piped Water Supply limited

in hours of supply 4. No treatment options

practiced at household level.

1. Piped Water Supply inadequate, Over Head Tank leakages, poor power supply.

2. Distribution network very limited.

3. Number of Household connections low.

4. Regular Hand Pump breakdowns average 25%.

5. Water quality of Groundwater sources perceived as good.

1. Piped Water Supply adversely affected due to power supply and distribution network problems.

2. Water quality affected with iron, fluoride & TDS, mostly cloth filtering practiced.

3. Perceptible lowering of Groundwater levels.

4. Problems because of treatment HP breakdowns.

1. Piped Water Supply has low no. of household connections, willingness to pay poor.

2. Stand posts not found convenient.

3. Water quality not an issue. Few Hand Pumps have iron in water.

4. Water quantity a problem in summers.

1. One village with Piped Water Supply. Multiple sources used in both villages. Piped Water Supply found inadequate.

2. Wastage of Piped Water a major issue.

3. Open wells also used.

SAN

ITAT

ION

1. 90% households other than Bagodar village practice open defecation.

2. The most common place of defecation is near a water source.

3. Mud and ash are the most prevalent hand washing mediums.

1. Largely open defecation practiced.

2. High cost of ISL considered a reason for 100% of construction.

3. Lack of sanitation awareness.

1. Open Defecation predominant and near open water bodies.

2. Individual Sanitary Latrines found unaffordable.

3. Preference to Open Defecation even in households with Individual Sanitary Latrines, mainly for older generation.

1. Largely open defecation. 2. Incidence of soap use for

hand washing higher.

1. One village high incidence of ISL, open defecation still 65%.

2. Very high incidence of soap use, as this is a trading village.

Page | 70


SOLI

D W

ASTE

1. Domestic waste disposed in backyard.

2. Agri-waste dumped in fields.

3. Vermi composting practiced in Kalyanpur.

1. Solid waste domestic wate mostly burnt.

2. Very little recycling or composting practiced.

3. Agri waste dumped in fields.

1. Domestic waste disposed in backyard, kitchen waste used for animal feed.

2. Agri-waste dumped in open field.

1. Low awareness of waste management.

2. Recycling and composting absent.

3. Agri-waste piled in the village area.

1. Tapkara has a problem of waste littering.

2. Agri-waste also a problem in the habitation as agricultural fields area far.

SULL

AGE

1. Unpaved drains used for sullage disposal.

1. Sullage drained into unpaved drains.

2. No resource available for paving of drains.

1. Water stagnation a major problem.

2. Lack of resources in paving drains considered the reason for poor sullage.

1. Low incidence of paved drains.

2. Stagnant sullage water causes health problems.

3. People expect Govt. help for village environment improvement.

1. Waste water disposal a major problem.

2. Local puddling and waste pools a major problem.


CHAPTER-4

ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT APPRAISAL & ASSESSMENT


4. ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT APPRAISAL & ASSESSMENT

4.1 KEY PARAMETERS

Key parameters within which the appraisal and assessment of the environment has been carried out in the context of rural drinking water and sanitation in the state of Jharkhand have been schematically depicted in the diagram below.

AREASCOVERED

ENVIRONMENTAL

FUNCTIONAL

GEOGRAPHICAL

ROLE CENTRAL

SUPPORT

12 DISTRICTS OFJHARKHAND

1. Garhwa2. Palamu3. Giridih4. Dumka5. Godda6. Sahebganj7. Pakur8. Jamtara9. Dhanbad10.Saraikela11.East Singhbhum12.Khunti

Gram PanchayatsCommunities

State govtPRIsNGOsPrivate sector

1. Rural drinking water2. Rural sanitation

1. Facilitation2. Planning3. Implementation4. Monitoring5. O & M1. Sustainability

2. Demand driven3. Security of water source4. 24/7 supply5. Metered connections6. Professionalised service7. Independent reviews8. Use of SCADA

MODELATTRIBUTES

OBJECTIVES

1. Assessment of status2. Assessment of inputs &

outputs3. Develop

planning, monitoring &implementation guidelines

4. Identify good practices5. Develop EMF6. Develop ECOPs

ENVIRONMENTALASSESSMENT

ENVIRONMENTALMANAGEMENT

4.2 APPRAISAL

We have been through with the appraisal of the existing status of environment, within the parameters prescribed, on the basis of secondary data available, relevant portions of which have been included herein earlier or have otherwise been annexed with the report.

1. Types of water sources in the villages • Open wells • Hand pumps • Tube wells • Surface sources • Wetlands

2. Quality of water

Water quality standards (BIS, CPHEEO, WB, CPCB) • Distribution of problems over different geographical locations • Arsenic • Iron

Jharkhand

Page | 71


• Fluoride • Manganese • Radioactivity • Ecologically sensitive areas • Industrial areas • Flooded areas

3. Environmental impact of human activity on environment (Domestic activities, industrial activities,

agricultural) of environment on human being • Solid waste • Liquid waste • Pollution of ground water • Pollution of surface sources • Pollution of wetlands • Diarrhea • Dysentery • Typhoid • Malaria • Disease caused by high iron • Disease caused by high fluoride • Disease caused by high arsenic • Disease caused by radioactivity • Disease caused by high manganese • Disease caused by high pH in water • Industrial diseases (respiratory, asbestosis, etc)

4. Types of facilities available: Their limitations Water supply

• Single village schemes • Multi village schemes • Open well schemes • Hand pump schemes • Gravity schemes • Pumping schemes • Tube well source • Surface source • Storage of water • Distribution of water • Disinfection of water • Availability of power

Sanitation

• Open defecation • Defecation by drain-sides • Dry latrines • Pour flush latrines • Flush latrines • Soak pits

Page | 72


• Septic tanks-effluent into drains • Septic tanks-effluent into soak pits • Solid waste

4.3 MAJOR ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS OF MINING

It is observed that water supply and sanitation have minimal impact on the environment. The present study is, however, focussed on the quality of water and sanitation practices on human life. The quality of water, particularly of surface waters, is significantly affected by mining operations in the State of Jharkhand, possessing the richest mineral resources in India. This is the single largest human activity in the State hat has the widest environmental implications, and, therefore dealt with in detail. Mining operations use large quantities of water. The discharged water, due to lack of treatment facilities, invariably flows back into rivers, causing chemical pollution. Since mining has been going on in Jharkhand for several decades, the quality of water of all its rivers has constantly been deteriorating. Studies have made from time to time confirm the deteriorating impact of mining; including surface waters, natural resources, ground water and human being. The adverse effects of water pollution have been dealt with in the next section. The given diagram shows the environmental parameters to be included in an assessment of impact. The parameters include both biotic as well as abiotic elements. However, certain elements such as terrestrial ecology, air and noise environment and socio-economic part have not been included because study on these elements is beyond the scope of this assignment. 4.3.1 Impact of Mining on the Environment of JharkhandP

1

A significant portion of Jharkhand’s population, 44 per cent, is below the poverty line and more than six per cent is still unable to get sufficient food. The poverty ratio in the state is much higher than that of the country. Jharkhand has been witnessing gigantic industrialization for the exploitation of its natural and human resources. The working of Jharia, Bokaro and Karanpura coalfields started in the 1856. The opening of coal mining in Dhanbad during the second half of the 19th century and the establishment of the Tata Iron and Steel Company in Jamshedpur in Singhbhum district in 1907 marked the beginning of the large scale exploitation of mineral and other industrial resources in this area. The impact of these activities on the environment of the state can be categoriezed as under:

• Impact on forest • Soil erosion • Formation of sinkholes and land subsidence • Loss of biodiversity • Impact on water

As waters interact and alter the disturbed geologic materials, constituents such as salts, metals, trace elements, and/or organic compounds become mobilized. Once mobilized, the dissolved substances can leach into deep aquifers, resulting in groundwater quality impacts. In addition to concerns due to naturally occurring contaminants, mining activities may also contribute to groundwater pollution from leaking underground storage tanks, improper disposal of lubricants and solvents, contaminant spills as well as others. See also Annexure-33. 1 Priyadarshi, N,2004. Distribution of Arenic in Permian coals of North Karanpura Coal Field, Jharkhand, Jour. Geol. Soc. India, 63,533-536 Priyadarshi, N, 2004 in Impacts of mining on the Environment of Jharkhand, www.firstpeoples first.in 4.4 THE PRIMARY DATA

Page | 73


Primary data has been collected from twenty four villages located in twelve selected districts of the state. The districts selected are 50% of the total number (24) of districts in the state. The selected districts represent places where problems related to quality or availability of drinking water is more pronounced or otherwise where impact on environment is blatantly visible. The districts include Dhanbad and East Singhbhum, home to mineral wealth of India, where large scale mining, widespread deforestation, displacement of population including that of aborigines, have been occurring over several decades and other places where iron, fluoride,

or arsenic etc are found in water in higher

than permissible

concentrations. Criteria for selection of villages in these districts is that one village in each district, where drinking water facility is available, is selected to analyse how well, if at all, it is working and what are the

issues in the success or failure of management of the scheme; and to have another village where organized, public drinking water facility is not available to find the problems, if any, people are facing without a public facility and whether there is really any demand for the facility. The selection of the districts and villages has been done in consultation with the officials of the Department of Drinking Water and Sanitation of the Govt of Jharkhand. The field survey has been carried out by a highly qualified team of Ph.D and M.Tech scholars from the BIT, Mesra, Ranchi, the renowned institutes in Engineering. The team has collected compiled, collated and analysed the relevant data. 4.4.1 Analysis and Assessment – Environmental Issues

The analysis and assessment that follows is based on secondary data, also primary data, visits to villages and discussions from time to time with officials of the DDWS. The assessment is data based as well as perception based The schematic diagram hown here Indicates process leading to the formulation of an Environmental Management Framework. Major points that come out in the analysis and assessment are listed below: 4.4.1.1 Drinking water

Coal mines of Jharia in district Dhanbad have been burning for decades, causing extensive damage to environment & people.

Page | 74


1. The sources of water available in the rural areas of Jharkhand, as already listed earlier, are open or dug wells, hand pumps, tube wells, rivers, lakes ponds or dams.

2. According to the results of tests of the water samples under the RGNDWM, 7 out of 12 districts selected are afflicted with quality problems.

3. According to the reports of the CGWB, there are quality problems of one or more kinds in almost all districts. Therefore, there is discrepancy between the results of the two agencies.

4. The laboratories that were established at district levels are reported to be mostly non-functional and all tests are either done at the few functional laboratories or are not done at all.

Most of the rural population is covered by hand pumps. There are few piped water supply schemes.

5. The hand pumps installed in areas where fluoride levels are high are not provided any facility to treat excess fluoride.

6. The hand pumps and tube wells are bored at places where land is available, not where water is available because required investigations to ensure availability of water are not made. The result is that many tube wells and hand pumps fail.

7. In spite of the fact the forest cover in Jharkhand, even after continued denudation for decades, is still the maximum amongst the states of India, and there is plenty of rainfall in Jharkhand, the ground water exploitation is very little. The reasons include geological formation at most places is rocky, water percolates into the ground through fissures and cracks and stored in voids, small in size, that hold limited quantities of water and yield small discharges. Bores are successful if these voids are hit, otherwise these fail.

8. The maps of the CGWB provide details of areas with depth of water table during pre-monsoon and post-monsoon seasons and the likely yield marked on them. The maps the JSAC (Jharkhand Space Applications Centre) are digital maps based on satellite imagery and show the kind of geological formation, the depth of SWL and likely yield marked on them so that it is possible to find out at least at the village level as to how much yield should be available from a tube well.

Page | 75


Box-4

RECOMMENDATIONS ON QUANTITY & QUALITY • In the hard rock areas, pin pointing suitable sites for bore wells is

always a challenge. Considering the anisotropy in distribution of fractures at deeper level, suitable sites may be selected using remote sensing techniques in association with geophysical and hydrogeological investigations. For deriving optimal benefit from aquifers in areas under fissured formation, the dug wells should be designed to penetrate the weathered zone as well as top part (1-2 m) of the underlying bed rock, so as to get the full benefit, from the total thickness of the shallow aquifer. In such places where the dug wells go dry during summer, the wells should be constructed deeper so that it can tap the entire saturated thickness of weathered residuum.

• For hand pumps and shallow tube wells the casing provided against the weathered zone should be slotted at the bottom so that the well can extract shallow ground water also.

• Ground water potential of the rocks are limited. Surface water resources can be utilized for the river water can be lifted for irrigation as well as drinking purposes. Alternate water supply schemes should be developed for arsenic affected villages from surface water source or ground water source after sealing the arsenic affected aquifers.

• Potential areas for artificial recharge could be located where groundwater levels are declining on regular basis or where substantial amount of aquifer has been desaturated. Rainwater harvesting and artificial recharge to groundwater schemes may be adopted in all block head quarters. It should be guided by findings from hydrogeological and geophysical surveys. Sites for artificial recharge should be taken up at places where sufficient thickness of weathered zone as well as fracture/fracture zones are available. The depth of the recharge well should be governed by the depth of occurrence of the fractures.

• The construction of rain water harvesting structures such as gully plugging, contour bunding, gabion structures, check dams and percolation tanks would increase the storage in surface which will in turn recharge the ground water around it.

• In fluoride- affected area, the ground water must be used after deflouridation through fluoride removal plants. Alternative source may be identified in fluoride affected areas. The existing fluoride affected sources may be sealed.

• The bore well may be a better alternate option for the drinking water purposes in areas where dug wells (shallow aquifers) report high Nitrate levels.

9. The quality of ground water is affected by the natural geological formations, containing minerals of various kinds present in them. The quality of ground water is also degraded by the leachates from mines.

10. One remarkable fact about the quality of ground water, as it appears from the test results of the RGNDWM, is that water obtained from hundreds of deep tube wells the MPN count is very high. In local terminology a tube well which is deeper than 50 metres is called a deep tube well.

It is necessary to carry out a detailed and thorough investigation into the causes of the MPN being so high in such a large number of tube wells. It is reported that in the city of Rewa in Madhya Pradesh where source of drinking water was tube wells and where a sanitation programme (latrines discharging into soak pits) had been launched, increasing number of sporadic, diarrhea and gastro enteritis cases have been reported. Subsequently shdn casualties increased, it was found that the leachates from several soak pits from latrines constructed under the sanitation programme travelled through fissures in the underlying rocks to reach the ground water supplied for drinking to cause epidemic.

11. The test reports on record of deep tube wells also indicate abnormally high turbidity contents. There is need for detailed investigation because if turbidity is contributed by partially soluble minerals within the strata form colloidal

Page | 76


solutions in water, such as those of iron, the turbidity will have to be treated and iron, if it is in excess of permissible limits, will have to be brought within acceptable limits.

12. It emerged from discussions that generally tube wells have a short life ofseven to eight years at many places in Jharkhand for two problems - either because of strata drying up or caving in of tube well assemblies. These two problems are different and will need to be addressed in different ways. The former problem is to be resolved by shifting tube wells at appropriate locations by making use of available technologies. During one of the visits it was found by a block official that there was water diviner in a nearby village, whose services were availed by private boring contractors. If tube well assemblies are caving, certainly is need for analysis of water. If water is corrosive in nature and the material of the assembly is mild steel, either a non-corrosive material is to be used or appropriate measures, such as cathodic protection, have to be taken to protect the assembly pipes from corrosion and prolong life of the tube wells.

13. In spite of the fact that water from tube wells contains abnormally high MPN, there is no disinfection being practiced anywhere.

14. Surface water is preferred due to short life and uncertainty of qualifity of water in tube wells. The durability of source is certainly an advantage in case of river waters, if perennial. There are, however, hardly any perennial rivers in Jharkhand. The quality of river water is, therefore, much worse than the quality of tube well water. In case there is no chemical pollution, water from tube well requires only disinfection while river water requires complete treatment including sedimentation and filtration.

The limited availability of power in rural areas is an equal demerit in both the cases.

The capital cost as well as the maintenance cost is likely to be higher for the river water than for the tube well water.

15. There are several dams and natural lakes in Jharkhand that can be used for supplying drinking water after treatment to sizeable chunks of rural population nearby. There also smaller wetlands that can be used, particularly for single village schemes.

The problem experienced with multi village pipe line rural water supply schemes in Uttar Pradesh and Uttarakhand Is that the long conveyance mains are intercepted and meddled with by inhabitants of villages on the way for irrigating fields. As such, it is rather diddicult for the maintenance staff to get the better of them. As a result, in almost all rural schemes with 6 to 20 villages, only thosevillage have intact water supply, where water works are with a maximum of one or two more villages.

4.4.1.2 Sanitation

1. More than 90% households in rural areas defecate in the open because of their habit. The men folk go away from their home for defecation, preferably if there is a river nearby. Women folk go for defecation while it is dark in the morning and after sunset in evening. This information is obtained from interactionwith women folk on visit to their homes in adivasi village in district Khunti.

2. As per the media reports more rapes and offences against women occur in rural areas than in the urban. It, however, seems that may offences against women in rural areas are not reported in the media. It is also observed that the perpetraters of crimes against women are active at dawn and dusk and find fields the most convenient place.

3. Most people, irrespective of their gender, religion and status want sanitary latrines within their residents, particularly for females in family. Majoirty is able and willing to pay Rs 1000 to1500 for the latrines, whereas minority is willing but cannot afford to pay.

4. As available data point out that in many cases where latrines have been constructed, arrangements for proper disposal of waste effluent are lacking. The waste is disposal is either in a nearby drain or in a pond or in the open.

5. Septic tanks are generally not constructed in rural areas. People do not seem to be familiar with septic tanks. Soak pits are used for disposing of effluents from latrines and toilets. As the geological

Page | 77


formation underlying the earch surface in most part of Jharkhand is rocky with fissures and cracks, it takes a long time to establish connection between the crust and the ground water. In all probability the latrines without soak pits, is a significat factor causing bacterial pollution of ground water.

6. Though potable water is a necessity of life, it is a luxury for in most people. There is very little awareness about the relationship between quality of water and sanitation.

7. It was interesting to observe in one of the adivasi villages that there was neither any heap of garbage nor any foul smell. It was found that the householdes feed their animails on kitchen waste and dump animal waste in pits. The pit is laterr filled and covered with earth and another small pit is dug close by. After 2-3 months when the compost was ready, the contents earlier pit was used as manure in the fields. The villagers, however, burn their solid waste like paper and polythene because, if left unattended, their animals might fall sick by eating the waste.

8. It was observed that the earlier sanitation programmes, launched with the assistance of Central government agencies like the ILCS (Integrated Low Cost Sanitation) did not take off well in spite of the fact that nearly half the cost of unit was available to beneficiaries as subsidy. It was not only in Jharkhand but in many other states also that the assistance of the government was poorly utilized.

9. Analysis of the programme point out to following deficiencies:

• Cumbersome accounting of the subsidy component. • Requirement of cumbersome documentation in case of loan component for which there was

provision. • Lack of hassle-free and efficient delivery system. • Lack of confidence in the quality of the large part of the unit to be constructed. • Lack of awareness about sanitation

10. There are no standards, which are officially accepted, authenticated designs for latrines for different

soil and geological and hydrological conditions (or geo-climatic conditions). There is lack of credibility in people and implementers of the programme about the quality aspects of the product.

11. Efficient and safe effluent disposal system in latrines is imperative. Without safe effluent disposal system, even well designed and appropriately constructed laterin will fail to serve the purpose. Lack of awarneness of safe effluent disposal, particularly in the rural areas, is another significant constraint in implementing the programmes and system.

4.4.1.3 Availability of data

1. It has been ascertained that large volume of data, records and information is available at various government offices and agencies enganed in similar water and sanitation activities in respect of the work completed, work continuing and work proposed in future. However, most of the required date is not available in digital form. Secondly, there is lack of well-organized authentic data for ready use because the data is scattered and stored in files, records and computers at numerous locations.

2. Most of the data about Jharkhand available on the internet are from web sites of the Central Government agencies. The web sites of state government agencies contain little information, which is rather old. There are vision and mission statements and policy statements or compilation of orders. It is difficult to find on the state governnment sites any map of districts and villages.

3. The Government has appointed agencies like the JSAC to provide satellite imagery data from various resources for planning. The Government is spending substantial amount of money on acquiring this data, but it is difficult to obtain the required and latest data on developmental work.

4. The authenticity and reliability of data and statistics pertaining to states of India, including Jharkhand, sold by private agencies is doubtful. It is rather difficult and expensive for scholars, institutions and planners to obtain the required information and date from official web sites.

Page | 78


5. Recently many institutions and organisations have set up digital libraries to disseminate of information and knowledge to promote and help scholarship, research and planning. Though the access to the resources of the library is both free and paid, yet the arrangement is not reliable and authentic for research and decision-making.

4.4.1.4 Institutional capacity

1. The management of environment at the village level requires a good, efficient, effective, communicative, interactive, transparent, responsive and smooth network, integrating all levels of governance, from policy maker to the worker in the field.

2. It is observed that the process of decision making is skewed towards the top and there us beed fir decentralization at the lower levels for effectiveness of the bulk of work force, which is closer to the field.

3. A clear delegation of power and responsibility is required in the organization to avoid redundancy and different levels of supervision for enhancing the efficiency and accountability in management. All members in the organization must be awared of their duties and responsibilities of work.

4. After duties and responsibilities are delegated and a communication to each member of the organization, he should be imparted the required training and be equipped with necessary information in respect of norms, standards, rules, regulations, laws for efficiently discharging their duties.

5. Units having typical structure or specific geographical jurisdiction should be designed on the basis of requirements of the specific projects under implementation. Personnel of appropriate qualifications and skills should be available to meet the requirements of the project.

6. Serious gaps have been observed between available qualifications and skills and the required qualifications and skills. There is need to ensure that requred number of personnel with necessary qualifications and skills are available in the organization.

7. Units of the organization exist at district headquarters. It was observed that obly one block-level worker available during the visits. It was also found that in a women’s section gram-sakhis were also operating at the village level.

One block-level worker is inadequate for the required work. With additional load of the World Bank project, more workers are required. The number and level of workers will have to be decided on the basis of the number of villages to be effectively supervised by one worker. Each block level worker needsa communication device and a two-wheeler transport for efficiently discharging his duty.

8. Many initiatives are required with the progress of the work for building institutional capacity.

4.5 MAJOR ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS

Implementation of the RWSSP will have a wide range of environmental and social implications. In general, successful implementation of the Program will have high socioeconomic benefits to the people.

4.5.1 The environmental impacts identified include:

4.5.1.1 Potential Positive or Beneficial Impacts

Successful implementation of the Program’s investment subprojects will have numerous benefits including the following:

• Better access to safe drinking water and sanitation facilities, leading to improved standard of living and changes in exposure to both communicable and non-communicable diseases;

Page | 79


• The program will contribute to increase in local development and employment as the local population are likely to be employed during the construction phase and thereafter for construction and water related investments;

• Improved financial, managerial and administrative skills to the community leaders and village water committees due to training package;

• Sanitation will also be promoted with its attendant improvement in the health of the people such as reduced incidence of water borne diseases like malaria, cholera, gastrointestinal disorders etc.;

• From a gender viewpoint, the program will lead into reduced time allocated to water supply for women and children due to closer drinking water sources, and reduced efforts associated with water transportation.

The important benefits include:

i. increased productivity in particular for women as a result of saving time wasted in fetching water;

ii. better opportunity for girls to attend schools instead of spending their time fetching water;

iii. increased representation and participation of women in water committees and holding responsible decision making positions; and (iv) reduced risk of exposure to HIV/AIDS and Sexually Transmitted Infections (STIs) during fetching water far from their households, especially women and girls who are more vulnerable;

• The program is expected to contribute to rural communities well-being associated with improved services, stability, work opportunities, settlements, health, empowerment, education and training. Such benefits would serve as catalyst to sustainable management of water resources; and

• Empowerment of communities by giving them responsibility for planning, implementation and management of their water supply systems and improved public sanitation;

• The program and suggested measures will maximise the use of groundwater and rainwater for climate adaptation and development, to deal with the increased extremes, highs and lows, which are expected as result of climate change.

4.5.1.2 Potential Negative Impacts

• Disturbance of quality of life due to nuisances such as noise during construction;

• Dust and traffic related to construction works;

• Occupational health and safety of workers during construction;

• Disturbance of land and water uses Possibility of rivalry associated with incompatible uses upstream and downstream of the water supply source/system.

• Water resources (reduced water quality at the construction sites of intakes) ;

• interruption of surface water flows during construction; variations in the level of groundwater table resulting from changes in the drainage; over-pumping of groundwater etc);

• Soil resources (soil compaction, mixing of soil horizons, soil erosion may also result from inadequacies in backfilling construction works and improper drainage of storm water);

• Ecosystems (encroachment into ecologically sensitive and protected areas, drainage of wetlands etc); and Flora and fauna (limited removal of the vegetation cover and disturbance of wildlife habitats).

4.5.1.3 Possible Sources of Environmental Impacts

• The project activities will chiefly generate environmental impacts during implementation and operation because of the following reasons:

Page | 80


• The civil works for new structures will sometimes involve construction on virgin land thereby affecting the forests, animals and other natural resources;

• the works may require demolition of existing infrastructure and will generate rubble and waste that will need to be disposed of properly; both the new civil works and the rehabilitation works may require new land; civil works for new structures The works may effect the community physically (air and water pollution, nuisance and contamination etc.) economically (land use, income generation, mobility and community association);

• the water supply services will require additional water abstraction, resulting in changes in ground and surface water regimes, both inside and outside the project impact areas;

• additional use of water will result in increases in waste water generation; • water supply activities and other civil works may cause water stagnation and sanitation problems; • The increase in numbers of people within the project location/areas will result in depletion of natural

resources, pollution of public waters and degradation of soils. Consequently, several environmental components may be affected in one way on another by such activities; and

• The increase in interaction of different types of people will result in health problems caused by various diseases transmitted among these people and arising from high pressure on social and health services such as medical services.

• During the construction of water supply schemes located in the forest areas adverse impacts may occur due to the felling of trees, soil erosion due to trenching, loss of top soil, damage to flora and fauna and the setting in of man-animal conflicts. Since no major construction works are involved the impacts are expected to be minimal, yet, forest land must be avoided and where imperative, the sub project must confirm to the policies and guidelines as laid down by the Forest Department.

4.5.2 Environmental Impacts:

Overall, the project is environment friendly and beneficial for the community. The sub-project components involve simple, appropriate, low cost technologies that do not pose any significant environmental consequences.

The provision of safe drinking water and proper sanitation facilities is expected to have a significant positive impact on the improvement of livelihoods and the environment, including reduction in groundwater pollution. Some minor and temporary negative environmental impacts may occur, resulting mainly from the construction activities. The positive impacts include:

(i) improved quantity and quality of safe drinking water;

(ii) reduction in water related diseases such as diarrhea, dysentery, cholera, typhoid and thereby minimizing the cost of healthcare in households;

(iii) reduction in infant, child and maternal mortality and morbidity due to improved health and sanitation services in the health units;

(iv) reduced distances to water points which will lead to gain in productive time for women and girls; and

(v) better and properly sited sanitation facilities will reduce the risk of contamination of surface and groundwater resources.

Page | 81


The negative impacts include:

(i) risk of industrial accidents during construction;

(ii) management and disposal of waste generated from construction activities; and

(iii) higher risk of HIV/AIDs and STDs due to interactions of contractor staff and the local population. Implementation of the environmental mitigation measures will be undertaken as an integral part of the community empowerment and infrastructure construction activities.

The Project will require small areas of land for the location of small groundwater pumping stations, and, in othercases small storage tanks.

Access to potable water and increased sanitation awareness among the rural population will improve health and sanitation. Improved health conditions will contribute to reduction of the child mortality rate and incidence of waterborne and skin diseases. The number of hours spent on collecting water will be reduced significantly by the establishment of water points and public water standpipes closer to public institutions and homesteads. This will allow women to spend time in productive activities and family welfare. Children, especially girls, will have more time for school work and welfare activities. The steps taken will focus on the need to adopt proper sanitary practices and lead to environmental improvements, health benefits, and increased productivity, resulting in direct socio-economic development. Community-based organizations for water management can help women by empowering them for leadership and networking opportunities and building solidarity among themselves.

Page | 82


CHAPTER-5

ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT FRAMEWORK

Page | 83


5. ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT FRAMEWORK

5.1 ENVIRONMENTAL ANALYSIS

This section presents a summation of the key environmental concerns contextual to the water Supply & Sanitation Sector in Jharkhand which would help Department of Drinking Water & Sanitation (DDWS) of Jharkhand proposed, develop & implement the Environment Management Framework (EMF). The presented issues and the EMF should help the Government of Jharkhand in preparing a strategy which is responsive to the foreseeable environmental pitfalls in the design of the project.

5.1.1 Key Environmental Issues

5.1.1.1 Water Availability

Groundwater has been the major source of water for drinking, irrigation (and also industrial) sectors in Jharkhand. However, extraction of groundwater for drinking and irrigation in the state of Jharkhand is amongst the lowest in India, compared to availability and recharge potential (the current Ground Water utilization is 20% of the recharge potential). The aquifers are therefore under no stress. The sustainability of exploitation of ground water in Jharkhand is afflicted by following factors:

o The general rocky strata make it difficult to bore wells. o Quality of water in many areas not being within norms of acceptability. o Possible pollution of ground water by disposal of fecal matter on open land. o Difficulty in locating proper places where to bore wells. o Short life of hand pumps and tube wells because of reported caving in of the assembly pipe.

About 90% of DDWS schemes in Jharkhand are based on groundwater. There are complaints from the community that some of these sources go dry during summer season (dry period). The remaining few rural schemes (around 7%) in Jharkhand are based on surface water from rivers or dams.

5.1.1.1.1 Estimation of additional water requirement

The DDWS World Bank supported project will involve augmentation, rehabilitation and implementation of Single Village Schemes (SVS) and Multi Village Schemes (MVS), as per details indicated in the Table-27:

Table-27 S NO

DISTRICT

DIVISION

NO OF SCHEMES PROPOSED SVS MSVS MVS MMVS TOTAL

1 GARHWA * GARHWA 476 22 5 2 505 2 GIRIDIH GIRIDIH-1 111 68 10 2 191

GIRIDIH-2 285 19 18 2 324 3 GODDA GODDA 18 458 31 0 507 4 SAHIBGANJ SAHIBGANJ 72 42 16 14 144 5 PAKUR PAKUR 134 228 19 10 391 6 DHANBAD DHANBAD-1 430 0 0 2 432

DHANBAD-2 15 47 5 5 72 7 EAST SINGHBHUM * JAMSHEDPUR 889 51 7 2 949 8 PALAMU * PALAMU 455 5 16 12 488 9 DUMKA * DUMKA 72 334 64 27 497 10 JAMTARA * JAMTARA 146 162 24 10 342 11 KHUTI * KHUTI 308 224 56 2 590 12 SAREIKELA * SAREIKELA 78 29 23 1 131 TOTAL 3489 1689 294 91 5563


Page | 84


The additional estimated water requirement for this project is as worked out in the table below:

5.1.1.1.2 Additional Water Requirement

Table-28

S. No.

Scheme Design Population in lakhs

Total Daily Requirement in MLD; (@70 lpcd)

Total Annual Requirement of drinking water in MCM

Source Name (Aquifer/ River)

Groundwater Surface Water

Annual Replenishable Groundwater; MCM

Net Annual Groundwater Availability; MCM

Annual Groundwater

Draft; (Industrial

and Drinking) MCM

Total Requirement Annually (6) as % of availability (9)

Total land area, sq km

Average annual rainfall

Estimated surface water available annually MCM

Total Requirement Annually (5) as % of Flow (14)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 Garhwa * 5.99 46.1 17 Acquifer/ River 283.08 266.34 53.27 6.32 4044 1193 482.45 3.49 2 Giridih 7 53.9 20 Acquifer/ River 339.71 319.62 63.92 6.16 4853 1200 582.36 3.38

3 Godda 11.04 85.0 31 Acquifer/ River 141.92 133.53 54.14 23.24 2110 1063 224.29 13.83

4 Sahibganj 7.68 59.1 22 Acquifer/ River 112.00 105.38 21.08 20.48 1600 1575 252.00 8.57

5 Pakur 8.27 63.7 23 Acquifer/ River 142.36 133.94 17.31 17.35 1805 1399 252.52 9.20

6 Dha’bad 8.97 69.1 25 Acquifer/ River 143.11 134.65 34.4 18.72 2042 1241 253.41 9.95

7 E.S’bhum* 10.76 82.9 30 Acquifer/ River 247.31 232.68 46.54 13.00 3533 1100 388.63 7.78

8 Palamu * 8.31 64.0 23 Acquifer/ River 341.03 320.86 64.17 7.28 5247 1163 610.23 3.83

9 Dumka * 10.77 82.9 30 Acquifer/ River 260.12 244.74 48.95 12.37 3716 1100 408.76 7.41

10 Jamtara 3.09 23.8 9 Acquifer/ River 144.01 135.49 21.4 6.41 1792 1294 231.88 3.75

11 Khunti * 4.91 37.8 14 Acquifer/ River 182.77 171.96 34.39 8.02 2611 1111 290.08 4.76

12 Saraikela * 2.71 20.9 8 Acquifer/ River 190.89 179.60 35.92 4.24 2727 1176 320.70 2.37

89.5 689.15 251.54 2528.32 2378.79 495.49 36080.00 14615.00 4297.31


Page | 85


JHARKHAND STATE (CGWB)

1. Surface Water - M.C.M. 25876.98 2. Allocation for irrigation required by fields - M.C.M. 3813.17 3. Industry Requirement - M.C.M. 4338 4. Urban area requirement - lakh gallons 1616.35 5. Availability in urban area - lakh gallons 734.35

NOTES/ ASSUMPTIONS

1 Figures about ground water in columns 7, 8 and 9 for districts for which data is not available has been worked out on proportionate basis from the CGWB data.

2 Figures about surface water in columns 11, 12 and 13 for districts for which data is not available has been worked out on proportionate basis from the CGWB data.

3 Total requirement worked out in Col-5 is included in the draft worked out in Col-9. 4 The ground water potential of the state is grossly underutilised at 20% at present. 5 In Col-13 the estimated quantity of water available has been taken as 10% of the annual rainfall 6 In Col-10 the percentages shown are for all the schemes utilising ground water resource 7 In Col-14 the percentages shown are for all the schemes utilising surface water resource 8 The design populations in Col-3 are as per the information available from SWSM 9 No waste water will be allowed to flow into the rivers from sanitation units proposed under the project.

10 Most of the drinking water in rural areas of Jharkhand is being drawn presently from ground water sources The drinking water requirement worked out here is (smaller or larger part of it) included in the ground water draft figures of the CGWB

JHARKHAND STATE (CGWB) Area Sq km 79714 Rainfall 917 Annual replenishable GW resource, BCM 5.58 Net annual GW availability, BCM 5.25 Annual GW draft, BCM 1.06 Stage of GW development 20%

Page | 86


The total requirement of water for the proposed schemes is 516 million litres per day, which is equal to nearly 190 million cubic metres per year. Against this requirement the Annual Replenishable Groundwater Resources in Jharkhand are more than 22000 mcm. The ground water draft is only 2.8% of the available (replenishable) quantity of ground water.

5.1.1.1.3 Measures to Augment Water Supplies

In the interest of resource conservation and optimization of national assets, it is essential to first improve on the existing resources; therefore the emphasis should be on:

Rehabilitation/ Upgrading of existing water supply schemes should be a priority wherever feasible.

Rehabilitation of reservoirs for storing rainwater and augmenting groundwater recharge, recycling and reuse of treated water are to be implemented.

In case where water supply from surface source schemes is affected during the lean periods, the schemes should be designed either with enhanced storage.

Distant sources will have to be tapped to augment water supply with simple treatment (Slow Sand Filters or conventional Rapid Sand Filters), chlorination drinking water of desired quality

Box-5

JHARKHAND

Issues

Drinking water

A Quality issues

• Water quality problems due to mining activities, Arsenic, Iron, Chromium, Fluoride etc. High turbidity in groundwater.

• Water quality problems due to indiscriminate waste water discharges. • High MPN count in a majority of tube wells possibly due to soak pits leachate

finding its way through fissures: Lack of disinfection. • Lack of perception amongst inhabitants on quality criteria. • Water supplies drying up due to limited storage in inter rock voids through

fissures and crevices. • Soil contamination in areas near mining.(especially radio activity) • Preference for surface water which is qualitatively poorer but easily accessed.

B Quantity issues Hand pumps installed in contaminated areas do not ensure quality.

• Installation of hand pumps and tube wells is done on land availability criteria rather than water availability.

• Short life span of tube wells became either of the strata drying up or the caving in of the tube wells due to suspected corrosivity.

C Mitigation Measures

• Appropriate fluoride treatment units should be provided with the hand pumps. In case of a treatment unit being out of order standby hand pumps may be used till the units are brought back into operation.

• Expertise in hydrogeological investigations may be developed in house and teams may be built and set up at the block or district level as the need may be. Alternatively the task of investigations and deciding proper locations for hand pumps or tube wells and assessing yield may be out sourced or contracted on a long term basis.

• The state govt of Jharkhand has been paying substantial amounts of money to the JSAC from time to time for mapping various resourced in the state and for estimating yield or availability of these resources. The DWSD may organize training of selected officials of the rank of assistant engineers and junior engineers who stay close to the field, in interpreting the maps and in actually using them for pin-pointing exact locations of hand pumps and tube wells and estimating their yields.

• To the extent mining agencies are responsible for discharging polluted water into the natural drainage system, they can be compelled under provisions of law to provide appropriate treatment to their spent water, and , in addition, should fund detailed scientific investigation for identifying and demarcating the area in which the quality of ground water is affected. Agencies can be taxed on the basis of damage they cause to environment. (The principal of polluter pays)

• If test results are credible the presence of high MPN in waters extracted from deep tube wells should be taken serious note of. The first thing that needs to be done is verification of the results. Second a thorough investigation should be made of the causes of this bacterial pollution of ground water since large number of people is using ground water. If investigations trace the source of pollution to current sanitation practices, then another team of investigators will need to work out changes needed in the sanitation practices.

• Tampering of long conveyance mains. • The team investigating degraded quality of water from tube wells will also

investigate reasons for high turbidity. If it is contributed by minerals present in the available geological formations appropriate treatment will need to be provided. If turbidity is caused by caving in of tube well assembly because of corrosion of the mild steel pipe used in the assembly there could be two alternatives: Either glass reinforced plastic pipe (GRP), or fibre reinforced plastic (FRP) pipe or some other non-metallic pipe could be used in the sembly, as it is being widely used at many places, or devices to protect assembly pipe from corrosion, like cathodic protection, could be used.

Page | 87


standards (especially in Uranium affected areas). In cases where the drinking water supply source involves extraction from a critical or overexploited

aquifer the emphasis must be on water conversation (including ground water recharge and rainwater harvesting).

Efficiency of use of water should be promoted through awareness & regulation.

5.1.1.2 Water Quality

5.1.1.2.1 Surface Water Quality

The major sources of surface water in Jharkhand are the rivers, impounding structures such as dams and bunds built across rivers for holding rain water.

Surface sources are more open to pollution than the ground water sources because they receive domestic waste directly, without passing through filtering media like the ground water does. Consequently the surface water receives both the liquid and the solid waste. Washeries from coal mines and other mines, which are abundant in Jharkhand, discharge into the surface drainage system. The quality of surface water sources, therefore, gets seriously deteriorated. The pollution level becomes more severe during periods when the flow in the river is not sufficient to cause adequate dilution of the discharged effluents.

5.1.1.2.2 Environmental Concerns:

1. Non point sources of pollution in the catchment areas due to the widely prevalent practice of open defecation, washing, bathing and other human activities in rivers serving as water supply sources

2. Discharge of untreated or inadequately treated municipal and industrial wastes in receiving water bodies or on land

3. Breakage/ leakage in rising mains, distribution lines and valve chambers 4. Streams & Water bodies are affected due to Ore- Waste, Coal Washeries, and detritus. 5. Improper collection, storage and handling of water at the individual household level

5.1.1.2.3 Ground Water Quality

The groundwater quality in many parts of Jharkhand is poor owing to natural presence of iron, fluorides, arsenic, nitrates and even bacteriological pollutionin concentrations exceeding permissible levels for drinking water use. In addition, the quality of groundwater also indicates contamination due to inadequate treatment and disposal of sullage, effluent from septic tanks or industrial effluents. According to the estimates of the RWSS department, about 80% of villages in Jharkhand suffer from poor water quality conditions.

5.1.1.2.4 Environmental Concerns

• Presence of iron, fluoride, arsenic & nitrates at concentrations exceeding the permissible levels for drinking water use;

• Bacteriological or chemical contamination due to inadequate treatment and disposal of sullage, effluent from septic tanks or industrial discharges.

• Operational problems including inefficient and irregular disinfection

5.1.2 Implications for the Design & Implementation:

The emergent concern be addressed by the EMF include the siting, planning, design, and operation of the schemes. Further, the EMF should ensure that the implementation ensures the water quality of the source, and that water quality at household delivery level meets the drinking water norms. More specifically:

1. Source Selection for the water supply should be done after investigation of potential sources. Selection should be based on the guidelines provided in Annexure 5. The water quality testing should be done prior to source selection of water supply schemes (refer Annexure 3). Further a sanitary survey needs to be taken up in accordance with the guidelines given in Annexure 6. Sanitary protection of water supply

Page | 88


sources is prescribed in Annexure 11. Annexure 13 presents guidelines for sustainability of groundwater sources.

2. For fluoride affected and other contaminated viz Arsenic etc villages the strategy should be distant safe groundwater (SVS) or distant surface water (MVS) as detailed in Annexure 12.

3. In case quality of available water is very poor and no distant surface water source is available, advanced treatment options like iron removal units, Reverse Osmosis (RO) plants can be opted. Dual water supply can be adopted, supply of limited quantity of safe, potable water (say 10-15 Lpcd) from systems which are expensive to build operate and maintain (eg. RO Plant) and continue with existing supplies after ultra filtration for not potable purposes.

4. Effective and regular disinfection, as well as preventive and corrective maintenance of water distribution systems should be ensured.

5. Water supply sources need to be protected as per the guidelines given in Annexure 11.

6. A protocol for regular water quality testing and control (refer Annexure 3) will have to be developed by DDWS, which will be implemented through the operations phase of the water supply schemes. Water quality testing for chemical contaminants shall be conducted by the DDWS, in a phased manner based on an initial sampling of groundwater and surface waters in the districts of the state before taking up subprojects in that area.

5.1.3 Environmental Sanitation

The present level of sanitation coverage in the rural areas of the state is only 8%. Only less than half of the rural households with latrines are using them regularly. This implies that still more than 90% of rural population resort to open defecation with its associated risk to water supply sources. Open defecation constitutes a major nonpoint source of pollution of surface and ground waters. Poor environmental sanitation conditions and lack of adequate supply of safe water are factors responsible for high incidence of water borne/

Box-6

Sanitation Issues • More than 90% rural population defecates in open. Fixed mind set in

favour of open defecation. • Most areas near water bodies. • Inability to pay for toilets. • Disposal of excreta is not proper. • Only soak pits installed. Low sensitivity on advantages of septic tanks.

Coupled with hard rock. They could be a source of bacterial contamination of groundwater.

• Lack of awareness on importance of sanitation. • Lack of standard designs. • Waste water from households including cowshed wastes etc flow

freely in village drains or stagnate. This seeps to ground water. • Stagnant waste water leads to poor personal hygiene and results in

contagious and other infectious diseases. • Solid waste being indiscriminately disposed.

Mitigation Measures • A continuous, prolonged awareness campaign will need to be

organized in a professional manner to make a worthwhile impact. • First of all the basic cost of unit could be made to have options,

considering that certain items of work could be done by beneficiaries themselves, like construction of superstructure, or construction of roof which could be dispensed with if needed or improvised. The issue of affordability could also be dealt with by having tie up with banks for providing credit facilities to beneficiaries with repayment schedules to suit their pockets.

• Good practices in sanitation should be propagated and disseminated and people motivated to emulate such practices through organized publicity campaigns covering other aspects of sanitation as well.

• Procedural handicaps will need to be overcome in order to make the sanitation programme fruitful. Easier and hassle-free procedure could be thought of for this purpose.

• Experience has been that if the entire latrine unit could be pre-fabricated with minimum material and labour required to be used at site, it will substantially enhance credibility of the product to be delivered, and perhaps also considerably help the prospects of the programme.

• Looking to the variety of situations and site conditions in different parts of the state and in view of the fact that sanitation is so important to health, and therefore to the productivity of the state, it is necessary to assign the task of designing sanitation units along with arrangements for disposal of effluent for different conditions to a team of researchers and people drawn from field. This team should come out with the designs, drawings, specifications, estimates and take action for standardization of these designs etc first of all within the state and then the BIS (Bureau of Indian Standards), NBO (National Building Organization), CPHEEO (Central Public Health & Environmental Engineering Organization) and BMTPC (Building Material & Technology Promotion Council).

• Location of toilets should follow good sanitation, environmental and pollution control practices as per uniform guidelines.

• Drinking water, sullage and sewer lines should be kept away as per standard practices.

• Remodeling of existing ponds in order to assimilate or obviate sullage flows.

• Treating sewage and sullage and utilization in horticulture, agriculture, aquaculture, etc. Designing and commissioning treatment systems.

• Disinfection of ponds and drains. • Community solid waste management schemes to be drawn up.

Page | 89


water related diseases in the rural areas.

5.1.3.1 Environmental Concerns

1. Rampant open field defecation due to inadequate latrines, low usage of latrines and low levels of awareness.

2. Wastewater generated by the households, including the wastewater from cattle sheds, flows into open surface drains leading to stagnation in the lanes and bylanes. There are instances of effluent from latrines or septic tanks finding its way to the drainage system, if there is any, or on to open land.

3. Without adequate arrangements for treatment and disposal, the wastewater often seeps into hand pumps, open dug wells and pipelines, and the village ponds leading to contamination of aquifers and loss of productive uses.

4. The presence of stagnant water in the villages combined with poor personal hygiene leads to the incidence of malaria and other vector borne diseases, diahorreal diseases, etc.

5. Solid wastes of decomposable and nondecomposablenatue are collected together and disposed by mere dumping along streets and public places leading to stinking and vector breeding.

5.1.3.2 Suggestions for Design & Implementation:

1. Construction of latrines and awareness creation for increased usage. Selection of safe sanitation technologies and environmental considerations in location of toilets is given in Annexure 14. Annexure 15 presents recommended construction practices and pollution safeguards for Twin Pit Pour Flush Latrines.

2. Efficient design of surface sullage drains and adoption of good construction practices, along with a system of regular maintenance can ensure that stagnant pools of sullage are eliminated. The guidelines for safe sullage disposal at household and community levels are given in Annexure 16.

3. Adopting the recommended practice of laying water and sullage lines on different sides of the road reduces the risk of cross contamination.

4. Existing ponds can be remodelled to accommodate increased sullage flow. 5. Adequate treatment and gainful utilization of the treated effluent/ sullage is possible in agriculture,

aquaculture and agro forestry. The treatment system could be any of the following: o Stabilization ponds, o Duckweed ponds, o Constructed wetlands, etc.

Suitable consultants may be commissioned to do the required studies, preparation of detailed project reports and for construction supervision for these schemes.

6. Vector control to the ponds and drains carrying sullage should be ensured by way of avoiding stagnation and spraying with nonhazardous insecticides in conformity with OP 4.09.

7. Solid waste management including segregation of wastes at source, collection at door step, recycling of nondegradable wastes, composting of biodegradable wastes, safe disposal of hazardous wastes, demarcated land fill sites, etc. Guidelines for community solid waste management are given in Annexure 17.

5.1.4 Construction Stage Environmental Impacts

The implementation phase of the project and the construction activities are likely to cause environmental impacts and these which may be transient and negative in nature would need to be addressed. Some of the likely issues are the following:

Page | 90


• During the construction of components of water supply schemes, underground drainage, drains and sanitation facilities, significant earth work may be involved, which may cause erosion of land and cutting of trees.

Possible damage to places of cultural, heritage and recreational importance.

Impact on human health and safety due to dust and noise pollution, and inadequate safety measures. The safety provisions (Building) convention 1937 (No. 62) is given at the end of annexures under Annexure 24.

5.1.4.1 Mitigation Measures

All schemes should be designed to have minimal adverse environmental impacts and an environmental mitigation and management plan with dedicated funding drawn up and monitored for compliance. 5.1.5 Environmental Management Framework

5.1.5.1 Objectives of EMF

The Jharkhand Rural Water Supply and Sanitation Project will finance investments in rural water supply and sanitation improvement schemes to serve the rural populations in Jharkhand. The project interventions are, therefore, expected to result in benefits to the rural communities, through improved quality and delivery levels of RWSS services. Some of the main environmental health benefits expected under the project include: increased and better quality water for drinking and other domestic uses; drudgery reduction (time and energy savings through providing water supply closer to homes) improvements in personal hygiene and village sanitation levels; and reduced fecal & oral contamination of drinking water resulting in lower occurrence of diseases.

The project interventions are expected to result in environmental and public health improvements in the state, however, adverse environmental impacts can occur if the schemes are not properly designed, implemented, and maintained. To ensure that the identified environmental issues are addressed in the various stages of the implementation of subprojects, an Environment Management Framework (EMF) has been developed for this project. The objectives of the EMF are as follows:

• To provide a systematic approach for identifying the various possible environmental impacts at the different stages of the scheme.

• To identify appropriate mitigation measures for addressing the identified environmental impacts.

• To devise an institutional arrangement for mainstreaming environmental management in project implementation processes.

Box-7

POSSIBLE SOURCES OF ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS

The project activities will chiefly generate environmental impacts during implementation and operation because of the following reasons:

• The civil works for new structures will sometimes involve construction on virgin land thereby affecting the forests, animals and other natural resources;

• The rehabilitation works will require demolition of existing infrastructure and will generate rubble and waste that will need to be disposed of properly; both the new civil works and the rehabilitation works may require new land; civil works for new structures as well as rehabilitation works will affect the communities.

• both physically (air and water pollution, nuisance and contamination etc.); and socio- economically (land use, income generation, mobility and community association);

• the water supply services will require additional water abstraction, resulting in changes in ground and surface water regimes, both inside and outside the project impact areas;

• additional use of water will result in increases in waste water generation;

• water supply activities and other civil works may cause water stagnation and sanitation problems;

• The increase in numbers of people within the project location/areas will result in depletion of natural resources, pollution of public waters and degradation of soils. Consequently, several environmental components may be affected in one way on another by such activities; and

• The increase in interaction of different types of people will result in social and health problems caused by various diseases transmitted among these people and arising from high pressure on social and health services such as medical services.

Page | 91


5.1.5.2 Key Elements of the EMF

The key elements of the EMF as applied to a project sponsored scheme are discussed below:

1. Collection of Basic Environmental Data:

The EMF requires that basic environmental data pertaining to the proposed scheme be compiled at the field data collection stage. For this purpose, an Environmental Data Sheet (EDS) has been formulated for schemes on water supply, sanitation, solid and liquid waste management, etc. The formats for the EDSs for different types of schemes are furnished in Annexure 18. The AEE/ EE of the DDWS will fill up the EDS in consultation with the GPWSC and with the facilitation support of the NGO/ SO.

The EDS will be submitted to the Environmental Specialist at the DPMU along with the analysis note for a decision on the scheme classification.

2. Classification of Schemes for Environmental Screening:

At the Detailed Project Report (DPR) preparation stage, the available environmental information in the EDS will be evaluated and based on the level of expected environmental and public health impacts. The proposed scheme would be classified as Category 1 and Category 2, based on the potential impacts, whether limited or significant The EDS formats, given in Annexure 18. The screening tool for the categorization of schemes is furnished in Annexure 19. The environmental classification of schemes, by using the screening tool, is done by the ES of the DPMU and submitted to Project Manager DPMU. Subsequently, the concerned division of DDWS, will also ensure that the scheme is evaluated in terms of applicability of the various policies, laws and guidelines and necessary procedures followed and obtain necessary clearances and permissions from the concerned authorities.

3. Environmental Appraisal and Approval:

For category 2 schemes, a detailed environmental appraisal is required by the district level environmental expert attached to DPSU. In extreme cases, where the district level resources are not sufficient for conducting the environmental appraisal and designing the appropriate mitigation measures, support from the environmental experts of state level PSU would be requested. The environmental appraisal for category 2 schemes can be completed within 30 days.

For all category 1 schemes, there shall be no separate environment appraisal other than filling up of EDS, included in the DSR.

The Detailed Scheme Report (DSR) for Category 1 schemes should be accompanied by the Environmental Data Sheet (EDS). The EE of the DDWS will ensure this. The Detailed Scheme Report (DSR) for Category 2 schemes should be accompanied by the Environmental Data Sheet (EDS) as well as the Category 2 environmental appraisal. The EE of the DDWS will ensure this.

Each scheme could be accorded technical clearance only after getting an Environmental clearance from the Environmental Specialist.

4. Environmental Compliance Monitoring during Implementation and O&M phases:

The EMF will ensure the following:

1. Each scheme has to be drawn up an environmental mitigation and management plan and allocate required funds. Integrated environmental considerations are required at the operation phase.

Page | 92


2. The management plan, drawn up for all the phases of the project, shall be reviewed at predecided intervals by various authorities for grant of compliance certificates of compliance. Third party compliance monitoring and auditing could be an in-built feature of the project.

3. The prescribed environmental mitigation measures, (including construction stage measures) as identified through the environmental appraisal process, have to be adequately implemented. The Implementation Completion Report of each scheme will include an Environmental Compliance Certificate given by the GPWSC for SVS and MWSC for MVS, indicating that the mitigation measures identified in the appraisal have been implemented.

4. Capacity building and IEC activities have to be undertaken for effective implementation of the EMF, including assessment procedures, supervision and monitoring as well as for community awareness and sensitization on personal hygiene, environmental sanitation and water conservation.

5. Monitoring of external environmental parameters once in a year and drawing up State of Environmental Reports for the village has to be done on an annual basis for monitoring impacts and building up into a state data base.

6. Creating appropriate institutional capacities to implement schemes and manage the project at various levels.

7. Designing and implementing a comprehensive plan for training at various levels and provide adequate funding support.

5.1.6 Application of EMF to Project

The EMF has to be systematically implemented for all the project sponsored schemes to mainstream environmental management. Further it has to be ensured that the EMF needs are integrated in the scheme cycle.

The following table provides an overview of various EMF activities in the preplanning, planning, implementation and O&M phases of the proposed scheme cycle for the project sponsored schemes. The responsibilities are also indicated in the table against the respective tasks for proper implementation.

Table-29 Environmental Management Framework

Phase EMF Activity Objectives Process Responsibility Result Initial Screening Phase / Planning

Village identification & filling up of Environmental Data Sheet

To collect basic information on the proposed scheme, source environmental status

Public consultation with community and identification environmental issues of Complete EDS with supplementary notes if required.concern.

SOs, with DPMU JE/AE/DDWS with assistance from SO and NGOs.

EDS prepared and attached to DPR.

Classification of the scheme vis a vis

To ensure that schemes with potentially significant environmental or public health issues are identified at an early stage for

Evaluate all the available information on environmental scheme is Category 1 or Category 2 based on screening criteria.

EE/DWSD with Environmental Expert, DPMU.

Scheme classified as 1 OR 2 Category using the screening criteria.

Page | 93


Phase EMF Activity Objectives Process Responsibility Result detailed environmental appraisal.

Environmental assessment and approval of classification

To ensure that identified environmental issues and appropriate mitigation measures have been incorporated

For category 1 schemes, there shall be no separate environmental appraisal but environmental aspects shall be included in the normal appraisal and evaluation process for the proposed scheme, based on the EDS included in the DPR. For category2 schemes, a detailed environmental appraisal of the proposed scheme is required, (including evaluation of environmental and public health impacts, risk assessment if needed, and design of mitigation measures.)

Environmental Expert, DPMU.

Environmental appraisal of the Category 2 scheme is made using the Checklist for Environmental Appraisal as per Annexure 19 and an appropriate environmental management plan developed

Addition of all Environmental issues & concerns by approved mitigation measures

To ensure that mitigation measures and their cost are incorporated in the DPR

Technical Sanction for the scheme will not be accorded without Environmental Clearance from PSU

As per the Financial Handbook of the Government of Jharkhand

Technical Sanction for scheme with environmental mitigation measures and its costs are integrated in the DPR.

Implementation Implementation of Environmental mitigation measures.

To ensure that the mitigation measures at construction stage are implemented.

Construction supervision will ensure compliance at different stages of implementation progress. Implementation Completion Report (ICR) for schemes will need to include compliance certificate that all (prescribed) environmental mitigation measures have been implemented.

WSC for Schemes, SOs, CS Agency

ICR with Progress Reports and environmental compliance information.

O&M Environmental supervision, monitoring, and evaluation IEC and capacity building on

To ensure that environmental aspects are integrated in the O&M phase.

Check if all safeguards are met. 10%schemes at 6 monthly intervals -- Water quality monitoring will be conducted as per project water quality

By a team from DWSC - State Level Environmental Expert supported by

Issues for redressal = Water quality monitoring reports.

Page | 94


Phase EMF Activity Objectives Process Responsibility Result hygiene and environmental issues.

monitoring protocol. = Internal supervision will be conducted for 20% of the schemes completed once in a year. All UGD/ Sewerage schemes will be supervised twice a year. - Monitoring of external environmental parameters relevant to the project will be conducted once in a year. Environmental Audit through external agency will be conducted once in a year by selecting about 10% of schemes completed. IEC on (i) need for drainage improvement/ sullage treatment in villages, (ii) personal and public hygiene, and (iii) need for water conservation. - Environmental audit, once a year of 5% of schemes -

District Level Environmental Experts. - State Level Environmental Expert (SPSU) with assistance from State Level Technical Expert (SPSU)-State Level Environmental Expert (SPSU) with assistance from State Level Technical Expert (SPSU). - External Agency to be nominated by the SPSU -

- Periodic environmental supervision, monitoring and audit reports. - Training and IEC activity reports and report on environmental status. Mid way corrections in EMF - Audit reports and evaluation -

5.1.7 Environmental Supervision and Monitoring

The organizational set up of the Government of Jharkhand that would manage the environmental framework has been shown in the diagram below:

Page | 95


The EMF requires detailed supervision, monitoring and evaluation of the impact of the project on the environment. This includes:

Environmental supervision: A sample of 10% of the completed schemes will be visited at six monthly intervals by a team from the DWSC (including the District Resource Persons – Environmental Management) to check if all safeguard requirements are met and to identify any issues that need to be addressed. The selected sample will have representation of both 1 and Category 2schemes in water supply, sanitation and waste management. Annexure 20 gives details of the sampling procedure for the supervision and Annexure 21 gives the format of the supervision report. However, internal environmental monitoring will be done as part of the regular monitoring by the DWSS.

Monitoring of relevant external environmental parameters: Once every year, the state Project Support Unit (PSU) will prepare a report of the environmental situation in the state including data and analysis of relevant parameters such as rainfall, depth to water levels, status of groundwater basins, incidence of water borne diseases, etc., as well as a listing of relevant new legislation and regulations that have a bearing on the environmental performance of the project. The EMF will be suitably revised annually on the basis of this document by the PSU.

Environmental audit: Once every year, the SPSU will appoint an external agency to undertake an independent audit of the environmental performance of the project. 5% of the completed schemes will be covered in the audit having representation of both Category 1 and Category 2 schemes in water supply, sanitation and waste management. The Annexure 22 presents details of sampling and the Annexure 23 gives a list of performance indicators to be used in these audits.

5.1.8 Institutional Arrangements

5.1.8.1 Village Level GPWSC and SOs

The GPWSC is a local level institution, set up as a subcommittee of the Gram Panchayat, to take up total responsibilities for all activities related to RWSS at the village level. They will be supported by (non

• RWSS-SWSM SECRETARIAT• M& E UNIT• FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT UNIT

PMU

DWSMDPMUs

VWSC SCHEME LEVEL COMMITTEEFOR MVS

RWSS STATE LEVELOFFICES

RWSS DISTRICT LEVELOFFICERS OF DWSD

RWSS STATE LEVELOFFICERS OF DWSD

RWSS RELATEDDISTRICT LEVEL OFFICERS

OF DWSD

RWSS SWSM(Apex Committee)

GOVERNMENT OFJHARKHAND

GRAM PANCHAYAT

Page | 96


government) Support Organizations (SOs), selected for a cluster of villages within a particular geographical boundary. The SOs will primarily be responsible for providing community development and external liaison support to the GPWSCs on a day to day basis.

The responsibility of facilitating planning and implementation of EMF activities at the village level is vested with the GPWSC and SOs. One SO is expected to service 10-20 GPs. The TOR for the SO would include specific responsibilities pertaining to the EMF, including facilitation of the GPWSC's participation in filling up the EDS in certifying the implementation of the environmental mitigation measures, in identifying and meeting capacity building needs. The AEE/ AE, DDWS will support the GPWSC and SOs in execution of these functions. The project will develop capacities of both GPWSC and SO through training and other information sharing measures to execute these functions effectively.

5.1.8.2 Scheme Level Committee (SLC) for MVSs

Considering the complexity of MVSs, the decisions regarding environmental appraisal, implementation of mitigation measures and supervision will be jointly taken up by the ZP RWSS department in consultation with the SLC. The SLC will have one member from each of GPWSCs related to GPs of the MVSs. The EE, DDWS will be the chair person of the SLC.

5.1.8.3 Disrtict Level

Similar arrangements are envisaged in DWSMs through District Water and Sanitation Committee (DWSC) to ensure the all RWSS plans follow and are in conformity with the EMF, and to ensure proper planning and monitoring of EMF activities at the district level, and also coordination between the District and SWSM.

The EE will be responsible for ensuring EMF implementation within the district. He will also select the external experts for appraisal of Category II schemes, if required. There will be a District Support Unit at the district level under the control of the EE. This DSU will be responsible for implementation of the environmental management activities in accordance with the EMF at the district level. The DSU will have a District Level Environmental Expert in the unit. The DSU will have number of District Resource Persons (DRPs) in the cadre of Executive Engineer (EE) and one of the DRPs will be trained in environmental management (EM).

5.1.8.4 State Level

At the State level the EC committee prepares the environment policy and sets the guidelines for the EMF implementation, monitoring and evaluation. This committee also liaises with other departments with regard to environmental issues.

The Project Director, SWSM will be responsible for ensuring the implementation of the EMF across the state. One State Level Environmental Expert in the state PSU will ensure that environmental management activities are in conformity with the EMF and that necessary guidance and budget is provided to implement these plans.

Table-30 Role and responsibilities of the major players in implementing the EMF

Institutional Arrangement for Implementation of the EMF

Level Institution Function Responsibility State State water

Sanitation Mission (SWSM)/ PSU

Ensure overall implementation of the EMF in the project. Arrange funds required for implementing the provisions of EMF. Ensure availability of required human resources for implementation of EMF. Ensure that recommendations from supervision and monitoring are integrated into the project and the EMF is updated periodically as necessary.

PD, PMU supported by the State Level Environmental Expert

SE, DWSM, District LevelEnvironment Expert, DPMU, DRP-EM

Page | 97


Level Institution Function Responsibility Recruit external experts for conducting Environmental Audit once in a year and ensure that the relevant recommendations are integrated into the project. Conduct environmental supervision of all Under Ground Drainage/ Sewerage schemes on a half yearly basis.

District District Water and Sanitation Mission (DWSM)/ DWSC

Training and Capacity Building of SOs, GPWSC, Environmental Management (EM) and District Resource Person – Environmental Management (DRP-EM)on EMF. Coordination between various players and actors involved in EMF. Coordinate with other line departments on environment related issues; in particular with State Ground Water Directorate for water level monitoring.

EE, DWSM supported by the District Level Environmental Expert, DPSU

DPMU Day-to-day management, responsible for undertaking all activities necessary for implementation of the EMF. Carry out regular monitoring and supervision of the EMF implementation through appropriate mechanisms (and report the same to SWSM and DWSM as necessary). Supervising the accuracy of the environmental appraisal conducted by AEE/AE, DDWS as part of the scrutiny of the schemes – including checking if the screening is accurate, if the Environmental Data Sheet has been filled in as required etc. Evaluation of EDS and categorize the scheme into one of the categories A, B & C. Conduct Category A environmental appraisal using the Detailed Appraisal Sheet, if required or in cases where external technical support is required for conducting Category A appraisal – forwarding to the EE for decision on selection of suitable expert for conducting detailed appraisal for category A schemes and preparation of Detailed Appraisal Sheet (DAS) to identify the environmental impacts and designing mitigation measures. The mitigation measures are included in Environmental Management Plan (EMP) to be implemented along with various components of the scheme. Conduct supervision visits to 20% of the completed schemes twice in the year (in coordination with the PSU). Provide technical advice and guidance on environmental management to SO, GPs & GPWSCs. Provide inputs to DWSC on relevant environmental policies. Ensure capacity building of all stakeholders in environmental management. Design and implement IEC campaigns on environmental management. Maintain a database consisting of relevant baseline environmental information of the district, environmental appraisal of the various ongoing and completed schemes, findings of supervision, etc. Coordinate with institutions, agencies and individuals relating to environmental management including the regional offices of the JSPCB, Forest Department, etc.

Page | 98


Level Institution Function Responsibility Collect, collate and publish data and information on EMF implementation in the project.

Village GP Water and Sanitation Committee (GPWSC) with the support of Support Organization (SO)

Participation in preparation of Environmental Data Sheet (EDS) to be enclosed to Detailed Scheme Report (DSR). The committee shall deliberate on environmental safeguards relevant to the schemes and adopt the same during construction and implementation Certifying the implementation of environmental mitigation measures as part of the implementation completion report. Facilitate IEC activities regarding water conservation, sanitation and hygiene among the villagers.

President, GPWSC, SO, EE/ AE, DDWS

Support Organization (SO)

Provide support to the EE/AE DDWS in preparing the EDS. Facilitating participation of the community in preparation of EDS as part of the DSR preparation and in certification process (for environmental mitigation measures) for implementation completion report. Liaison with forest department, JPCB, and other related departments at scheme level for ensuring implementation of identified mitigation measures (permissions, technical support, etc.). Provide support in execution of the IEC activities on EMF. Provide support to the DDWS in the supervision, monitoring and audit activities of the EMF. Train the GPWSC/ MWSC in conforming to EMF requirements in operation and maintenance of Under Ground Drainage/ Sewerage schemes.

Directors of SO

Scheme Level Committee (SLC) (wherever multiple schemes are proposed in IGP)

Participation in EDS preparation of MVS. Participation in certification process for implementation of environmental mitigation measures as part of implementation completion report. To make efforts for spreading awareness regarding sanitation and hygiene among the member villages of the MVSs.

President, GPWSC, SO, EE/ AE, DDWS

5.1.9 Performance Indicators

A list of environmental performance indicators which can be integrated with the overall project indicators for monitoring and evaluation of the project performance are given in Annexure 23.

5.1.10 Training and Capacity Building

The DDWS Jharkhand at present has limited capacity for environmental management. The capacity building and IEC strategy has been outlined as part of the EMF program developed for the project, aiming at building environmental awareness and environmental management capacity in the project administration structure as well as in the intended target communities. Capacity building for environmental management will be integrated with overall capacity building component of the project.

Page | 99


5.1.10.1 Objectives

The objectives of the capacity building initiatives are: • To build and strengthen the capability of rural water and sanitation service delivery institutions (PRIs

and DDWS) and other partners (NGOs, Contractors, Consultants) to integrate sound environmental management into water and sanitation service delivery.

• To orient the service delivery staff and elected PRI representatives to the requirements of the project’s environmental management framework.

5.1.10.2 Approach

Systematic capacity building initiatives will be introduced only after completion of Institutional Analysis and assessment of the training requirements. The training will be of cascade mode. All the trained staff and others will in turn conduct further trainings at state, district, mandal and village levels. However, since capacity building goes beyond mere imparting training, institutionalization of best practices becomes a prerequisite for improved service delivery.

5.1.10.3 Institutions for Training

In view of the specialized training and capacity building envisaged under the EMF of the project, it is necessary to identify nodal training institutes to closely work with capacity building wing of PSU for conceptualizing, designing, conducting and managing training programs on the EMF. Some of the specialized institutions for the requirements include:

• National Institute of Rural Development (NIRD) • Engineering Staff College of India (ESCI) • National Academy of Construction (NAC) • Visvesvaraya Sanitation and Water Academy, Ranchi • State Institute of Rural Development, Ranchi • Administrative Training Institute, Ranchi • Indian Institute of Mines, Dhanbad • BITS MESRA, Ranchi • Administrative Staff College of India, Hyderabad

5.1.10.4 Details of Training Programmes

5.1.10.5 Training on the Environmental Management Framework

5.1.10.5.1 Purpose of the Training:

To equip with knowledge and skills necessary for undertaking environmental appraisal as per the requirements of the EMF

To prepare for undertaking periodic supervision of environmental performance of schemes To prepare for implementing Community Based System for Water Quality Monitoring and

Surveillance

5.1.10.5.2 Participants:

The key officers of the project for Environmental Management will include JE/AE, EE, SE as well as State and District Level Environmental Experts and District Resource Persons. The Superintending Engineer of the district will be responsible for selection of suitable candidates for the training and the expense for the selection process will be borne by the overall project capacity building budget.

Page | 100


5.1.10.5.3 Schedule:

The training will include an initial orientation workshop, a main and annual refresher training workshops on environmental assessment. The main and refresher training programs will be for duration of 2-3 days each, whereas the initial orientation workshop will be of one day duration. A total 30 programs will be conducted, out which 10 training programs will be conduced during the first year and 5 refresher programs per year will be conducted for the next 4 years depending on the requirements.

The detais of Management Action Plan are appended as Annexure 35.

5.1.10.6 Details of Training Programmes

T1. Training on the Environmental Management Framework

Purpose of the training:

To equip with knowledge and skills necessary for undertaking environmental appraisal as per the requirements of the EMF

To prepare for undertaking periodic supervision of environmental performance of schemes To prepare for implementing Community Based System for Water Quality Monitoring and

Surveillance Participants:

Key officials of the project including JE/AE, EE, SE as well as State and District Level Environmental Experts and District Resource Persons will participate in the Environmental Management. The Superintending Engineer of the district will be responsible for selection of suitable candidates for the training, and the expense will be borne by the overall project capacity building budget.

Schedule:

The training will include an initial orientation workshop, main and annual refresher training workshops on environmental assessment. The main and refresher training programs will be for the duration of 2-3 days each, whereas the initial orientation workshop will be of one day duration. A total of 10 training programs will be conducted during the first year and 5 refresher programs per year will be conducted for the next 4 years. This will total to 30 programs.

T2. Training on Environmental Management

Purpose of the training:

• To equip with knowledge and skills necessary for meaningful participation in the environmental appraisal as per the requirements of the EMF

• To prepare for planning and monitoring implementation of environmental mitigation measures identified through the appraisal process

• To equip with skills necessary for water quality testing using the field kits under the Community Based System for Water Quality Monitoring and Surveillance

Participants:

The SOs, members of GPWSC and Block Resource Persons will participate in Environmental Management.

The Superintending Engineer of the DWSM will be responsible for selection of suitable candidates for the training, and the expense will be borne by the overall project capacity building budget.

Page | 101


Schedule:

The training will include an initial orientation workshop, a main and annual refresher training workshops on environmental assessment. The main and refresher training programs will be for duration of 2-3 days each, whereas the initial orientation workshop will be of one day duration. There will be about 1200 GPWSCs, 150 SOs and 50 Block resource persons, totaling about 1400. There will be about 28 training programs of about 50 participants in every batch. Considering that an equal number of refresher trainings will be conducted, the total T2 training programs will be about 56 for the project duration.

T3.Environmental Awareness and Sensitization Purpose of the training:

• To build awareness on safe drinking water, water conservation, environmental sanitation and personal hygiene.

Participants: JEs/ AEs, SOs, Members of GPWSC and NGOs.

Schedule:

The training will involve one day workshops at the mandal level. There will also be one day refresher workshops organized annually. There will be about 1200 GPWSCs, 150 SOs and 50 resource persons totaling to about 1400. There will be about 28 training programs of 50 per batch. Total T3 training programs will be 53, considering that an equal number of refresher trainings will be conducted.

T4. Quality Construction Practices for Artisans

Purpose:

• To equip with knowledge and skills for quality construction and maintenance of water and sanitation structures (including aspects of environmental conservation, human health and safety).

Participants: Masons, mechanics, electricians and plumbers as well as for the contractors’ workforce involved in the project.

Schedule: The training will involve one day workshops at the block level. There will also be one day refresher workshops organized annually. There will be about 2500 artisans and about 100 resource persons, totaling to about 2600. There will be about 52 training programs of 50 per batch. Considering that an equal number of refresher trainings will be conducted, the total T4 training programs will be about 104 for the project duration.

The following table indicates the number of suggested training programs:

Table-31 Number of Training Programs

No. Topics Number of Trainings

1 T1 - Environmental Management Framework 30 2 T2 - Environmental Management 56 3 T3 - Environmental Awareness and Sensitization 56 4 T4 - Quality Construction Practices for Artisans 104 Total 246

Page | 102


About 40 to 50 trainees would participate in each of the training programs. It is intended that these trained persons will in turn provide onsite training to DWSD staff, SOs, GPWSCs, NGOs, Contractor staff, etc. onsite at village level. Training to women on the qualitative & quantitative aspects of water would also be included.

5.1.10.7 Budget

The total estimated cost of training on environmental management for members of GPWSCs, NGOs/SOs, Engineers of DWSD, and artisans, is presented in the table below:

Table-32 Estimated cost of Training

S. No. Training No. of Programs Estimated Unit Cost in lakhs of Rs.

Total Cost In lakh of Rs.

1 T1 30 1.25 37.5 2 T2 56 0.75 42 3 T3 and T4 160 0.30 48 4 Workshops (State) 3 0.75 2.25 5 Workshops (District) 12 0.30 3.6 Total 133.35

The total budget for environmental management activities under the proposed project has been worked out as Rs. 3.39 crore. The detailed breakup of the budget is presented in the table below.

Table-33 Budget for Environmental Management

S No. Activity Amount in lakhs of Rs.

1 Training and workshops (as estimated) 133.35 2 Internal supervision visits @ 10 lakhs per year for 5 years 50 3 Environmental Audit by the external agency once in a year (5 Nos) @ Rs.

10.0 lakhs per year 50

4 Preparation of specific environment related community awareness materials @ 1.0 lakh per district and 3 lakh at state level

15

5 EA for Category 2 Schemes @ 10 lakhs per year for 5 years 50 6 External Environmental Monitoring @ Rs. 2.0 lakhs per year for 5 years 10 SubTotal 308.35 Contingencies @ 10% 30.83 Total 339.18

5.1.11 Guidelines / Environmental Code of Practices

The Guidelines/ Environmental Code of Practices (ECOP) have been prepared for addressing the following environmental issues and are marked the Annexures.

1. Guidelines for Identification and Selection of water supply sources: The criteria for the selection of source for water supply are specified in Annexure 4.

2. Guidelines for Sanitary survey of water supply sources: Periodic survey of the source is necessary to identify if any new pollution sources are emerging. The guidelines for Sanitary Survey of groundwater/surface water sources are detailed in Annexure 5 to Annexure 9.

3. ECOP for sanitary protection of water supply sources: The well to tap groundwater sources and intake arrangements to tap surface water sources are located at certain distance away from the existing

Page | 103


sources of pollution and the structures are protected with certain measures to protect the quality of water from getting contaminated. The detailed guidelines are furnished in Annexure 10.

4. Differential Pressure Bleach Powder Solution Dosing Equipment: The disinfection is an important treatment of both surface and ground water to ensure safety of water supply. A simple disinfection method with bleaching powder is sufficient for small water supplies.

5. Guidelines for Sustainability of Sources: The yield from the sources in general and ground water source in particular is likely to decrease during summer. In order to ensure sustainable yield throughout the year certain measures such as artificial recharge of the groundwater source with rainwater harvesting structures are necessary. These measures are furnished in Annexure 12.

6. Water Quality Monitoring and Surveillance: The water quality of the sources and distribution system is deteriorating due to contamination, especially after rains in surface water sources, and, in summer in groundwater sources. Water quality monitoring should be undertaken periodically for taking the necessary corrective measures, if the quality of water deteriorates. The procedure and protocol for water quality monitoring and surveillance are described in Annexure 2.

7. Selection and installation of safe sanitation technologies; the checklist for choice of technology and selection of location is furnished in Annexure 14.

8. Recommended Construction Practice and Pollution Safeguards for Twin Pit Pour Flush toilets: Twin Pit Pour Flush Latrines (TPPFL) are considered to be the most commonly adopted sanitation technology, which is suitable in most of the environmental conditions, except coastal areas with high groundwater table. Recommended construction practice and Pollution Safeguards for TPPFTs are described in Annexure 13.

9. A format for attachment to the contracts of contractors/ consultants is given in Annexure 24. This format needs to be filledin for each contract package and signed by the respective contractor/ consultant for conforming to the EMF and implementing the measures suggested under the EMF.

Page | 104


5.2 SUMMARY OF ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN

A. Description of the project and key components

The proposed Rural Water Supply and Sanitation Project will address to the problems of sustainable water supply and sanitation in rural area of Jharkhand and shall be implemented in 06 selected districts of the state by the State Drinking Water and Sanitation Mission, Drinking Water and Sanitation Department, Ranchi, Jharkhand. The overall goal of the project is to promote decentralised service delivery arrangements with increased Panchayati Raj Institutions (P.R.I.) and community participation, improved financial sustainability and enhanced accountability at all levels.

The vision of the Jharkhand Rural Water Supply and Sanitation Sector is to ensure safe, adequate and sustainable drinking water and sanitation services, cost effectively to all households, establishments and institutions in Jharkhand with a view to ensure a healthy and dignified life to all citizens through community participation at all levels.

The project is expected to increase access to safe water supply and improved sanitation through rehabilitation of existing works and creating new schemes in the six selected districts and covering a population of about 1.13 million. The project will be implemented in 05 years. The main components of the project are provision of drinking Water, Water Quality Management, Environmental Sanitation and support organisation costs (capacity building).

The proposed water supply infrastructure includes new schemes and rehabilitation of SVS (single habitation), SVS (multiple habitation within same GP), Simple MVS (2TO 3 GP’s) and Large MVS (more than 03 GP’s).The sanitation infrastructure includes drainage schemes/lane improvement schemes and household sanitation.

Development of Water Supply and Sanitation Infrastructure is likely to generate site specific environmental impacts especially during the construction phase.

A capacity building program has been outlined as part of the EMF, aiming at building environmental awareness and environmental management capacity in the project implementation structure at all levels including communities. Capacity building for environmental management will be integrated with overall capacity building component of the project.

The project will directly benefit an estimated 1.13 million people with access to safe water and improved hygiene and sanitation habits through improved sanitation facilities and awareness building.

B. Major environmental impacts

Overall, the project is environmentally beneficial. The environmental evaluation suggests that the sub-project components involve simple, appropriate, low cost technologies that do not pose any significant environmental consequences. The project has been classified as Category B as per the World Bank Operational Policy 4.01. The provision of safe drinking water and proper sanitation facilities is expected to have a significant positive impact on the improvement of livelihoods and the environment, including reduction in groundwater pollution. Some minor and temporary negative environmental impacts may occur, resulting mainly from the construction activities.

The positive impacts include (i) improved quantity and quality of safe drinking water (ii) reduction in water related diseases such as diarrhoea, dysentery, cholera, typhoid and resultant low cost of healthcare in households (iii) reduction in infant, child and maternal mortality and morbidity due to improved health and

Page | 105


sanitation services in the health units (iv) reduced distances to water points which will lead to gain in productive time for women and girls (v) better and properly sited sanitation facilities will reduce the risk of contamination of surface and groundwater resources.

The negative impacts include those arising out of tree felling, soil erosion, loss of top soil, loss of flora and fauna, danger to wild life, air (including noise), water and soil pollution due to construction activities and disposal of construction wastes, leachates from toilets, sludge from treatment plants, backwash from Arsenic, fluoride and iron and other treatment units, overuse of water and depletion of source, loss of agricultural land.

C. The Environmental Management Framework

To ensure that the identified environmental issues are addressed in the various stages of the subproject, an EMF has been developed for the project which proposes to evaluate the impacts by filling and analysing the EDS, screening and classifying the subprojects, conducting detailed EA of projects with significant impacts, evaluating the applicability of various laws and policies to the subprojects and ensuring compliance, implementing the EMP for all subprojects and monitoring the environmental performance indicators. This EMF also provides several environmental codes of practice with technical specifications as guidelines for implementation. These guidelines given as annexure in the report, respond to the environmental priorities analysed as part of the EA. The EMF has prescribed the institutional arrangements for monitoring and implementation and a capacity building program aimed at training, building environmental awareness and environmental management capacities. For the achievement of the EMF related capacity building, a budget of Rs. 40 million has been proposed.

D. Mitigation Measures:

The EMF has through the guidelines also suggested mitigation measures as follows:

1. Various options for disposal of reject brine from R.O. plants including salt recovery. 2. Procedures for selection of sustainable sources for water supplies including quality assessments 3. Spacing criteria between wells 4. Sanitary protection of water supply sources and other measures for maintaining quality of drinking

water 5. Fluoride mitigation 6. Guidelines for water harvesting and conservation including roof top, percolation tanks, check dams,

ponds/tanks, Bandharas, gully plugging contour bunds and erosion control 7. Environmental criteria for location of toilets 8. Location specific construction practices and pollution safeguards for twin pit pour flush latrines 9. Guidelines for safe sullage disposal along with low cost treatment options 10. Guidelines for community solid waste management 11. Guidelines for internal supervision 12. Checklists for supervision and audits 13. Environmental performance indicators 14. Safety provisions in the construction of buildings

These mitigation measures would generally include also ensuring that:

1. Construction and operation activity is planned in adherence to Legal and Regulatory norms, as prescribed in EMF.

2. Minimal damage is caused to trees and other vegetation

Page | 106


3. Top Soil is stored separately and reused for vegetation after the construction phase. All excavated soil to be properly stockpiled

4. Construction activities are avoided in Forest areas. Where imperative, they should be as per legally permissible norms and procedures.

5. Avoid spillage of oil and grease on soil or in water. Store containers to isolate and treat spillages. 6. Provide adequate protective gear for workers health and safety; isolating and barricading work areas

to make them accident free and free from exposure to air pollutants. 7. Implement dust suppression measures like spraying with water and ensuring that plant, machinery

and vehicles conform to prescribed standards. 8. Construction waste to be safely stored and in no case be allowed to go into storm water or other

drains. 9. Ensure safe distance between toilets and water sources. 10. Sludge from treatment plants and waste oil and grease to be properly treated. Any hazardous waste

to be treated through specialised agencies authorised by the Jharkhand Pollution Control Board. 11. Back wash from treatment units is properly treated through solar evaporation ponds and recovered

residue properly disposed. 12. Monitoring and fixing leakages to prevent wastages and water logging 13. Preventing non domestic use of water supply including bathing of animals. 14. Recharge of ground water harvesting rain water. 15. For multi village schemes, evaluate both surface water and ground water sources for sustainability. 16. Polluted sources and sources downstream of polluting stream should be avoided

E. Monitoring and Audit

The EMF requires the project proponent to prepare a monitoring plan and undertake regular internal and external auditing. Monitoring is needed to check if and to what extent the impacts are mitigated, benefits enhanced and new problems addressed. The key objective of monitoring is to ensure that the EMP is implemented as per the guidelines. The EMF has prescribed guidelines for project supervision and monitoring, institutional arrangements, water quality monitoring and surveillance including responsibilities, frequencies and standards and formats for data collection.

F. Implementation Schedule and Reporting

All mitigation and enhancement measures will be implemented along side with the implementation of program subprojects as required and planned in the subproject implementation schedules. Progress on the implementation of the safeguards is included in the overall periodic progress reports, midterm review and monitoring and evaluation reports as prescribed in the EMF.

G. Conclusion and Recommendations

The anticipated negative impacts will be short-term, site specific, confined and reversible and can be managed through the application of mitigation and monitoring measures to enhance the benefits of the project. The successful implementation of the scheme will improve the quality of life of about 1.13 million people living in rural areas of 06 districts of Jharkhand. This summary generic EMP has been prepared from the EA report and has suggested comprehensive generic mitigation measures. Implementing such mitigation measures and management interventions will reduce the adverse environmental impacts and increase the environmental acceptability of the project with regards to National and State laws and procedures and the World Banks safeguard policies.


ANNEXURE-1

QUESTIONNAIRE FOR FIELD DATA COLLECTION

Page | 107


Annexure-1 QUESTIONNAIRE FOR FIELD DATA COLLECTION

U1. Village Information Format (Collect information form Village Sarpanch, Village Secretary and other responsible village leaders) Identification Name of the Habitation Name of the Village (GP) Name of the Block Name of the District General Information Terrain 1. Plain/ 2. Sloping/ 3. Hilly/ 4. Forest / 5. Other (Specify) Area in Acres Population Distance from Block Headquarters in Km Nature of Soil (Clay, sand, gravel, rock) Depth of Water Table (Location wise) 1. 2.

3. 4. Water Supply

1. Type of Scheme 1. SVS / 2. MVS/ 3. HPs 2. Source 1. Bore well/ River/ Canal/ Tank/ Pond/

Others (Specify)

3. Treatment 1. Yes/ 2. No. 4. Type of treatment 1. Slow sand Filtration/ 2. Defluoridation/ 3.

Chlorination/ 4. Others (Specify)

5. Type of Storage 1. GLSR/ 2. OHT/ 3. Others (Specify) 6. Distribution 1. HSC/ 2. PSP/ 3. Others 7. Supply duration From _____ Hrs to _____ Hrs 8. Supply Frequency 1. Daily/ 2. Once in ____ Days 9. Quality Perception 1. Muddy/ 2. Salty/ 3. Fluoride/ 4. Smell/ 5.

Other (specify)

10. Quality Parameter (Specify parameter and value in ppm)

Environmental Sanitation No of ISLs

11. ISL Coverage (% of households) 12. No of Public Latrines 13. Solid Waste Disposal? 1- Outside village / 2- In village / 3- Near

fields/ Other

14. Use of waste as Manure? 1- Yes/ 2- No 15. Open Defecation places 1- Near Water Source/ 2- Sloping grounds/ 3-

Catchments/ 4-Others _

16. Presence of Sewerage 1- Yes/ 2- No 17. Sewerage Coverage (% of

households)

18. Sewage treatment 1. Yes/ 2. No. 19. Where Sewerage is disposed

finally? 1- Nallah/ 2-Tank/ 3- Irrigation canal/ 4- Pond/ 5-Rivulet/ 6-Others___

Page | 108


20. Where this waste disposed finally?

1- Nallah/ 2-Tank/ 3- Irrigation canal/ 4- Pond/ 5-Rivulet/ 6-Others___

Roads 21. Total Road Length (Km.) 22. Type of Roads (specify length in

Km) 1. CC_________ / 2. Metal________ / 3. Kutcha ______ / 4. Other _______

23. Presence of Road side Drains 1- yes/ 2- No 24. Coverage in Km

Solid waste 25. Where do you dispose solid

waste? 1- Inside the Village/ 2- Out Side/ 3- Others _____

26. Where do you dispose fodder waste/dung?

27. Locations 28. Distance from village Km 29. What is done with the waste? 1- Compost/ 2- Burnt/ 3. leave it alone/

4.Other (specify)

30. Health 31. Health facility 1. PHC/ 2. Sub-Center/ 3. Others 32. Health staff in village 1. Govt. Doctor/ 2. Private Qualifid Doctor/ 3.

ANM/ 4. Quack/ 5. None/ 6.Others (specify)

33. Common Diseases 1. Malaria/ 2. Typhoid/ 3. GE/ 4. JE/ 5. Others (Specify)

34. Season for Typhoid, Malaria, GE, JE, etc.

1. Rainy Season/ 2. Winter/ 3. Summer

1. Other Information

Position Name Phone/ Mobile No. GP President GP Secretary Revenue Secretary AE (RWS) in charge Village Leader 1 Village Leader 2 Village Leader 3 Village Leader 4

U2. HH ENVIRONMENTAL INTERVIEW FORMAT Identification Habitation Village Block District Demographic Profile 1. Name of the Household Head:

2. Religion 1- Hindu/ 2- Muslim/3- Christian/4-Others

3. Caste 1- General/2- SC/ 3- ST/4- BC

4. Sub caste / sub tribe

Page | 109


HH Environmental Sanitation 5. Where do you defecate? 1- Individual Sanitary Latrine (ISL)/ 2 –

Public Latrine/ 3- Open

6. If ISL, do all members of your family use? 1- Yes/ 2- No

7. Is your ISL / Public Latrine connected to 1 – Leach pit/ 2- Septic Tank

8. How do you dispose effluent from Septic Tank?

9. Where do you dispose septic tank/ leach pit waste?

1- Outside village / 2- In village / 3- Near fields/ Other

10. Do you use this waste as Manure? 1- Yes/ 2- No

Open Defecation 11. Do you resort to open defecation? 1 –Yes/ 2- No

12. If Open defecation, then where do you go 1- Near Water Source/ 2- Slope grounds/ 3- Catchments/ 4-Others __

Sewerage 13. Is your HH connected to Sewerage? 1- Yes/ 2- No

14. If Yes, any treatment is done? 1- Yes/ 2- No

15. Where it is disposed finally? 1- Nallah/ 2-Tank/ 3- Irrigation canal/ 4- Pond/ 5-Rivulet/ 6-Others___

Waste Water 16. Where do you dispose sullage? 1- Drain/ 2- Soak pit

17. Where does this waste water lead to 1- Nallah/ 2-Tank/ 3- Irrigation canal/ 4- Pond/ 5-Rivulet/ 6-Others___

18. Do this waste water treated? 1- Yes/ 2- No

Personal Hygiene 19. Do you practice hand washing after

defecation? 1- Yes/ 2- No

20. When do you generally wash hands? 1- Before & After eating/ 2- After Defecation/ 3 – Both

21. What do you use for cleaning hands? 1- Soap/ 2- Mud/ 3- Ash/ 4- Others ___

22. How often do members of your family bath?

1. Daily/ 2. Once in two days/ 3. Twice a week. 4. Weekly once/ 5. DKCS

23. Cleaning practice after defecation in open 1- Water/ 2- Stone/ 3- Leaves/ 4- Sticks/ 5- Paper/ 6- others

24. Where do your children defecate? 1- Inside house/ 2- Outside/ 3- latrine/ 4- Field/ 5- Others ____________

25. How do you dispose children faecal matter?

26. Do you wash your hands after cleaning children’s faeces?

1 – Yes/ 2- No

Drinking Water 27. Where from you get your drinking water? 1- Panchayat tap/ 2- Hand pump/ 3 - Public

Open well/ 4- Individual open well

28. Do you treat drinking water in case obtained from open well?

1- Yes/ 2- No

29. If Yes, how do you treat? 1- Filtering using Cloth/ 2- Candles/ 3- Boiling/ 4- Chlorine Tablets/ 5- Alum or herbs/ 6 – Others ________

Page | 110


30. How do you handle drinking water? 1-Use ladle/ 2- Cover or lid/ 3- Customized pot or tank with tap/ 4- Other______

Solid Waste 31. Where do you dispose Solid waste? 1- In bins/ 2- Outside on lane/ 3. In front

of house/ 4. In compost pit / 5. Other Places (specify)

Livestock 32. Where do you dispose fodder waste/dung? 1- House back yard / 2- Outside village/

3 – Others _________

33. Do you have a compost pit for this waste? 1. Yes/ 2. No.

U3. Focus Group Discussions/ Public Consultation Facilitator Checklist

1. Background Information Date and Time of FGD Habitation Location/Venue of FGD Focus Group Category General/ Women/ SC/ST/ Others

Sub-category (specify) Number of Participants Men: Women: Total: Moderator 2. Water Sources

• What are the major sources of water supply? • What are your main sources of drinking water? • Which sources do you use for cattle purposes? • What is the quality of these sources? • How do these sources get contaminated? • What are the probable areas for groundwater extraction? • What are the groundwater levels during the last 10 years?

3. Present Sanitation (Human Waste, Waste Water, Animal Waste,

• How many have ISLs in the village? • How many do use them? • What are the reasons for not using the ISLs? • What are the reasons for not building ISLs? • Where do you dispose of the contents of the septic tanks/ leach pits? • What percentage of village is covered with drainage? • Why the remaining portion is not covered? • How often your drainage is clogged? • Who maintains the drainage? • Would contribute for providing underground drainage to the entire village? How much? • Would you contribute to maintain the underground drainage properly? How much? • Where does the village wastewater go finally?

Page | 111


• Do you think your village is clean? • How far it is clean? Can it be better? • What are your suggestions to keep it clean? • Are the roads paved in your village?

4. Water Quality

• What are your perceptions about the drinking water quality? If the water is not good do you have any other means? What is sustainability of these sources?

• Has the quality deteriorated over past few years? How and Why? (e.g. color, taste, smell) • Due to what reasons the water quality has deteriorated?

5. Awareness Generation

• What are the various awareness programmes regarding water and sanitation taken up in your village?

• How can the people be motivated to water sources clean and keep water at home clean? • How can people be motivated to built ISLs and use them? • Who all need to be educated and on what specific aspects? (e.g. women, children, general public,

officials) 6. Indigenous Knowledge/ Village Wisdom How do you protect your drinking water sources? How do you traditionally clean/ treat water? At household level/ community level: Are there any occasions during which the whole village is compulsorily cleaned and sanitized?

7. Suggestions

• What are the environmental problems that you perceive from the project? • What are your suggestions to overcome these problems?

Page | 112


ANNEXURE-2

WATER QUALITY MONITORING AND SURVEILLANCE

Page | 113


Annexure -2 WATER QUALITY MONITORING AND SURVEILLANCE

Water Quality Standards The Bureau of Indian Standards specifications IS:10500-1991 govern the quality of drinking water supplies in India by public agencies. These are based on International standards for drinking water quality issued by the WHO and the manual of standards of quality for drinking water supplies, ICMR, 10500 (2004-2005).

Page | 114


Page | 115


Page | 116


Page | 117


Page | 118


Page | 119


Page | 120


Page | 121


Page | 122


Page | 123


Page | 124


Page | 125


Page | 126


Page | 127


Page | 128


ANNEXURE-3

GUIDELINES FOR WQM&S

Page | 129


Annexure 3 GUIDELINES FOR WQM&S

Guidelines in this Annexure are based on the Community-based Water Quality Monitoring and Surveillance system documented in the Implementation Manual on National Rural Water Quality Monitoring and Surveillance Programme published in 2004 by the Rajiv Gandhi National Drinking Water Mission, Department of Drinking Water Supply, Ministry of Rural Development, Government of India. These guidelines will be applicable on the Jharkhand Project. Plan for WQM&S Community-based systems for Water Quality Monitoring and Surveillance: The actions planned for integrating a Community-based system for Water Quality Monitoring and Surveillance programme are:

• Identifying suitable user-friendly field kits for Water Quality Testing. • Initiating an action research (pilot) on Community-based systems for Water Quality Monitoring

and Surveillance in few villages. • Using the piloting experience to develop a scaling-up strategy for all the project villages. • Using the pilot villages as models for training (a) first, the Technical and Community Development

Staff of all DSUs, and through them, (b) the engineers at Block/ sub-division level and technical staff of Sos, and (c) the GPWSCs.

• Implementing the Community-based systems for Water Quality Monitoring and Surveillance programme in all the project villages through the use of user-friendly Water Quality Testing Kits and by involving the GPWSCs, community institutions (such as SHGs), local educational institutions, PHCs, etc.

Water Quality Monitoring and Surveillance through Laboratory Infrastructure: The water to be supplied is tested at two stages.

• Firstly, at the time of development of source to ascertain if the source would yield water within safe chemical-content limits.

• Secondly, after commissioning of the water supply schemes, to monitor any change in quality of the water supply source over the years.

• Water samples, apart from the source, are also taken from different points in the distribution system including the consumer end and tested in the laboratories.

Testing personnel Frequency Responsibility

Pump operator/ caretaker of water distribution

Once in a day Checking and ensuring the safety of water

Maintaining a record of residual chlorine

Junior Engineer Once in a week

Checking turbidity of treated water from filters in case of surface water sources

Testing residual chlorine

Checking the water quality record maintained by operator

Maintaining the record of treated water quality

Assistant Engineer Once in a month

Testing residual chlorine in the water sample

Checking the record of tests conducted by the pump operator and Junior Engineer and will record his comments over the

Page | 130


results.

Executive Engineer Once in three months

Collecting and sending samples for bacteriological analysis;

Maintaining the records of bacteriological water quality

Superintending Engineer Twice in a year before and after monsoon

Collecting and sending samples to district laboratories for Chemical analysis;

Maintaining the records of chemical water quality Key guidelines for WQM&S Objective of the water quality monitoring:

• To ascertain the quality of water in various rural water supply schemes (tube wells or canal based) as well as in the distribution network.

• To examine physico-chemical and bacteriological quality to establish whether the drinking water is fit for human consumption and meets the drinking water standards as laid down in IS - 10500: (2004-2005).

Sampling: Recommended Frequency:

Source Minimum frequency of sampling and analysis Remarks

Bacteriological Physical/Chemical

Ground Water

Shallow tube wells with hand pump

Every fortnight Once initially, then 4 times yearly

Situations requiring testing: change in environmental conditions, outbreak of water borne disease or increase in incidence of waterborne diseases

Deep tube wells with hand pump

Once initially, then as situation demands 4 times yearly

Once initially, then two4 times yearly.

Residual chlorine test –

Wells and piped supplies

Once initially, thereafter as situation demands

Once initially, then 4 times yearly

Test weekly for residual chlorine if water is

Surface Water

Filtered and/or chlorinated and piped supplies

Once monthly Once initially, then 4 times yearly.

Residual chlorine test – daily

Increase frequency of bacteriological test if situation demands

Recommended Location: Selection of location for sampling should indicate true representative samples.

Public stand posts (PSPs) Selected consumer locations at random

Page | 131


In addition to above, raw water source and treated water should also be analyzed in case of canal/surface water based water supply schemes.

Water Quality Record: The water quality test results should be entered in a logbook as per the prescribed format (sample shown below) and should be submitted to the DSU once every 3 months. Sl. No.

Point of Sampling (Distribution system)

Turbidity (NTU)

Residual Chlorine

Fecal coliform MPN/ 100mL

Quantity of bleaching powder/ sodium hypochlorite being added/day

Initials of pump operator carrying test

Initials of Engineer carrying test

Remarks

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 The information on water quality will be integrated into the Computerized Sector Management Information System.

Page | 132


ANNEXURE-4

DISPOSAL OF REJECT BRINE FROM RO PLANT

Page | 133


Annexure-4 DISPOSAL OF REJECT BRINE FROM RO PLANT

Desalination process with RO plant for treating the brackish/saline groundwater with high TDS is the solution to supply drinking water to isolated habitations where the groundwater is brackish and supplying water from the distant surface water source is not feasible. Production and disposal of reject brine are an integral part of an overall desalination process. Reject brine is in the range of 40 to 60% of the feed water depending upon the TDS of the feed water. For inland (located away from the sea coast) desalination plants, this poses a serious challenge, as the option of ocean disposal of reject brine is not available. Various disposal options currently used for the reject brine are: disposal in lined evaporation ponds (lined with polyethylene or other polymeric sheets),

where land is available disposal in unlined evaporation ponds, where land is available deep well injection after assessment of geological conditions disposal in natural depressions if no drinking water supply is depending on ground water in

the vicinity of 100 m. An alternative approach is further processing the reject brine to extract all the salts involving multiple-evaporation and/or cooling, supplemented by chemical processing. However, this may not be economically viable. Of all the disposal options, disposal of brine in lined evaporation ponds is preferable (technologically simple, risk of groundwater contamination is lesser). Dried salts resulting out of the evaporation process have to be suitably disposed after careful environmental assessment.

Page | 134


ANNEXURE-5

GUIDELINES FOR THE IDENTIFICATION AND SELECTION OF WATER SUPPLY SOURCES

Page | 135


Annexure-5 GUIDELINES FOR THE IDENTIFICATION AND SELECTION OF WATER SUPPLY SOURCES

Groundwater aquifers are one of the main source of water in Jharkhand for tapping water for various uses. The aquifers are classified as confined aquifer and unconfined aquifer. The wells tapping water from confined aquifer are called deep wells, which have the recharge zone far away from the well location. In some locations the water quality of deep wells may have problems (fluoride/arsenic/nitrate/iron etc.). The wells tapping water from unconfined aquifer are called shallow wells, which have the recharge zone around the wells. These wells are likely to dry up during summer and liable for contamination from local pollution sources unless sanitary protection is provided. Presently the DDWS broadly follows the below procedure for identification of sources. A. Priority for the selection of sustainable sources for rural water supply

1. Groundwater source with acceptable quality (without any treatment except disinfection). These sources are preferred for single village schemes (SVSs).

2. When option (1) is not possible as the groundwater quality is problematic (fluoride/ arsenic /nitrate/iron etc.), distant surface water source which requires only simple filtration and disinfection will be preferred. These sources are preferred for multi-village schemes (MVSs) involving number of habitations (MVSs may be located away from the habitations and require treatment and pumping adding to O&M costs).

3. When option (1) and (2) are not possible due to isolation of the habitation and its location at high elevation, and if the local groundwater source is sustainable throughout the year but high TDS (> 2000 mg/L) is the only problem, the local source will be selected. Water from the local source will be treated with innovative technology such as Reverse Osmosis (RO). As RO plants have certain problems (for example, safe disposal of brine) as listed in Annexure 11, this option will be chosen only under exceptional circumstances.

4. Availability of sustained quantity based on yields and water balance considerations. B. Water Quality Testing Before selecting the source the raw water quality will be tested to check conformity with the drinking water standards as per B.I.S. 10500, 2004-2005 Box1: Designated Best Use Criteria for Surface Waters (Source: CPCB)

Designated Best Use Class Of criteria

Criteria

Drinking Water Source without conventional treatment but after disinfection

A 1. Total Coliforms Organism MPN/ 100ml shall be 50 or less 2. pH between 6.5 and 8.5 3. Dissolved Oxygen 6mg / l or more 4. Biochemical Oxygen Demand 5 days 20oC 2 mg/l or less

Page | 136


Outdoor bathing (Organised) B 1. Fecal Coliforms Organism MPN/ 100 ml shall be 2500 (Imax permissible), or 1000 (desirable) 2. pH between 6.5 and 8.5 3. Dissolved Oxygen 5mg/l or more 4. Biochemical Oxygen Demand 5 days 20oC 3 mg/l or less

Drinking water source after conventional treatment and disinfection

C 1. Total Coliforms Organism MPN/ 100ml shall be 5000 or less 2. pH between 6 to 9 3. Dissolved Oxygen 4mg/l or more 4. Biochemical Oxygen Demand 5 days 20oC 3mg/l or less

Propagation of Wildlife and Fisheries D 1. pH between 6.5 to 8.5 2. Dissolved Oxygen 4mg/l or more 3. Free Ammonia (asN) 1.2mg/l or less

Irrigation, Industrial Cooling, Controlled Waste disposal

E 1. pH between 6.0 to 8.5 2. Electrical Conductivity at 25oC micromhos/cm Max.2250 3. Sodium absorption Ratio Max.26 4. Boron Max.2mg/l

In correct land use leading to heavy soil erosion and sediment transport into the lake is resulting in nutrient enrichment of lake (Nitrate & Phosphate) signifying eutrophication. C. Spacing between the proposed well and the existing groundwater structure to avoid interference When a new well is located close to an existing well, the cone of influence of both wells may overlap and affect the yielding potential of both the wells. While locating new wells the spacing between new well and the existing well will, therefore, be fixed appropriately. The following table recommends the spacing between the existing groundwater abstraction structures and the proposed wells.

S. No. Situation Recommended spacing between any two wells (m)

Filter point or shallow wells Deep bore wells

1. Non-command area 120 300 – 500

2. Command area 160 200 – 300

3. Near perennial source like river or pond (within 200 m)

160 200 – 300

4. Non-perennial stream 180 300 – 500 Source: NABARD

Page | 137


ANNEXURE-6

SANITARY SURVEY OF WATER SUPPLY SOURCES

Page | 138


Annexure-6 SANITARY SURVEY OF WATER SUPPLY SOURCES

Current Practice The DDWS has an existing practice of sanitary survey of rural water supply sources while initially installing the source. However annual survey of the sources after installation is not being done systematically. Guidelines for Sanitary Survey in Jharkhand The guidelines for Sanitary Survey given in this Annexure are in line with the guidelines documented in the Implementation Manual on National Rural Water Quality Monitoring and Surveillance Programme published in 2004 by the Rajiv Gandhi National Drinking Water Mission, Department of Drinking Water Supply, Ministry of Rural Development, Government of India. These guidelines will be applied for Sanitary Surveys. Sampling Frequency SOURCE AND MODE OF WATER SUPPLY

Minimum number of sanitaty inspections per year

By GPWSSC / SO By JE / AE By EE / SE

Ground Water

Shallow tube wells with hand pumps

4 (including once initially while filling the EDS of the scheme)

Once initially (while filling the EDS) and thereafter as situation demands

Deep tube wells with hand pumps


Once initially (while filling the EDS) and thereafter as situation demands

Wells and piped supplies 1 (including once initially while filling the EDS of the scheme)


Once initially thereafter once every 5 years or as situation demands

Surface Water and/or chlorinated and piped supplies

Population upto 5000 12 (including once initially while filling the EDS of the scheme)


Once initially thereafter once every 5 years or as situation demands

Population 5000-20000 24-48 (including once initially while filling the EDS of the scheme)

Once a year

Community rainwater collection systems



Sanitary Survey Procedure and Recording Forms Sanitary inspection requires detailed examination of the water-supply system, especially at its key points in order to check whether the installations are satisfactory and whether the various operations are being carried out properly. The recommended method of undertaking an inspection is to follow the natural sequence: starting with the source water and its intake, and going on to treatment, disinfection, storage, distribution, etc. Observations are recorded on preset forms.

Page | 139


ANNEXURE-7

SANITARY SURVEY FOR THE ASSESSMENT OF RISKS OF CONTAMINATION OF DRINKING WATER SOURCES

Page | 140


Annexure-7 SANITARY SURVEY FOR THE ASSESSMENT OF RISKS OF CONTAMINATION OF DRINKING WATER

SOURCES I Type of facility : SHALLOW AND DEEP HANDPUMPS (TUBEWELL) General Information i. Location : Village…………………………………. : Gram Panchayat……………………….. : District…………………………………… ii. Code No iii. Water authority Panchayat President Community Representative Signature iv. Date of Visit v. Is Water Sample Taken-----------------------Sample No------------Acceptable/Rejectable II. Specific Diagnostic Information for Assessment Risks Yes No

1. Is there a latrine with in 10 m of handpump 2. The nearest latrine or defecation ground / pit latrines higher than the

hand pump?

3. Is there any other source of pollution within 10m of the hand pump? 4. Is there any work of stagnant water within 2m of the cement floor of

hand pump?

5. Is the hand pump drainage channel broken? Does it need cleaning? 6. Is there any pounding on the cement floor around the hand pump? 7. Are there any cracks on the cement floor around the hand pump? 8. Is priming of bore well required during dry season?

Total Score of risks___/8__

Containment Risk Score: 8 = V. high 6-7 = High 3-5 = Intermediate 0-3 = low Number of YES to be counted III. Result and recommendation: The following importance point of risks (Serially from top) will be noted and the authority advised on remedial action.

Page | 141


ANNEXURE-8


Page | 142



SOURCES

I Type of facility : DEEP BOREHOLE General Information i. Location : Village…………………………………. : Gram Panchayat……………………….. : District……………………………………

ii. Code No iii. Water authority Panchayat President Community Representative Signature iv. Date of Visit v. In Water Sample Taken------------------------Sample No----------Acceptable / Rejectable II. Specific Diagnostic Information for Assessment Risks

Yes No 1. Is there a latrine or sewer within 30m of the pump house? 2. Is the nearest latrine unsewered? (a pit latrine that percolates to soil) 3. Is there any other source of pollution within 10m of the hand pump? 4. Is there any other source of pollution within area of the well? 5. Is the drainage are removed from the pump house fully? 6. Is there fencing around the installation drainage which prevents animals

access or any entry?

7. Is the floor of the hand pump permeable to water?

8. Is the well seal insanitary? 9. Does the chlorination record show any interruption in dosing? If there is no

recorded chlorination, risk (yes) should be recorded

10. Is the free chlorine residual at the sample tap less than 0.2 mg/l? Total Score of risks _____/10

Containment Risk Score: 9-10 = V. high 6-8 = High 3-5 = Intermediate 0-2 = low Number of YES to be counted III. Result and recommendation: The following importance points of risk (serially from top) were noted and the authority advised on remedial action.

Page | 143


ANNEXURE-9


Page | 144



SOURCES I Type of facility : GRAVITY FEED PIPED SUPPLIES General Information

i. Location : Village…………………………………. : Gram Panchayat……………………….. : District……………………………………

ii. Code No iii. Water authority Panchayat President Community Representative Signature iv. Date of Visit v. Is water Sample Taken-------------------------Sample No------------Acceptable/Rejectable

II. Specific Diagnostic Information for Assessment URisk

Yes No Conduction pipe to reservoir

1. Is there any point leakage between the source and the reservoir? 2. If there are any pressure break boxes, are their covers insanitary? 3. Is the inspection cover on the reservoir insanitary? 4. Are any air vents insanitary? 5. Do the roof and walls of the reservoir allow any water to enter (is the reservoir

cracked?)

6. Is the reservoir water unchlorinated? Distribution pipes 7. Does the water entering the distribution pipes have less than 0.4 ppm free

residual chlorine (< 0.4 ppm)

8. Are there any leaks in any part of the distribution system? 9. Is pressure low in any part of the distribution system 10. Does any sample of water in the principal distribution pipes have less than 0.2

ppm free residual chlorine?

Total Score of risks ______/10 Containment Risk Score: 9-10 = V.high 6-8 = High 3-5 = Intermediate 0-2 = low Number of YES to be counted III. Result and recommendation: The following importance points of risk (serially from top) were noted and the authority advised on remedial action.

Page | 145


ANNEXURE-10


Page | 146



SOURCES I Type of facility : RAIN WATER TANK CATCHMENT General Information i. Location : Village…………………………………. : Gram Panchayat……………………….. : District…………………………………… ii. Code No iii. Water authority Panchayat President Community Representative Signature iv. Date of Visit v. Is Water Sample Taken---------------------------Sample No-------Acceptable/Rejectable II. Specific Diagnostic Information for Assessment Risks

Yes No 1. Is there any containment of the roof catchment area? e.g. plants, 2. Are the gathering channels which collect water dirty? 3. Is there any deficiency in the cover at the tank inlet? 4. Is there other point of entry to the tank which is not properly covered? 5. Is the any defect in the walls on top of the tank? e.g. Cracks, which could

be water accessible?

6. Is the water collection area inadequately drained? 7. Are there any cracks on the cement floor around the handpump? 8. Is priming of bore well required during dry season? 9. Is there any source of pollution around the tank or water collection area? 10. Is the water tank left in a position than it may be contaminated?

Total Score of risks ________/10

Containment Risk Score: 9-10 = V. high 6-8 = High 3-5 = Intermediate 0-2 = low Number of YES to be counted III. Result and recommendation: The following importance points of risk (serially from top) were noted and the authority advised on remedial action.

Page | 147


ANNEXURE-11

SANITARY PROTECTION OF WATER SUPPLY SOURCES

Page | 148


Annexure 11 SANITARY PROTECTION OF WATER SUPPLY SOURCES

Presently the DDWS is following some of the sanitary protection measures given below. The recommended procedures are for strengthening the existing DDWS practices for ensuring safe quality water supplies. The objectives of sanitary protection of the water supply sources are to avoid the sources getting contaminated. 1. Sanitary Protection of Surface Water Supply Sources

• The area around the source should be inspected at least once in a year to identify and control

any new pollution source. • Discharge of industrial/domestic wastewater on the upstream of the off-take arrangement

should be prevented. • Activities that lead to contamination of the water such as washing clothes, washing cattle,

dumping of solid waste and defecation should be prevented. • The area around sources including intake arrangements and upstream of river should be well

protected and fenced. Trespassing by people and cattle around the source should be prevented.

2. Sanitary Protection of Ground Water Supply Sources

1. Direct runoff of rain water into bore well sources should be prevented; 2. A concrete mat of sufficient thickness for 75 cm radius around the bore well shall be provided to

seal the outer periphery of the bore well. The casing pipe should be raised 60 cm above ground level and provided with a sanitary plug until the pump is installed.

3. Rainwater harvesting and recharge structure should be located at least 15 m away from the bore well to avoid direct contamination.

4. Soak pit for the disposal of effluent from septic tank or other sanitation facility should not allowed within 15 m radius from the bore well of water supply source to avoid direct contamination.

5. For bore wells, the annular open space on the outside of the well casing needs to be filled with neat cement grout.

3. Other preventive measures for maintaining quality of drinking water i. Sources of water supply including wells fitted with hand pumps should be disinfected regularly. Free

residual chlorine level of not less than 0.2 mg/L and more than 0.5 mg/L should be maintained throughout the distribution system

ii. OHTs and storage sumps should be periodically cleaned at least once in three months iii. Leakages in pipelines should be arrested iv. Pit taps both at public stand posts and house service connections should be prevented- all taps and

stand posts should be above ground level provided with platforms around v. Surroundings of the OHTs, public stand posts and hand pumps should have clean and hygienic

environment

Page | 149


ANNEXURE-12

FLUORIDE MITIGATION EFFECTS OF EXCESS FLUORIDE IN WATER

Page | 150


Annexure 12

FLUORIDE MITIGATION EFFECTS OF EXCESS FLUORIDE IN WATER

Excessive fluoride > 1.5 mg/L in drinking water may cause dental fluorosis, a condition resulting in the discoloration of the enamel, with chipping of the teeth in severe cases, particularly in children. With higher levels of fluorides > 3 mg/L, skeletal fluorosis with its crippling effects is observed. Non-skeletal and allergic manifestations of fluorosis can also occur. The effects of fluorosis are irreversible and there is no treatment. Avoiding excessive intake of fluoride can help in prevention. Fluorides are present mostly in ground waters and high concentrations have been found in Garhwa, Palamau and Latehar districts of Jharkhand. Strategy for mitigation When high levels of fluoride are detected in local ground waters, the ideal course of action to take would be: 1. Using alternate water sources. 2. Improving the nutritional status of the population at risk. 3. Removing excess fluoride (defluoridation). Removing excess fluoride (defluoridation): The following table gives an overview of the various defluoridation technologies that have been implemented in Jharkhand.

Defluoridation Process

Principle Advantages Limitations

Activated Alumina

Adsorption Removes fluoride up to 90%. Treatment is cost-effective.

Sensitive to pH fluctuations, TDS, presence of other elements, etc. Regeneration needed every 4-5 months. Effectiveness reduces with each regeneration. Disposal of fluoride sludge is a problem.

Nalgonda technique

Coagulation and precipitation using alum and lime

Does not involve regeneration of media. Employs chemicals which are readily available. Colour, odour, turbidity, bacteria and organic contaminants are also removed simultaneously.

Removes only 18-33% of fluoride. Regular analysis of feed and treated water is required to calculate the correct dose of chemicals to be added, because water quality changes with time and season. High maintenance costs. Large space requirement for drying of sludge.

RO membrane process

Physical filtration

Fluoride removal (up to 98%) and

Expensive. Nearly all ions are removed so remineralization

Page | 151


through semi-permeable membrane

disinfection are achieved simultaneously. Low maintenence and regeneration requirements.

and pH correction may be needed. Lot of waste brine water is generated and its disposal poses a problem.

Bone Char coal Adsorption Efficiency of the material in fluoride removal is independent of raw water characteristics such as hardness and alkalinity.

There is no technology to regenerate used bone char, so the material must be replaced periodically.

Recommended Strategy for Fluoride Mitigation In any attempt to mitigate fluoride contamination, it is recommended that the provision of safe, low fluoride water from alternative sources, either as an alternative source or for blending, should be investigated as the first option1. The following table presents the available options for fluoride affected villages and the situation for which they seem appropriate.

Recommended Options for Fluoride Affected Villages

Available options Situation for which the option seems

appropriate 1. Alternate local / distant ground water source (with appropriate ground water recharge arrangements)

Where isolated small number of habitations are affected

2. Local/distant surface source Where large number of contiguous villages are affected

3. Blending with non-fluoride water wherever feasible

Where fluoride concentration is marginally higher (1.5-2 mg/l) and fluoride free water is available

4. Dual supply with different service level (drinking, cooking and other purposes)

Where community is aware and able to distinguish the difference (on pilot basis)

Page | 152


Information, Education, Communication (IEC): In addition to providing alternative safe water, the project will focus on creating awareness on fluoride in the affected habitations. The focus of the IEC efforts will be on generating awareness:

fluoride, flurosis and flurosis prevention the role of nutrition (reducing fluoride-rich foods and cosmetics, intake of calcium and

Vitamin C rich foods, etc.) in fluoride mitigation the need for use of alternate safe water sources identification of unsafe water and need to discontinue its use for consumption

The IEC on fluoride will be part of the overall IEC strategy of the project.

Page | 153


ANNEXURE-13

GUIDELINES FOR SUSTAINABILITY OF GROUNDWATER SOURCES

Page | 154


Annexure-13 GUIDELINES FOR SUSTAINABILITY OF GROUNDWATER SOURCES

Existing Practices in Ground Water Recharge in Jharkhand The RWSS Department, Government of Jharkhand has implemented schemes involving several different types of water harvesting structures (depending on the local site conditions). These include:

Check Dams Percolation Tanks Sub-surface Dykes Rooftop Rain Water Harvesting Structures Infiltration Rings Recharge Pits Injection Wells/Recharge Wells

Guidelines for Ground Water Recharge in Jharkhand Rural Piped Water Supply Projects The guidelines presented in this Annexure are based on the guidelines provided in the publication Water Harvesting and Artificial Recharge published by the Rajiv Gandhi National Drinking Water Mission, Department of Drinking Water Supply, Ministry of Rural Development, Government of India (2004). These guidelines will be followed in the Jharkhand Rural Piped Water Supply Projects. The Recommended Water Harvesting Measures for Jharkhand are presented below. Roof Top Water Harvesting Systems Roof top water harvesting systems can provide good quality potable water with the design features outlined below are taken into account:

• The substances that go into the making the roof should be non-toxic in nature • Roof surfaces should be smooth, hard and dense since they are easier to clean and are less likely

to the damage and released material / fiber into the water. • Roof painting is not advisable since most paints contain toxic substances and may peel off. • No overhanging tree should be left near the roof. • The nesting of birds on the roof should be prevented. • All gutter ends should be fitted with a wire mesh screen to keep out leaves etc. • A first-flush rainfall capacity, such as detachable down pipe section, should be installed. • A hygienic soak away channel should be built at water outlet and a screened overflow pipe

should be provided. • The storage tank should have a tight fitting roof that excludes light a, manhole cover and a

flushing pipe at the base of the tank (for standing tanks). • There should be a reliable sanitary extraction device such as a gravity tap or a hand pump to

avoid contamination of the water in the tank. • There should be no possibility of contaminated wastewater flowing into the tank (especially for

tanks installed at ground level) • Water from other sources, unless it is reliable source, should not be emptied into the tank

through pipe connections or the manhole cover. • During the rainy season, the whole system (roof catchment, gutters, pipes, screens, first-flush

and overflow) should be checked before and after each rain and preferably cleaned after every dry period exceeding a month.

Page | 155


• At the end of the dry season and just before the first shower of rain is anticipated, the storage tank should be scrubbed and flushed all sediment and debris (the tank should be re-filled afterwards with a few centimeters of clean water to prevent cracking). Ensure timely service (before the first rains are due) of all tanks features, including replacement of all worm screened and servicing of the outlet tap or hand pump.

Percolation Tanks

• Percolation tanks should normally be constructed in a terrain with highly fractured and weathered rock for speedy recharges; in case of alluvium the boulder formations are ideal. However, the permeability shouldn’t be too high that may result in the percolated water escaping the downstream.

• Submergence area should be uncultivated as far as possible. • Rainfall pattern based on long-term evaluation is to be studied so that the percolation tanks gets

filled up fully during monsoon ( preferably more than once) • Soil in the catchment area should preferably be of light sandy type to avoid silting upon the tank

bed. • The location of the tank should preferably be downstream of runoff zone or in the upper part of

the transition zone, with a land slope gradient of 3 to 5%. • While designed, due care should be taken to keep the height of the ponded water column about

3 to 4.5 m above the bed level. It desirable to exhaust the storage by February since evaporation losses becomes substantial from February on wards. It is preferable that in the downstream area, the water table it is depth of 3 to 5 m below level during the post monsoon period, impaling that the benefited area possesses a potential shallow aquifer.

• Construction–wise there is not much difference between a percolation tank and a minor irrigation tank, except for providing outlets for surface irrigation and the depth of the cut-off trench. The cut-off trench is to be provided below the earthen bund with depth limited to one fourth of the height between bed level and full storage level.

Check Dams Check Dams are constructed in the drainage course of narrow streams in low rainfall area to impound run-off rainwater. The following are some guidelines for consturcin of check dams.

• The total catchment of the nala should normally be between 40 to 100 hectares though the local situations can be guiding factor in this

• The rainfall in the catchment should be less than 1000mm/ annum • The Nala bunds should be preferable located in area where contour or graded bunding of lands

have been carried out • The rock strata exposed in the ponded area should be adequately permeable to cause ground

water recharge through ponded water • Nala bund is generally a small earthen dam with cutoff core wall of bricks work, though masonry

and concrete bunds/plugs are now prevalent • Dams should be built at sites that can produce relatively high depth to surface area so as to

minimize evaporation loses. • Rocky surface should not be fractured or cracked, which may cause the water to leak away to

deeper zones or beneath the dam. • Dam foundation must of solid impermeable rock with no soil pockets or fracture line

Page | 156


• No soil erosion in the catchment area • Dams should be site along the edges of depressions or directly across the lower ends of deep

gullies into rock. Ponds/ Tanks A good pond should possess the following traits: • The site should be narrow gorge with a fan shaped valley above: so that amount of earthwork

gives a large capacity. Junctions of two tributaries, depressions and other sites of easily available fill material and favourable geology should be preferred

• The capacity catchment ratio should be such that the pond can be fill upto about 2-3 months of rainfall. The capacity should not be too small to be choked up with sediments very soon

• The pond should be located where it could serve a major purpose e.g. if irrigation it should be above irrigated field

• The site should not have excessive seepage losses • The catchment areas should be put under conservative practices

Bandhara The following care need to be taken in maintaining Bandhras:

• Periodically it should be checked for seepage of surface pollutants • Periodic checking of the dam site for erosion after each large flood and correction by refinishing

the clay and protecting it with large rocks. • Any any channel erosion that might undermine or expose the dam should be arrested by filling it

with large boulders and using silting traps to catch sandy material. • With raised dams, the gravity pipe should be checked frequently along its length for signs of

damage or leaks and the tapping station should be kept in good order. • Ensure there is no open defecation in/near the river bed upstream • No tethering of animals at the well • Check bathing/ laundry upstream of the dam • There must be no pit-latrines on the bank upstream • There must be no unprotected wells in the river bed near the protected well • Regular maintenance of the protected well-site and the hand pump must be assured • Ensure use and maintenance of a downstream gravity out-take • Avoid use of pesticides/ chemicals upstream of the dam site

Gully plugging, Contour bunds The gully plugging measures includes vegetative plantings and brushwood check dams, boulder bunds, brick masonry and earthen bunds or a combination of both, sand bag plugs etc. Contour bunds involve construction of horizontal lines of small earthen or boulder bunds across the slopping land surface.

• Ensure there is no open defecation in/near strucrture • No tethering of animals at the site • There must be no pit-latrines on the bank upstream

Page | 157


• Avoid use of pesticides/ chemicals upstream of the site Rainwater Harvesting Structures Guidelines for Implementation of Rainwater Harvesting Structures for Sustainability of Drinking water supply sources:

• The rainwater harvesting (RWH) structures should be site specific closer to the source but 15 m

away from the bore well to prevent direct contamination; the location should be certified by the hydrogeologist of the Jharkhand Rural Piped Water Supply Projects department.

• The local geological and hydrogeological conditions have to be studied in conjunction with the location of the groundwater source to facilitate maximum recharge from the structure.

• No RWH structure should be installed in the supply/feeder channel of tanks. • RWH structure should be simple and suitable to the location and economically viable to the

community. • All the works of RWH structure should be implemented before the onset of the monsoon. • Pre and post water level and water quality monitoring should be carried out in the well for water

supply source to evaluate the benefit accrued of the RWH structures. Erosion control in catchment There is no unique solution for erosion control. The following are some of the erosion control measures used in many parts of the country. Conservation cover: Establish and maintain perennial vegetative cover to protect soil and water resources. Contour bunding/trenching: Forming contour bunding or trenching along the contour in steep sloped areas may be taken up for reducing runoff and erosion. Terraces are constructed with earthen embankments that retard runoff and reduce erosion by breaking the slope into numerous flat surfaces separated by slopes that are protected with permanent vegetation. Critical area planting: Planting vegetation such as trees, shrubs, grasses or legumes on highly erodable or eroding areas. While undertaking any plantation programme care must be taken to plant only indigenous species with involving and close coordination with local people

Page | 158


ANNEXURE-14

SELECTION OF SAFE SANITATION TECHNOLOGIES AND ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS IN LOCATION OF TOILETS

Page | 159


Annexure 14 SELECTION OF SAFE SANITATION TECHNOLOGIES AND ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS IN

LOCATION OF TOILETS Selection of Safe Sanitation Technology Selection and installation of safe sanitation technologies to suit the local soil characteristics and hydrogeology is necessary so as to minimise ground water contamination. For selecting the most appropriate system for any location the following factors are to be considered: Number of people to be served Per capita water supply rate and the water availability for ablution and flushing Extent of space available within the plot/street for sanitation facility Hydrogeologic characteristics of the subsoil Depth to groundwater table from the ground surface (summer and rainy season) Quality of groundwater in the vicinity and their present uses Locations of the existing water supply wells sources

Technologies

Latrine Type

Suitable for high Ground Water table

Suitable for areas prone to floods, tidal floods or flushes

Suitable for loose soils

Suitable for soils of low permeability

Water requirement

Ease of construction

Ease of maintenance Remarks

Direct Single Pit Latrine Without Pour flush

Yes, if raised Yes, if raised

Yes, if fully clay soils lined Not for No Easy Easy

Sludge unsafe

Direct Twin Pit Latrine Without Pour flush

Yes, if raised Yes, if raised

Yes, for fully lined

Not for, clay soils No Easy EAsy

Safe sludge

Offset Single Pit Latrine with Pour-flush

Yes, if raised and with soak away Yes, if raised


Yes, with soak away Yes Easy Easy

Sludge unsafe

Offset Twin Pit Latrine with Pour-flush

Yes, if raised and with soak away Yes, if raised


Yes, with soak away Yes

Fairly Easy Fairly

Safe sludge easy

Urinal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes a bit Easy Easy

Considering the various sanitation options available and the factors to be considered, the following on-site sanitation options are recommended as suitable sanitation for the rural habitations: two-pit pour-flush toilet (TPPT) composting toilet or eco-sanitation (Eco-san)

The SOs should play a crucial role in facilitating the choice of appropriate sanitation system for the site specific situation.

Page | 160


Environmental Considerations in Location of Toilets Specific topic on which information/ data is needed Considerations Type of soil –stability

Loose, sides of wall collapse

Line the pits. In very sandy soils,sink cement rings that are perforated or set on top of each other without cement.

Hard to dig

Use the pits. In very sandy soils, sink cement rings that are perforated or set on top of each other without cement.

permeability (how water is absorb by soil)

Clay soil

Test by pouring water into a hole and measuring how long it takes to be absorbed. Pits in dense clay may need back filling about 1.2 meters with more sandy soil.

Coarse sand

Back fill around the rings with denser soil and /or locate the latrine pipes far 9 for example, 40 meters or more)from a well used for drinking.

Hard Latrine

If there might be cracks in the laterine, the latrine pits can pollute nearby drinking water sources. Place the latrine far from these sources.

Ground water level in wet season (deepest level)

Water rises higher than one meter from bottom of the latrine pit, but never completely floods the latrine pits

Locate thelatrine pit far from any well used for drinking purpose and should be away for example, 40 meters or more

Water rises to or above the ground level and sludge comes out the latrines

Raise the latrines above the ground level so that the top third of the pit is always above the water level. Place latrines far from drinking water sources.

Distance to Water sources Distance from latrines pit to drinking water sources At least 15 meters

Page | 161


ANNEXURE-15

RECOMMENDED CONSTRUCTION PRACTICE AND POLLUTION SAFEGUARDS FOR TWIN PIT POUR FLUSH LATRINES

Page | 162


Annexure-15 RECOMMENDED CONSTRUCTION PRACTICE AND POLLUTION SAFEGUARDS FOR TWIN PIT

POUR FLUSH LATRINESP1F

2

Construction of Pits 1. Pits in Water logged, Flood Prone and High Sub-soil Water Areas In high sub-soil, water logged or flood-prone areas, the pits should be raised above the ground level to a height such that the invert of the incoming drains/pipes is just above the likely flood water or sub-soil water level. Raising the pipes will necessitate raising the latrine floor also. In pits located in water logged or flood prone areas, earth should be filled and well compacted all around the pits in 1000 mm width and up to the top. It is not necessary to raise the pits by more than 300 mm above the plinth of the house. In these situations, the pits should be designed as wet pits, taking into consideration the infiltration rate of the type of soil. 2. Pits in Rocky Strata In rocky strata with soil layers in between, leach pits are designed on the same principles as those for low sub-soil water level taking the infiltration capacity of the soil as 20 litres per sq.m per day. However, in rocks with fissures, chalk formations, or old root channels, pollution can flow over a very long distance; hence these conditions demand careful investigation and adoption of pollution safeguards. In impervious rocky strata the pits will function as holding tanks since there will be no infiltration of liquid. In such situations, a PF latrine with leaching pits is not a suitable system. 3. Pits in Soils with Low Infiltration Capacity Leaching capacity tends to be the limiting factor when the infiltration capacity of soil is low. In these circumstances, there are two options: construct a larger pit, or increase the critical leaching area by backfilling and compacting with brick ballast, gravel, sand etc., for the required width all around the pit. Emptying of Pits/Septic tanks Emptying of pits becomes essential when they get filled. The three most important issues related to emptying of pits are frequency, cost, and hygiene. Manual methods of emptying are common for pour-flush latrines. The responsibility for emptying latrines is with the users. The main guidelines relating to latrine emptying include Advising householders that the filling/ emptying cycle is likely to be between three to six years

and that they need to make their own arrangements for emptying the pits. Emptying costs are location-specific; anticipated emptying costs should be ascertained with local

contractors during programme planning. Groundwater pollution A problem that is related to on-site sanitation is the potential for pollution of groundwater that is associated with these systems. Groundwater under or near pit latrines may become polluted, which can be a serious problem when it affects the quality of drinking-water drawn from wells and boreholes.

2Technical Guidelines on Twin Pit Pour Flush Latrines (1992), Ministry of Urban Development, Government of India

Page | 163


Water in leaky pipes may also be contaminated if the pressure drops and polluted groundwater levels are above the pipes. A particular problem in densely populated areas is the possible proximity of latrine pits and shallow wells on neighboring plots. The key guideline is that a minimum distance of 15 m, other than in fractured formations, between a pit and a downstream water-point, is normally sufficient to remove all contaminants. Pollution safeguards for twin pit pour flush latrines To ensure that the risk of polluting ground water and drinking water sources is minimal, the following safeguards should be taken while locating the pits of the pour flush latrines:

• Drinking water should be obtained from another source or from the same aquifer but at a point beyond the reach of any fecal pollution from the leach pits.

• If the soil is fine (effective size 0.2 mm or less), the pits can be located at a minimum distance of 3 m from the drinking water sources, provided the maximum ground water level throughout the year is 2 m or more below the pit bottom (low water table). If the water table is higher, i.e., less than 2 m below the pit bottom, the safe distance should be increased to 10 m.

• If the soil is coarse (effective size more than 0.2 mm), the same safe distances as specified above can be maintained by providing a 500 mm thick sand envelope, of fine sand of 0.2 mm effective size, all around the pit, and sealing the bottom of the pit with an impervious material such as puddle clay, a plastic sheet, lean cement concrete, or cement stabilized soil.

• If the pits are located under a footpath or a road, or if a water supply main is within a distance of 3 m from the pits, the invert level of the pipes or drains connecting the leach pits should be kept below the level of the water main, or 1 m below the ground level. If this is not possible due to site considerations, the joints of the water main should be encased in concrete.

Operation and Maintenance - Dos and Don’ts of Twin-pit Pour-flush Latrines DO s

• Keep a bucket full of water outside the toilet. • Keep a 2 liters can in the toilet filled with water for flushing. • Before use, pour a little quantity of water to wet the pan so that excreta can slide smoothly into

the pit. • Flush the excreta after each use.

o Pour a little quantity of water, say half a liter, in the squatting pan after urination. o The squatting pan should be cleaned daily with a soft broom or soft brush with a long

handle after sprinkling a small quantity of water and detergent powder/soap. o Use minimum quantity of water in washing the pan and toilet floor. o Wash hands, using soap or ash, after defecation at the assigned place. o If any construction defect is observed during the defect-liability period, report the

matter to the local authority or the construction agency. o When the pit in use is full, divert the flow to the second pit o If the trap gets choked, rodding should be done from the pan side as well as from the

rear side by means of a split bamboo stick, after removing the cover of the drain or junction chamber.

Page | 164


• Care should be taken while desludging the pits located in water-logged or high water sub-soil water areas and in case of combined pits, as humus may not be safe for handling.

DON'T s

• Do not use both the pits at the same time. • Do not use more than 2 litres of water for each flushing (if the waste is not flushed with 2 litres,

pour more water at the specific spots for flushing the waste). • Do not use caustic soda or acid for cleaning the pan. • Do not throw sweepings, vegetable or fruit peelings, rags, cotton waste, and cleaning materials

like corn cobs, mud balls, stone pieces, leaves, etc. in the pan or the pits. • Do not allow rain water, kitchen or bath waste to enter the pits. • Do not provide water tap in the toilet. • Do not throw lighted cigarette butts in the pan. • Do not desludge the pit before 1½ years of its being in use.

Page | 165


ANNEXURE-16

GUIDELINES FOR SAFE SULLAGE DISPOSAL AT HOUSEHOLD AND COMMUNITY LEVELS

Page | 166


Annexure-16 GUIDELINES FOR SAFE SULLAGE DISPOSAL AT HOUSEHOLD AND COMMUNITY LEVELS

1.0 Introduction The guidelines in this annexure on sullage disposal at household and community levels are based on the guidelines in the publication - 'Solid and Liquid Waste Management in Rural Areas - A Technical Note' (TSC, UNICEF). These guidelines will apply to the sullage disposal activities undertaken in the rural areas of Jharkhand.

2.0 Technical options for household level management The village level water management system should be as simple as possible for a village level person to understand and implement and it should be decentralized. The technological options should based on domestic (Household) level management and/ or community level management. It will always be better to manage and treat domestic grey water generated in the house in the area/courtyard/land surrounding the house. The following technological options will be suitable for this purpose:

• Kitchen Garden with piped root zone system • Kitchen Garden without piped root zone system • Leach pit • Soakage pit.

Out of these options only soak pits are planned in Jharkhand Rural Piped Water Supply Projects. There is a possibility that the other options may be taken up as innovative sub-projects.

3.0 Soak Pit Soak pit is a dug out pit .lled with stones or preferably over burnt bricks. The large numbers of stones or bricks increase the surface area over which biological and chemical action takes place. The water seeps into the ground and reduces danger of polluting the ground water sources. Advantages

• This is the cheapest technology for management of water at household level • Prevents greywater stagnation • Prevents vector breading.

Operation and maintenance (O&M)

• Filter to be cleaned every fortnight or month, depending on accumulation of dirt • Make a hook of thick wire and pierce it in the .lter and take .lter media out and

clean/wash it and dry and replace it in the earthen pot • Soak pit looses its capacity within a period of 7 to 8 years of work. At that time take out

the boulders from the pit, scrap the walls of the pit in order to remove the oily layer; let the pit dry for a period of 2 to 3 days and clean and dry the boulders and replace into the pit.

Limitations • Soakage pit is not suitable for rocky terrain • It will over .ow if wastewater .ow in the pit exceeds the design .ow • If suspended solids get into the pit, the choking of the pit will take place earlier.

Page | 167


4.0 Off Site Community Level Management: For the community greywater of this type, the .rst step would be to establish a system for collecting and transporting this greywater for the final treatment on a suitable location. It will be necessary to establish a suitable drainage system for this purpose. This drainage system could be of two types a. Open drain with technically sound design, involving semicircular base and trapezoidal cross section so

as to maximize self cleansing velocity for carrying away silt in greywater b. Closed drain-small bore greywater draining system with intercepting tanks at suitable points. 1. Open or Surface Greywater Drainage System

For collection and transportation of greywater .owing out from the houses, surface drain has been the simplest system, whereby, the community greywater is carried away from the village for onward .nal treatment. This system can be established easily with available local mason at minimum cost. Operation and maintenance (O&M)

• Gram Panchayat will have to establish a system for periodical cleaning and silt removal from the drain

• Community will have to be educated to keep the drain free from garbage, so as to avoid blockages in drain

• Care needs to be taken to avoid over. flow water (effluent) from septic tank, from .owing to the open drain. This effluent should be led to leach pit covered at the top.

2. Closed Drainage

a. Small bore greywater drainage system

In rural areas, closed drain system akin to conventional sewerage systems will not be feasible because of the excessive capital & operation maintenance expenditure and the elaborate maintenance requirements. The small bore greywater drainage system which is laid close to the soil surface is suitable and appropriate as it is low cost and requires minimum maintenance which is easy. Advantages:

• As the system is closed, materials like garbage, road side solid wastes, plastics, building materials etc. will not .nd access to the system

• Operation and maintenance becomes easily manageable by Gram Panchayat • Construction cost is comparable to the cost for surface drain. It may be only marginally

varying • Road space is fully utilized.

5.0 Final Treatment of Community Greywater Once the community greywater is collected at one or multiple points outside the village, final treatment is required to convert it into harmless and reusable water. The treatment technologies need to suit the following requirements.

• As low cost as possible • O&M should be easy and low cost for Gram Panchayat • Same cost recovery may be possible by the farmers

Page | 168


• Selling the treated water. Treated water could be used for public gardens or horticulture. The produce may be sold portably

• Vector breeding is avoided • Pollution of water from nala or river is prevented. • Some appropriate technologies easily manageable by Gram Panchayat could be as

follows: o Sullage stabilization pound and reuse o Sedimentation and .ltration and reuse o Screening stabilization tank systems like DOSIWAM, DEWATS etc.

A. Sullage Stabilization Ponds The greywater collected via drainage system is passed to large shallow basins or ponds excavated at suitable land site and placed serially as a stabilization system in which greywater is stabilized, its pathogenicity is reduced and the stabilized water becomes useable. a. Anaerobic ponds

The greywater reaching the pond via drain, usually has high solid content. In the anaerobic pond, these solids settle at the bottom, where these are digested anaerobically. Thus, the partially clari.ed liquid is discharged onwards into a facultative pond for further treatment. b. Facultative ponds The partially clari.ed water is led to facultative pond. In this pond oxidation of greywater takes place. It is called ‘facultative’ because in this pond in the upper layer aerobic conditions are maintained while in the lower layer, anaerobic conditions exist.

c. Maturation pond The stabilized water from facultative pond is led to a maturation pond. The main function of the maturation period is the destruction of pathogens. This pond is wholly aerobic. Operation and maintenance

• It will be the responsibility of GP • Maintenance requirements are minimal. Regular cutting of grass on embankments and

removal of any .oating scum from pond surface are the only requirements • Occasional anti mosquito spraying treatment may be necessary.

B. Screening, Sedimentation and Filtration The greywater collected from drainage system can be passed through a screening, sedimentation and filtration tank system. The treated water can be used for irrigation etc.

C. Reuse of Stabilized Water Greywater stabilized and cleaned by the use of any of the above mentioned systems can be reused in many ways.

• Irrigation for agricultural use • Irrigation for horticulture • Fish farming.

Page | 169


ANNEXURE-17

GUIDELINES FOR COMMUNITY SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT

Page | 170


Annexure-17 GUIDELINES FOR COMMUNITY SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT

1.0 Introduction

The guidelines in this annexure on solid waste disposal at household and community levels are based on the guidelines in the publication - 'Solid and Liquid Waste Management in Rural Areas - A Technical Note' (TSC, UNICEF). These guidelines will apply to the solid disposal activities undertaken in the Jharkhand Rural Piped Water Supply Projects.

Types of Solid Waste

Biodegradable and recyclable Non-biodegradable Recyclable Non-recyclable

Kitchen waste Plastic - carry bags, milk covers PVC pipes etc. Syringes, Glucose bottles etc. Cotton and nylon cloth Tyres & Tubes

Nitrozen sealed packing for chips

Food Cow dung/animal waste Agriculture Leaves Egg cells Henna paste Vegetable Peels, Meat, Bones Dead animals Paper Wood

Shampoo Bottles Glass Books/notebook Wires Caps of mineral water bottles Plastic Tin can Metal Ash/dirt

Tetrapacks Thermo cal Carbon paper Plastic coated visiting cards Sachets Modern packing materials (plastic) for food packing PET mineral water bottles

2.0 UApproaches for Solid Waste Management For effective management of solid waste in rural areas, focus should be on management at household level. That which cannot be managed at household level should be managed at the community level. In general, the following approach should be followed: • Segregation of solid waste at the

household level (Biodegradable and non biodegradable)

• Reuse of non biodegradable waste at the household level to the extent possible

• Household level treatment of bio degradable waste

• Collection and transportation of segregated waste at the household level to a place identified at the community level (in cases where household level treatment is not possible)

• Community level treatment or recycling/reuse of waste o All the biodegradable waste should be composted at the community level o Non biodegradable waste may be further segregated and sold or recycled o Waste which cannot be composted, reused or recycled may be disposed at the land.ll sites

following appropriate procedure, (such waste may usually be construction waste, debris etc).

Page | 171


3.0 Community level composting Community level composting may be resorted to when management of solid waste at household level is not possible. For community level composting, Panchayat should select a suitable site as Compost Yard for the village. Site should be selected taking into consideration wind flow direction, so that the inhabited areas don’t get any foul odour. The site should be easily accessible for transportation of waste and manure. It should not be a low lying area to avoid water logging. A. Underground unlined manure pit or garbage pit: This is applicable for rural areas with low rainfall and villages where there is lack of space at household level for composting. This is not suitable for heavy rainfall areas and rocky terrain. Use and maintenance of the pits

• Go on adding collected garbage in the pits (only biodegradable type) • Wherever possible, it is advisable to add cow dung slurry to the garbage to enhance the

composting process • Spread a very thin layer of soil over it (once a week) to avoid odour & .y nuisance • Continue to add garbage everyday • Follow the above procedure & repeat the layers till the pit is full. It is recommended to .ll the pit

up to about 300mm above ground level • After 3-4 days the garbage above ground settles down • Plaster it with soil • Leave the pit as it is for 3-6 months for maturation and start other pits sequentially • After 3-6 months take out the compost & use it in the .fields.

B. Underground brick lined manure pit or garbage pit: This is applicable for rural areas with low rainfall and villages where there is lack of space at household level for composting. This is not suitable for heavy rainfall areas and rocky terrain and is a capital intensive option Use and maintenance of the pit

• Go on adding collected garbage from the houses in the pits (only biodegradable type) • Wherever possible, it is advisable to add cow dung slurry to the garbage to enhance the

composting process • Spread a very thin layer of soil over it (once a week) to avoid avoid odour & fly nuisance • Continue to add garbage everyday • Follow the above procedure & repeat the layers till the pit is full. It is recommended to .ll the pit

up to about 300mm above ground level • After 3-4 days the garbage above ground settles down • Plaster it with soil • Leave the pit as it is for 3-6 months for maturation and start other pits sequentially • After 3-6 months take out the compost & use it in the .elds.

C. Over ground heap: This is applicable for rural areas with high rainfall and rocky terrain and for villages where there is lack of space at household level for composting. Use and maintenance of the heap

• Go on adding garbage collected from the houses over the platform (only biodegradable type) • Wherever possible, it is advisable to add cow dung slurry to the garbage to enhance the

composting process • Spread a very thin layer of soil over it (once a week) to avoid odour & .y nuisance

Page | 172


• Continue to add garbage everyday • The heaps should be sprinkled with water periodically to maintain the moisture level • Follow the above procedure & repeat the layers till the heap attains the height of 0.8m • After 3-4 days the garbage above ground settles down • Plaster it with soil • Leave the heap as it is for 3-6 months for maturation and start another heap • After 3-6 months take out the compost & use it in the .elds • Till the manure in the heap matures, make another heap of the same dimensions at a minimum

distance of 1m from the .rst heap. D. Over ground brick lined compost tank: This is applicable for rural areas with high rainfall and rocky terrain and for villages where there is lack of space at household level for composting. Use and maintenance of the tank

• Go on adding collected garbage from the houses in the tank (only biodegradable type) • Wherever possible, it is advisable to add cow dung slurry to the garbage to enhance the

composting process • Spread a very thin (1-2 inch) layer of soil over it (once a week) to avoid odour & .y nuisance • Continue to add garbage everyday • Follow the above procedure & repeat the layers till the heap attains the height of 1m • After 3-4 days the garbage above ground settles down • Plaster it with soil • Leave the heap as it is for 3-6 months for maturation • After 3-6 months take out the compost & use it in the .elds • Till the manure in the tank matures, make another tank of the same dimensions at a minimum

distance of 1m from the first tank. 4.0Vermicomposting at Community Level The following steps need to be followed for vermicomposting at community level:

• Appropriate site selection: the site should be protected from direct sunlight and should not be in low lying areas

• Vermiculture site preparation; Proper ramming of soil or preparation of platform is required before preparation of vermicompost beds

• Construction of appropriate shed: thatched roof/tin sheds on bamboo/metal poles with proper slope to drain rain water, and proper ventilation

• The biodegradable waste should be predigested in a separate bed before transferring to the treatment beds.

Precautions to be taken

• Proper covering of feed bed (local available materials such as coconut leaves etc may be used for covering of the vermi compost pit)

• Avoid excess water (only sprinkling) • Protect the shed area and the beds from red ants, cockroaches etc. by using haldi (turmeric)

sprinkling atta (.our) all around the perimeter of the shed and the bed • Keep the feed beds away from birds/chicken/ducks/rodents from eating the worms.

Page | 173


5.0 Recycling A. Recycling of Papers It is possible to convert waste paper into useful recyclable product. Making pulp from waste paper is an old art. The process has now been refined. Various articles including showpieces may be made using the pulp. The articles are so sturdy that they can be an alternative to wood to some extent. Hence it is also called Pepwood. Women/ SHG members/ Unemployed youths after receiving thorough training can undertake this activity. It is also necessary to attain a certain level of skill. Materials such as Waste paper, Flour of fenugreek or tamarind seed as adhesive, Water, Rough .at stones for macerating paper, Colors, Moulds of different shapes and sizes, well ventilated cupboard for storing the articles, etc. are required. B. Recycling of Plastics In all types of solid waste in rural areas, plastics have become a major cause of concern due to Non-biodegradability, nuisance value in waste stream and blockage of drainage channels, pollution of surface water and random burning here and there causing air pollution problem. There is no proper collection or disposal system of plastic waste. 6.0Land Fill In spite of composting, re-use and recycling, some waste remains untreated/unmanaged which requires final disposal, either by incineration or by land filling. Incineration is a technology where waste is burnt in a specially engineered machine called Incinerator. Incineration is not simply burning, but complete combustion. Incinerators are considered to be causes of air pollution. This is not a viable option for waste management. A landfill is a properly designated area and used for the disposal of non-biodegradable and non-recyclable inorganic solid waste. Landfill is considered to be a viable option. This land fill takes care of the problem of disposal of non recyclable solid waste.

• Selection of Landfill Site: Gram Panchayat in consultation with Zilla Parishad/Block Panchayat (as the case may be) should select the landfill site which should be: o Located at the outskirts of the village o Accessible o On vacant/uncultivated land o Located in the natural depressions with slight slopes o Waste from landfills leaches into the aquifer below site should be such as to avoid surface

water and groundwater pollution o Before establishing any landfill site, baseline data of ground water quality in the area shall be

collected and kept as a record for future reference. • Procedures to be followed for landfill construction

o Wastes should be compacted to achieve high density o Wastes should be immediately covered with a minimum 10cm of soil/debris/ o Before the monsoon season, an intermediate cover of soil approximately 40-65cm thick

should be placed on the landfill to prevent infiltration o Proper drainage system should be constructed to divert run-off water o After the completion of landfill a final cover should be provided to prevent infiltration and

erosion. This should be according to the given diagram

Page | 174


o Landfill site should be properly fenced with a provision of a gate with locking arrangements by the gram panchayat/community

o Plantation at landfill site should be encouraged to combat pollution. It should be in sufficient density to minimize soil erosion

o The plants should be locally adapted, non-edible, drought and extreme temperature resistant, short rooted and of low nutrient demanding variety.

Operation and maintenance

• Gram Panchayat/community should prevent entry of stray animals and unauthorized persons through protective measures

• Regular Monitoring of groundwater is required for maintaining groundwater quality.

• Avoid entry of cattle and grazing on the landfill site in an unfenced landfill as it would be hazard

Page | 175


ANNEXURE-18

FORMATS FOR ENVIRONMENTAL DATA SHEETS (EDS)

Page | 176


Annexure-18 FORMATS FOR ENVIRONMENTAL DATA SHEETS (EDS)

A. EDS for Water Supply

S. No. Description Particulars Remarks GENERAL

1. Name of Habitation 2. Name of Gram Panchayat 3. Name of Block 4. Name of District 5. Population (present) 6. Total water demand (Litres per day) 7. Present water supply (Litres per day)

8. Present classification of habitation NC / NSS / PC

9. Problem with present water supply

10. Net demand of water from the proposed source (Litres/day)

11. Type of source Groundwater source Surface water

12. Type of scheme Single Village Scheme (SVS)

Multi Village Scheme (MVS)

13. Is de-fluoridation planned? Yes No LOCATION

14. Where is the source located?

15. Has a sanitary survey of the source location been done? (Enclose the report of the sanitary survey) Refer to Annexure: 13

16. Is any component of the scheme located in a forest area? Yes No

If yes, obtain permission in writing from the Forest Department

17. Is the source is near (within 5 km) any ecologically sensitive area (National Parks, Wildlife Sanctuaries)? Yes No

Avoid the sensitive areas. If not possible, obtain permission in writing from the Forest Department and follow mitigation measures as suggested by the Forest Department

18.

Are any trees likely to be cut at the location for construction of the scheme? If yes, mention the number of trees.


IN CASE OF GROUNDWATER SOURCE AQUIFER STATUS AND SUSTAINABILITY

19. What is the type of aquifer? Shallow aquifer Deep aquifer

20. Total depth of well (metres) 21. Depth to groundwater table below GL (m) 22. Summer 23. Winter

24. Is the groundwater tapping in safe zone (classified based on exploitation)? Yes No

25. What are the measures proposed for source sustainability?

Groundwater recharging structure

Limiting the draft to safe yield

LOCATION OF THE WELL

Page | 177


26.

What is the distance of this source from the nearest leach pit of any existing sanitation facility? (It should be more than 15 metres)

27.

What is the distance of this source from the nearest rain water harvesting pit? (It should be more than 15 metres)

28. What is the distance of the source from the nearest existing well? (It should be more than 300 metres)

29. STRUCTURE OF THE WELL

30. Will the well be provided with sanitary plug till the pump is installed? Yes No

31. Is a concrete mat (of at least 75 cm radius) planned around the bore well? Yes No

32. Is grouting of the space outside the well casing planned? Yes No

WATER QUALITY

33. Is the quality of water acceptable? (enclose the water quality test report) Yes No

34. If not acceptable, mention the type of water quality problem

35. What is the alternative proposed?

36. If the water is to be treated, mention the treatment process

37.

What is the frequency planned for testing water for bacteriological contamination? (should be 1 initially and later as required)

38.

What is the frequency planned for testing water for physical and chemical contamination? (should be 4 times/year)

39. What is the frequency planned for testing residual chlorine? (should be at least once a week)

40. What is the frequency planned for sanitary inspection by GPWSSC? (should be 4 times/year)

41. What is the frequency planned for sanitary inspection by AEE? (should be once/year)

IN CASE OF SURFACE WATER SOURCE LOCATION

42. Will there be any significant land disturbance resulting in erosion, subsidence and instability? Yes No

43.

Will the scheme involve alteration of natural drainage? If yes, indicate the measures for the drainage. Yes No

SUSTAINABILITY

44. Is the expected safe yield from the source greater than water demand? Yes No

WATER QUALITY

45. What is the Turbidity of raw water (NTU)? (Enclose water quality test report)

46.

Is this source within 100 m from the nearest sewage/industrial effluent disposal point (disposal into the surface water source)? Yes No

47. Is there any chemical impurity present? If yes, furnish the details. (Enclose water quality test report) Yes No

48.

What is the frequency planned for testing water for bacteriological contamination? (should be 1 every month)

49.

What is the frequency planned for testing water for physical and chemical contamination? (should be 4 times/year)

Page | 178


50. What is the frequency planned for testing residual chlorine? (should be once every day)

51. What is the frequency planned for sanitary inspection by GPWSSC? (should be 12 times/year)

52.

What is the frequency planned for sanitary inspection by AEE? (should be 2 times /year if population serviced is less than 5000; should be 24-48 times /year if population serviced is between 5000-20000)

WATER TREATMENT 53. What is the method of water treatment proposed?

54. How will the sludge and other residue from the water treatment plant be disposed?

Note: Refer Guidelines Vide Annexures 5, 6, 11, 12 and 13. B. EDS for Rainwater Harvesting S. No. Description Particulars Remarks

GENERAL 1. Name of Habitation 2. Name of Gram Panchayat 3. Name of Block 4. Name of District 5. Population (present) 6. Total water demand (Litres per day) 7. Present water supply (Litres per day)

8. Problem with present water supply

Source is inadequate in summer

Water table is depleted in summer

LOCATION

9. What is the distance of the RWH Structure from the nearest bore well? (should be 15 m away)

10.

Is the RWH located away from any supply / feeder channel of tanks? (RWH must not be in these locations)

11. Has the location of the RWH structure been certified by a hydrogeologist of the DDWS?

12. Is there any possibility of contaminated water flowing into the RWH structure?

STRUCTURE 13. Type of RWH structure 14. Intended use of rain water

HOUSEHOLD ROOFTOP RWH STRUCTURE

15. Is the roof smooth, free from any toxic materials (including paint)?

16. Are there any overhanging trees nearby?

17. Is there provision planned for discarding first flush of rain water?

18. Is there provision planned for wire mesh screens at gutter heads?

19. Is there provision for safe extraction of the harvested rain water? (filtration, disinfection, gravity tap)

MAINTENANCE

20.

What is the planned frequency of conducting complete maintenance check and cleaning of the RWH system? (recommended before and after every rain; cleaning after every dry period of 1 month)

21. What is the planned frequency of cleaning storage tank? (recommended at end of dry season, before the

Page | 179


first rain) Note: Refer Guidelines Vide Annexures 16. C. EDS for Sanitation Schemes S. No. Description Particulars Remarks

GENERAL 1. Name of Habitation 2. Name of Gram Panchayat 3. Name of Block 4. Name of District 5. Population (present) 6. No. of ISL proposed

LOCATION

7.



8. Type of substrata Pervious Impervious 9. Depth to groundwater table, in metres 10. *winter 11. *summer 12. Is a shallow aquifer used as source for drinking water

supply in the habitation?

13. Is the habitation located in an coastal area?

14.

Is a minimum distance of 15 metres maintained between the pits and the nearest drinking water sources? (for all the ISLs proposed) Yes No

15.

In case of high ground water table and in case of highly permeable soils, is a minimum distance of 40 metres maintained between the pits and the nearest drinking water sources? (for all the ISLs proposed) Yes No Not applicable

STRUCTURE 16. What is the type of toilet proposed? Refer Annexure 17. 17. For ISL 18. What are the precautions taken to prevent

groundwater contamination?

19.

In case of high ground water table, is raising of platform, bottom sealing of pit and earth filling outside along sides of pit planned? Yes No

Not applicable

20. In case of flood prone area, is is raising of platform and earth filling outside along sides of pit planned? Yes No

Not applicable

21. In case of loose soils, is lining of pits with perforated cement rings planned? Yes No

Not applicable

22. In case of soils with low permeability, is back filling of part of pit with more sandy soil planned? Yes No

Not applicable

23. In case of soils with high permeability, is earth filling around rings with denser soil planned? Yes No

Not applicable

MAINTENANCE

24.

Is an awareness programme for prospective users on proper use and maintenance of the IHLs being planned?

25. Is adequate water available for use? (2 litres per each use)

26.

What is the expected cleaning interval of pits? (a pit should not be emptied before 1 ½ years after its being in use)

27. What is the method of disposal of materials removed from pits?

Page | 180


Note: Refer Guidelines vide Annexure 14 and 15 D.EDS for Storm water / Sullage Drainage Scheme

S. No. Description Particulars Remarks

GENERAL 1. Name of Habitation 2. Name of Village Panchayat 3. Name of Block 4. Name of District 5. Population (present) 6. How the sullage is disposed presently? 7. Is there any place where sullage is stagnated?

LOCATION

8. Is any component of the scheme located in a forest area? Yes No


9.



10. Type of substrata Pervious Impervious 11. Depth to groundwater table (in metres) 12. *winter 13. *summer

14. Is adequate gradient/slope available for smooth flow of water?

STRUCTURE 15. What is the total length of roads/streets? (m) 16. What is the present length of drains? 17. What is the proposed length of drain? 18. Are the drains planned with semicircular base and

trapezoidal cross-section? (This design will help to increase the velocity of water and the drain's self-cleaning capacity)

19. Will the top of the drain be at a lower level compared to the road surface? (This will prevent stagnation of storm water on road)

20. Are the drains to be covered with stones or RCC slabs? (This is not recommended as covered drains cannot be cleaned leading to stagnation)

21. Is there a chance of overflow of effluent from septic tank flowing into open drain? (This must be avoided)

MAINTENANCE 22. Has the GP established a system for periodic

maintenance and silt removal from the drains?

23. Is there a plan to educate the community to avoid throwing solid waste into the drain (to keep it free from blockages)?

TREATMENT 24. What is the treatment proposed for the sullage?

(Suspended solids must be removed through settling – for example, in sullage stabilization pond)

25. Is a single treatment pond planned or are a series of ponds planned? (a series of interconnected shallow ponds is recommended – it is better to have multiple ponds of smaller size than few large ponds)

26. Is the soil very permeable? (If yes, plastic sheeting topped with soil may be laid at

Page | 181


bottom) 27. Is any reuse proposed for the sullage? 28. What are the precautions taken to prevent

groundwater contamination from sullage?

Note: Refer Guidelines vide Annexure 16 E. EDS for Household Soak Pits S. No. Description Particulars Remarks

GENERAL 1. Name Habitation 2. Name of Village Panchayat 3. Name of Block 4. Name of District 5. Population (present)

LOCATION

6. Is the soak pit located in rocky terrain? (Not suitable for rocky terrain) Yes No

STRUCTURE

7.

Will the wastewater flow exceed the design flow of the soak pit? (calculate design flow as per requirement for bathing 20-30 l/p/d, kitchen 5-10 l/p/d, washing clothes 15-20 l/p/d, and other uses) Yes No

8.

Is filling material of appropriate size available? (Should be pebbles of sizes 125 – 150 mm, 100 -125 mm and 50 – 75 mm) Yes No

9. Is the pit to be filled loosely? (Filling material must not be tightly packed) Yes No

10. Is the pit to be filled with murram, brickbats or sand? (These materials must not be used) Yes No

MAINTENANCE

11.

What is the frequency planned for cleaning the filter of the soak pit? (Must be cleaned every fortnight or month)

12.

What is the frequency planned for cleaning the pit and replacing the filling material? (Must be once in 7-8 years)

F. EDS for Community Solid Waste Management

S. No. Description Particulars Legal

requirements GENERAL

1. Name of Habitation 2. Name of Gram Panchayat 3. Name of Block 4. Name of District 5. Population (present)

LOCATION 6. Type of substrata Pervious Impervious 7. Depth to groundwater table in metres 8. *winter 9. *summer

WASTE GENERATION 10. What is the expected quantity of solid waste generation per

day? (tons)

11. What is the expected quantity of biodegradable waste (waste that can be composted) per day? (tons)

12. What is the expected quantity of non-biodegradable waste

Page | 182


(waste that can be composted) per day? (tons) WASTE MANAGEMENT WASTE SEGREGATION AND COLLECTION

13. Are awareness programmes on household waste segregation planned to be organized? Yes No

14. Is segregation of wastes at household level (into biodegradable and non-biodegradable wastes) being planned? Yes No

15. How will the household waste be collected? Community

waste bins

Door-to-door collection

16. Are the community waste bins planned to be located at least 15 m away from any water sources?

17. What is the planned frequency of collecting waste (from community bins or from individual households)?

COMPOSTING OF BIODEGRADABLE WASTE 18. What is the type of composting planned?

Underground (lined or unlined) pits – suitable for low rainfall areas Overground heap or tank – suitable for high rainfall areas and rocky terrain Vermi-compost units

FOR COMPOSTING UNITS 19. Will the wind flow direction at the composting yard cause four

odor in the habitation?

20. Is the compost yard in a low lying area (likely to get water logged)?

21. Will weekly covering of the compost pit/heap with thin soil layer planned to avoid odour and fly nuisance?

FOR VERMI-COMPOSTING UNITS 22. What is the variety of earthworms planned? (local or exotic)

(local variety – Lampito mauritii is preferred to exotic varieties – Eisenia foetida and Eudrilus euginiae)

23. Is the vermi-composting unit located in an area that is not low-lying and has adequate slope (to prevent water-logging)?

24. What pest control (control of red ants, cockroaches, etc.) methods are planned at the vermi-composting unit? (Only non-chemical methods such as application of turmeric and flour around perimeter of the tank must be practiced)

MANAGEMENT OF NON-BIODEGRADABLE WASTE 25. What part of the non-biodegradable waste will be recycled?

(sold to the kabadiwalla, recycled through any SHG enterprise, etc.)

26. What part of the non-biodegradable waste will be sent to the land fill?

27. Is the site identified for the land fill located in a forest area? Yes No

Avoid the forest area

28. Is the site located for the land fill near (within 5 km) any ecologically sensitive area (National Parks, Wildlife Sanctuaries)?

Yes No

Avoid having the land fill site near the sensitive area (Seek Forest Department permissions)

29. What is the extent of land available for the land fill site?

Obtain clearance from JPCB

30. What is the ownership of the land identified for the land fill site? Government / Panchayat Private land

If private land, follow recommended

Page | 183


land guidelines for acquisition

31. What is the distance of the land fill site from nearest water supply source/catchment boundary/water body (less than 100 m?)

32. What are the precautions taken/planned to prevent surface and groundwater contamination?

33. Is periodic covering of waste with minimum 10 cm of soil/debris planned?

34. Is covering of waste with 40-65 cm thick soil cover planned before every monsoon (to prevent infiltration)?

35. Is an appropriate drainage system planned at the land fill site to divert run off water?

36. Will the land fill site have fencing and a gate to prevent entry of stray animals and unauthorized persons?

37. Has baseline data on groundwater quality in the area been collected (for future reference)? Enclose report water quality test.

38. Is periodic and regular monitoring of ground water quality in the area planned?

Page | 184


ANNEXURE-19

SCREENING TOOL FOR CATEGORIZING SCHEMES

Page | 185


Annexure-19 SCREENING TOOL FOR CATEGORIZING SCHEMES

Category I Category II A. Water Supply Schemes 1. SVS with source in shallow aquifer in safe and semi-crtitical zone

1.SVSs/MVSs with shallow groundwater source located in either critical or over exploitation zones of groundwater exploitation and deep groundwater source in semi-critical and over exploited zones

2. SVS with source in deep aquifer located in safe zone of exploitation

2. SVSs/MVSs with sources located at or nearer (within 1 km) to natural habitats/sensitive ecosystem such as National Park / Wildlife Sanctuaries (Seek Forest Department permission)

3. SVS with perennial surface water source requiring slow sand filtration only

3. SVSs/MVSs with the water quality at the source is not treatable with conventional treatment , and involves special treatment/RO treatment.

4. MVSs with surface water source requiring treatment

B. Artificial Recharge Structure

1. Individual house hold roof top rainwater harvesting 1. All types of rain water harvesting structures to improve water supply sources

C. Underground Drainage Schemes No scheme 1. All types of underground drainage schemes D. Sanitation Schemes 1. Construction of ISL where subsoil strata is not favourable

(hard rock or low infiltration capacity) for adoption of twin pit pour flush toilets

2. Construction of ISL where subsurface strata is favourable for adopting twin pit pour flush toilet and groundwater table is at depth greater than 3.0m below ground level

2. Construction of group owned latrines where subsoil strata is not favourable for adoption of twin pit pour flush toilets

3. Construction of group owned latrines where the subsoil strata is favourable for adoption of twin pit pour flush toilets and groundwater table is at depth greater than 3.0m below ground level

3.Construction ISL or group owned latrines where groundwater table is at depth lesser than 3.0m below ground level

E. Storm water / Sullage Drains If all the following conditions are satisfied:

Construction of drains where groundwater table is at depths > 3.0m

Subsoil is having sufficient bearing capacity Length of drain is not more than 250 m

If any of the following conditions are satisfied Construction of drains where groundwater table is at

depths < 3.0m Soil bearing capacity is < 5 t/mP

2 Length of drain is more than 250m

F. Solid Waste Management No scheme 1. All types of solid waste management with source

segregation and installing vermi-composting / composting

Page | 186


ANNEXURE-19(A)

FORM-1A APPENDIX II

Page | 187


Annexure 19(A)

FORM-1A

APPENDIX II

(See paragraph 6)

FORM-1 A (only for construction projects listed under item 8 of the Schedule) CHECK LIST OF

ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS

(Project proponents are required to provide full information and wherever necessary attach explanatory notes with the Form and submit along with proposed environmental management plan & monitoring programme)

1. LAND ENVIRONMENT

(Attach panoramic view of the project site and the vicinity)

1.1. Will the existing landuse get significantly altered from the project that is not consistent with the surroundings? (Proposed landuse must conform to the approved Master Plan / Development Plan of the area. Change of landuse if any and the statutory approval from the competent authority be submitted). Attach Maps of (i) site location, (ii) surrounding features of the proposed site (within 500 meters) and (iii)the site (indicating levels & contours) to appropriate scales. If not available attach only conceptual plans.

1.2. List out all the major project requirements in terms of the land area, built up area, water consumption, power requirement, connectivity, community facilities, parking needs etc.

1.3. What are the likely impacts of the proposed activity on the existing facilities adjacent to the proposed site? (Such as open spaces, community facilities, details of the existing landuse, disturbance to the local ecology).

1.4. Will there be any significant land disturbance resulting in erosion, subsidence & instability? (Details of soil type, slope analysis, vulnerability to subsidence, seismicity etc may be given).

1.5. Will the proposal involve alteration of natural drainage systems? (Give details on a contour map showing the natural drainage near the proposed project site)

1.6. What are the quantities of earthwork involved in the construction activity-cutting, filling, reclamation etc. (Give details of the quantities of earthwork involved, transport of fill materials from outside the site etc.)

1.7. Give details regarding water supply, waste handling etc during the construction period.

1.8. Will the low lying areas & wetlands get altered? (Provide details of how low lying and wetlands are getting modified from the proposed activity)

1.9. Whether construction debris & waste during construction cause health hazard? (Give quantities of various types of wastes generated during construction including the construction labour and the means of disposal)

Page | 188


2. WATER ENVIRONMENT

2.1. Give the total quantity of water requirement for the proposed project with the breakup of requirements for various uses. How will the water requirement met? State the sources & quantities and furnish a water balance statement.

2.2. What is the capacity (dependable flow or yield) of the proposed source of water?

2.3. What is the quality of water required, in case, the supply is not from a municipal source? (Provide physical, chemical, biological characteristics with class of water quality)

2.4. How much of the water requirement can be met from the recycling of treated wastewater? (Give the details of quantities, sources and usage)

2.5. Will there be diversion of water from other users? (Please assess the impacts of the project on other existing uses and quantities of consumption)

2.6. What is the incremental pollution load from wastewater generated from the proposed activity? (Give details of the quantities and composition of wastewater generated from the proposed activity)

2.7. Give details of the water requirements met from water harvesting? Furnish details of the facilities created.

2.8. What would be the impact of the land use changes occurring due to the proposed project on the runoff characteristics (quantitative as well as qualitative) of the area in the post construction phase on a long term basis? Would it aggravate the problems of flooding or water logging in any way?

2.9. What are the impacts of the proposal on the ground water? (Will there be tapping of ground water; give the details of ground water table, recharging capacity, and approvals obtained from competent authority, if any)

2.10. What precautions/measures are taken to prevent the run-off from construction activities polluting land & aquifers? (Give details of quantities and the measures taken to avoid the adverse impacts)

2.11. How is the storm water from within the site managed?(State the provisions made to avoid flooding of the area, details of the drainage facilities provided along with a site layout indication contour levels)

2.12. Will the deployment of construction labourers particularly in the peak period lead to unsanitary conditions around the project site (Justify with proper explanation)

2.13. What on-site facilities are provided for the collection, treatment & safe disposal of sewage? (Give details of the quantities of wastewater generation, treatment capacities with technology & facilities for recycling and disposal) 2.14. Give details of dual plumbing system if treated waste used is used for flushing of toilets or any other use.

Page | 189


3. VEGETATION

3.1. Is there any threat of the project to the biodiversity? (Give a description of the local ecosystem with it’s unique features, if any)

3.2. Will the construction involve extensive clearing or modification of vegetation? (Provide a detailed account of the trees & vegetation affected by the project)

3.3. What are the measures proposed to be taken to minimize the likely impacts on important site features (Give details of proposal for tree plantation, landscaping, creation of water bodies etc along with a layout plan to an appropriate scale)

4. FAUNA

4.1. Is there likely to be any displacement of fauna- both terrestrial and aquatic or creation of barriers for their movement? Provide the details.

4.2. Any direct or indirect impacts on the avifauna of the area? Provide details.

4.3. Prescribe measures such as corridors, fish ladders etc to mitigate adverse impacts on fauna

5. AIR ENVIRONMENT

5.1. Will the project increase atmospheric concentration of gases & result in heat islands? (Give details of background air quality levels with predicted values based on dispersion models taking into account the increased traffic generation as a result of the proposed constructions)

5.2. What are the impacts on generation of dust, smoke, odorous fumes or other hazardous gases? Give details in relation to all the meteorological parameters.

5.3. Will the proposal create shortage of parking space for vehicles? Furnish details of the present level of transport infrastructure and measures proposed for improvement including the traffic management at the entry & exit to the project site.

5.4. Provide details of the movement patterns with internal roads, bicycle tracks, pedestrian pathways, footpaths etc., with areas under each category.

5.5. Will there be significant increase in traffic noise & vibrations? Give details of the sources and the measures proposed for mitigation of the above.

5.6. What will be the impact of DG sets & other equipment on noise levels & vibration in & ambient air quality around the project site? Provide details.

6. AESTHETICS

6.1. Will the proposed constructions in any way result in the obstruction of a view, scenic amenity or landscapes? Are these considerations taken into account by the proponents?

6.2. Will there be any adverse impacts from new constructions on the existing structures? What are the considerations taken into account?

6.3. Whether there are any local considerations of urban form & urban design influencing the design criteria? They may be explicitly spelt out.

6.4. Are there any anthropological or archaeological sites or artifacts nearby? State if any other

Page | 190


significant features in the vicinity of the proposed site have been considered.

7. SOCIO-ECONOMIC ASPECTS

7.1. Will the proposal result in any changes to the demographic structure of local population? Provide the details.

7.2. Give details of the existing social infrastructure around the proposed project.

7.3. Will the project cause adverse effects on local communities, disturbance to sacred sites or other cultural values? What are the safeguards proposed?

8. BUILDING MATERIALS

8.1. May involve the use of building materials with high-embodied energy. Are the construction materials produced with energy efficient processes? (Give details of energy conservation measures in the selection of building materials and their energy efficiency)

8.2. Transport and handling of materials during construction may result in pollution, noise & public nuisance. What measures are taken to minimize the impacts?

8.3. Are recycled materials used in roads and structures? State the extent of savings achieved?

8.4. Give details of the methods of collection, segregation & disposal of the garbage generated during the operation phases of the project.

9. ENERGY CONSERVATION

9.1. Give details of the power requirements, source of supply, backup source etc. What is the energy consumption assumed per square foot of built-up area? How have you tried to minimize energy consumption?

9.2. What type of, and capacity of, power back-up to you plan to provide?

9.3. What are the characteristics of the glass you plan to use? Provide specifications of its characteristics related to both short wave and long wave radiation?

9.4. What passive solar architectural features are being used in the building? Illustrate the applications made in the proposed project.

9.5. Does the layout of streets & buildings maximise the potential for solar energy devices? Have you considered the use of street lighting, emergency lighting and solar hot water systems for use in the building complex? Substantiate with details.

9.6. Is shading effectively used to reduce cooling/heating loads? What principles have been used to

maximize the shading of Walls on the East and the West and the Roof? How much energy saving has been effected?

9.7. Do the structures use energy-efficient space conditioning, lighting and mechanical systems?

Page | 191


Provide technical details. Provide details of the transformers and motor efficiencies, lighting intensity and air-conditioning load assumptions? Are you using CFC and HCFC free chillers? Provide specifications.

9.8. What are the likely effects of the building activity in altering the micro-climates? Provide a self

assessment on the likely impacts of the proposed construction on creation of heat island & inversion effects?

9.9. What are the thermal characteristics of the building envelope? (a) roof; (b) external walls; and (c) fenestration? Give details of the material used and the U-values or the R values of the individual components.

9.10. What precautions & safety measures are proposed against fire hazards? Furnish details of emergency plans.

9.11. If you are using glass as wall material provides details and specifications including emissivity and thermal characteristics.

9.12. What is the rate of air infiltration into the building? Provide details of how you are mitigating the effects of infiltration.

9.13. To what extent the non-conventional energy technologies are utilised in the overall energy consumption? Provide details of the renewable energy technologies used.

10. Environment Management Plan

The Environment Management Plan would consist of all mitigation measures for each item wise activity to be undertaken during the construction, operation and the entire life cycle to minimize adverse environmental impacts as a result of the activities of the project. It would also delineate the environmental monitoring plan for compliance of various environmental regulations. It will state the steps to be taken in case of emergency such as accidents at the site including fire.

Page | 192


ANNEXURE-20

GUIDELINES FOR INTERNAL SUPERVISION

Page | 193


Annexure-20 GUIDELINES FOR INTERNAL SUPERVISION

A. Documents to be referred to prior to and during the Supervision visit:

• Filled in EDS of the scheme type • Filled in Checklist for Environmental Assessment of the Category II Schemes (if applicable) • Scheme specific supervision checklist given in Annexure 21 • Format of report of field visits undertaken during supervision given in Annexure 22

B. Process of supervision: The supervision visit must include the following methodology: Interaction with AEE/AE Interaction with SO Interaction with GPWSC Field inspection of all components of the scheme under supervision Interaction with beneficiaries Photo documentation (highlighting any significant issues) C. Report of Supervision: For each scheme visited in the supervision, a separate report should be prepared as per the format given in Annexure 22. The report must be submitted to the DPSU for action. A copy must be sent by the DPSU to the SPSU for reference.

Page | 194


ANNEXURE-21

CHECK LIST FOR ENVIRONMENTAL SUPERVISION/AUDIT

Page | 195


Annexure-21 CHECK LIST FOR ENVIRONMENTAL SUPERVISION/AUDIT

CHECKLIST FOR SUPERVISION/AUDIT OF WATER SUPPLY SCHEMES Groundwater sources

UConstruction: • Well construction:

• Total depth of well. • Type of casing: diameter, material and length from surface. • Screen or perforations: diameter, material, locations and lengths. • Formation seal: Material (cement, sand, bentonite, etc.), depth intervals, annular

thickness and method of placement. UProtection:

• Protection of well at top: presence of sanitary well seal, casing height above ground or flood level, protection of well from erosion and animals.

• Is there any source of contamination within 15 m radius from the well? • Is direct runoff of rain water into bore well sources prevented? • Is a concrete mat of sufficient thickness for 75 cm radius around the bore well provided to seal

the outer periphery of the bore well with the casing pipe raised 60 cm above ground level? • Is rainwater harvesting and recharge structure located within 15 m of the bore well subject to

direct contamination of the source? • Is there any soak pit for the disposal of effluent from septic tank or other sanitation facility is

within 15 m radius from the bore well of water supply source subject to direct contamination? • Is there any sand mining in the river bed within a radius of 500 m from the wells?

UWater Quality:

• Is there any unsafe supply available, usable in place of normal supply, hence involving danger to the public health?

• What is the type of disinfection arrangement provided? Is the test kit provided for testing residual chlorine?

• What is the monthly consumption of bleaching powder? Surface water sources

• Protective measures in connection with the use of watershed to control fishing, boating, swimming, wading, permitting animals on marginal shore areas and in or upon the water etc.

• Treatment of water: kind and adequacy of equipment; duplication of parts; effectiveness of treatment; adequacy of supervision and testing; contact period after disinfection; free chlorine residuals carried.

• Pumping facilities: pump house, pump capacity and standby units, storage facilities. Rainwater Harvesting Structures

• Are the rainwater harvesting (RWH) structures site specific closer to the source but 15 m away from the bore well?

• Whether the location of the RWH structures was certified by the hydrogeologist of the jharkhand rural piped water supply projects department?

• Whether the RWH structure was implemented before the onset of the monsoon?

Page | 196


Water Quantity • Any register maintained to record daily water supply to the habitation? • What are the average, maximum and minimum daily water supplies to the community for each

month? • What is average per capita water supply for each month? • What is the duration of supply?

Water Quality

• Are water quality monitoring is being done as per protocol? • Are records of water quality tests are maintained in a register? • What are the parameters tested and the frequency of testing? • Is the residual chlorine test carried out daily? • What is the number of days in a month that the residual chlorine is absent? • Analyze the results and report what percentage of the results are complying with the drinking

water standards. CHECKLIST OF SUPERVISION / AUDIT OF SANITATION SCHEMES Sanitation Coverage Details of existing toilets in the habitation with types and categories Category Open pit VIP Toilet Twin-pit PFT Water closet connected to

Septic tank Total

Existing prior to projects IHHL E1 = GOL E2 = School toilets Anganwadi toilets Total Constructed under the Project IHHL P1 = GOL P2 = School toilets Anganwadi toilets Total Grand total Percentage population having access to toilets = U{(E1 +E2) + (P1+P2) }

Population of the habitation * 100 Structure

• Is the junction chamber of the toilet constructed with proper slope and Y pipe? • Are the leach pits properly connected and covered with pre-cast slab? • Is the facility for cleaning linked to soak pit?

Selection

• Whether the selection of the toilet is appropriate to the substrata and groundwater table?

Page | 197


Operation and Maintenance • What is the condition of the toilet (including pan and fixtures such as doors)? • Has the pan been cleaned after fixing and is free of cement droppings? • Is the toilet and its surrounding area clean? • Are the toilets being used? • Is water supply available for the toilet? • Are the people adopting the hygienic practices (such as cleaning hands after using toilets)? • What is the volume of the pit filled?

CHECKLIST OF SUPERVISION / AUDIT OF SANITATION SCHEMES Sullage/ Drainage Coverage Details of existing sullage/ drainage in the habitation with types and categories Category Open Covered Total Existing prior to projects E Constructed under the Project

P

Total E+P Percentage population have access to sullage/ drainage = (E+P) / (Population of the habitation * 100) Structure

• Is the drain designed for the project population? • Is the drain having proper slope and shape to maintain free flow without silting? • Are there silt traps at the household connection and at the junctions? • Is this drainage linked treatment facility?

Selection

• Whether the selection of the pipe material appropriate to village population and soil conditions?

Operation and Maintenance • What is the condition of the drain (including manholes and treatment facility)? • Is silt being removed from the drains and manhole chambers? Is the removed silt taken away to

land fills? • Is there is any pooling water in the open drains? • Is there any mosquito breeding in the manholes and open drains? • Do the Gram Panchayat has equipment for cleaning the drains?

CHECKLIST OF SUPERVISION / AUDIT OF SANITATION SCHEMES

Soak Pits Coverage Details of existing soak pits in the habitation Category Total Existing prior to projects E Constructed under the Project

P

Total E+P Percentage population having soak pits = (E+P) / (Population of the habitation * 100)

Page | 198


Structure • Is the soak pit filled with ballast/ boulders or brick bats? • Is the soak pit filled with filter sand on top? • Is there a pot with a holes attached to out let pipe to collect grit and debris? • Is the soil permeable?

Selection

• Whether the selection of the soak pit as choice made based on the local soil conditions? Operation and Maintenance

• Is the soak pit cleaned every fortnight/ month? • Is the filter media being cleaned on a regular basis? • Is there dirty water around the soak pit? Is the soak pit overflowing? • Is there any mosquito breeding around the soak pit?

Sanitation Coverage Details of existing Solid Waste Management systems in the habitation with types and categories Category Vermicomposting Land Fill Total Existing prior to projects E Constructed under the Project

P

Grand total Percentage population have access to SWM = (E+P) / (Population of the habitation * 100) Structure

• Are the walls of the Vermicompost pit sufficiently high to keep away predators? • Is the land fill site outside the village in a vacant area? • Is the land fill site fenced and locked? • Is there a plantation around the land fill site?

Selection

• Whether the selection of the land fill site made based on the substrata and groundwater table? Operation and Maintenance

• What is the temperature in the vermicompost pit (range 20 to 30°c)? • Is there too much of water in the vermicompost plant? • Is the compost being turned? • Are there any solid inorganic objects or metals in the compost? • Are there any ants, cockroaches, etc. around the plant? • Are there any stray animals in the land fill site? • Is there any foul smell at the land fill site? • Is the ground water quality being monitoring regularly near the land fill?

Page | 199


ANNEXURE-22

SAMPLE FIELD VISIT REPORTS FOR INTERNAL SUPERVISION / EXTERNAL AUDIT

Page | 200


Annexure-22 SAMPLE FIELD VISIT REPORTS FOR INTERNAL SUPERVISION / EXTERNAL AUDIT

Name and designation of team members Date of the visit:

1. 2. 3.

Name of district: Name of Block: Name of Gram Panchayat: Name of habitation: Type and category of scheme: Brief description of the scheme components: Has the EDS been filled in and attached to the DSR? Has the screening been done correctly? Has the Checklist for Environmental Assessment of Category II Schemes been filled in properly (if

applicable)? What are the mitigation measures prescribed in the EDS and/or specified in the Environmental

Management Plan? What is the implementation status of these mitigation measures?

Mitigation measure implemented: Mitigation measures not implemented: What environmental concerns were noted during the field visit: Recommendations for managing the environmental concerns noted: Did the beneficiaries of the scheme receive any relevant IEC? Give details of participation in any

training or awareness programme, any communication material received, etc. Any other findings:

Signature of GPWSC Member Signature of AEE/AE Signature of the Leader of Supervision/Audit Team

Page | 201


ANNEXURE-23

ENVIRONMENTAL PERFORMANCE INDICATORS

Page | 202


Annexure-23 ENVIRONMENTAL PERFORMANCE INDICATORS

I. Water Quantity: 1. No. of habitations with availability of at least 40 Lpcd of drinking water during the year as a

percentage of total project habitations completed, 2. No. of habitations which have now been provided an alternative sustainable source as a percentage

of total project habitations previously depending on critical and overexploited basins 3. No. of wells providing sustainable yield (throughout the year) as a percentage of total wells

constructed in the project 4. No. of functional rainwater harvesting structures as a percentage of total rainwater harvesting

structures supported by the project II. Water Quality: 1. No. of habitations which were dependent on NSS (excess fluoride, brackishness, etc.) that have now

been provided a safe water source as a percentage of project-covered NSS habitations 2. No. of habitations with bacterial/chemical contamination in drinking water supplies as a percentage

of total project habitations 3. No. of habitations with no residual chlorine levels at the public taps as percentage of project

habitations 4. No. of project habitations with disinfection facility as percentage of total project habitations III. Environmental Sanitation: 1. Number (and %) of households and institutions with access to safe sanitation facilities 2. Number (and %) of households and institutions with regular use of sanitation facilities 3. Number of habitations with solid waste management including composting as percentage of all

project habitations 4. Number of habitations with liquid waste management including drainage and safe disposal of sullage

as percentage of all project habitations 5. Percentage of length of street/roads in project habitations provided with storm water/sullage drains IV. Institutional Arrangements and Capacity Building: 1. No. of districts with DRPs to anchor responsibility of EMF implementation as percentage of all project

districts 2. No. of project staff at state, district and Block levels trained in EMF as a percentage of all project staff

at each level 3. No. of community institutions (VWSCs and SLCs) that participated in IEC programmes conducted on

EMF as a percentage of all community institutions involved in the project 4. Number of external audits conducted as against the target number of audits for the project duration

Page | 203


ANNEXURE-24

SAFETY PROVISIONS (BUILDING) CONVENTION, 1937 (NO. 62)

Page | 204


Annexure-24 SAFETY PROVISIONS (BUILDING) CONVENTION, 1937 (NO. 62)

Part II. General Rules as to Scaffolds Article 7 Suitable scaffolds shall be provided for workmen for all work that cannot be safely done from a

ladder or by other means. A scaffold shall not be constructed, taken down, or substantially altered, except--

(a) under the supervision of a competent and responsible person; and (b) as far as possible by competent workers possessing adequate experience in this kind of work. All scaffolds and appliances connected therewith and all ladders shall--

(a) be of sound material; (b) be of adequate strength having regard to the loads and strains to which they will be subjected;

and (c) be maintained in proper condition. Scaffolds shall be so constructed that no part thereof can be displaced in consequence of normal

use. Scaffolds shall not be overloaded and so far as practicable the load shall be evenly distributed. Before installing lifting gear on scaffolds special precautions shall be taken to ensure the strength

and stability of the scaffolds. Scaffolds shall be periodically inspected by a competent person. Before allowing a scaffold to be used by his workmen every employer shall, whether the scaffold

has been erected by his workmen or not, take steps to ensure that it complies fully with the requirements of this Article.

Article 8 1. Working platforms, gangways and stairways shall--

(a) be so constructed that no part thereof can sag unduly or unequally; (b) be so constructed and maintained, having regard to the prevailing conditions, as to reduce as far

as practicable risks of persons tripping or slipping; and (c) be kept free from any unnecessary obstruction.

2. In the case of working platforms, gangways, working places and stairways at a height exceeding that to be prescribed by national laws or regulations-- (a) every working platform and every gangway shall be closely boarded unless other adequate

measures are taken to ensure safety; (b) every working platform and gangway shall have adequate width; and (c) every working platform, gangway, working place and stairway shall be suitably fenced.

Article 9 1. Every opening in the floor of a building or in a working platform shall, except for the time and to the

extent required to allow the access of persons or the transport or shifting of material, be provided with suitable means to prevent the fall of persons or material.

2. When persons are employed on a roof where there is a danger of falling from a height exceeding that to be prescribed by national laws or regulations, suitable precautions shall be taken to prevent the fall of persons or material.

3. Suitable precautions shall be taken to prevent persons being struck by articles which might fall from scaffolds or other working places.

Page | 205


Article 10 1. Safe means of access shall be provided to all working platforms and other working places. 2. Every ladder shall be securely fixed and of such length as to provide secure handhold and foothold at

every position at which it is used. 3. Every place where work is carried on and the means of approach thereto shall be adequately lighted. 4. Adequate precautions shall be taken to prevent danger from electrical equipment. 5. No materials on the site shall be so stacked or placed as to cause danger to any person. Part III. General Rules as to Hoisting Appliances Article 11 1. Hoisting machines and tackle, including their attachments, anchorages and supports, shall--

(a) be of good mechanical construction, sound material and adequate strength and free from patent defect; and

(b) be kept in good repair and in good working order. 2. Every rope used in hoisting or lowering materials or as a means of suspension shall be of suitable

quality and adequate strength and free from patent defect. Article 12 1. Hoisting machines and tackle shall be examined and adequately tested after erection on the site and

before use and be re-examined in position at intervals to be prescribed by national laws or regulations.

2. Every chain, ring, hook, shackle, swivel and pulley block used in hoisting or lowering materials or as means of suspension shall be periodically examined.

Article 13 1. Every crane driver or hoisting appliance operator shall be properly qualified. 2. No person under the age to be prescribed by national laws or regulations shall be in control of any

hoisting machine, including any scaffold winch, or give signals to the operator. Article 14 1. In the case of every hoisting machine and of every chain, ring, hook, shackle, swivel and pulley block

used in hoisting or lowering or as a means of suspension the safe working load shall be ascertained by adequate means.

2. Every hoisting machine and all gear referred to in the preceding paragraph shall be plainly marked with the safe working load.

3. In the case of a hoisting machine having a variable safe working load each safe working load and the conditions under which it is applicable shall be clearly indicated.

4. No part of any hoisting machine or of any gear referred to in paragraph 1 of this Article shall be loaded beyond the safe working load except for the purpose of testing.

Article 15 1. Motors, gearing, transmissions, electric wiring and other dangerous parts of hoisting appliances shall

be provided with efficient safeguards. 2. Hoisting appliances shall be provided with such means as will reduce to a minimum the risk of the

accidental descent of the load.

Page | 206


3. Adequate precautions shall be taken to reduce to a minimum the risk of any part of a suspended load becoming accidentally displaced.

Article 16 1. All necessary personal safety equipment shall be kept available for the use of the persons employed

on the site and be maintained in a condition suitable for immediate use. 2. The workers shall be required to use the equipment thus provided and the employer shall take

adequate steps to ensure proper use of the equipment by those concerned. Article 17 When work is carried on in proximity to any place where there is a risk of drowning, all necessary equipment shall be provided and kept ready for use and all necessary steps shall be taken for the prompt rescue of any person in danger. Article 18 Adequate provision shall be made for prompt first-aid treatment of all injuries likely to be sustained during the course of the work.

Page | 207


ANNEXURE-25

FORMAT FOR DECLARATION BY CONTRACTOR/ CONSULTANT

Page | 208


Annexure-25 FORMAT FOR DECLARATION BY CONTRACTOR/ CONSULTANT

Contract Package: Contract No.: I/We hereby declare that we have read and understood the Environmental Management Framework for the Jharkhand Rural Water Supply and Sanitation Project. We will implement all the necessary mitigation measures, procure required goods and equipment, provide the required services, build/ construct necessary works, etc. in order to comply with the EMF. The following guidelines (delete the guidelines which are not applicable) given as annexures to the EMF are applicable for our package. Annexure 7: List of projects requiring prior environmental clearance as per EIA Notification 2006 Annexure 8: Water Quality Monitoring and Surveillance Annexure 11: Disposal of Reject brine from RO Plant Annexure 14: Sanitary Protection of Water Supply Sources Annexure 15: Fluoride Mitigation Annexure 16: Guidelines for Sustainability of Groundwater Sources Annexure 17: Selection of Safe Sanitation Technologies and Environmental Considerations in Location of Toilets Annexure 18: Recommended Construction Practice and Pollution Safeguards for Twin Pit Pour Flush Latrines Annexure 19: Guidelines for Safe Sullage Disposal at Household and Community Levels Annexure 20: Guidelines for Community Solid Waste Management Annexure 27: Environmental Performance Indicators Annexure 28: Safety Provisions (Building) Convention, 1937 (No. 62) Signature of Authorized Representative of Contractor/ Consultant Name in Full: Designation: Company Seal Place: Date:

Page | 209


ANNEXURE-26

WORLD BANK OPERATIONAL MANUAL: 4.01

Page | 210


Annexure-26 WORLD BANK OPERATIONAL MANUAL: 4.01

Environmental Assessment

1. The Bank1 requires environmental assessment (EA) of projects proposed for Bank financing to help ensure that they are environmentally sound and sustainable, and thus to improve decision making. 2. EA is a process whose breadth, depth, and type of analysis depend on the nature, scale, and potential environmental impact of the proposed project. EA evaluates a project’s potential environmental risks and impacts in its area of influence;2 examines project alternatives; identifies ways of improving project selection, siting, planning, design, and implementation by preventing, minimizing, mitigating, or compensating for adverse environmental impacts and enhancing positive impacts; and includes the process of mitigating and managing adverse environmental impacts throughout project implementation. The Bank favors preventive measures over mitigatory or compensatory measures, whenever feasible. 3. EA takes into account the natural environment (air, water, and land); human health and safety; social aspects (involuntary resettlement, indigenous peoples, and cultural property); 3 and trans boundary and global environmental aspects. 4 EA considers natural and social aspects in an integrated way. It also takes into account the variations in project and country conditions; the findings of country 1. “Bank” includes IDA; “EA” refers to the entire process set out in OP/BP 4.01; “loans” includes credits; “borrower” includes, for guarantee operations, a private or public project sponsor receiving from another financial institution a loan guaranteed by the Bank; and “project” covers all operations financed by Bank loans or guarantees except structural adjustment loans (for which the environmental provisions are set out in OP/BP 8.60, Adjustment Lending, forthcoming) and debt and debt service operations, and also includes projects under adaptable lending—adaptable program loans (APLs) and learning and innovation loans (LILs)—and projects and components funded under the Global Environment Facility. The project is described in Schedule 2 to the Loan/Credit Agreement. This policy applies to all components of the project, regardless s of the source of financing. 2. For definitions, see Annex A. The area of influence for any project is determined with the advice of environmental specialists and set out in the EA terms of reference. 3. See OP/BP/GP 4.12, Involuntary Resettlement (forthcoming); OD 4.20, Indigenous Peoples ; and OP 4.11, Safeguarding Cultural Property in Bank -Financed Projects (forthcoming).

3. Global environmental issues include climate change, ozone-depleting substances, pollution of international waters, and adverse impacts on biodiversity.

Note: OP, BP, and GP 4.01 together replace OMS 2.36, Environmental Aspects of Bank Work ; OD 4.00, Annex A, Environmental Assessment ; OD 4.00, Annex B, Environmental Policy for Dam and Reservoir Projects; OD 4.01, Environmental Assessment ; and the following Operational Memoranda: Environmental Assessments: Instructions to Staff on the Handling of the Borrower’s Consultations with Affected Groups and Relevant Local NGOs, 4/10/90; Environmental Assessments: Instructions to Staff on the Release of Environmental Assessments to Executive Directors, 11/21/90; and Release of Environmental Assessments to Executive Directors, 2/20/91. Additional information related to these statements is provided in the Environmental Assessment Sourcebook (Washington, D.C.: World Bank, 1991) and subsequent updates available from the Environment Sector Board, and in the Pollution Prevention and Abatement Handbook. Other Bank statements that relate to the environment include OP/BP/GP 4.02, Environmental Action Plans; GP 4.03, Agricultural Pest Management ; OP/BP/GP 4.04, Natural Habitats; OP 4.07, Water Resources Management ; OP 4.09, Pest Management ; OP 4.11, Safegua rding Cultural Property in Bank -Financed Projects (forthcoming); OP/BP 4.12, Involuntary Resettlement (forthcoming); OP/GP 4.36, Forestry; OP/BP 10.04, Economic Evaluation of Investment Operations; and OD 4.20, Indigenous Peoples. This OP and BP apply to all projects for which a PID is first issued after March 1, 1999. Questions may be addressed to the Chair, Environment Sector Board. Environmental studies; national environmental action plans; the country’s overall policy framework, national legislation, and institutional capabilities related to the environment and social aspects; and obligations of the country, pertaining to project activities, under relevant international environmental treaties and agreements. The Bank does not finance project activities that would contravene such country obligations, as identified during the EA. EA is initiated as early as possible in project processing and is integrated closely with the economic, financial, institutional, social, and technical analyses of a proposed project.

Page | 211


4. The borrower is responsible for carrying out the EA. For Category A projects, 5 the borrower retains independent EA experts not affiliated with the project to carry out the EA.6 For Category A projects that are highly risky or contentious or that involve serious and multi- dimensional environmental concerns, the borrower should normally also engage an advisory panel of independent, internationally recognized environmental specialists to advise on all aspects of the project relevant to the EA.7 The role of the advisory panel depends on the degree to which project preparation has progressed, and on the extent and quality of any EA work completed, at the time the Bank begins to consider the project. 5. The Bank advises the borrower on the Bank’s EA requirements. The Bank reviews the findings and recommendations of the EA to determine whether they provide an adequate basis for processing the project for Bank financing. When the borrower has completed or partially completed EA work prior to the Bank’s involvement in a project, the Bank reviews the EA to ensure its consistency with this policy. The Bank may, if appropriate, require additional EA work, including public consultation and disclosure. 6. The Pollution Prevention and Abatement Handbook describes pollution prevention and abatement measures and emission levels that are normally acceptable to the Bank. However, taking into account borrower country legislation and local conditions, the EA may recommend alternative emission levels and approaches to pollution prevention and abatement for the project. The EA report must provide full and detailed justification for the levels and approaches chosen for the particular project or site. EA Instruments 7. Depending on the project, a range of instruments can be used to satisfy the Bank’s EA requirement: environmental impact assessment (EIA), regional or sectoral EA, environmental audit, hazard or risk assessment, and environmental management plan (EMP).8 EA applies one or more of these instruments, or elements of them, as appropriate. When the project is likely to have sectoral or regional impacts, sectoral or regional EA is required.9 Environmental Screening 8. The Bank undertakes environmental screening of each proposed project to determine the appropriate extent and type of EA. The Bank classifies the proposed project into one of four categories, depending on the type, location, sensitivity, and scale of the project and the nature and magnitude of its potential environmental impacts. 5. For screening, see para. 8. 6. EA is closely integrated with the project’s economic, financial, institutional, social, and technical analyses to ensure that (a) environmental considerations are given adequate weight in project selection, siting, and design decisions; and (b) EA does not delay project processing. However, the borrower ensures that when individuals or entities are engaged to carry out EA activities, any conflict of interest is avoided. For example, when an independent EA is required, it is not carried out by the consultants hired to prepare the engineering design. 7. The panel (which is different from the dam safety panel required under OP/BP 4.37, Safety of Dams) advises the borrower specifically on the following aspect s: (a) the terms of reference for the EA, (b) key issues and methods for preparing the EA, (c) recommendations and findings of the EA, (d) implementation of the EA’s recommendations, and (e) development of environmental management capacity. 8.These terms are defined in Annex A. Annexes B and C discuss the content of EA reports and EMPs. 9. Guidance on the use of sectoral and regional EA is available in EA Sourcebook Updates 4 and 15. (a) Category A: A proposed project is classified as Category A if it is likely to have significant adverse environmental impacts that are sensitive, 10 diverse, or unprecedented. These impacts may affect an area broader than the sites or facilities subject to physical works. EA for a Category A project examines the project’s potential negative and positive environmental impacts, compares them with those of feasible alternatives (including the “without project” situation), and recommends any measures needed to prevent, minimize, mitigate, or compensate for adverse impacts and improve environmental performance. For a Category A project, the borrower is responsible for preparing a report, normally an EIA (or a suitably comprehensive regional or sectoral EA) that includes, as necessary, elements of the other instruments referred to in para. 7. (b) Category B: A proposed project is classified as Category B if its potential adverse environmental impacts on human populations or environmentally important areas—including wetlands, forests, grasslands, and other natural habitats—are less adverse than those of Category A projects. These impacts are site-specific; few if any of

Page | 212


them are irreversible; and in most cases mitigatory measures can be designed more readily than for Category A projects. The scope of EA for a Category B project may vary from project to project, but it is narrower than that of Category A EA. Like Category A EA, it examines the project’s potential negative and positive environmental impacts and recommends any measures needed to prevent, minimize, mitigate, or compensate for adverse impacts and improve environmental performance. The findings and results of Category B EA are described in the project documentation (Project Appraisal Document and Project Information Document). (c) Category C: A proposed project is classified as Category C if it is likely to have minimal or no adverse environmental impacts. Beyond screening, no further EA action is required for a Category C project. (d) Category FI: A proposed project is classified as Category FI if it involves investment of Bank funds through a financial intermediary, in subprojects that may result in adverse environmental impacts. EA for Special Project Types Sector Investment Lending 9. For sector investment loans (SILs), 12 during the preparation of each proposed subproject, the project coordinating entity or 10. A potential impact is considered “sensitive” if it may be irreversible (e.g., lead to loss of a major natural habitat) or raise issues covered by OD 4.20, Indigenous Peoples ; OP 4.04, Natural Habitats ; OP 4.11, Safeguarding Cultural Property in Bank -Financed Projects (forthcoming); or OP 4.12, Involuntary Resettlement (forthcoming). 11. When the screening process determines, or national legislation requires, that any of the environmental issues identified warrant special attention, the findings and results of Category B EA may be set out in a separate report. Depending on the type of project and the nature and magnitude of the impacts, this report may include, for example, a limited environmental impact assessment, an environmental mitigation or management plan, an environmental audit, or a hazard assessment. For Category B projects that are not in environmentally sensitive areas and that present well- defined and well-understood issues of narrow scope, the Bank may accept alternative approaches for meeting EA requirements: for example, environmentally sound design criteria, siting criteria, or pollution standards for small-scale industrial plants or rural works; environmentally sound siting criteria, construction standards, or inspection procedures for housing projects; or environmentally sound operating procedures for road rehabilitation projects. 12. SILs normally involve the preparation and implementation of annual investment plans or subprojects as time slice activities over the course of the project. Implementing institution carries out appropriate EA according to country requirements and the requirements of this policy. 13 The Bank appraises and, if necessary, includes in the SIL components to strengthen, the capabilities of the coordinating entity or the implementing institution to (a) screen subprojects, (b) obtain the necessary expertise to carry out EA, (c) review all fin dings and results of EA for individual subprojects, (d) ensure implementation of mitigation measures (including, where applicable, an EMP), and (e) monitor environmental conditions during project implementation.14 If the Bank is not satisfied that adequate capacity exists for carrying out EA, all Category A subprojects and, as appropriate, Category B subprojects—including any EA reports—are subject to prior review and approval by the Bank. Sector Adjustment Lending 10.Sector adjustment loans (SECALs) are subject to the requirements of this policy. EA for a SECAL assesses the potential environmental impacts of planned policy institutional, and regulatory actions under the loan. 15 Financial Intermediary Lending 11. For a financial intermediary (FI) operation, the Bank requires that each FI screen proposed subprojects and ensure that sub- borrowers carry out appropriate EA for each subproject. Before approving a subproject, the FI verifies (through its own staff, outside experts, or existing environmental institutions) that the subproject meets the environmental requirements of appropriate national and local authorities and is consistent with this OP and other applicable environmental policies of the Bank.16 12. In appraising a proposed FI operation, the Bank reviews the adequacy of country environmental requirements

Page | 213


relevant to the project and the proposed EA arrangements for subprojects, including the mechanisms and responsibilities for environmental screening and review of EA results. When necessary, the Bank ensures that the project includes components to strengthen such EA arrangements. For FI operations expected to have Category A subprojects, prior to the Bank’s appraisal each identified participating FI provides to the Bank a written assessment of the institutional mechanisms (including, as necessary, identification of measures to strengthen capacity) for its subproject EA work.17 If the Bank is not satisfied that adequate capacity exists for carrying out EA, all Category A subprojects and, as appropriate, Category B subprojects— including EA reports—are subject to prior review and approval by the Bank.18 Emergency Recovery Projects 13. The policy set out in OP 4.01 normally applies to emergency recovery projects 13. In addition, if there are sectorwide issues that cannot be addressed through individual subproject EAs (and particularly if the SIL is likely to include Category A subprojects), the borrower may be required to carry out sectoral EA before the Bank appraises the SIL. 14. Where, pursuant to regulatory requirements or contractual arrangements acceptable to the Bank, any of these review functions are carried out by an entity other than the coordinating entity or implementing institution, the Bank appraises such alternative arrangements; however, the borrower/coordinating entity/implementing institution remains ultimately responsible for ensuring that subprojects meet Bank requirements. 15Actions that would require such assessment include, for example, privatization of environmentally sensitive enterprises, changes in land tenure in areas with important natural habitats, and relative price shifts in commodities such as pesticides, timber, and petroleum. 16. The requirements for FI operations are derived from the EA process and are consistent with the provisions of para. 6 of this OP. The EA process takes into account the type of finance being considered, the nature and scale of anticipated subprojects, and the environmental requirements of the jurisdiction in which subprojects will be located. 17. Any FI included in the project after appraisal complies with the same requirement as a condition of its participation. 18.The criteria for prior review of Category B subproject s, which are based on such factors as type or size of the subproject and the EA capacity of the financial intermediary, are set out in the legal agreements for the project. processed under OP 8.50, Emergency Recovery Assistance. However, when compliance with any requirement of this policy would prevent the effective and timely achievement of the objectives of an emergency recovery project, the Bank may exempt the project from such a requirement. The justification for any such exemption is recorded in the loan documents. In all cases, however, the Bank requires at a minimum that (a) the extent to which the emergency was precipitated or exacerbated by inappropriate environmental practices be determined as part of the preparation of such projects, and (b) any necessary corrective measures be built into either the emergency project or a future lending operation. Institutional Capacity 14. When the borrower has inadequate legal or technical capacity to carry out key EA- related functions (such as review of EA, environmental monitoring, inspections, or management of mitigatory measures) for a proposed project, the project includes components to strengthen that capacity. Public Consultation 15. For all Category A and B projects proposed for IBRD or IDA financing, during the EA process, the borrower consults project- affected groups and local nongovernmental organizations (NGOs) about the project’s environmental aspects and takes their views into account.19 the borrower initiates such consultations as early as possible. For Category A projects, the borrower consults these groups at least twice: (a) shortly after environmental screening and before the terms of reference for the EA are finalized; and (b) once a draft EA report is prepared. In addition, the borrower consults with such groups throughout project implementation as necessary to address EA- related issues that affect them. 20 Disclosure 16. For meaningful consultations between the borrower and project-affected groups and local NGOs on all Category A and B projects proposed for IBRD or IDA financing, the borrower provides relevant material in a timely manner prior to consultation and in a form and language that are understandable and accessible to the groups being consulted.

Page | 214


17. For a Category A project, the borrower provides for the initial consultation a summary of the proposed project’s objectives, description, and potential impacts; for consultation after the draft EA report is prepared, the borrower provides a summary of the EA’s conclusions. In addition, for a Category A project, the borrower makes the draft EA report available at a public place accessible to project-affected groups and local NGOs For SILs and FI operations, the borrower/FI ensures that EA reports for Category A subprojects are made available in a public place accessible to affected groups and local NGOs. 18. Any separate Category B report for a project proposed for IDA financing is made available to project-affected groups and local NGOs. Public availability in the borrowing country and official receipt by the Bank of Category A reports for projects proposed for IBRD or IDA financing, and of any Category B EA report for projects proposed for IDA funding, are prerequisites to Bank appraisal of these projects. 19. Once the borrower officially transmits the Category A EA report to the Bank, the Bank distributes the summary (in English) to the 19. For the Bank’s approach to NGOs, see GP 14.70, Involving Nongovernmental Organizations in Bank –Supported Activities. 20. For projects with major social components, consultations are also required by other Bank policies —for example, OD 4.20, Indigenous Peoples, and OP/BP 4.12, Involuntary Resettlement (forthcoming). executive directors (EDs) and makes the report available through its Info Shop. Once the borrower officially transmits any separate Category B EA report to the Bank, the Bank makes it available through its InfoShop.21 If the borrower objects to the Bank’s releasing an EA report through the World Bank InfoShop, Bank staff (a) do not continue processing an IDA project, or (b) for an IBRD project, submit the issue of further processing to the EDs. Implementation 20. During project implementation, the borrower reports on (a) compliance with measures agreed with the Bank on the basis of the findings and results of the EA, including implementation of any EMP, as set out in the project documents; (b) the status of mitigatory measures; and (c) the findings of monitoring programs. The Bank bases supervision of the project’s environmental aspects on the findings and recommendations of the EA, including measures set out in the legal agreements, any EMP, and other project documents.22 21. For a further discussion of the Bank's disclosure procedures, see The World Bank Policy on Disclosure of Information (March 1994) and BP 17.50, Disclosure of Operational Information. Specific requirements for disclosure of resettlement plans and indigenous peoples development plans are set out in OP/BP 4.12, Involuntary Resettlement (forthcoming), and OP/BP 4.10, forthcoming revision of OD 4.20, Indigenous Peoples. 22. See OP/BP 13.05, Project Supervision, forthcoming. Definitions 1. The following definitions apply in OP and BP 4.04: (a) Natural habitats1 are land and water areas where (i) the ecosystems' biological communities are formed largely by native plant and animal species, and (ii) human activity has not essentially modified the area's primary ecological functions. All natural habitats have important biological, social, economic, and existence value. Important natural habitats may occur in tropical humid, dry, and cloud forests; temperate and boreal forests; mediterranean-type shrub lands; natural arid and semi-arid lands; mangrove swamps, coastal marshes, and other wetlands; estuarie s; sea grass beds; coral reefs; freshwater lakes and rivers; alpine and sub alpine environments, including herb fields, grasslands, and paramos; and tropical and temperate grasslands. (b) Critical natural habitats are: (i) Existing protected areas and areas officially proposed by governments as protected areas (e.g., reserves that meet the criteria of the World Conservation Union [IUCN] classifications2), areas initially recognized as protected by traditional local communities (e.g., sacred groves), and sites that maintain conditions vital for the viability of these protected areas (as determined by the environmental assessment process3); or

Page | 215


(ii) sites identified on supplementary lists prepared by the Bank or an authoritative source determined by the Regional environment sector unit (RESU). Such sites may include areas recognized by traditional local communities (e.g., sacred groves); areas with known high suitability for bio-diversity conservation; and sites that are critical for rare, vulnerable, migratory, or endangered species.4 listings are based on systematic evaluations of such factors as species richness; the degree of endemism, rarity, and vulnerability of component species; representativeness; and integrity of ecosystem processes. (c) Significant conversion is the elimination or severe diminution of the integrity of a critical or other natural habitat caused by a major, long-term change in land or water use. Significant conversion may include, for example, land clearing; replacement of natural vegetation (e.g., by crops or 1. Biodiversity outside of natural habitats (such as within agricultural landscapes) is not covered under this policy. It is good practice to take such biodiversity into consideration in project design and implementation. 2. IUCN categories are as follows: I—Strict Nature Reserve/Wilderness Area: protected area managed for science or wilderness protection; II—National Park: protected area managed mainly for ecosystem protection and recreation; III—Natural Monument: protected area managed mainly for conservation of specific natural features; IV— Habitat/Species Management Area: protected area managed mainly for conservation through management intervention; V—Protected Landscape/Seascape: protected area managed mainly for landscape/seascape conservation and recreation; and VI—Managed Resource Protected Area: protected area managed mainly for the sustainable use of natural ecosystems . 3. See OP/BP 4.01, Environmental Assessment. 4. Rare, vulnerable, endangered, or similarly threatened, as indicated in the IUCN Red List of Threatened Animals, BirdLife World List of Threatened Birds, IUCN Red List of Threatened Plants, or other credible international or national lists accepted by the RESUs. tree plantations); permanent flooding (e.g., by a reservoir); drainage, dredging, filling, or channelization of wetlands; or surface mining. In both terrestrial and aquatic ecosystems, conversion of natural habitats can occur as the result of severe pollution. Conversion can result directly from the action of a project or through an indirect mechanism (e.g., through induced settlement along a road). (d) Degradation is modification of a critical or other natural habitat that substantially reduces the habitat's ability to maintain viable populations of its native species. (e) Appropriate conservation and mitigation measures remove or reduce adverse impacts on natural habitats or their functions, keeping such impacts within socially defined limits of acceptable environmental change. Specific measures depend on the ecological characteristics of the given site. They may include full site protection through project redesign; strategic habitat retention; restricted conversion or modification; reintroduction of species; mitigation measures to minimize the ecological damage; post development restoration works; restoration of degraded habitats; and establishment and maintenance of an ecologically similar protected area of suitable size and contiguity. Such measures should always include provision for monitoring and evaluation to provide feedback on conservation outcomes and to provide guidance for developing or refining appropriate corrective actions. Content of an Environmental Assessment Report for a Category A Project 1. An environmental assessment (EA) report for a Category A project1 focuses on the significant environmental issues of a project. The report’s scope and level of detail should be commensurate with the project’s potential impacts. The report submitted to the Bank is prepared in English, French, or Spanish, and the executive summary in English. 2. The EA report should include the following items (not necessarily in the order shown): (a) Executive summary. Concisely discusses significant findings and recommended actions. (b) Policy, legal, and administrative framework. Discusses the policy, legal and administrative framework within which the EA is carried out. Explains the environmental requirements of any co financiers. Identifies relevant international environmental agreements to which the country is a party. (c) Project description. Concisely describes the proposed project and its geographic, ecological, social, and temporal context, including any off- site investments that may be required (e.g., dedicated pipelines, access roads, power plants, water supply, housing, and raw material and product storage facilities). Indicates the need for any resettlement plan or indigenous peoples development plan2 (see also subpara. (h)(v) below). Normally includes a

Page | 216


map showing the project site and the project’s area of influence. (d) Baseline data. Assesses the dimensions of the study area and describes relevant physical, biological, and socioeconomic conditions, including any changes anticipated before the project commences. Also takes into account current and proposed development activities within the project area but not directly connected to the project. Data should be relevant to decisions about project location, design, operation, or mitigatory measures. The section indicates the accuracy, reliability, and sources of the data. (e) Environmental impacts. Predicts and assesses the project’s likely positive and negative impacts, in quantitative terms to the extent possible. Identifies mitigation measures and any residual negative impacts that cannot be mitigated. Explores opportunities for environmental enhancement. Identifies and estimates the extent and quality of available data, key data gaps, and uncertainties associated with pre- dictions, and specifies topics that do not require further attention. 1. The EA report for a Category A project is normally an environmental impact assessment, with elements of other instruments included as appropriate. Any report for a Category A operation uses the components described in this annex, but Category A sectoral and regional EA require a different perspective and emphasis among the components. The Environment Sector Board can provide detailed guidance on the focus and components of the various EA instruments. 2. See OP/BP 4.12, Involuntary Resettlement (forthcoming), and OD 4.20, Indigenous Peoples. (f) Analysis of alternatives.3 Systematically compares feasible alternatives to the proposed project site, technology, design, and operation— including the “without project” situation—in terms of their potential environmental impacts; the feasibility of mitigating these impacts; their capital and recurrent costs; their suitability under local conditions; and their institutional, training, and monitoring requirements. For each of the alternatives, quantifies the environmental impacts to the extent possible, and attaches economic values where feasible. States the basis for selecting the particular project design proposed and justifies recommended emission levels and approaches to pollution prevention and abatement. (g) Environmental management plan (EMP). Covers mitigation measures, monitoring, and institutional strengthening; see outline in OP 4.01, Annex C. (h) Appendixes (i) List of EA report preparers— individuals and organizations. (ii) References—written materials both published and unpublished, used in study preparation. (iii) Record of interagency and consultation meetings, including consultations for obtaining the informed views of the affected people and local nongovernmental organizations (NGOs). The record specifies any means other than consultations (e.g., surveys) that were used to obtain the views of affected groups and local NGOs. (iv) Tables presenting the relevant data referred to or summarized in the main text. (v) List of associated reports (e.g., resettlement plan or indigenous peoples development plan). 3. Environmental implications of broad development options for a sector (e.g., alternative ways of meeting projected electric power demand) are best analyzed in least-cost planning or sectoral EA. Environmental implications of broad development options for a region (e.g., alternative strategies for improving standards of living an a rural area) are best addressed through a regional development plan or a regional EA. EIA is normally best suited to the analysis of alternatives within a given project concept (e.g., a geothermal power plant, or a project aimed at meeting local energy demand), including detailed site, technology, design, and operational alternatives. Environmental Management Plan 1. A project’s environmental management plan (EMP) consists of the set of mitigation, monitoring, and institutional measures to be taken during implementation and operation to eliminate adverse environmental and social impacts, offset them, or reduce them to acceptable levels. The plan also includes the actions needed to implement these measures.1 Management plans are essential elements of EA reports for Category A projects; for many Category B projects, the EA may result in a management plan only. To prepare a management plan, the borrower and its EA design

Page | 217


team (a) identify the set of responses to potentially adverse impacts; (b) determine requirements for ensuring that those responses are made effectively and in a timely manner; and (c) describe the means for meeting those requirements. 2 More specifically, the EMP includes the following components. Mitigation 2. The EMP identifies feasible and cost- effective measures that may reduce potentially significant adverse environmental impacts to acceptable levels. The plan includes compensatory measures if mitigation measures are not feasible, cost-effective, or sufficient. Specifically, the EMP (a) Identifies and summarizes all anticipated significant adverse environmental impacts (including those involving indigenous people or involuntary resettlement); (b) describes—with technical details— each mitigation measure, including the type of impact to which it relates and the conditions under which it is required (e.g., continuously or in the event of contingencies), together with designs, equipment descriptions, and operating procedures, as appropriate; (c) estimates any potential environmental impacts of these measures; and (d) provides linkage with any other mitigation plans (e.g., for involuntary resettlement, indigenous peoples, or cultural property) required for the project. Monitoring 3. Environmental monitoring during project implementation provides information about key environmental aspects of the project, particularly the environmental impacts of the project and the effectiveness of mitigation measures. Such information enables the borrower and the Bank to evaluate the success of mitigation as part of project supervision, and allows corrective action to be taken when needed. Therefore, the EMP identifies monitoring objectives and specifies the type of monitoring, with linkages to the impacts assessed in the EA report and the mitigation measures described in the EMP. Specifically, the monitoring section of the EMP provides (a) a specific description, and technical details, of monitoring measures, including the parameters to be 1. The management plan is sometimes known as an “action plan.” The EMP may be presented as two or three separate plans covering mitigation, monitoring, and institutional aspects, depending on borrowing country requirements. 2. For projects involving rehabilitation, upgrading, expansion, or privatization of existing facilities, remediation of existing environmental problems may be more important than mitigation and monitoring of expected impacts. For such projects, the management plan focuses on cost-effective measures to remediate and manage these problems. Measured, methods to be used, sampling locations frequency of measurements, detection limits (where appropriate), and definition of thresholds that will signal the need for corrective actions; and (b) monitoring and reporting procedures to (i) ensure early detection of conditions that necessitate particular mitigation measures, and (ii) furnish information on the progress and results of mitigation. Capacity Development and Training 4. To support timely and effective implementation of environmental project components and mitigation measures, the EMP draws on the EA’s assessment of the existence, role, and capability of environmental units on site or at the agency and ministry level.3 If necessary, the EMP recommends the establishment or expansion of such units, and the training of staff, to allow implementation of EA recommendations. Specifically, the EMP provides a specific description of institutional arrangements— who is responsible for carrying out the mitigatory and monitoring measures (e.g., for operation, supervision, enforcement, monitoring of implementation, remedial action, financing, reporting, and staff training). To strengthen environmental management capability in the agencies responsible for implementation, most EMPs cover one or more of the following additional topics: (a) technical assistance programs, (b) procurement of equipment and supplies, and (c) organizational changes. Implementation Schedule and Cost Estimates

Page | 218


5. For all three aspects (mitigation, monitoring, and capacity development), the EMP provides (a) an implementation schedule for measures that must be carried out as part of the project, showing phasing and coordination with overall project implementation plans; and (b) the capital and recurrent cost estimates and sources of funds for implementing the EMP. These figures are also integrated into the total project cost tables. Integration of EMP with Project 6. The borrower’s decision to proceed with a project, and the Bank’s decision to support it, are predicated in part on the expectation that the EMP will be executed effectively. Consequently, the Bank expects the plan to be specific in its description of the individual mitigation and monitoring measures and its assignment of institutional responsibilities, and it must be integrated into the project’s overall planning, design, budget, and implementation. Such integration is achieved by establishing the EMP within the project so that the plan will receive funding and supervision along with the other components. 3. For projects having significant environmental implications, it is particularly important that there be in the implementing ministry or agency an in-house environmental unit with adequate budget and professional staffing strong in expertise relevant to the project (for projects involving dams and reservoirs, see BP 4.01, Annex B).

Page | 219


ANNEXURE-27

STATUS OF HEALTH & HEALTH SERVICES

Page | 220


Annexure-27 STATUS OF HEALTH & HEALTH SERVICES

NATIONALDISEASECONTROLPROGRAMME (Source DLHS-III) Leprosy Although state has reached elimination of the disease, still large numbers of new cases are being detected every year indicating active transmission in the community. An in-depth situational analysis with steps to complete treatment etc be started. IDSP It is a Phase III state. The recruitment of key human resources (Data managers, Epidemiologists, microbiologists etc) needs to be fast tracked and completed in a time bound manner. The data reporting should start from all the districts. Blindness Reporting of utilization of GoI grants need to be accelerated. Cataract performance and IOL implantation percentage needs to be improved. NVBDCP Fill up the human resources (Male MPW, Lab Tech, Malaria Technical Supervisors) gaps. RNTCP Total Case Detection and cure rate (83%) need to be improved. This appears to be due to gaps in key HR (STO, DTO, and other levels), weak supply chain management and supervision. Demographic, Socio-economic and Health profile HEALTH INDICATORS OF JHARKHAND The Total Fertility Rate of the State is 3.2. The Infant Mortality Rate is 48 and Maternal Mortality Ratio is 312 (SRS2004-06) which are higher than the National average. The Sex Ratio in the State is 941 (as compared to 933 for the country). Comparative figures of major health and demographic indicators are as follows: Demographic, Socio-economic and Health profile of Jharkhand State as compared to India figures

S.No. Item Jharkhand India 1 Total population (Census2001) (in millions) 26.9 1028.61 2 Decadal Growth (Census2001) (%) NA 21.54 3 Crude Birth Rate (SRS2007) 26.1 23.1 4 Crude Death Rate (SRS2007) 7.3 7.4 5 Total Fertility Rate (SRS2007) 3.2 2.7 6 Infant Mortality Rate (SRS2007) 48 55 7 Maternal Mortality Ratio (SRS 2004-2006) 312 254 8 Sex Ratio (Census 2001) 941 933 9 Population below Poverty line (%) - 26.10

10 Schedule Caste population (in millions) 3.19 166.64 11 Schedule Tribe population (in millions) 7.09 84.33 12 Female Literacy Rate (Census 2001)(%) 38.9 53.7

Health Infrastructure of Jharkhand

Particulars Required In position shortfall Sub-centre 5057 3958 1099 Primary Health Centre 806 330 476

Page | 221


Community Health Centre 201 194 7 Multipurpose worker (Female)/ANM at Sub Centres & PHCs

4288 5011 -

Health Worker(Male)MPW(M) at Sub Centres 3958 1922 2036 Health Assistant (Female)/LHV at PHCs 330 - - Health Assistant (Male) at PHCs 330 660 - Doctor at PHCs 330 330 0 Obstetricians & Gynaecologists at CHCs 194 30 164 Physicians at CHCs 194 0 194 Paediatricians at CHCs 194 0 194 Total specialists at CHCs 776 40 736 Radiographers 194 0 194 Pharmacist 524 348 176 Laboratory Technicians 524 381 143 Nurse/Midwife 1688 429 1259

(Source: RHS Bulletin, March 2008,M/O Health & F.W.,GOI)

Other Health Institutions in the State are as follows:

Health Institution Number Medical College 3 District Hospitals 24 Referral Hospitals City Family Welfare Centre Rural Dispensaries Ayurvedic Hospitals 1 Ayurvedic Dispensaries 122 Unani Hospitals - Unani Dispensaries 30 Homeopathic Hospitals 2 Homeopathic Dispensary 54

Progress of NRHM in Jharkhand (June2009) Jharkhand is one of the newly formed States. Jharkhand has implemented the activities of National Rural Health Mission but Jharkhand is committed to make efforts towards identifying gaps and adopting measures to align with the national mainstream. NRHM has transformed public health service delivery in the State. The decentralization, responsiveness to local needs, paradigm shift in health system management and availability of untied funds has improved the facilities and their credibility among members of the public. Brief information on progress of activities is as follows: Institutional Framework of NRHM Meeting of State & District Health Mission held regularly. State Health Mission held 3 times and of District Health Mission meeting held 50 times. Merger of societies is completed in 24 districts. A total of 30, 011 VHSCs constituted & 10,000 Joint Accounts operationalised at sub centre and VHSC. Rogi Kalyan Samitis are operational at 24 DH, 170 CHCs & 231 PHCs. Out of 24 districts, 22 districts have started developing their own IDHAP. Infrastructure Improvements In total 194 PHC are strengthened with three Staff Nurse to make them functional for 24x7 and 32 CHC are functioning on 24X7 basis to provide quality health services & facility survey completed in 186 health institutions below district level. Overall 4 SDH, 16 CHC & other sequal to and below district level including 12 District Hospitals are functioning as FRUs. All districts have functional Mobile Medical Unit (MMU)

Page | 222


Human Resources A total of 39,556 ASHAs have been selected &23733 are trained up to 4thModule. 36659 ASHAs have been provided with drug kits. There are 4291 Sub-centres functional with an ANM and 3958 SCs strengthened with 2ndANM. Under NRHM 163 contractual AYUSH Doctors have been appointed. Man power augmentation through contractual appointments of 707 MBBS Doctors, 3204 ANMs, and 1200 Para Medics have been done under NRHM and need to strengthen the positioning of specialists and Staff Nurse. Services Institutional deliveri es have declined from 0.69 lakhs (2006-07) to 0.52 lakhs (2007-08). During the year 2008-09 there were 1.94 lakhs Institutional deliveries in the state. JSY beneficiaries increased from 1.23 lakhs (2006-07) to 2.01 lakhs (2007-08). The numbers of JSY beneficiaries were 4.78 lakh during the year 08-09. Female sterilizations has remained same at 0.94 lakh (2006-07) to 0.94 lakh (2007-08) and male sterlisation has increased from 6461 (2006-07) to 15977 (2007-08). During the year 2008-09, a total of 113726 female & 12123 male sterilization have been reported so far. 15 districts are implementing IMNCI & 4500 people trained so far. 290801 VHND held since the launch of NRHM. First Phase of Communit y Monitoring has been operationalised in the state.

(Source: NRHM MIS report, April 2009) Immunization Evaluated Immunization Coverage

Survey Indicator

NFHS1 (1992-93)

NFHS2 (1998-99)

NFHS3 (2005-06)

CES (2005)

CES (2006) DLHS2 (2002-04)

DLHS3 (2007- 08)

FI NA 8.8 34.5 45.7 52.1 25.7 54.1

BCG NA 44.3 72.9 76.5 83.8 50.8 85.0

Measles NA 18.2 48.0 58.0 62.2 31.2 70.5

DPT3 NA 21.6 40.3 57.8 57.9 35.6 62.6

District wise Performance: (Based on quarterly reports for 1 P

stP Quarter 2009)

• 8 (36%) of 22 districts have very low TCD rate of <102/lakh (50%) but only one district (Godda) has low NSPCD rate of <38/lakh (50% of expected TB patients). • Sputum conversion rate is very low (<85%) in 2 districts of Godda and Koderma but the cure rate is very low (<80%) in 5 districts (Chgatra, Godda, Hazaribagh, Koderma and Paschimi Singhbhum).

Name of the District

Suspects examined per lakh population

Annualized total case detection rate(against >144/lakh)

Annualized new sputum positive ase detection rate (against>53/lakh)

Sputum conversion rate(against >90.0%)

Cure rate (against >85.0%)

Bokaro 131 136 52 70% 90% 88% Chatra 73 87 46 61% 94% 78% Deoghar 119 90 56 74% 95% 91% Dhanbad 117 118 59 79% 92% 86% Dumka 113 173 55 74% 93% 90%

Page | 223


Garhwa 118 158 57 76% 94% 87% Giridih 102 103 52 69% 93% 85% Godda 61 63 30 40% 58% 44% Gumla 88 86 53 71% 90% 85% Hazaribagh 119 116 52 70% 85% 76% Jamtara 116 111 56 75% 93% 90% Kodarma 105 84 50 66% 84% 57% Lathehar 125 124 66 89% 92% 84% Lohardaga 110 105 52 70% 90% 89% Pakaur 107 97 42 56% 93% 85% Palamu 140 157 66 87% 93% 90% Pashchimi Singhbhum

76

135

57 76%

92%

76%

Purbi Singhbhum 107 123 55 73% 91% 87% Ranchi 111 138 52 70% 92% 81% Sahibganj 116 159 43 57% 97% 89% Saraikela- Kharsawan

117

99

53 70%

93%

85%

Simdega 102 98 58 78% 86% 81% Total 110 121 53 71% 91% 83%

Fact Sheet on NVBDCP - Jharkhand Background Information The State has 22 districts with a population of 26.9 million. There are 194 CHCs, 330 PHCs, 3958 Sub-centres and 32615 villages. There are 4372 Multipurpose worker (Female)/ANM, 4291 Health worker (Male) MPW (M), 278 Heath Assistant (Female (LHV), 118 heath Assistant (Male) and 239 Laboratory Technicians. In addition, state has 4274 functioning Fever Treatment Depots (FTDs). The high endemic districts have been covered under Global Fund (7 districts) and World Bank (15 districts) Supported Project for additional inputs to intensify malaria control activities.

Malaria: Epidemiological Status

Year Total Slide examined Total Malaria Cases Total Pf Cases Deaths

2006 2095301 193888 48388 4

2007 2000462 184878 45926 31

2008 2529898 212496 74178 25

2009 (Upto Mar) 538676 36275 13772 1

• State is being provided Rapid Diagnostic Kits for early diagnosis of Pf cases and ACT for effective treatment of P.falciparum cases. • Under World Bank project, 15 district level VBD Consultant, 72 MTS, 36 LTs have been sanctioned to the state. Elimination of Lymphatic Filariasis • The goal of Elimination of Lymphatic Filariasis in the country is set to be achieved by 2015. In pursuance to achieve this, Government of India during 2004 initiated Mass Drug Administration (MDA) with annual single dose of DEC tablets to all the population living at the risk of filariasis excluding pregnant women, children below 2 years of age and seriously ill persons. The population coverage of MDA in the state was 46.13% in 2004, 73.72% in 2005, 73.60% in 2006, 80.03% in 2007 and 84.64% in 2008.

Page | 224


• Line listing of Lymphoedema and Hydrocele cases was also initiated in 2004 for morbidity management and as per updated report (2007), there are 73263 Lymphoedema and 27908 Hydrocele cases.

KALA-AZAR • Kala-azar is the major problem in four districts namely Godda, Pakur, Sahibganj and Dumka. World Bank has agreed to support Catholic Missionary in Jharkhand through NVBDCP for the EDPT and case management of Kala-azar cases. Kala-azar incidence as reported is given below:

Year Cases Deaths 2006 7508 11 2007 4803 20 2008 3690 5 2009 (UptoMarch) 169 0

Dengue, Japanese Encephalitis & Chikungunya are not reported in the state of Jharkhand.

Issues: Malaria

• The state has to yet to fill up 90 contractual mal e MPW against the 1116 sanctioned posts. Apart from the vacant posts of regular surveillance worker/MPW (Male) should be filled up.

• 6 posts of Lab. Technician are yet to be filled up against 16 sanctioned posts. All the ASHAs need to be

trained in use of RDTs and delivery of antimalarials.

• Out of 95 malaria t echnical supervisor provided under GFATM (17) and World Bank Project

(72) so far state has filled up only 51.

• Assistance is being provided for performance based incentive in seven high malaria endemic districts by the Centre. For remaining malaria high endemic districts, similar provision may be made through the funds provided to village sanitation committee.

• State needs to intensify efforts to reduce malaria mortality b y establishing proper effective referral mechanism and treatment facilities for severe cases.

• The quality spray has to be ensured through intensive supervised spray activities.

Filaria • State needs to gear up for hydrocele operation and complete the mapping to show the updated number of lymphoedema and hydrocele.

Kala-azar • Provision of individual patient boxes for complete treatment compliance. • Strengthening o f supervision and monitoring at District/PHC/Sub-centre level. • Provision of free diet to all indoor kala-azar patients to be ensured at all districts hospitals and PHCs.

National Leprosy Eradication Programme • Epidemiological scenario- The state has achieved the goal of elimination of leprosy (i.e. Prevalence rate of less than 1 case /10000 population) in 2008-09. There were 2941 leprosy cases on record as on March 2009. • New case detection and treatment completion- During 2008-09, a total of 5181 new leprosy cases were detected as compared to 6799 new cases detected

Page | 225


during the corresponding period of previous year. Out of 5700 cases discharged during the year, 5369 cases (94.2%) were released as cured after completing treatment. • Reconstructive Surgery for leprosy affected persons- There are 2 Govt. institutions and 3 NGO institution providing reconstructive surgery services to l eprosy affect ed persons with disability in the state. In the year 2008-09, about 20 reconstructive surgeries were performed in these institutions. • NLEP action plan for the year 2009-10 amounting to 172 lakhs has been approved for the state. Issues

1. The state has reported low level of fund utilization in 2008-09. During 2008-09, the state action plan was approved for Rs.201.5 lakhs, however the state could utilize only Rs. 114 lakhs.

2. Large numbers of new leprosy cases are being detected in the state every year which suggest active transmission of the disease in the community. The state is advised to carry out in-depth situational analysis in districts/blocks reporting large number of new cases and take suitable actions like –

(i)Ensuring completion of treatment in each of the new cases detected.

(ii) Enhance awareness of the community to improve self reporting of suspected cases to health facility and

(iii) Carrying out family contact survey against all multibacillary and child cas es.

3.The state has listed around 1500 grade II disability cases in last 5 years. There are 2 Govt. institutions and

3 NGO institution providing reconstructive surgery services to leprosy affected persons with disability. The state should send proposals of these centres to GOI for recognition and utilize the services of these institutions effectively for conducting RCS so that the backlog of leprosy cases with disability could be reduced.

4. There are about 48 leprosy colonies in the state. The state should ensure provision of proper health care facilities like ulcer car e, provision of supportive drugs and dressing materials to the persons affected with leprosy residing in these colonies.

Page | 226


ANNEXURE-28

NATIONAL RWSS- LS PROGRAMME FOR FOUR STATES

Page | 227


Annexure-28 NATIONAL RWSS- LS PROGRAMME FOR FOUR STATES

Terms of Reference for study on

Environment Assessment and Environment Management Framework 1. Background The National Rural Drinking Water Programme (NRDWP) of the Government of India emphasizes the involvement of Panchayati Raj Institutions (PRIs) and communities in planning, implementing and managing drinking water supply schemes. States are incentivized to hand over management of their schemes to PRIs. Funds for sustainability of schemes are provided on a 100% central share basis. A separate component of support activities to fund Information Education and Communications (IEC), Human Resources Development (HRD), Management Information Systems (MIS), Water Quality Monitoring and Surveillance and other support activities has been introduced. Recently, as part of the NRDWP, the state departments responsible for drinking water supply and sanitation have prepared their long term strategic plan (2011-2022) for ensuring drinking water security to all rural households. The strategic plans aim to cover 90% of households with piped water and at least 80% of households with tap connections during this period. This forward looking strategy supports the creation of an enabling environment for the Panchayati Raj Institutions, SHG and local communities to manage rural drinking water sources and systems. The strategy emphasizes achieving water security through decentralized governance with oversight and regulation, participatory planning and implementation of sources and schemes. Capacity building programs will be required for communities to monitor and prudently use their water resources. Sustainable service delivery mechanisms are a central feature of the program, with State institutions or Zilla Panchayats implementing and managing large multi-village schemes, delivering bulk water to villages in water stressed areas, and GPs implementing and managing in-village and intra-Panchayat schemes. The strategy highlights source sustainability measures, water quality safety, monitoring and surveillance, service agreements with operators, convergence of different development programs, and building professional capacity at all levels. The lagging states in terms of piped water coverage, viz. Assam, Bihar, Jharkhand, and Uttar Pradesh also face constraints in institutional and technical capacity at the state, district, block and GP levels for implementing sustainable rural water supply projects. The constraints are in terms of institutional capacity for involving communities and Panchayats in planning, implementing and managing their own drinking water supply schemes, and technical capacity of the State Rural Water Supply Departments for supporting and implementing the decentralization program. Also, operations and maintenance of existing schemes is not satisfactory, resulting in non-functionality of many schemes. Further, the States face issues of water quality affected habitations that require supply of water from distant safe sources. Key Elements of the RWSS Program for Lagging States The RWSS Program for Lagging States program will be a separate component of NRDWP focusing on lagging states with different allocation criteria and funding components, but implemented within the framework of NRDWP, supporting the following key elements of the reform program:

Placing GPs and communities in the central role, supported by higher levels of PRIs, the State government and the local non-governmental and private sector, for facilitating, planning, implementing, monitoring and providing a range of O&M back-up services.

Using sustainable, community or local government managed models for intra-GP RWSS schemes and using State-PRI partnership models for multi-GP schemes.

Putting water resources security as a core theme of the new model, including increased community management of scarce resources.

Moving the RWSS sector to recovery of atleast 50% O&M and replacement costs and initiating contribution to capital costs keeping affordability and inclusiveness in mind. .

Moving towards metered household connections, with 24/7 water supply where feasible, as a basic level of service.

Page | 228


Promoting professionalized service provision management models, and/or back-up support functions, for the different market segments (simple/small single village/GP schemes; large single village/GP schemes; multi village/GP schemes).

Integrating water supply and sanitation, with effective sanitation promotion programs for achieving “clean villages”.

Establishing M&E systems with independent reviews and social audits.

The Government of India had approached the World Bank for assistance on a National Project for the lagging states particularly Assam, Uttar Pradesh, Jharkhand and Bihar. The project will bring about positive health and environmental benefits through supply of 'safe' drinking water and creation of sanitary conditions in the village. The project will have programmes related to improved water quality monitoring, health and hygiene education as well as ground water recharge for water supply source protection. Several environmental mitigation measures will be included in the project design and the project is expected to have a net positive effect on the environment. The project itself is not expected to cause any adverse environmental impacts. However, some key environmental concerns related to the project are:

Water Quantity Issues Availability of 'safe' drinking water, especially in the summer months Management of solid and liquid waste management and so on. UOpen defecation free Gram Panchayat.

To contribute to the environmental sustainability of the project, an 'Environmental Assessment' (EA) Study is required as per the World Bank’s safeguards policies. The study will collect and analyze information regarding the environmental issues related to the project from each participating state in the first phase on sample and finally prepare an Environmental Management Framework (EMF) to be integrated in the overall project. The aim of the EA/EMF study is to analyze the existing environmental issues related to rural water supply and sanitation and ensure that these inadequacies are addressed or mitigated in the project design. 2. Objectives of the Study The key objective of the study is to undertake and prepare a state-specific Environmental Assessment/Environment Management Framework (EA/EMF) Report with a view to identify the critical environmental concerns in the RWSS sector and address them as an integral part of project design. The specific objective includes:

1. To assess the existing status of environment in the state and to identify threats and issues which have effect on RWSS sector.

2. To identify the environmental issues associated with implementation of RWSS schemes (single village & multi village schemes) and develop environmental codes of practices that need to be followed during various stages such as planning, construction and operation and maintenance.

3. To identify generic environmental issues that are beyond the scope of RWSS schemes, but related to the sector and recommend remedial measures to address them as part of the project.

4. UTo identify existing good behavior in recycling of water, use of traditional method of liquid and solid waste management.

5. UTo identified traditional habitation which results into lower per capita consumption of water. 6. To identify household and environmental sanitation issues as well as to make an assessment of pollution

level with regard to water supply and its usages & propose appropriate sanitation technology options. 7. To prepare an Environment Management Framework including well-defined performance indicators for

addressing the identified issues, through the various activities/tasks under the proposed project, and strategy for its implementation to achieve sustainable sources for water supply schemes and environmental sanitation benefits.

3. Scope of Works The specific tasks of the study are to:

1. Conduct an analysis of the environmental status and issues in the program area for the state 2. Identify the potential environmental impacts of the range of activities to be undertaken through the state

Page | 229


projects, review the effectiveness of environmental management through the program systems 3. Assess the country and state policy, legal and regulatory requirements relevant to the WSS program, the

performance of the program in this context, and identify provisions to ensure compliance 4. Review of the existing capacity and institutional arrangements for environmental management in the

program 5. Develop an Environmental Management Framework for the state.

The tasks in detail are as follows: 3.1 Analysis of Environmental Status and Issues It is necessary to conduct a review of the proposed project in the lagging states to understand the natural resource conditions (including natural habitats and physical cultural resources) as well as the vulnerability to the likely environmental impacts of activities to be supported under proposed project. To this end the Consultant will do the following:

i. Collect and compile district/block level data on water resources and water quality for assessing the availability of safe drinking water from surface/groundwater sources. In addition to presenting the present status, the consultant shall undertake a trend analysis such as depleting spring & gadhera sources, declining ground water tables, degrading water quality and drying of surface sources such as Naulas etc. in various districts/blocks. District level maps need to be prepared by categorizing the water sources into district categories such as safe for drinking, safe with treatment and unsafe for drinking purpose.

ii. Examine the extent and possible cause of chemical and biological contamination of drinking water sources (district level) and propose mitigation plan for the same. Wherever applicable the consultant should also identify any policy/regulatory measures that may be required to protect the water resources from further contamination. The consultant shall also recommend various cost effective treatment options for contaminations that are very common in the state. The Consultant should collect information from secondary sources to examine possible point and non-point sources of contamination. The water quality hotspots need to be clearly identified for each district.

iii. Assess adequacy of current water quality monitoring programs and institutional capacity in the State, and provide recommendations for enhancing these as well as disseminating water quality information to the rural public.

iv. Assess household and environmental sanitation issues, including personal hygiene, health, household environment and sanitation issues. Collected information on major diseases and their causes, and assess how these can be reduced through various project interventions. Assess need for personal health and hygiene programs;

v. Assess environmental sanitation issues pertaining to the rural areas, including need for pavement of internal village roads and properly design network of sullage and water drains.

3.2 Review of Effectiveness of Environmental Management of Water Supply and Sanitation (WSS) Activities

It is necessary to provide a review of the anticipated individual and cumulative environmental impacts of the activities supported under the proposed National Project and the effectiveness with which these are currently being addressed in the state programs. This analysis will rely primarily on a review of relevant information on environmental management in the state programs on WSS based on field study. The field study will focus especially on multi village or regional water supply schemes, construction/upgrading of RWSS infrastructure in large/peri-urban villages, water treatment plants, sewage treatment plants, interventions increasing energy efficiency, etc.). The sample for the state-specific field study will be representative with respect to water availability and water quality, presence of critical natural habitats, etc. Furthermore, the review will include the extent to which program activities can adversely affect and to what degree do program systems include safeguard measures relevant to the following

Page | 230


1.1 Important biodiversity sites 1.2 Important cultural resource sites 1.3 Natural and critical natural habitats 1.4 Physical cultural property 1.5 Community and worker safety against potential risks during construction and operations of schemes 1.6 Exposure to toxic chemicals and hazardous waste, including polluted industrial areas 1.7 Reconstruction or rehabilitation of schemes in natural hazard prone areas 1.8 Technically sound environmental engineering practices employed for all schemes to ensure

sustainability of water quantity and quality. The output of this component is a profile of the WSS schemes to be taken up with details on the nature and scale of the activities, remarks and field observations on environmental impact, and, remarks on the effectiveness with which impacts are currently being addressed through the program systems. Activities that pose a risk of potentially significant and irreversible adverse impacts on the environment (classified Category A schemes under IL) will be clearly identified and criteria for exclusion from the program will be developed.

3.3 Analysis of Performance of the Legal, Regulatory and Policy Framework

i. A review of the relevant policy, legal and regulatory requirements will be undertaken. This task will include an examination of the existing policies, laws and regulations of the Government of India and the State Governments relevant to the WSS program. The review will identify the legal, regulatory and policy bases for environmental management in the WSS program; assess the performance of the program systems in this context; and state clearly the provisions that need to be included in the Environmental Management Framework (see task 3.5) to ensure that the activities supported under the National Project are in compliance with the legal and regulatory requirements of the Government and with the safeguard policy of the World Bank.

ii. The output from this component is expected to be a detailed, up-to-date listing of all relevant policies as well as legal and regulatory requirements of the Government of India and the State Governments and the relevant safeguard policies of the World Bank specifying the gaps and relevance to the activities undertaken under the proposed National Project for lagging states.

3.4 Review of Existing Capacity and Institutional Arrangements on Environmental Safeguards

This will include a review of the existing capacity and institutional arrangements for environmental management and compliance in the program implementing institutions will be undertaken including an identification of a strategy and plan to strengthen the same. The analyses should cover but not be limited to:

i. Description of existing systems, identification of gaps and recommendations for strengthening the following key organizational dimensions: (i) Authority and capacity of the implementing agency to manage the environmental effects of the program, (ii) Adequacy of staffing and skills with respect to environmental management, (iii) Program coordination systems, (iv) Nature and effectiveness of the monitoring systems for environmental management and compliance. A special focus will be given to the environmental management experience and institutional capacity of the state agencies that is responsible for large water supply schemes in the state.

ii. Interagency coordination arrangements for environmental management: This will include an analysis of the key partners involved in the WSS sector in the states for (i) Water Availability – (ii) Sanitation and Water Quality (iii) Waste management – (iv) Community Based Organizations.

iii. The output of this component is an analysis of implementation capacity and experience on environmental safeguards in WSS program in the states with lessons and recommendations for the EMF.

3.5 Development of an Environmental Management Framework (EMF) Based on the outputs of Tasks 1-4 an EAP should be prepared containing, but not limited to, the components as described below:

Page | 231


i. Environmental appraisal procedures: Detailed procedures and tools - a negative list, a screening tool and mitigation guidelines (or scheme-specific environmental codes of practiceP2 F

iP) need to be developed

to ensure that (a) all relevant policy, legal and regulatory requirements are met (b) activities requiring further detailed environmental assessment are identified and go through the same (c) the environmental sustainability of the interventions is enhanced. This section will be informed by the outputs of Tasks 3.1-3.3.

ii. Legal, policy and regulatory measures: This will contain (based on the outputs of Task 3.3) a listing of the legal and regulatory measures to be complied with and a description of any new measures (e.g., new GOs) required ensuring the effectiveness of environmental planning and action.

iii. Institutional roles and responsibilities: This must contain (based on the outputs of Task 3.4) a detailed description of roles and responsibilities within the Program Management Unit in the national and state levels, and within the PRIs and community institutions for implementation of the EMF. It must give a clear picture of roles and responsibilities with respect to screening, environmental assessment, capacity building and monitoring.

iv. Capacity building: This section must include (i) a description of training needs of program staff, PRIs and community institutions at the various levels (ii) description of the training modules and delivery process (iii) description of mentoring through Support Organizations (iv) details of the IEC (Information, Education, Communication) strategy for raising awareness on integrating environmental sustainability in WSS planning.

v. Monitoring: This component needs to have details of (i) the verification requirements for environmental compliance, specifying roles and responsibilities, to ensure that the procedures defined for screening and assessment are effectively applied, (ii) the process of assessing cumulative environmental impacts, (iii) the reporting requirements on the EMF implementation including specification of the performance indicators, and, integration of the performance indicators into the program MIS.

vi. The output will be an Environmental Management Framework providing detailed recommendations and actions, including actions.

4. Suggested Methodology for the Study

• The consultant will collect the existing information about Environmental issues of RWSS sector, relevant policies/laws/regulations of the Governments of India, in-depth discussions with officials in the various water sector institutions particularly focusing on performance issues [If possible, and subject to data availability, the consultant should preferably use satellite data to map the water resources including water quality for each district on a GIS platform to enable easy identification of safe drinking water supply sources by the implementing agency.]

• Secondary research focusing on a review of EA documents of the relevant Bank supported projects (ii) Field study covering a representative sample of schemes (described above). Additionally, focused discussions will be held with the staff of the relevant sector institutions, PRIs and NGOs.

• The consultant should hold detailed interactions with all the stakeholders such as a PHED, Departments of Drinking Water/Rural Development, SWSM/PMU, relevant R&D institutions/ organizations in the State, Beneficiaries and Watershed Directorate etc. to collect information regarding environmental issues done by them.

• The environmental issues should be presented in detail, using Charts, Tables and Maps for clarity. Use of pie charts will be especially useful for analyzing the hotspots. The EMP and performance indicators should be presented in a matrix format. The consultants will provide all relevant data/ information in this regard. All assumptions made should be clearly stated along with their justification.

• The consultant will liaise regularly with the World Bank team in Delhi

All the sources of information will be required to be enlisted and validated by support documents. The final outcome of the study should meet the objectives and should cover the scope of the works.

Page | 232


5. Consultations

Using the draft documents as discussion material, the State and National Government will lead consultation workshops in the state and in Delhi (national level) to elicit comments and inputs. The consultation will target key stakeholders including representatives from water sector institutions and local governments (Panchayat Raj Institutions - PRIs) – Water Supply and Sanitation Department (WSSD), Zilla Parishads (ZPs) (district local governments), Block Resource Centres (BRCs), and Gram Panchayats (village local governments), State Water Board), Groundwater Departments and representatives from NGOs, universities and research institutions. The consultant team will incorporate the feedback and concerns raised during the consultation into the documents.

6. Schedule of Deliverables

The study should be completed within 16 weeks from the data of commissioning of the study. The following are the deliverables from the date of commissioning of the study:

Benchmark (Reports) Time Schedule (Weeks)

For each stage/report

From date of commencement

Stage 1 – Inception Report which includes but not limited to study tools, approach and methodology, identification of data requirements, mode of data collection, outline of the final report, field survey format in select, criteria for choosing districts/blocks for field visits in consultation with the state government counterparts and Bank team, list of state institutions & technical experts to meet for consultations and data.

2 weeks 2 weeks

Draft Environment Assessment Report providing an overall state profile specifying the baseline environmental issues and features, and implications for the EMF. The report should also include the environmental management/safeguards analyses based on a representative sample of WSS schemes, policy/regulatory analyses and robust institutional analyses of environmental management in the WSS sector that is relevant to the state.

4 weeks 6 weeks

Draft Final Report includes the above deliverable incorporating changes suggested by the World Bank and state counterparts. The Draft Final Report will also include a draft Environmental Management Framework applicable to the state. This EMF will contain a negative list, mitigation measures, monitoring and evaluation strategies and institutional responsibilities; codes of practice and performance indicators, budgets, among others. All relevant data should be presented in annexures.

4 weeks 10 weeks

Final Report, incorporating comments from National and States Project Units and World Bank on Draft Final Report. The final report should also include the proceedings from the national and state consultations.

2 weeks 12 weeks

7. Data, Services and Facilities for the Study

The State Project Management Unit would coordinate and supervise the study and facilitate interaction and exchange of information between the consultants, concerned state departments and Panchayat Raj Institution (PRIs-GPs, BPs, ZPs). SWSM/PMU staff may join the consultant team during selected field visits.

Page | 233


8. The Outputs of the Study will be:

• Inception Report together with the tested check-lists / instruments proposed to be used and the formats of the expected results (3 copies)

• Draft Environment Assessment Report after completing field work (5 copies) • Draft Final Report 5 copies) • Final Report (10 copies) • In addition of the paper copies, the consultants will make available electronic copies (in a CD) of:

o All reports in MS Word Files. o All raw data in tabulated form together will relevant summary tables, in Oracle Database at the

time of submission of draft report and revised final report.

i. P

1P Sample examples of guidelines to be prepared are given below: -

Guidelines/ECOPs for identification of sources of water supply. Guidelines/ECOPs on protecting surface water supply sources and ensuring sustainability. Guidelines/ECOPs on protecting ground water supply sources and ensuring sustainability. Guidelines/ECOPs on Water Quality Management. Guidelines/ECOPs on selection of Safe Sanitation Technology Options (including drainage) at

individual household and community level Guidelines/ECOPs on selection of location for community toilets Guidelines/ECOPs on Safe Sullage Disposal and Organic waste management. Guidelines on Safe Solid Waste Management at individual household and community level.

These guidelines/ECOPs shall be prepared, based on local soil characteristics, hydrogeology and accessibility of water sources, socio cultural environmental etc. The sanitation and environmental related issues guidelines prepared by UNICEF, DANIDA, Rural Development Department, Watershed Management Directorate, etc. will be particularly useful in developing the guidelines for safe sanitation technology options. The “State of Environment Conservation and Pollution Control Board in the state, which should be studied, and WATSAN related issue must be analyzed and incorporated in the Environmental Management Plan.

9. Required Qualifications of the Consultant • Experience in conducting similar studies in India particularly in rural water and sanitation

programs. Familiarity of having worked in selected state is an advantage. • Strong capacity and experience in organizing and planning survey logistics, data management and

statistics. • Demonstrated knowledge and skills in both quantitative and qualitative surveys and assessments especially

using participatory and consultative techniques and tools.

10. Suggested key personnel for this assignment:

• Team Leader (1): The Team Leader should have a PhD or Masters with preferable academic background in civil/water/environmental engineering or a relevant social science. He/she should have considerable experience (10 years plus) in undertaking large-scale studies related to rural water and sanitation related fields especially with governments at state and national levels. Knowledge of state-level water quality monitoring and surveillance systems and institutional mechanisms in the RWSS is required.

• Environment Specialist (1): The Environment Specialist should be a Post Graduate in Engineering and/ or Environment with at least 8 years of experience in the sector. He/she should have had exposure to the rural water and sanitation programs and can cover the full range of environmental issues of the sector.

• Research Coordinators (1): The Research Coordinators should have a Masters degree in statistics, economics or related fields, and have at least 5 years of experience in documentation and qualitative

Page | 234


and quantitative research. Experience of managing a team of researchers, analysis of information and data should be demonstrated.

11. Management of the Study

The consultant will report to the Additional Chief Secretary of the relevant department in the state. The consultancy firm is responsible for all logistics, including but not limited to supplies, printing of instruments, translations, computers, and so forth. The State Government will not provide logistical support for the study team. The consultant team will also liaise closely with the World Bank team.

12. UReview Committee to Monitor Consultants Work

The Additional Chief Secretary will be the chairperson of the review committee comprising members from the field of engineering, community development and finance. The committee may also seek comments and inputs on the consultants work from the World Bank staff and other experts as appropriate.

13. Payments

Signing of the contract 10% of the contract value

Acceptance of the Inception report 10% of the contract value

Acceptance of Draft Report

40% of the contract value

Acceptance of the summary of stakeholder consultation meetings and Final Reports

40% of the contract value

Page | 235


ANNEXURE-29

LIST OF PROJECT DISTRICTS AND PUBLIC HEALTH ENGG. DIVISIONS FOR SELECTION OF SCHEMES

Page | 236


ANNEXURE-29 LIST OF PROJECT DISTRICTS AND PUBLIC HEALTH ENGG. DIVISIONS FOR SELECTION OF

SCHEMES

1. Garhwa

2. Palamu

3. Giridih [1 & 2]

4. Dumka [1 & 2]

5. Godda

6. Sahibganj

7. Pakur

8. Jamtara

9. Dhanbad [1 & 2]

10. Saraikela

11. East Singhbhum (Jamshedpur)

i. Adityapur

ii. Jamshedpur

12. Khunti

1 Functional Piped Water Supply Schemes with household connections selected from each district, and 8 additional

schemes would be studied to ensure coverage of tribal villages, coverage of all types of sources & scheme

technologies and critical water quality affected villages.

Page | 237


ANNEXURE-30

THE LIST OF SAMPLE HABITATIONS FOR FIELD STUDY

Page | 238


ANNEXURE-30 THE LIST OF SAMPLE HABITATIONS FOR FIELD STUDY

LIST OF VILLAGES

Sl. No. Name of Village Name of District

1. Kajigaon Sahibganj

2. Tinpahar Sahibganj

3. Sangrampur Pakur

4. Bandiya Pakur

5. Dharmah bandh Dhanbad

6. Sinidih Dhanbad

7. Gadi Giridih

8. Bagodar Giridih

9. Kankari Palamu

10. Nimia Palamu

11. Sudnah Palamu

12. Kalyanpur Garwa

13. Pratapur Garwa

14. Dharmih Garwa

15. Purvuh tola Garwa

16. Harijan Tola Garwa

17. Patsa Garwa

18. Narayanpur Sarai Kela

19. Dugni Sarai Kela

20. Jhariya East Singhbhum

21. Potka East Singhbhum

22. Hathihariyari Godda

23. Bhataundha Godda

24. Haroraidih Dumka

25. Maslia Dumka

26. Bagjori Jamtara

27. Bewa Jamtara

Page | 239


ANNEXURE-31

POLICY & REGULATORY FRAMEWORK RELATED TO MANAGEMENT OF ENVIRONMENT

Page | 240


ANNEXURE-31 POLICY & REGULATORY FRAMEWORK RELATED TO MANAGEMENT OF ENVIRONMENT

1. The 73P

rdP Amendment to the ‘Constitution of India’ and The Jharkhand Panchayat Raj Act 2001

The 73P

rdP Amendment to the Constitution of India in 1992 backed the idea of a three tier Panchayati Raj System (the

Gram Panchayat, the Panchayat Samiti and the Zila Panchayat). Article 243-B has provided for the Constitution of Panchayat at the village, intermediate and district levels in all states of India with a population of more than 20 lakh. The State Legislature under Article 243-C has been entrusted the responsibility of making provisions for composition of such Panchayats by Law. The Amendment Act of 1992 contains provisions for devolution of Powers and responsibilities to the Panchayats both for the preparation of economic development plans and social justice as well as for the implementation in relation to 29 subjects listed under Powers, Authorities and functions of the Panchayat in the eleventh schedule of the Constitution (Article 243 a). Drinking water (S. No. 11), Health and Sanitation (S. No. 23) and Maintenance of Community assets (S. No. 29) are included in this schedule.

The Jharkhand Panchayati Raj Act, 2001, was enacted to provide for Constitution of Panchayati Raj in the State of Jharkhand except for areas covered under the Patna Municipal Corporation Act, 1951, Bihar and Orissa Municipal Act, 1922 and Cantonment Act, 1924. The Act specifies the Powers and Functions of the Gram Sabha (Section 10) including the management of natural resources, keeping a watch over local schemes, making drinking water available for domestic use and also sanitation and Conservancy. Section 32 provide for creation of Panchayat Samities at the Block Level and excludes such areas of the Blocks lying under any Municipal Corporation, municipality, notified area or Cantonment Board. It is the link between the Gram Sabha and the Zila Parishad. The Panchayat Samities are constituted as corporate entities. (Section 33)

The Zila Parishad, also constituted as a corporate body is the highest link of the three tiers Panchayati System. The Zila Parishad has jurisdiction over the entire district excluding such portions of the district as are included in a Municipality or are under the Authority of a Municipal Corporation, Cantonment Board or a Notified Area Committee.

Section 75 (A.11) of the Act provides for Drinking Water Facilities to be a function of the Gram Sabha. This includes construction, repair and maintenance of public wells, ponds and hand pumps for drinking water, washing clothes and bathing, taking measures for prevention and control of water pollution, conducting and maintaining rural water supply schemes and management of water sources. Section 75 (A.22) lays down Hygiene and Sanitation as a function of the Gram Sabha and includes promotion of village sanitation and the construction and maintenance of public latrines. Section 75 (A.26) specifies that the Gram Sabha will also maintain and preserve community assets along with encouraging peoples participation in this. Importantly the functions of the Gram Panchayat as given in Section 75 will not affect the other Acts and Rules of the Government from time to time, nor their jurisdiction.

Section 76 prescribes functions of the Panchayat Samities and in this context, under Section 76 (XI) indicates integrated provision of rural water supply schemes, their repairs and maintenance and integrated management of drinking water sources. (Integrated Management of rural water supply schemes is not mentioned for Gram Panchayats). Under Section 76 (XXI) the Panchayat Samitis are also expected to guide the Gram Panchayats by making integrated plans for encouraging hygiene and sanitation.

Section 77 describes the functions of the Zila Parishads. The Zila Parishads, as provided in Section 77 (X) are also responsible for the extension of rural water supply and the management of drinking water sources. They are also responsible for development of Ground Level Water resources, encouraging community water committees and installing committee pump sets.As prescribed in Section 77 (XX), ensuring promotion of rural sanitation and cleanliness of public streets, ponds, wells and roads and preparing integrated plans for public toilets, getting the same implemented and maintenance are important functions of the Zila Parishad under the Panchayati Raj Act of Jharkhand. Section 79 empowers the Gram Panchayats to maintain sources of sanitation, cleanliness, water emission, water transition, water supply and to regulate use of water.

Page | 241


As per Section 93, a Gram Panchayat is authorized to take fees on management of sanitation and water charges where supply of water for drinking, irrigation and other purposes is arranged for by a Gram Panchayat. It can also change a sanitation tax at the places where provision for sanitation of private latrines, urinals and cess pits within its jurisdiction is made by the Gram Panchayat. The Panchayat Samiti or Zila Parishad can impose a fee / tax if the necessary provisions of water / sanitation are made by them.

In terms of delegation of functions, all the three tiers of PRIP

sP appear to be adequately assigned the duties of

managing and maintaining drinking water sources and managing and maintaining rural water supply and sanitation schemes.

2. National Water Policy

The following components of the Draft National Water Policy 2012 adopted in December 2012 by the National Water Resources Ministry have a bearing on Rural Water Supply and Sanitation Schemes.

1. Water needs to be managed as a community resource held, by the State, under public trust doctrine to achieve food security, livelihood and equitable and sustainable development for all. Existing acts may have to be suitably modified. A national legal frame work of general principles needs to be developed also to lead the way to the formulation of essential legislation in water Governance in each state. A comprehensive legislation for optimum management and institutionalization of interstate water resources should also be drawn up.

2. Losses of water should be optimized and an awareness of water as a scarce resource should be fostered. The Centre, the States and the local bodies must ensure access to a minimum quality of potable water for essential health and hygiene to all its citizens, available within easy reach of the household. Importantly, the policy also provides that the community should be sensitized and encouraged to adapt first to utilization of water as per local availability before providing water through long distance transfer. Community based water management should be institutionalized and strengthened.

3. In view of the predicted impacts of climate change on water availability, the capability of communities to adapt climate resilient technologies should be augmented. These should include technologies which are more water efficient. Water storage in the form of increased soil moisture, ponds, ground water, rain water harvesting and construction of reservoirs etc. has to be increased.

4. Trends in water availability must be assessed and accounted for during water resource planning. The availability of water is limited and therefore this needs to be increased to meet the increasing demands. This could be done through the direct utilization of rain water and the avoidance of in advertent evapo-transpiration. Inter basin transfers of water as a means of meeting basic human needs and or achieving equity and social justice should be considered on the basis of merits of each case after evaluating the environmental, economic and social impacts of such transfers.

5. Water foot prints and water auditing should be developed to promote and incentivize efficient use of water. Water conservation technologies in agriculture and irrigation should be promoted. There should be a concurrent mechanism involving users for monitoring if the water use pattern is causing problems.

6. For the preemptive and high priority uses of water for sustaining life and ecosystem for ensuring food security and supporting livelihood for the poor, the principle of differential pricing may have to be retained. Over and above these users, water should increasingly be subjected to allocation and pricing on economic principles. A Water Regulatory Authority needs to be established in each state to fix and regulate the water tariff system and charges according to the principles of the policy. Water Users Associations

Page | 242


(WUAs) should be given statutory powers to collect and retain a portion of water charges, manage the water allotted to them and maintain the distribution system in their jurisdiction. They should be given the freedom to fix rates subject to floor rates determined by WRA P

sP. Heavy underpricing of electricity needs to

be reviewed to check the wasteful use of both electricity and water.

7. Conservation of River Corridors, water bodies and infrastructure should be undertaken in a scientifically planned manner through community participation. Encroachments and diversions must not be allowed. Development activities should be strictly regulated and pollution controlled. Contracts for construction of water resources infrastructure projects should have inbuilt provisions for longer periods of proper maintenance.

8. Local governing bodies like Panchayats, Municipalities, Corporations etc and Water Users Associations, wherever applicable, should be involved in planning of the projects.

9. Efforts should be made to provide improved water supply in urban and in rural areas. Least water intensive sanitation and sewerage systems with decentralized sewage treatment plants should be incentivized.

10. Water resources projects and services should be managed with community participation.

11. The State Water Policies may need to be drafted / revised in accordance with the National Policy.

The policy therefore recognizes that water is a scarce resource and supplies need to be conserved and augmented. It also encourages scientific inter basin transfer of water. It also recognizes the necessity of ensuring supply of potable drinking water to all citizens, preferably through locally available sources, discourages transporting water from long distances, advocates for framework legislation and differential pricing policy regimes, provides for community participation and establishes a role for Panchayats. It also suggests that least water intensive sanitation systems with decentralized sewage treatment plants should be incentivized.

3. National Water Mission-Climate Change

The National Water Mission constituted under the Prime Ministers National Action Plan on Climate Change, plans to ensure integrated water management helping to conserve water, minimize wastage and ensure a more equitable distribution of water, both within and across the states. It seeks to develop a framework to optimize water use by increasing water use efficiency by 20% through regulatory mechanisms with differential entitlements and pricing. The Mission will also seek to ensure that a considerable share of the water needs of urban areas is met through recycling of waste water. It also makes a provision for policy interventions to promote enhanced storage of water both above and below ground, rainwater harvesting etc.

The Mission aims at optimizing the efficiency of existing irrigation systems, including rehabilitation of system that have been run down and also expand irrigation where feasible with a special effort to increase storage capacity. Incentive structures will be designed to promote water–neutral or water–positive technologies, recharging of underground water sources and adoption of large scale irrigation programs which rely on sprinklers, drip irrigation and furrow irrigation.

4. Jharkhand State Water Policy 2011

Page | 243


The Jharkhand State Water Policy recognizes water to be a scarce resource, the right of every citizen to equitable access to water for the fulfillment of basic needs and the necessity of policy, legislative and program initiatives in protection and enforcement of such rights.

The policy speaks of adopting a new state water policy framework, restricting the fundamental relationships of the state and water users, creating entitlements of water and incentives for water user organizations for more involved participation in management, creating new institutional arrangement at the State Level and at the river basin level to guide and regulate water resources planning and development, reviewing the existing institutional arrangement in the water sector and appropriately restructuring and adjusting them, promoting water efficient technologies and formulating appropriate legislation, rules and notifications to achieve these strategy options.

Jharkhand has committed itself to: 1. Preparation of a State Water Resources plan to promote balanced development of the Water Sector,

2. Review of the interstate water sharing arrangements and initiate necessary changes,

3. Encouraging integrated water shed development and management programs in drought prone areas,

4. Defining the water resources of the state, working out a strategy to provide irrigation facility to each cultivable plot of the state within 10 years chiefly through the use of a comprehensive computerized data base in this regards,

5. Within 05 years renovate and maintain existing irrigation projects and maintain a complete data base in order to achieve optimal utilization of existing irrigation potential,

6. Promote increased responsibility and participation of water users in the management of resources, make it mandatory for farmers participation through Water Users Association in irrigation management and to involve Panchayati Raj Institutions in the management and conservation of traditional water sources to cover the work of minor irrigation,

7. Establish a well-defined, transparent system for water entitlements that cannot be unilaterally changed by any State agency or authority and permit transfers of entitlements between entitlement holders based on fair compensation.

In terms of water for domestic use, the policy promotes ensuring drinking water for all by providing adequate domestic water facilities for the entire population both in urban and in rural areas to meet their needs. Multipurpose projects would invariably include a domestic water component. Ecology and drinking water needs of human beings and animals shall be the first priority on any available water resource. Drinking water is planned to be directly sourced from reservoirs and dedicated pipelines laid down as far as possible to avoid loss of water through canals or rivers. Make efforts to fix water rates in order to make the water supply self-sustaining at least in meeting the O & M costs. The Government also intends to work out a time bound action plan to augment the live capacity of existing reservoirs by de-siltation or use of other water efficient technologies and management options. It is also intended to consider utilizing the water of the Ganga for partly supplying water for storage in existing and proposed dams and reservoirs for meeting the drinking water demand in the non monsoon months and also for supplementing the irrigation needs. It is also proposed to construct large reservoirs nearly thickly populated cities for supply of drinking water. The community is also planned to be effectively involved in the planning and management of drinking water. The State, through the Pollution Control Board shall draw up a plan for control of pollutant discharges. The groundwater potential of the state is also to be periodically assessed. Groundwater Legislation is also proposed to be enacted by taking into account the model legislation communicated by the Government of India for the sustainable management of Groundwater.

Page | 244


The policy therefore plans for a very robust system for water resource management in order to achieve the objection of quality, quantity and equitable distribution. It puts a priority on domestic water supplies, puts in place a system of tariffs and regulation and also seeks to promote community involvement and people’s participation in planning and implementation of water sector projects including drinking water and sanitation. 5. Guidelines for Ground Water Use

The Central Ground Water Authority (CGWA) has notified 82 areas for the purpose of regulation of ground water development. The District Administrative Heads (DC or DM) in case of Administrative Block or Taluka, or the Head of the Municipality (in case of Municipal Area) of the notified areas in the country have been appointed as ‘Authorized Officers’ by Central Ground Water Authority under Section 4 of the Environmental Protection Act (EPA) (1986). Regulation of Ground Water development in Notified areas is through district administrative heads assisted by Advisory Committees under the provisions of Section 4 of the EPA, 1986. All issues pertaining to granting of NOC's for ground water withdrawal, checking violations, sealing of groundwater abstraction structures, launching of prosecution against offenders, attending to complaints, etc., are to be addressed by the Authorized Officers. The guidelines for abstraction of ground water in Notified and Non-Notified areas for various users are given below.

5.1 Notified Areas

i. Permission to abstract ground water through any energized means will not be accorded for any purpose

other than drinking water. ii. Drinking purpose:

NOC can be accorded for construction of groundwater abstraction structures/ replacement of existing defunct well for drinking purpose only to:

a. Government department/Agency/Undertaking entrusted with the water supply b. Other Government organizations/State Government Guest Houses/Registered Housing societies c. Schools/ educational & State/Central Government recognized research Institutions/ Universities d. Hospitals

NOC for the item (b to d) will be considered only if Water Supplying Department is not providing adequate water in the area/premises. Proof for this is to be produced from the concerned authority by the applicant. Pre-conditions for grant of NOC for abstraction of ground water to categories under Sl No. (a) to (d) are:

1. Maximum diameter of the groundwater abstraction structures should be restricted to 150 mm (6 inches) only and capacity of the pump should not exceed 1 HP. In case of Government water supply agencies, housing societies, tube well size/dia & HP of prime mover can be more depending on the ground water availability and requirement.

2. Concurrent with the construction of groundwater abstraction structures, the organization shall undertake artificial recharge to groundwater through rain water harvesting structure in the premises within 45 days of issuance of NOC and will confirm to the Authorized Officer for verification.

3. Water meter installation in the abstraction structure is mandatory and confirmation of water meter installation shall be given to the Authorized Officer under intimation to the concerned Regional office of CGWB immediately after construction. The daily water meter reading should be maintained and quarterly report should be submitted to Authorized Officer.

4. The water from the groundwater abstraction structures will be used for drinking and domestic purposes only.

5. All details of the drilling like rock formations encountered, the depth and diameter of the constructed groundwater abstraction structures, type of pipes used, yield of bore well/ tube well (Fracture zones encountered/zones tapped) and ground water quality etc have to be furnished to the nodal agency authorized by district administration head within 15 days of the completion of the construction.

Page | 245


6. The permission for construction of groundwater abstraction structure would be valid for a period of six months from the date of issue of NOC.

7. The NOC issued would be non-transferable.

e. For Individual households: 1. Permission to be granted only for such cases where public water supply system does not exist. The

permission shall be valid only till such time there is no public water supply provided. In that case, the abstraction structure shall be exclusively utilized for artificial recharge to groundwater or sealed.

2. A certificate from the water supply agency regarding non-availability of government water supply to the area/individual is to be submitted by the applicant.

3. The premises should have only one Groundwater abstraction structure (either existing or new) to meet the drinking and domestic requirements. No tube-well/bore-well will be constructed, if any working tube-well already exists. In case the existing well has become nonfunctional and is to be replaced, it should be converted into recharge well, if possible or properly sealed and no water be pumped from it.

4. The person(s) intending to construct new tube-well will seek permission from the Authorized officer/Advisory Committee, at least 30 days in advance along with the name and address of the drilling agency, which will undertake construction of tube-well. Authorities/Nodal Agency can ask the user to supply additional information.

5. The maximum diameter of the tube-well should be restricted to 110 mm (4 ½ inches) only and the capacity of the pump should not exceed 1HP. In case of deep water level the capacity/dia of the structure will be decided by the Authority based on the site specific recommendations.

6. Concurrent with the construction of groundwater abstraction structure, the owner of the tube-well shall undertake artificial recharge to groundwater through rainwater harvesting in the premises.

8. The water from the tube-well/bore-well will be used exclusively for drinking and domestic purposes only within the premises.

9. All details of the drilling like rock formations encountered, the depth and diameter of the constructed tube-well, (Fracture zones encountered/zones tapped) type of pipes used in tube well, yield of bore well/tube well and ground water quality etc., shall be kept for record and are to be provided at the time of inspection.

10. Any violation of the above conditions will attract legal action under section 15 of the Environment (Protection) Act, 1986.

In case the notified area is de-notified subsequently, the conditions pertaining to “non-notified areas” shall be followed. 5.2 Non-Notified Areas

NOC for Ground Water withdrawal will be considered for Industries/Infrastructure projects which are either NEW or under EXPANSION as per the criteria given below: 5.3 Industries

Safe Mandatory recycling and reuse of water. NOC is required for groundwater withdrawal if quantity of groundwater abstraction exceeds 100 mP

3P/day. AR to groundwater to be adopted. However, Industries under B-VI have no

exemption from obtaining NOC.

Semi critical

Page | 246


Major and Medium industries shall recycle and reuse at least 50% of the waste water. Withdrawal may be permitted subject to undertaking of recharge** measures. The withdrawal should not exceed 200% of the recharged quantity.

Critical Major and Medium industries should fully recycle and reuse the waste water. Withdrawal may be permitted subject to undertaking of recharge** measures. The withdrawal should not exceed 100% of the recharged quantity.

Overexploited (except industries falling under category mentioned in B (VI). Full utilization of recycled water and reuse of water should be mandatory. Withdrawal may be permitted subject to undertaking of recharge** measures. The withdrawal should not exceed 50% of the recharged quantity.

* The present guidelines will follow the assessment of Ground Water Resource Estimation (GWRE) 2009 till it is revised. ** The recharge should be implemented within the premises and/or preferably in the same water shed / assessment unit. Detailed Project Proposal (DPR) shall be included along with the application for NOC. 5.4 Infrastructure Projects

(SEZ, Group Housing projects, Residential townships, Hospitals, Educational Institutions, Roads, Bridges, Technology parks, Malls, Multiplex, etc.)

a. Run-off from the entire project area is to be utilized for artificial recharge to ground water unless risk of contamination exists or area is water logged. The runoff from the entire premises shall be utilized for harvesting/storage also, apart from recharge.

b. The quantum of ground water for usage other than drinking/ domestic shall not exceed 25% of total ground water abstraction in case of Housing projects/ Residential Townships.

c. Proponents are to submit a status report stating the quantum of water required and the quantity that would be provided by the Government Water Supplying agency. This should be supported by a letter from the agency.

5.5 Areas Having Specific Depth Zones Notified:

a. In areas where specific depth zones are notified, permission to withdraw groundwater can be considered based on the site specific recommendations of Regional Directorate of CGWB from the depth zones, which are not coming under the notification.

5.6 Mining and Dewatering Projects

Abstraction of ground water by mining industries intersecting water table for dewatering of mine pit water, and dewatering ground water for basement construction of buildings, etc., may be permitted subject to the following conditions in addition to those already specified under Para B-I.

a. The dewatered quantum of water is to be put to gainful use. This may include water supply and provide to water supply agencies, agriculture, dust suppression by the industry, utilization by the mining industry, utilization for artificial recharge to groundwater, etc.

b. Piezometers for monitoring the ground water level are to be mandatorily installed within the premises and in peripheral areas. The record of water level data be maintained and to be provided periodically or whenever demanded by the regulating agency.

c. Wherever the mines/dewatering project is situated in the coastal area special care should be taken to prevent sea water ingress. This should be supported by a technical evaluation report.

Page | 247


d. In case of mining projects detailed and continuous study on the groundwater regime, including groundwater modeling should be carried out and the results should be submitted to the Regional Directorate of CGWB periodically.

5.7 Abstraction Of Saline Ground Water By Industries/Infrastructure Projects

Industries/infrastructure projects desirous of utilizing saline ground water would be permitted to extract saline groundwater. However, due care to be taken in respect of disposal of the effluents by the units so as to protect the water bodies and the aquifers from pollution. Proposals pertaining to such cases must have a detailed project report elucidating the mechanism of handling the effluent water and its various uses. All precautions must be taken for protection of environment especially fresh water aquifers in and around the area. Large scale recharge mechanism should be adopted wherever feasible in such cases to improve the ground water conditions in the region. 5.8 Industries Using Groundwater as Raw Material and other Water Intensive Industries

Industries using water as raw material/water intensive industries like packaged drinking water, mineral water industries, distilleries, breweries, soft drink manufacturing industries, textiles, paper & pulp, etc shall not be granted NOC for groundwater withdrawal from OE areas. In Safe, Semi- Critical & Critical areas NOC for ground water withdrawal is mandatory for these industries as per Section B-1. However, ground water withdrawal will be limited as follows:

Safe: Withdrawal limited to 200% of ground water recharge Semi-critical: Withdrawal limited to 100% of ground water recharge Critical: Withdrawal limited to 50% of ground water recharge Over-exploited: No permission for industries under this category 5.9 Change In Land Use

Industries/ Infrastructure projects coming up in agricultural land or any other land after change in land use shall have to submit all documents endorsing the change of land use from competent authority. Withdrawal of ground water from existing abstraction structures, if any, after change in land use in the area can be done only after approval from the Central Ground Water Authority. Cases would be processed as per changed land use. 5.10 Other conditions (applicable for all cases):

• Sale and supply of raw/unprocessed/untreated ground water by unauthorized agencies for commercial use is not permitted.

• Non-compliance of conditions mentioned in the NOC may be taken as sufficient reason for cancellation of NOC accorded/ non-renewal of NOC.

• Wherever State Government Authorities are in existence to manage and control ground water regimes, the Groundwater Regulation would be done by them. The State Ground Water Authority (SGWA) shall send a quarterly progress report to CGWA for records.

• In case of any delay in executing the project for bonafide reasons within the set time, for which NOC has been granted, the firm shall apply to CGWA for extension. CGWA may consider extension based on its merits.

• No application for NOC shall be entertained without proper referral letters from the statutory authority (Central and State Govt. Dept and Agencies).

• The referral letter shall contain verification on the quantum of water for the industry/project with detailed break up of groundwater consumption, recycle & reuse of the waste water, so that the wastage of the

Page | 248


precious resource can be avoided. In case this is not given by the referral authority, applicant should obtain a letter from the Industries Dept. /Project Sanctioning Authority on the same line.

• The CRZA rules and regulation shall be applicable wherever in vogue. • No permission required for withdrawal of ground water from any area if withdrawal is done through non-

energized means. • Mandatory clause on RWH may be relaxed in case of water logged/shallow water level (< 5 m bgl during

pre-monsoon) areas. • Relaxation in the quantity of ground water withdrawal in over-exploited areas, and/or quantity of recharge

being affected by the firm can be permitted by CGWA if it feels it absolutely necessary in national interest. • The artificial recharge proposals are required to be vetted by any competent authority of State/Centre. • Treated water shall not be used for recharge to ground water, since it may contain heavy metals & other

toxic elements. The treated waters shall be fully used by the proponent or any other agency, who can utilize it without contaminating the underlying aquifer / water bodies.

• NOC issued is non-transferable. 5.11 Issuance/ Renewal of NOC

a. NOC will be accorded in non notified areas for a period of two years initially and will be renewed for a period of three years thereafter, subject to compliance of conditions mentioned in the NOC. Subsequently NOC’s shall be renewed every five years subject to the compliance of the conditions mentioned in the renewed NOC.

b. Renewal of NOC’s in notified areas will be done by the Authorized Officer for 2 years and the same shall be renewed every two years.

c. In case of change in category of the area, renewals would be granted with conditions as laid down for such new category areas. In case it is difficult to comply with the conditions the applicant should satisfy the authority for granting exemption/alternative measures.

d. In case it is found that some of the conditions stipulated during the issuance NOC have not been implemented in certain localities it may be relaxed by CGWA based on the recommendations of the concerned Regional Director for specific areas as per site specific condition.

e. Processing fee prescribed if any, from time to time shall be charged for issuance and renewal of NOC’s.

6 The Water (Prevention And Control Of Pollution) Act, 1974

The Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1974 is a Central Act of Parliament which provides for the Prevention and Control of Water Pollution and the maintaining or restoring of wholesomeness of water. It also provides for the establishment of the Boards for the Prevention and Control of Water Pollution section 3&4 and for assigning to such Boards, Powers (Sections 18,19,20,21,23,30,33,33A of Water Act) and functions (Sections 16,17 of Water Act)

The Act provides that no person shall discharge any sewage or trade effluents beyond the standards as prescribed by the Board into any stream, river, well or on land. It also provides that no person shall knowingly cause an impediment in the flow of any stream which may lead to aggravation of Pollution (Section 24).

The Act establishes a mechanism of consent wherein a consent to establish (Section-25) has to be obtained from the Pollution Control Board for establishing or taking steps to establish any industry, operation or process or any treatment and disposal system which is likely to discharge sewage or trade effluents into a stream, river, well or land or to begin to make a new discharge of sewage or alter the existing discharge. Consent to operate has to be obtained for existing facilities (Section-26). The consent unless given or refused earlier be deemed to have been given unconditionally on the expiry of a period of four months of making a complete application to the Board along with the prescribed fees (Section 25, 26 Water Act). The act provides for an appellate Authority to address to

Page | 249


grievances against orders made by the Board under section 25/26 and 27. Such appeals have to be filed within 30 days but give the power to the Authority to hear the cases even after 30 days if satisfied about the reasons for delay (Section 28).

Where certain works prescribed under Section-25 and 26 are to be executed for the prevention of pollution by any person and the 04 person fails to execute these works the Board may get the works executed and recover the amount so spent along with interest as arrears of land revenue (Section 30 Water Act).

The Board has been empowered to make applications to courts for restraining pollution. The courts may in turn redirect the person to take necessary action or authorize the Board to undertake the mitigation works. Expenses incurred by the Board are recoverable from the concerned person as arrears of land revenue. (Section 33 of Water Act). A board may also issue directions which may include the directions to close prohibit or regulate any industry, operation or process or the stoppage or regulations of supply of electricity, water or any other services. (Section 33A)

Failure to provide information as sought under Section-20 is punishable with imprisonment for a period up to 3 months or with fine which may extend to 10000 rupees or with both and in case the default continues with a fine which may extend to 5000 Rs. for every day during which such failure continues. Failure to comply with directions issued under section 32 or 33 (A), would be punishable with imprisonment for a term extending from 18 months to 72 months and with fine. Continued failure to comply invites a fine of Rs. 5000 for every day to a period of 1 year beyond which it is punishable with an imprisonment of 24 months to 84 months and with fine (Section 41).

Destruction, obstruction, damage to Board property, not furnishing information or providing false information, tempering of diaries etc. is punishable with imprisonment which may extend to 3 months or with fine which may extend to Rs. 10,000 or with both. (Section 42)

Discharging effluents beyond standards prescribed by the Board or establishing any industry, operations or process likely to generate effluent or continuing to use an outlet without the consent of the Board shall be punishable with imprisonment ranging from 18 months to 72 months and with fine. Continued contravention invites an enhancement penalty of 24 months to 84 months of imprisonment and with fine. (Section 43, 44)

Provisions for sampling have been provided under section 21. Samples on the request of the occupier have to be divided into two, one part analysed by the Board laboratory and the other part by the reference laboratory designated as the State Water laboratory (Section 21)

Apart from the Pollution Control Boards, any person who has given a notice of not less than 60 days to the Pollution Control Board, of his intention to do so can make an application to the Court not inferior to that of a Metropolitan Magistrate or a Judicial Magistrate of first class (Section 49).

The State Government and the Central Pollution Control Boards can issue directions to the State Pollution Control Boards (Section18)

Standards published by the Central Government under the EP Act cannot be relaxed by the State Board but can be made more stringent.

6.1 The Water (Prevention And Control Of Pollution) Cess Act, 1977

The Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Cess Act, 1977 is a Central Act of Parliament which provides for the levy and collection of cess on water consumed by industries and local authorities. The act is applicable to the whole of India except the State of Jammu and Kashmir. It is an act to augment the resources of the State Pollution Control Boards.

Page | 250


The Act provides that the State Pollution Control Boards and Committees shall levy and collect Cess from persons carrying on any industry and from all local authorities for the purposes of and utilization under the Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act 1974.

The Cess shall be assessed on the basis of water consumed by the person or local authority and would also include supply of water.

It also prescribes for higher rates of cess in the event of the assesse not meeting the standards prescribed under the Environment Protection Act 1986 or with the provisions of Section 25 of the Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act 1974.

If a user liable to pay cess is taking water from another person or authority which is also liable to pay cess, then the end user will pay and the earlier users (suppliers in this instant) shall not be liable to pay.

53TSection 4of the Act p53Trovides for the affixing of Meters and prescribes that for measuring the quantity of water, used by any person or any industry or by local authorities, the persons liable to pay cess should install water meters of such standards and at such positions as may be prescribed. If this is not done then the Central Government (presently the duty of the State Boards) shall install the same and recover the costs from the concerned industry or local authority.

53TSection 10 prescribes that53T any person or authority fails to pay the amount of cess to the State Government, within the date specified in the order, then they have to pay an interest of two percent for every month or part of a month on the amount payable by them to the State Government.

Section-11 prescribes that if any person or industry or any local authority fails to pay the cess arrears within the specified time, then a penalty not exceeding the amount of cess in arrears can be imposed on the person, industry or local authority by the assessing authority after giving proper opportunity to be heard .

7 The Air (Prevention And Control Of Pollution) Act 1981

The Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1981 is a central Act of Parliament, which provides for the prevention and control of air pollution and maintaining the good quality of air. It has also provided for the establishment of the Central and State Boards for the Prevention and Control of Air Pollution under sections 3 and 4.

53TSection-211T53T 1Tmakes a provision of Consent of the State Pollution Control Board for establishing or operating any industrial plant in an air pollution control area. It also lays down procedures for making the application which has to be in the prescribed form and accompanied by such fees as may be prescribed, the manner of inquiry and a time limit of four months within which the consent has either to be granted or refused by the State Board. The consent so granted may be cancelled or refused before the expiry of the period of consent if the conditions are not complied with.

53TUnder Section-221T53T 1Tno person having any industrial plant in an air pollution control area can discharge emissions of any air pollutants in the excess of the standards prescribed by the State Pollution Control Boards

Under section-22A, where a violation of the emission standards prescribed by the Board is apprehended the Board may make an application to a court, for restraining such person from emitting such pollutant. The court may issue necessary directions. In case the same are not complied with, by the person, the court may authorize the Board to implement the directions. Costs so incurred by the Board can be recovered as arrears of land revenue.

Under Section-31, any person aggrieved by an order made by the State Board under this act may prefer an appeal before the appellate authority constituted by the state government for the purpose. The appeal has to be generally

Page | 251


filed within thirty days from the date on which the order is communicated but the appellate authority may entertain the appeal after the expiry of thirty days, if it is satisfied that the appellant was prevented by sufficient cause from filing the appeal in time.

53TSection-31A1T53T 1Tempowers the State Pollution Control Boards, in the exercise of their powers and performance of functions under this Act, to issue any direction in writing to any person, officer or authority. It has also been provided that such person, officer or authority shall be bound to comply with the directions. The power to issue directions under this section includes the power to direct for the closure, prohibition or regulation of any industry, operation or process or the stoppage or regulation of supply of electricity, water or any other services.

53TUnder Section-3753T, whoever fails to comply, with the provisions of section-21 or section-22 or directions issued under section-31A, shall in respect of each such failure, be punishable with imprisonment, which shall not be less than one year and six months, but which may extend to six years and with fine and in case of failure continues, with an additional fine of five thousand rupees every day.

8 The Environment (Protection) Act, 1986

This Act provides for the protection and improvement of environment and for matters connected therewith. It defines environment to include “Water, air, and land and the inter-relationship which exists among and between water, air and land, and human beings, other living creatures, plants, micro-organisms and property.” This law prescribes that the central government shall take “all such measures as it deems necessary orexpedient for the purpose of protecting and improving the quality of the environment and preventing, controlling and abating environmental pollution.” It also provides for “the standards of quality of air, water, or soil for various areas and purposes, the maximum allowable limits of concentration of various environmental pollutants procedures and safeguards for the handling of hazardous substances.” The Act also lays down a procedure for the prevention, control and abatement of environmental pollution through regulating the discharge or emission of any environmental pollutant in excess of standards as may be prescribed. Contravention of provisions of the act is punishable by imprisonment up to seven years or fine up to Rs 1 lakh. An additional fine up to Rs 5,000 for every day of violation is also prescribed. 9 The EIA Notification of 2006

Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) is an important tool for integrating the objectives of environmental management into the decision making process to ensure environmentally sound and sustainable development. Development activities were earlier evaluated keeping in view the technical feasibility and financial viability of the project only. However, with the introduction of concept of EIA the environmental considerations have also been included in the evaluation of the feasibility and sustainability of any developmental/industrial project/activity. The main purpose of EIA is to mitigate adverse environmental impacts (if any) of any project/activity and bring them to an acceptable level to the community likely to be affected by the proposed project.

Under the Industrial Policy Statement of 1980 the site was also required to be declared fit from the Environmental Angle through the concerned Industries Department. Most of the State Pollution Control Boards also initiated the process of granting No Objection Certificates from the Environmental Angle in the early nineties. This started off as an administrative requirement involving adequacy of sites and appropriateness of pollution control measures. Subsequent amendments in the Air and Water Acts in 1988 introduced the legal requirements of Consents to Establish. The State Government, in consultation with the Pollution Control Board, under provisions of section 17 of the Air and Water Acts was also entrusted the responsibility of examining the suitability of sites.

The EIA notification was issued on the 27P

thP of January 1994, under the Environmental (Protection) Act (1986)

through which a formal statutory EIA process was established for a number of projects/activities, likely to have significant environmental impacts and health implications and as specified in the schedule. The EIA notification also incorporated provisions for “Public Hearing”.

Page | 252


To further improve and decentralize the EIA process, a fresh EIA notification was issued on September 14P

thP,

2006.The earlier notification of 1994 as amended up to 2004 was superseded through this notification and and is not effective today. According to this notification, 08 different projects/ activities have been prescribed which require prior “Environmental Clearance” (EC) from the Central Government, i.e. MoEF, either through the Central Impact Assessment Authority (Category ‘A’) or the State Environmental Impact Assessment Authority (SEIAA) (Category ‘B’). This clearance is a clearance issued by the MoEF and not a State Government clearance, even if the clearance has been issued by the State Environmental Impact Assessment Authority. The category ‘B’ has been further divided into category ‘B1′( where a project requires to submit EIA report) and ‘B2′ (Project activities which do not require EIA report). All categories ‘A’ and ‘B1′ projects necessarily have to carry out EIA studies along with the “Public Hearing” as per the procedure stipulated in the notification. A project or activity where General Conditions are prescribed to apply, will become a category ‘A’ project if situated within 10 Kms. of interstate boundaries, notified Wild Life Parks and sanctuaries and ecosensitive zones etc. The notification has been revised in 2009 to modify some categories and include a few other amendments. Compliance reports have to be sent every 06 months to the concerned regulatory authority and the concerned Regional Officer of the Ministry of Environment and Forests, Govt. of India. The Clearance as issued is valid for a period of five years from the date of issue to the date of completion of construction or start of production activities.

10 The Wetlands (Conservation and Management) Rules 2010

Recognizing the importance of wetlands as vital parts of the ecosystem and recognizing the fact that many wetlands are seriously threatened; the Central Government identified certain wetlands for conservation and promulgated the Wetlands (Conservation and Management) Rules 2010. The protected wetlands include wetlands under the Ramsar Convention, wetlands in ecologically sensitive areas, wetlands lying within UNESCO World Heritage Sites, wetlands above 2500 meters with an area of more than 5 HA, wetlands below an altitude of 2500 meters with an area equal to or greater than 500 hectares or any other wetlands identified and notified for the purpose of these rules. Reclamation of wetlands, setting up of new industries, handling hazardous chemicals and wastes, using genetically engineered organisms, solid waste dumping, disposal of untreated effluents, constructions of permanent nature within 50 meters or any other adversely impacting activity is prohibited within the wetland. The rules also enlist a series of activities that can be undertaken with the prior approval of the State Government within the wetlands. In terms of water supply and sanitation this would include withdrawal of water or the impoundment, diversion or interruption of water sources within the local catchment area of the wetland ecosystem, treated effluent discharges. The State Government will have to ensure that an E.I.A. as per the E.I.A. Notification of 2006 is conducted before granting permissions. The Central Government on recommendation of the Authority constituted under the rules may permit any of the prohibited activities in the protected wetland. No wetland can be converted to non-wetland use unless the Central Government is satisfied on the recommendation of the Authority that it is essential in public interest to do so. 11 The Hazardous Wastes (Management, Handling And Transboundary Movement) Rules, 2008

The Ministry of Environment and Forests in exercise of the powers conferred by section 6, 8 and 25 of the Environment (Protection) Act, 1986 (29 of 1986) and in supersession of the Hazardous Wastes ( Management and Handling) Rules, 1989 notified the Hazardous Wastes (Management, Handling and Transboundary Movement) Rules, 2008 on the 24th. September, 2008. As per the rules “Hazardous Waste” means any waste which by reason of any of its physical, chemical, reactive, toxic, flammable, explosive or corrosive characteristics causes danger or is likely to cause danger to health or environment, whether alone or when in contact with other wastes or substances. An inclusive list of Hazardous Wastes is provided in the rules under schedules 1, II and III. Any occupier generating hazardous wastes is required to ensure that such wastes are properly handled and disposed off without any adverse effects which may result from such wastes and the occupier shall also be responsible for proper collection, reception, treatment, storage and disposal of these wastes either himself or through the operator of a facility. Every person who is engaged in generation, processing, treatment, package, storage, transportation, use, collection, destruction, conversion, offering for sale, transfer or the like of the hazardous waste is required to obtain an authorization from State Pollution Control Board.

Page | 253


The State Pollution Control Board should not issue an authorization unless satisfied that the operator of a facility or an occupier, as the case may be, possesses appropriate facilities, technical capabilities and equipment to handle hazardous wastes safely. 12 Bio-Medical Waste (Management and Handling) Rules, 1998

With a view to control the indiscriminate disposal of hospital waste/bio medical waste, the Ministry of Environment & Forest, Govt. of India has prescribed rules for Bio Medical Waste Management under the Environment (Protection) Act, 1986.

These rules apply to all persons who generate, collect, receive, store, transport, treat, dispose, or handle bio medical waste in any form and prescribes that it shall be the duty of every occupier of an institution generating bio-medical waste which includes a hospital, nursing home, clinic, dispensary, veterinary institution, animal house, pathological laboratory, blood bank by whatever name called to take all steps to ensure that such waste is handled without any adverse effect to human health and the environment and a proper authorization availed from the Pollution Control Board. It also says that Bio-medical Waste shall not be mixed with other wastes, but segregated at the point of generation. No untreated Bio-medical waste shall be kept stored beyond a period of 48 hours. The State Pollution Control Boards have been designated as the prescribed authority for grant and renewed of applications under this rule. Occupiers of clinics, dispensaries, pathological laboratories, blood banks providing treatment/service to less than 1000 (one thousand) patients per month may not need an authorization.

The urban local bodies, corporation and boards are responsible of providing common disposal/incineration sites if the waste is generated within the jurisdiction of Municipal bodies. For areas outside the municipal bodies it is the responsibility of the generator.

13 Municipal Solid Waste Management and Handling Rules 2000

In view of the serious environmental degradation resulting from the unscientific disposal of MSW, the Ministry of Environment and Forests (MoEF),Government of India, has notified the ‘Municipal Solid Waste (Management and Handling) Rules, 2000’making it mandatory for ULBs to improve the systems of solid waste management as envisaged in the rules within a given time frame ending 31stDecember,2003.

These rules layout procedures for waste collection, segregation, storage, transportation, processing and disposal. Further, the rules mandate that all cities set up suitable waste treatment and disposal facilities by December 31, 2003 or earlier. These rules also specify standards for compost quality, health control & management and closure of land-fills.

Compliance criteria for each and every stage of waste management-collection, segregation at source, transportation, processing, final disposal and quality of leachate and compost etc. are set out in the MSW Rules.

The Rules also establish a system of obtaining authorization from the Pollution Control Boards for disposal of Municipal Solid Wastes.

14 E- Waste (Management and Handling)Rules 2011

The Rules have been published by The Ministry of Environment and Forests and have come into effect from 1stMay 2012. These apply to every producer, consumer or bulk consumer involved in the manufacture, sale, purchase and processing of electrical and electronic equipment or components specified in Schedule-1 of the Rules, collection centre, dismantler and recycler of e-waste and not apply to batteries, covered under the Batteries (Management and Handling) Rules, 2001, Micro and Small Enterprises defined in the Micro, Small and Medium Enterprises Development Act, 2006 and Radio Active Wastes covered under the provisions of Atomic Energy Act, 1962.

Page | 254


The Rules list down the responsibilities of the different stakeholders. It prescribes responsibilities for producers including that of obtaining an Authorization from the Pollution Control Boards. It also fixes responsibilities of the Collection Centers, Bulk consumers, dismantlers, transporters and recyclers who have to ensure that they obtain authorization and registration from the SPCB/PCC and no damage is caused to the environment during storage and transportation of e-waste. 15 EIA Mechanism and Wild Life Clearances

In terms of the application for Environmental Clearance, the footnote to the amendments to Form 1 in the MoEF, GOI notification no. SO 3067(E)dated 01-12-2009 mentions that for projects to be located within 10 km of the National parks, Sanctuaries, Biosphere Reserves, Migratory Corridors of Wild Animals, the project proponent shall submit the map duly authenticated by Chief Wildlife Warden showing these features vis-à-vis the project location and the recommendations or comments of the Chief Wildlife Warden thereon.

The MoEF on 02-12-2009 clarified the process further through its Office Memorandum no. J-11013/41/2006-1A.II(I) dated 02-12-2009 and prescribed that the proposal from environmental angle will be appraised by the respective Expert Appraisal Committee and recommendations made on the same which will be processed by the IA Division and approval obtained from the competent Authority. However, while granting environmental clearance to projects involving forestland, wildlife habitat (core zone of elephant / tiger reserve etc.) and or located within 10 kms of the National Parks/ Wildlife Sanctuaries (at present the distance of 10km has been taken in conformity with the order dated 04-12-2006 in writ petition no. 460 of 2004 in the matter of Goa Foundation Vs Union of India), a specific condition shall be stipulated that the environmental clearance is subject to their obtaining prior clearance from forestry and wildlife angle including clearance from the Standing Committee of the National Board for Wildlife as applicable. Further, it will also be categorically stated in the environment clearance that grant of environmental clearance does not necessarily imply that forestry and wildlife clearance shall be granted to the project. The proposals for forestry and wildlife clearance will be considered by the respective authorities on their merits and decision taken. The investment made in the project, if any, based on environmental clearance so granted, in anticipation of the clearance from forestry and wildlife angle shall be entirely at the cost and risk of the project proponent and Ministry of Environment & Forests shall not be responsible in this regard in any manner.”

Recently the Government of India has prescribed procedures to be followed for Environmental Clearances for all projects falling inside National Parks and Sanctuaries and Conservation Reserves and within 10 km from boundaries of such areas. Clearances for activities inside National Parks, Wildlife Sanctuaries and Conservation Reserves should also have the approvals of the Hon’ble Supreme Court. For activities within 10 km of the boundaries of National Parks, Sanctuaries, etc. a prior clearance of the Standing Committee of the National Board for Wildlife has to be obtained which is generally subject to recommendation of the State Board for Wildlife. The procedures have been prescribed through letter no. F. No. 6-10/2011 WL dated 15-03-2011 issued by the MoEF, Government of India.

With specific reference to the procedure to be followed for activities within 10 kms. from boundaries of National Parks and Wildlife Sanctuaries, the following provisions have been made: “In case the project site is located within the eco-sensitive zone or 10 Kms. in absence of delineation of such a zone from the boundaries of such National Parks, Wildlife Sanctuaries or is an Elephant Reserve / Tiger Reserve and / or important corridor of wildlife movement, the User agency / Project Proponent should seek prior clearance from the Standing Committee of NBWL before seeking Environmental Clearance as per prescribed procedures.The Standing Committee of NBWL has been insisting on the recommendation of the State Board for Wildlife for all proposals, including those falling within 10 kms. from the boundary of National Parks and Wildlife Sanctuary.” The Ministry of Environment and Forest, Government of India has laid down procedures for grant of environmental clearance to projects which involve diversion of forest land vide its office memorandum no. J-11013/41/2006-IA.II(1) dated 09-11-2011.

These procedures prescribe that

1. Application for permission regarding diversion of forest land under the Forest Conservation Act 1980 shall be submitted before considering the proposal for TOR under the E.I.A. notification of 2006. Proof of submission of application shall be submitted at the time of consideration of proposal for TOR by the Expert Appraisal Committee.

Page | 255


2. The EAC shall be informed on the status of applications at the time of the appraisal. It will take cognizance of the involvement of forest land and its status in terms of forestry clearance and make their recommendations on the project on its merit. It shall then be examined by the Authority for grant of environmental clearance.

3. In the event of the Authority appraising grant of environmental clearance the proponent will be informed of the same and given a time of 12 months (extendable to 18) to submit the Stage–I forest clearance. The formal environmental clearance shall be issued after the stage and industry clearance has been so submitted. If the Stage–I forestry clearance is not submitted in the stipulated time, the proposal for E.C. shall be rejected and a fresh application for clearance filed.

16 Wildlife Protection Act, 1972

The Wildlife Protection Act, 1972 is a Central Act of Parliament providing for the protection of wild animals, birds and plants and for matters connected therewith or ancillary or incidental thereto with the view to ensuring the ecological and environmental securities of the country. It extends to the whole of India except the state of Jammu and Kashmir. The act provides for the constitution of a National Board for Wildlife with the Prime Minister as the Chairperson. The National Board shall promote the conservation and development of wildlife and forests by such measures as it thinks fit. The act also provides for the constitution of a State Board for Wildlife to advise the state government in matters connected with the protection of wildlife. The act regulates the hunting of wild animals and protection of specified plants. It also empowers the State Government to notify Sanctuaries, National Parks, and Game Reserves. It has also setup a National Tiger Conservation Authority and regulates trade or commerce in wild animals, animal articles and trophies. Contravention of provision of the act are punishable with imprisonment from 1 to 7 years and / with fine upto Rs. 50 lakhs depending on the nature of offence.

17 Forest Conservation Act, 1980

The Forest Conservation Act, 1980 is a Central Act of Parliament with a view to provide for the conservation of forest and for matters connected therewith or ancillary or incidental thereto. The act extends to the whole of India except the state of Jammu and Kashmir. Section 2 of the act makes a provision of a prior approval of the Central Government necessary before a State Government or any other authority issues direction for dereservation of reserved forests (which have been reserved under the Indian Forest Act 1927), use of forest land for non – forest purpose, assigning forest land by way of lease or otherwise to any private person or to any authority, corporation, agency or any other organization not owned, managed or controlled by the government and clear felling of naturally grown trees. The term “forest land” mentioned in Section 2 of the Act refers to reserved forest, protected forest or any area recorded as forest in the government records. Lands which are notified undersection4 of the Indian Forest Act would also come within the purview of the Forest Conservation Act 1980. The Supreme Court has also held that “forest” as understood in the dictionary sense would also be included under “forest land”. The term “forest” shall not be applicable to the plantation raised on private land except notified private forest. Tree falling in such plantation would however be governed by state acts and rules. The term “tree” will have the same meaning as defined in section 2 of the Indian Forest Act 1927.

Appeals against orders made under section 2 of the forest conservation act on or after the commencement of the National Green Tribunal Act 2010 lie with the National Green Tribunal. The procedures along with formats for obtaining clearances under the act have been prescribed under the Forest Conservation Rules 2003 and 2004 which also has constituted a forest advisory committee and regional empowered committee. The regional empowered committee shall decide the proposal involving diversion of forest land upto 40 ha. Proposals involving forest land of more than 40 ha. and all proposals relating to mining and encroachments irrespective of the area of forest land involved, shall be forwarded by the concerned State Government / Union Territory along its recommendations to

Page | 256


the MoEF Government of India. Non – compliance of provisions of section 2 of the act shall be punishable with simple imprisonment for a period which may extend upto 15 days.

18 The Indian Forest Act, 1927

The Indian Forest Act, 1927 was an act to consolidate the then existing laws relating to forest, the transit of forest products and duties that can be levied on “Forest Product” as defined in Section 2 (iv) (a) and (b) of the act. The act deals with reserved forest, village forest, protected forest, control over forests and lands not being property of government, the duty on timber and other forest produce, regulation transit of forest products, collection of timber, penalties and procedures, cattle – trespass, forest officers and other miscellaneous provisions.

This act does not lay down a specific definition for forests. The act establishes three categories of forests, reserve forest, protected forest and village forest. The reserved forests (section 3 to 27 of the Act of 1927) can be notified by the State Government on any forest land or waste land to which the government has ownership or right. To be categorized as a reserved forest, the land must be forest land or waste land in the absence of which the notification could be quashed. Section 26 of the Indian Forest Act 1927 prohibits a number of activities including making fresh clearings, tree felling, lopping, burning, grazing, quarrying, manufacturing activities, hunting, shooting, etc. in the forest. Violation of provisions of Section 26 specifically with regards to creating fire, felling, girdling, lopping, etc. of trees, quarrying and manufacturing operations or clearing breaking up of any land for cultivation is punishable with imprisonment for a term which may extend to two years or with fine which may extend to Rs. 20,000 but which shall not be less than Rs. 5,000.

For other offenses under Section 26 an imprisonment for a term which may extend to 6 months or with fine which may extend to Rs. 1,000 or with both and on the second and every subsequent conviction for the same offense, with imprisonment which may extend to 6 months or with fine which may extend to Rs. 2,000 or with both is prescribed. It also provides for adjudication of forest rights, uses by local people as allowed by forest officer, appeals and denotification. Section 25 specifically empowers the forest officer to stop any public or private way or water coarse in reserved forest. The act also provides for issuing notification regarding appointment of forest settlement officer to adjudicate rights and granting permissions for activities and claims.

Section 28 provides for assigning rights of reserved forests or protected forests or any forest belonging to the state government to any village community and provisions relating to reserved forest, protected forest or forest belonging to the government shall apply. Such forests are called village forests.

Section 29 provides for the notification of protected forests. Protected forests are also notified on forest land or waste land. The state government under provision of Section 30 may declare any tree or class of trees in a protected forest to be reserved, it can also declare any portion of a protected forest as closed for a term not exceeding 30 years during which the rights of private persons shall be suspended provided that alternate rights are available in the remainder of the forest. It can also prohibit specified activities within the area Violation of prohibited activities in protected areas as prescribed in Section 30 and 32 are punishable offences liable to be punished with imprisonment for a term which may extend to 2 years or with a fine which may extend to Rs. 5,000 or with both and on the second and every subsequent conviction for the same offence, with imprisonment for a term which may extend to 2 years and with fine which may extend to Rs. 10,000.

The state government also has the powers to regulate or prohibit activities in any forest or waste land not being the property of the government after providing suitable opportunity to the owner of such forest or land.

19 The Biological Diversity Act 2002

The Biological Diversity Act 2002 is also a Central Act of Parliament aiming to provide for conservation of biological diversity, sustainable use of its components and a fair and equitable sharing of the benefits arising out of the use of biological resources, knowledge and matter connected therewith and thereto. It provides for a system of prior approvals of the National Biodiversity Authority on application for intellectual property rights or patents on biological research or information. It also regulates the transfer of any biological resource or knowledge and it provides for the establishment of a State Biodiversity Board.

Page | 257


20 World Bank Safeguard Policies

The World Bank has formulated 10 environmental, social and legal safeguard policies. Amongst the Environmental Safeguard Policies, Operational Policy (O.P.) / Bank Procedure 4.01: Environmental Assessment is an umbrella policy for the Banks Environmental ‘Safeguard Policies’ which among others also include: Natural Habitats, Pest Management, Physical Cultural resources and Safety dams.

20.1 Operational Policy 4.01: Environmental Assessment 1999 (Revised February 2011)

This policy is used by the World Bank to identify, avoid and mitigate the potential negative environmental impacts associate with the Bank lending operations. In the World Bank operations, the purpose of Environmental assessment is to improve decision making to ensure that project options under consideration are sound and sustainable and that potentially affected people have been properly consulted. The policy contains the following subsets:

a) Operational Policy 4.01: Environmental Assessments, April 2012. b) Operational Policy 4.01; Annexure A: Definitions. February 2011. c) Operational Policy 4.01; Annexure B: Content of an Environmental Assessment report for category ‘A’

project 1999. d) Operational Policy 4.01; Annexure C: Environmental Management Plan 1999. e) Bank Procedure 4.01: Environmental Assessment, May 2011. f) Bank Procedure 4.01; Annexure A: Application of Environmental Assessment to dam and reservoir projects,

May 2011. g) Bank Procedure 4.01; Annexure B: Application of Environmental Assessment to projects involving pest

management Environmental Assessment, May 2011.

The Environmental Assessment Policy provides for screening of projects. A project is classified as category ‘A’ if it is likely to have significant adverse environmental impacts that are sensitive, diverse or unprecedented. This project may impact an area broader than the site or facilities subject to physical work. Category ‘A’ projects the borrower is supposed to prepare an EIA or a suitably comprehensive regional or sectoral Environmental Assessment. Category ‘B’ projects are these projects where the potential adverse environmental impacts on human populations or environmentally important areas – including wetland, forests, grasslands and other natural habitats – are less adverse than those of category ‘A’ projects. These impacts are site specific; very few of them are irreversible and in most cases mitigatory measures can be designed more readily than for category ‘A’ projects. The scope of Environmental Assessment for category ‘B’ projects is generally narrower than that of the category ‘A’ projects. A project is classified as category ‘C’ if it is likely to have minimal or no adverse environmental impacts. Such projects only involve screening. All category ‘A’ and ‘B’ projects involve consultations with project affected groups and local NGO’ P

sP about the

project’s environmental aspects and lakes their views into account. For category ‘A’ projects this consultation is organized at least twice by the borrower. 20.2 Operational Policy 4.04: Natural Habitats

This policy seeks to ensure that the World Bank supported infrastructure and other developmental activities take into account the conservation of biodiversity, as well as the numerous environmental services and products which habitats provide to human society. The policy prohibits Bank support for projects which would lead to the significant loss or degradation of any critical natural habitat which include legally protected, officially proposed for protection and unprotected but of known high conservation value habitats. In other non critical areas, projects can only be considered when there are no feasible alternatives to achieve the projects substantial overall net benefits and acceptable mitigation measures such as compensatory protected areas are included within the project. The policy has the following sub components: Operational Policy 4.04: Natural Habitats 2001 Operational Policy 4.04: Annexure A: Definition 2001 Bank Procedure 4.04: Natural Habitats 2001

Page | 258


If the Environmental Appraised indicates that a project would significantly convert or degrade natural habitats, the project would include mitigation measures acceptable to the World Bank. The Bank also expects the borrower to take into account the views, roles and rights of groups including local non-governmental organizations and local communities affected by Bank financed projects. Significant conversion or degradation of critical or other natural habitats classifies the project as category A. Projects otherwise involving natural habitats are classified as category ‘A’ or ‘B’ depending on the degree of their ecological impacts. 20.3 Operational Policy / Bank Procedure 4.36 Forests

This policy aims to reduce deforestation, enhance the environmental contribution of forested areas, promote afforestation, reduce poverty and encourage economic development. The bank is proposing a new ‘forest strategy’ to guide future Bank involvement with forests

• Harnessing the potential of forests to reduce poverty. • Integrating forests in sustainable economic development • Protecting vital local and global environmental sources and forest values.

The forest policy has also to be read in conjunction with Natural Habitats; Operational Policy 4.04. The policy has the following components:

• Operational Policy 4.36, Forests 2002 • Operational Policy 4.36, Annexure A: Definition, 2002 • Bank Procedure 4.36: Forests 2002

The objectives of the Forest Policy are to assist borrowers to harness the potential of forests to reduce poverty in a sustainable manner, integrate forests effectively into sustainable economic development and protect the vital local and global environmental services and values of forests. The Bank does not finance projects that in its opinion would involve significant conversion of critical forest areas or related critical natural habitats. For areas that are not critical, adequate mitigation measures have to be incorporated. The Bank also does not finance projects that contravene applicable international environmental agreements. A project with the potential for conversion or degradation of natural forests or other natural habitats that is likely to have significant adverse environmental impacts that are sensitive, diverse or unprecedented is classified as category A projects, otherwise involving forests or other natural habitats are classified as category B, C or F, depending on the type, location, sensitivity and scale of the project and the nature and magnitude of its environmental impacts. 20.4 Operational Policy 4.09: Pest Management

Rural development and health sector projects have to avoid using harmful pesticides. If pesticides have to be used in crop protection or in the fight against vector have diseases, the Bank funded project should include a Pest Management Plan (PMP) prepared by the borrower either as a standalone document or as part of the Environmental Assessment. In appraising a project that will involve pest management, the Bank assesses the capacity of the country’s regulatory framework and institution to promote and support safe, effective and environmentally sound pest management both in Agriculture and Public health. The Bank has also prescribed criteria for pesticide selection and use. 20.5 Operational Policy 4.11: Physical Cultural Resources 2006

Cultural resources are important as sources of valuable scientific and historical information, as assets for economic and social development and as integral parts of a people cultural identity and practices. The loss of such resources is irreversible but fortunately it is often avoidable. The objective of the policy is to avoid; or mitigate adverse impacts on cultural resources from development projects that the World Bank finances. It has two components:

• Operational Policy 4.11: Physical Cultural Resources, 2006. • Bank Procedure 4.11: Physical Cultural Resources, 2006.

Page | 259


The borrower addresses impacts on Physical Cultural Resources in projects, proposed for Bank Financing, as an integral part of the Environmental Appraisal process. Projects are classified during the screening process as Category A or B. As an integral part of the Environmental Appraisal process the borrower develops a physical cultural management plan which is consistent with the country’s overall policy framework and National Legislation. Physical Cultural Resources have to be included in the baseline data collection phase of the Environmental Assessment. The consultative process for the physical / cultural resources component normally includes relevant project affected groups, concerned government authorities and relevant non – governmental organizations. The bank procedures prescribe Screening, T.O.R. for E.I.A., Consultation, baseline and impact assessment. Mitigating measures, capacity assessment and Management plan. 20.6 Operational Policy 4.37: Safety of Dams 2001

The Bank guideline on safety of dams requires that experienced and competent persons design and supervise construction and that the borrower adopts and implements dam safety measures throughout the project cycle. The policy also applies to existing dams where they influence the performance of a project. In this case a dam safety assessment should be carried out and necessary additional dam safety measures implemented. The policy has three components:

• Operational Policy 4.37: Safety of Dams, 2001 • Bank Procedures 4.37: Safety of Dams, 2001 • Bank Procedures 4.37; Annexure A: Dam Safety Reports: Content and Timing, 2001

The policy requires that the borrower adopt and implement certain dam safety measures for the design, bill tendering, construction, operation and maintenance of the dam and associated works. Dams smaller than 15 meters in height are classified as ‘small’ and dams more than 15 meters high as ‘large’ but dams under 10 meters high are regarded as large dams if they are expected to become large dams during the operation of the facility. Dams that are between 10 and 15 meters are also regarded large if they present special design complexities e.g. flood handling, toxicity management, high sensitivity etc. Different procedures are prescribed for small and large dams. For small dams, generic dam safety measures designed by qualified Engineers are sufficient but detailed plans have to be drawn up for large dams. Bank projects involving dams are processed according to the procedures set forth in B.P. 10.00. Investment leading Identification to Board Presentation. Dam Safety reports may involve plans for construction, supervision and quality assurance, instrumentation plan, operation and maintenance plan, emergency procedures plan.

Page | 260


ANNEXURE-32

DISEASES, AILMENTS AND DISABILITIES CAUSED BY POLLUTANTS

Page | 261


Annexure-32 DISEASES, AILMENTS AND DISABILITIES CAUSED BY POLLUTANTS

Sl. No. Pollutant Effects

1. Zinc (Zn) Zinc is essential e lement f o r humans, a n i m a l an d p lants. It is also an important cell component in s e v e r a l m e t a l l o e n z y m e s . Infants need 3–5 mg/day, adult males 15 mg/day, pregnant and lactating females 20–25 mg Zn/day. However, heavy doses of Zn salts (165 mg) for 26 days causes vomiting, renal damage, cramps, etc.

2. Copper (Cu) Excess of Cu in human body (more than 470 mg) is toxic, may cause hypertension, sporadic fever, uremia, coma. Copper also produces pathological c h a n g e s in brain tissue. However, Cu is an important cell component in several metalloenzymes. Lack of Cu causes anaemia, growth inhibition and blood circulation problem.

3. Barium (Ba) Excess of Ba (more than 100 mg) in human body may cause excessive salivation, colic, vomiting, diarrhoea, tremors*, paralysis of muscles or nervous system, damage to heart and blood vessels.

4. Iron (Fe) It is one of the essential mineral for humans and animals. Degree of absorption depends upon solubility and stability of compound. It is a component of blood cells and liveral metalloenzymes. However, more than 10 mg per kg of body weight causes rapid respiration and pulse rates, congestion of blood vessels, hypertension and drowsiness. It increases hazard of pathogenic organisms, as many of them require Fe for their growth.

5. Cadmium (Cd) Cd is very toxic, 50 mg may cause vomiting, diarrhoea, abdominal pains, loss of consciousness. It t a k e s 5–10 y e a r s for chronic Cd intoxication. During first phase, discolouration of teeth, loss of sense of smell, mouth dryness occurs. Afterwards it may cause decrease of red blood cells, impairment of bone marrow, lumber pains, disturbance in calcium met abolism, sof tening of bones, fr actures, skelet al deformations, damage of kidney, hypertension, tumor formation, heart disease, impaired reproductive function, genetic mutation, etc.

6. Mercury (Hg) Mercury is very toxic. Excess mercury in human body (more than 100 mg) may cause headache, abdominal pain, diarrhoea, destruction of haemoglobin, tremors*, very bad effects on cerebral functions and central nervous system, paralysis, inactivates functional proteins, damage of renal tissues, hyper coagulability of blood, mimamata disease, and even death. It may cause impairment of vision and muscles and even coma. It disturbs reproductive and endocrine system. Also causes insomnia, memory loss, gum inflammation, loosening of teeth, loss of appetite, etc.

7. Lead (Pb) More than 400 mg of lead in human body can cause brain damage, vomiting, loss of appetite, convulsions, uncoordinated body movements, helplessly amazed state, coma. It i s retained in

Page | 262


liver, kidney, brain, muscle, soft tissues, bones. Leads to high rate of miscarriages, affects skin, and respiratory system, damages kidney, liver and brain cells. Disturbs endocrine system, causes anaemia, and long term exposure may cause even death.

8. Arsenic (As) Poisonous to fishes, animals and humans. Greater than 25 mg of arsenic causes vomiting, diarrhoea, nausea, irritation of nose and throat, abdominal pain, skin eruptions inflammations and even death. It binds globulin of blood haemoglobin in erythrocytes. May cause cancer of skin, lungs and liver, chromosomal aberration and damage, gangrene, loss of hearing, injury to nerve tissue, liver and kidney damage. Minor symptoms of As poisoning, weight loss, hair loss, nausea, depression, fatigue, white lines across toe nails and finger nails.

9. Vanadium (V) It is very toxic, may cause paralysis.

10. Silver (Ag) Causes pathological change in kidney, liver and may even damage kidney. May cause Argyria (discolouration of skin). Effects mucous membranes and eyes. In high doses, it may be fatal to humans.

11. Radioactive materials/ metals/substances

These generally cause ‘Gene’ mutation, ionization of body fluids, chromosomnal mutations and cancers. Destroy body cell tissue, adversely effects reproductive system. When mother is exposed to radiation during pregnancy, it causes severe mental retardation and leukaemia in infants. Radioactive metals like heavy metals are nephrotoxic and damage kidneys.

12. Fluoride Excess fluoride intake in body results in progressive crippling scourge (sponging)/fluorosis of bones, teeth. May cause metabolic alternations in soft tissues and their functional mechanism.

13. Selenium (Se) Signs of Se poisoning (more than 4 mg) are fever, nervousness, vomiting, falling of blood pressure, causes damage to liver, kidney and spleen, loss of nails and hair, causes blindness to animals. Cats are most susceptible. It affects enzyme systems and interfere with sulphur metabolism. It can cause growth inhibition, skin discolouration, bad teeth, psychological problem, gastro intestinal problems, but trace amount of Se is protective against poisoning by Hg, Cd, Ag.

14. Chromium (Cr) Any chromium compound is toxic but haxavalent Cr greater than 70 mg is very toxic. It causes cancer, anuria, nephritis, gastrointestinal ulceration, perforation in partition of nose. It penetrates cell membrane and badly affects central nervous system. Causes respiratory trouble, lung tumors when inhaled. May cause complications during pregnancy. It has adverse effects on aquatic life. Trace amount of Cr is essential for normal glucose, protein and fat metabolism and hence it is a essential trace element in diet.

15. Manganese (Mn) Mn is essential for mammals but in concentr ation greater than 100 ppm, is toxic, and causes growth retardation, fever, sexual impotence, muscles fatigue, eye blindness.

16. Cobalt (Co) High dose (27 mg or above) can cause paralysis, diarrhoea, low blood pressure, lung irritation, bone defects.

17. Nickel (Ni) More than 30 mg may cause changes in muscle, brain, lungs, liver, kidney and can also cause cancer, tremor*, paralysis and even death.

Page | 263


18. Boron (B) Essential for plant growth in traces. Harmful to crops and affects metabolic activities of plants in higher concentration. Affects central nervous system.

19. Alkalinity and Acidity Permissible range of pH value if violated may cause health problems to human and animals and loss of productivity in agriculture.

20. Phosphate and nitrates Soil nutrient and not toxic in low concentration. Deplete oxygen by excess Algae production-giving bad odour and taste of water and detrimental to aquatic life. They are toxic for human and animal life if concentration is beyond permissible limits. Nitrates also cause cynosis or blue body disease.

21. Chlorine (Cl) Destroys plant and aquatic life and is a biocide.

22. Sulphide Gives bad odour, toxic to many aquatic organisms and animals.

23. Salinity Very bad for soils which retain salinity. Destroys agricultural land.

24. Oil/Grease/Oil Sludge Petroleum product in general are very harmful for soils, aquatic life, animal, human and plant life. They are very toxic. Agricultural land may suffer accumulation of oily waste affecting aeration and fertility. Many constituents of oily sludge are even carcinogenic and potent immunotoxicants.

25. Surfactants and detergents They are toxic and harmful for aquatic life, animals and humans. Inhibit self-purification of water.

26. Phenols Toxic and impart objectionable odour. Also subdue plant growth generally. Some phenols (nitrophenyl etc) are carcinogens.

27. Cyanides Cyanide poses a serious health hazard. Apart from acute toxicity and chronic toxicity, it leads to development of iodine deficiency disorders.

28. Pesticides/Insecticides Highly poisonous for humans and animals. Also they lower seed germination, plays a role in development of Parkinson’s disease, destruction of nerve cells in certain regions of brain resulting in loss of dopamine which is used by nerve cells to communicate with brain. Some of these are physical poisons, some are protoplasmic poisons causing liver damage, some are respiratory poisons and some are nerve poisons.

29. Aluminium (Al) Toxic specially for brain, sometimes may lead to Alzheimer’s disease in humans.

Diseases Due To Bacterial Pollution of Water

Sl. No.

Diseases Bacteria I Virus I Protozoa I Worm

1. Water borne diseases: Bacterial: Typhoid Cholera Paratyphoid Gastroenteritis Bacterial dysentery

Salmonella typhi Vibrio cholerae Salmonella parayphi Enterotoxigenic Escherichia coli

Page | 264


Viral: Infectious hepatitis Poliomycetis Diarrhoea Other enteric diseases (Protozoan): Amoebic dysentery Other* intestinal illness

Variety of Escherichia coli

Hepatitis—A virus Polio virus Rota-virus, Norwalk agent, other virus Echono-virus, Coxsackie-virus

Ent-amoeba hystolitica Protozoa Glardia sp. and Cryptosporidium sp.

2. Water-washed diseases: Sabies Trachoma Bacillary dysentery

Various skin fungus species Trachoma infecting eyes E. coli*

3. Water based diseases: Schistosomiasis Guinea worm

Schistosoma sp. Guinea worm

4. Infection through water related insect vectors: Sleeping sickness Malaria

Trypanosoma through tsetse fly Plasmodium through Anaphelis

5. Infections due to defective sanitationI polluted water: Hookworms

Hookworms, Ascaris

Page | 265


ANNEXURE-33

IMPACT OF MINING ON THE ENVIRONMENT OF JHARKHAND

Page | 266


Annexure-33 IMPACT OF MINING ON THE ENVIRONMENT OF JHARKHAND

1. Different Case studies: Sukinda mines

Sukinda chromite valley is one of the largest chromite deposits of the country and produces nearly 8% of chromite ore. Leachate study clearly shows that the soil lying in the vicinity of mine waste dump shows highest concentration

of Cr+6.

2. Effect of deteriorating environment on the communities residing near mining areas:

The health hazards, degeneration of the health conditions of the people especially tribal women and children and water contamination is one of the most serious impacts of coal mining in Jharkhand and other mining in like stone mining, uranium mining etc.

Radioactive wastes enters village in Jadugoda in Jharkhand State.

Owing to the record 338.1 mm rainfall on June 17, 2008 in Jharkhand State of India, maximum in the past six decades, radioactive wastes from the tailing pond of Turamdih uranium mines on the outskirts of the Jamshedpur city has reportedly spilled over into the village ponds, wells and fields. According to the sources, the spillover was obvious due to torrential rain as there is no way to divert the water flowing into the village.

Health Impacts Due To Uranium Mining In Jadugoda:

Exposure to nuclear radiation is affecting the health of miners and villagers at Jadugoda in Singhbhum district, which is India’s first uranium mine. Jadugoda, literally meaning "magic land", intrigues an outsider. A health survey carried out by the State Health Department, to investigate the radiation effects, found 31 out of 712 people to be suffering from health disorders, which may be due to exposure to radiation. The diseases include blood in cough, ulcer, swelling of bone joints, asthma, eye problems, etc.

Case study of Coalfield

Jharkhand is an area of abundant coalmines. Most of the coalmines are situated in Hazaribag, Chatra, Palamau, Rajmahal, Dhanbad and Ranchi district. Mighty Damodar River and its tributaries flow through these coalmines.

Health impact due to stone mining in and around Ranchi city. Experience of miners on health condition

They always complain about cough and cold. Malaria is very common in the mining areas.

Case study of Roro asbestos mining area:

Roro hills is located about 20 kilometers west of Chaibasa, the district headquarters of West Singhbum, Jharkhand.

The region has had an active history of mining operations for about seven decades starting with the mining of magnetite. Roro hills were mined for chromite and asbestos by big industrial houses.

Page | 267


Interview with ex-workers from the Roro mines from Roro and Tilaisud villages revealed that most of them had suffered or are suffering from low back pains, blindness or severely reduced vision, and respiratory illnesses.

3. KEY IMPACTS ON FOREST:

To create new area for mining forest cover has been removed. In some areas especially in Tupudana area in Ranchi district no trace of forest are seen. 3.1 Major mining industries responsible for deterioration of Environment:

Among the above mentioned minerals, coal, bauxite, iron-ore, asbestos and uranium mining are more responsible for deterioration of local environment in Jharkhand State of India. Mining projects, in general, give rise to potential environmental impacts and in scoping exercise, the following environmental components (attributes) which are usually impacted as result of above listed activities must be considered : • Landuse • Landscape • Socio-economic • Water resources/hydrology • Water quality • Air and dust • Noise and vibrations Ecology Flora & fauna: Risk/hazards • Public health and safety

3.2 Anticipated Environmental Impacts

Anticipated (predicted) environmental impacts should be based on the experience gained in similar type of mines under similar conditions. Scientific data from the working mines to substantiate the anticipation shall also be furnished. The major anticipated impacts generally encountered in various components of development (as already listed in scoping) are summarised below. (a) Land use The major direct impacts on existing land use during the pre-mining phase are the removal of vegetation and resettlement of displaced population. There may also be landuse changes with respect to agriculture, fisheries, recreation sites, housing, forestry areas etc. Land reclamation/restoration of mined out lands may give rise to enhanced beneficial land use. (b) Landscape There exists major environment impacts due to landscape disruption particularly visuals (unsighty huge dumps, voids, mine structures, subsidence, mine fires etc.). During mining and post mining phases drastic changes in landscape with landforms take place. (c) Major associated impacts

Page | 268


Major associated impacts are soil-erosion, loss of top soil, change in complete geology, creation of huge dumps & voids, disposal of wastes, deforestation etc Land reclamation/restoration may provide better landuse and landscape with considerations to environmental management (d) Socio-economic

The major beneficial impacts of mining projects are change in employment & income opportunity, infrastructure, community development, communication, transport, educational, commercial, recreational and medical facilities. The major adverse impact, however, is the displacement and rehabilitation/resettlement of affected people including change in culture, heritage & related features. The crime and illicit activities also prop-up due to sudden economic development of the area. (e) Hydrology/water resources

The major adverse impacts are changes in ground water flow patterns, lowering of water table, changes in the hydrodynamic conditions of river/underground recharge basings, reduction in volumes of subsurface discharge to water bodies/ rivers, disruption & diversion of water courses/drainages, contamination of water bodies, affecting the yield of water from bore wells and dugwells, land subsidence etc. (f) Water quality

The major impacts are water pollution due to erosion, oil & grease, contamination of water bodies due to discharge of mine water/effluents, pollution from domestic & sewage effluents, sedimentation of rivers and other stored water bodies, leachates from wash-off from dumps, solid waste disposal sites, broken rocks, toxic wastes, salinity from mine fires, acid mine drainage etc. (g) Air Quality

The major adverse impact is the high intensity of dust nuisance problems such as visuals, soiling and degradation of materials etc. The major sources activities of dust emissions are drilling & blasting, overburden removal, haul roads, coal extraction, transportation, reclamation activities and also erosion from dumps, coal yards, waste disposal areas. Other impacts are gaseous emissions, exhaust from HEMM & other transport vehicles. (h) Noise and Vibrations

The major adverse impacts during pre-mining and mining phases are generation of obnoxious levels of noise & vibrations which also spread in neighbouring communities. The other impacts are occupational health hazards, damage to structures, disruption in wildlife etc. (i) Ecology (flora & fauna)

The major adverse impacts due to pre-mining and mining phases are loss of habitat, biodiversity, rare flora & fauna, fisheries & other aquatic life, migration of wildlife and overall disruption of the ecology of the area. During post-mining phase after land restoration, ecology may effectively improve. (j) Risks and hazards

Risks and hazards arise mainly from blasting and mine occupational activities and are well established. Blasting may effect the mine workers as well as people residing in the vicinity of mine and dependent upon the type & quantity of explosives used, pit geology, topography and confinement of the blast. Various respirable diseases due to occupational hazards associated with mining operations are quite infamous. Workers are also put in various risky jobs in typified mine works.

Page | 269


There also exists risks and hazards of mine accidents (roof fall, explosions, inundations, rock bursts etc.). Vibrations and fly rock as a result of blasting and rock fragmentation give rise to serious risk of accidents and damage to structures. (k) Significance of Impacts

After anticipation (prediction) of impacts, it is necessary to assess their significance. The assessment needs to reflect the particular local characteristics of the area proposed for the mining project. Some of the issues associated with the mining projects may have profound impacts on local people and their views need to be considered to avoid complications regarding the R&R package, employment opportunities, public health & safety etc. Criteria which are useful in assessment of impacts may be based on the following: • Legal requirements/environmental standards • Guidelines covering the design and construction of new infrastructure, R&R packages, compensation etc. • Need for providing mitigation measures including guidelines for the reclamation of mined out areas, dumps and other disused areas. 4. IMPACT OF DEFORESTATION

Mining is one of the major causes of deforestation and forest degradation, as commercially valuable minerals are often found in the ground beneath forests. Large-scale, open-pit mining operations can result in significant deforestation through forest clearing in order to access mineral deposits and to open remote forest areas for miners. Infrastructure built for transient mine workers—roads, tunnels, and dams—also has an Community Protests against Mining Companies Civil society and local communities in Asia have been actively protesting mining activities that cause water pollution and illnesses. Large quantities of timber are often used as supports in mine shafts and in tunnels, in the case of underground mines, and as fuel for operating mines. This link is a major concern for India, where forest lands have been increasingly designated as mines in the last decade. Between 1980 and 1997, the Ministry of Environment and Forest (MoEF) only granted forest clearances for 317 mines, which destroyed a total of 34,527 hectares of forest area. By contrast, from 1998 to 2005, the ministry cleared 881 mining projects in forest areas, destroying 60,476 hectares of forest area. In 1984, the Government of India introduced the Damodar Valley Project to control the flooding by using the water to generate hydro and thermal power. Industrialization came to valley promising a better future with no floods and electricity for all. A little over 25 years have passed and it has now become one of the most polluted river basins in the world. The Damodar river flows across some of the most mineral rich parts of the country – the Chota Nagpur plateau with its reserves of mica, bauxite, copper, iron ore, lime stone and coal. It had the raw materials that laid the foundation of India’s industrial revolution. The majority of the coal consumed in the country is mined from the region. The land has become the base for hundreds of industrial units. With mines, washeries, furnaces and the infrastructure, coal spawned an industry of its own. Setting up a coal mine destroys the immediate landscape. There is large scale deforestation and the quality of the land and soil is irreparably affected. The mine renders it unfit for any other purpose. The altering of land depletes the ground water. Dust and coal particles released in the mining and processing of the coal pollutes the air. They are a health hazard known to cause severe respiratory ailments. The gases that emanate from the mines are greenhouse gases that contribute towards global warming. The toxic drainage and loose soil not only pollutes the nearby sources of water but also finds its way to the ground water reserves damaging the quality of water. Apart from deforestation being largely associated with mining, particularly in the context of Jharkhand, there are many more reasons for occurrence of deforestation and far more implications than just uprooting of trees, like: 4.1 Atmospheric

Page | 270


Deforestation is a contributor to global warming, and is often cited as one of the major causes of the enhanced greenhouse effect. Rainforests are widely believed by laymen to contribute a significant amount of world's oxygen. Forests are also able to extract carbon dioxide and pollutants from the air, thus contributing to biosphere stability

4.2 Hydrological

Deforestation reduces the content of water in the soil and groundwater as well as atmospheric moisture. The dry soil leads to lower water intake for the trees to extract. Deforestation reduces soil cohesion, so that erosion, flooding and landslides ensue. Shrinking forest cover lessens the landscape's capacity to intercept, retain and UtranspireU precipitation. Instead of trapping precipitation, which then percolates to groundwater systems, deforested areas become sources of surface water runoff, which moves much faster than subsurface flows. That quicker transport of surface water can translate into flash flooding and more localized floods than would occur with the forest cover. Trees, and plants in general, affect the water cycle significantly: • their canopies intercept a proportion of Uprecipitation U, which is then evaporated back to the atmosphere

(canopy interception); • their litter, stems and trunks slow down surface runoff; • their roots create UmacroporesU – large conduits – in the soil that increase Uinfiltration U of water; • they contribute to terrestrial evaporation and reduce Usoil moistureU via Utranspiration U; • their Ulitter U and other organic residue change soil properties that affect the capacity of soil to store water. • their leaves control the Uhumidity U of the atmosphere by UtranspiringU. 99% of the water absorbed by the roots

moves up to the leaves and is transpired.

4.3 Soil

Undisturbed forests have a very low rate of soil loss, approximately 2 metric tons per square kilometer (6 short tons per square mile. Deforestation generally increases rates of soil erosion, by increasing the amount of runoff and reducing the protection of the soil from tree litter. Tree roots bind soil together, and if the soil is sufficiently shallow they act to keep the soil in place by also binding with underlying bedrock. Tree removal on steep slopes with shallow soil thus increases the risk of landslides, which can threaten people living nearby. 4.4 Biodiversity

Deforestation on a human scale results in decline in biodiversity and on a natural global scale is known to cause the extinction of many species. The removal or destruction of areas of forest cover has resulted in a degraded environment with reduced biodiversity. Forests support biodiversity, providing habitat for wildlife; moreover, forests foster medicinal conservation 4.5 Economic impact

Damage to forests and other aspects of nature could halve living standards for the world's poor and reduce global GDP. Historically, utilization of forest products, including timber and fuel wood, has played a key role in human societies, comparable to the roles of water and cultivable land. Today, developed countries continue to utilize timber for building houses, and wood pulp for paper. In developing countries almost three billion people rely

Page | 271

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Transpiration

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Precipitation_(meteorology)

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Macropore

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Infiltration_(hydrology)

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Water_content


http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Plant_litter

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Humidity



on wood for heating and cooking. P

]PThe forest products industry is a large part of the economy in both developed and

developing countries.

Page | 272

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Deforestation


ANNEXURE-34

THE PRIMARY VILLAGE LEVEL DATA – SALIENT FEATURES & ANALYSIS

Page | 273


Annexure-34 THE PRIMARY VILLAGE LEVEL DATA – SALIENT FEATURES & ANALYSIS

2.1.1 Regional Analysis of Data of Palamu, Garwa And Giridih

a. Introduction

This survey was conducted in January 2013 in about 120 sample households in the sample villages of Palamu {Kankari (Existing) & Nimia, Sudna (Proposed)}, Garwa {Kalyanpur (proposed), Pratappur, Darmi, Patsa, Gidha (Existing)} and Giridih (Bagodar (existing), Gadi (proposed). The region is primarily sandy soil with rocky and hilly terrain. b. Water Supply

The graph below shows that HPs are prominent mean of water supply in the region followed by open well. It indicates that water supply in the region in dependent on groundwater. However in Palamu surface water is being used as water supply source. Cases are observed that few villagers use both HP and open wells for drinking water supply. Thus those villages are counted in both the options. The graph explains that the water supply through panchayat taps is limited in only villages. In Nimia and Sudna, few villagers use water from taps of adjoining panchayat/town.

c. Type of Scheme

Water supply schemes are generally SVS except in case of proposed villages of Palamu (Nimia, Sudna) and existing water supply scheme in Garwa (Pratappur, Patsa, Gidha and Darmi). d. Scheme Sources

More than 60% population in the region is dependent on hand pumps for water supply except for Bagodar village in Palamu where more than 80% population consumes water from OHT. e. Quantity of Water

Water quantity is perceived to be good in Garwa and Giridih but very poor in Palamu. Summer seasons are extremely water deficit. f. Quality of Water

Visibly water quality is good but presence of fluoride and iron is prominent in Palamu and Garwa. Iron is main cause of water contamination in ground water in Giridih. Thus water supply schemes should address these issues. g. Water Treatment and Handling Practices

Except for Bagodar in Palamu, more than 50% villagers do not resort to any of water treatment options. Bagodar being close to a big city and grand trunk road is supplied with water from OHT. This water is generally treated with sand filters and further the villagers are economically capable to purchase sand filters at domestic level.

0%20%40%60%80%

100%120%

Gad

i

Kank

ari

Kaly

anpu

r

Perc

ent U

sers

Sample Villages

Sources of Drinking Water Supply

Tap

Hand pump

Open well

Page | 274


Among handling practices, most of the villagers employ lids to cover the water storage pots. Mugs are generally used to take out water for any purpose.

h. Sanitation

h1. Latrine Ownership

Nearly 50% of the sampled villagers defecate in open areas in the region. However as high as 95% in Gadi resort to open defecation. These figures indicate the lack of ISLs in the region. Bagodar being the only village where more than 90% villagers use ISLs.

h2. Latrine Usage and Open Defecation

All the villagers have shown interests in using ISLs of their own. But it also depends on the design criteria of the ISLs because in Kankari villagers stopped using the ISLs due to lack of roof, and unsuitable design. Defecating near water bodies and open land is a common practice.

0%20%40%60%80%

100%120%

Gad

i

Bago

dar

Kank

ari

Nim

ia,S

udna

Kaly

anpu

r

Prat

appu

r,Dar

mih

,Pa

tsa,

Gid

da

Perc

ent U

sers

Sample Villages

Water Treatment Options

Yes

No

0%20%40%60%80%

100%120%

Gad

i

Bago

dar

Kank

ari

Nim

ia,S

udna

Kaly

anpu

r

Prat

appu

r,Dar

mih

,Pa

tsa,

Gid

da

Perc

ent u

sers

Sample villages

Status of Defecation in Villages of Garwa, Palamu and Giridih

ISL

OPEN

Page | 275


h3. Personal Hygiene

Villagers in the region observe safe hygiene practices with daily bathing and washing of hands. The graph below shows the percent users of soap and mud. However depending on the poverty status villagers use soap or mud.

i. Solid Waste Disposal

A proper solid waste disposal system is lacking in the region. Majority of the villages practice open dumping (either in front of houses or on streets or in pits). Burning is opted only by few villagers and compost pit is rarely used in the region. Kalyanpur villagers have largely adopted compost pit system.

0%10%20%30%40%50%60%70%80%90%

Gad

i

Kank

ari

Kaly

anpu

rPerc

ent U

sers

Sample Villages

Locations of Defecation

Near water

Slope ground

Other (field)

0%20%40%60%80%

100%120%

Gad

i

Bago

dar

Kank

ari

Nim

ia,S

udna

Kaly

anpu

r

Prat

appu

r,Dar

mih

,Pat

sa,G

idda

Perc

ent U

sers

Sample Villages

Options for Washing Hands

Soap

Mud

0%20%40%60%80%

100%120%

Gad

i

Bago

dar

Kank

ari

Nim

ia,S

udna

Kaly

anpu

r

Prat

appu

r,Dar

mih

,Pat

sa,G

idda

Perc

ent U

sers

Sample Villages

Daily Bathing

Daily

Page | 276


j. Waste Water Disposal

The region is negligibly covered by paved drainages. Unpaved drains and soak pits are used to collect waste water. Most the water from unpaved drains from inside the houses is allowed to move on to the streets. Thus concrete drainages need to be built in the region.

k. Sewage Disposal

There is absence of any kind sewage system in the region. l. Fodder Waste/ Dung Disposal

Except for kalyanpur village in Garwa, maximum villagers of the region do not resort to vermicompost or any kind compost system. m. Awareness of Water Borne Diseases

Villagers are aware about the water borne diseases such as malaria, dysentery and jaundice. They are also aware about the presence of fluoride and iron in the ground water sources. n. Conclusion

Water supply in the region is limited by quality (iron and fluoride) and quantity (summer seasons). Thus proper measures need to be taken if alternate mean of water supply is planned. Example: If ground water sources are opted for water supply in Palamu and Garwa then mitigation measures for fluoride removal is a must.

Depending on terrain, construction of small catchments and dams can prove to be beneficial and they can also reduce pressures from existing water supply schemes.

Location of water supply points and timings of water supply must be regulated according to the population needs.

0

20

40

60

80

100

Soap Mud Only Water

Cleaning Hand

Cleaning Hand

0%10%20%30%40%50%60%70%80%90%100%

Gad

i

Bago

dar

Kank

ari

Nim

ia,S

udna

Kaly

anpu

r

Prat

appu

r,Dar

mih

,Pat

sa,G

idda

Perc

ent U

sers

Sample Villages

Waste Water Disposal Options

Drain

Soak Pit

Page | 277


Construction of ISLs should be based on proper design so that the usage is optimum.

Best examples from Bagodar and Kalyanpur can be implemented in other villages too.

Region lacks drainages and sewarage systems.

Overall hygiene status is good.

Measures for waste management and compost pits should be initiated.

Villagers are willing to pay for the development and maintenance of the systems.

Community level latrines can also be beneficial and they should be built in common places such as bus stops and key market areas.

2.1.2 Regional Analysis of Data for Dumka, Godda and Jamtara Districts

a. Introduction

This survey was conducted in January 2013 in about 20 sample households each in the sample villages of Dumka, Godda and Jamtara. The total population of the villages based on 2001 census is 12899. The region is primarily hilly with gravel, rocky and sandy soil. b. Water Supply

c. Type of Scheme

An analysis of source of water supply vis-à-vis SVS, MVS, and HP’s has been made and the results are discussed below. Water supply in Masalia, Bhatondha and Bewa is under SVS and is primary based on ground water. Among other sources are hand pump, open wells, nearby river and artesian wells. Water is distributed through an OHT to the residents of the villages.

Table1: Village summary

Masalia Haroraydih Bhatondha Hathihariyari Beoa Bagjuri

Block Masalia Masalia Poraiyahat Poraiyahat Jamtara Jamtara

District Dumka Dumka Godda Godda Jamtara Jamtara

Area (Hectares) 229 259 880 763 674 278

Population (2001) 649 1552 2809 1665 3880 2344

DWS* Yes No Yes No Yes No

Terrain Hilly Hilly Plain Plain Plain Hilly

Soil Sandy Sandy Clay Clay Rock Gravel

*Drinking Water Supply

Water is distributed twice a day in morning and evening. Treatment of OHT supply water is observed in only Beoa village of Jamtara district. In Masalia and Bagjuri no treatment is being done to the OHT supply water. Haroraydih, Hathihariyari and Bagjuri are the proposed villages for drinking water supply schemes respectively from Dumka, Godda and Jamtara districts. Water sources are mainly hand pumps and open wells, nearby river and artesian wells. Filtration using cloth treatment is observed in nearly all the villages. Based on the survey the water quality is perceived to be good. Water problem is observed during summer seasons, when water scarcity arises in some villages due to the low ground water level and absence of alternative water sources. d. Scheme Sources

The drinking water supply schemes in villages are SVS scheme. These schemes are mainly dependent on ground water source

Page | 278


.

Fig1: Drinking Water Sources

Among the sampled HH in Dumka district OHT supply, hand pump and open wells are found to be the main sources of drinking water. Masalia, which has an existing drinking water supply scheme shows the following trends, nearly 45% sampled HH are dependent on hand pumps as source of water, 30% are dependent on public open wells and 25% are dependent on OHT supply. Haroraydih is the proposed village for drinking water supply scheme in Dumka district. In the village majority 90% sampled HH are dependent on hand pumps for drinking water. The remaining 10% sampled HH use water from public open well.

In Godda district Bhatondh is the sampled village with existing drinking water supply scheme. The scheme is of SVS type. In Bhatondha, nearly 60% are dependent on hand pumps as source of water, 25% are dependent on nearby river and 15% are dependent on OHT supply. Hathihariyari is the village of Godda district which is without drinking water supply supply scheme. Here all the sampled HH nearly 99% use Artesian wells for obtaining drinking water. There are two artesian wells are present in this village. Hand pumps are also present in village but people prefer to take water from those artesian wells due to easiness in access of water.

In Jamtara district Beoa village is with SVS type drinking water supply scheme. Among the sampled HH in Beoa, nearly 70% are dependent on hand pumps as source of water, 5% are dependent on public open wells and 25% are dependent on OHT supply. Another village of the district without drinking water supply scheme is the Bagjuri. In Bagjuri village majority 65% sampled HH are dependent on hand pumps for water. The remaining 35% sampled HH use water from public open well.

e. Quantity of Water

In Dumka, HH receive optimum amount of water due to multiple sources. Although there is limitation in supply of water from OHT supply that is operational twice a day, but presence of hand pumps and open wells have resulted in optimum availability of water. However Haroraydih also witnesses optimum amount of water due to multiple sources of water. The situation gets grave in summer seasons.

In Godda district sampled HH of Bhatondha village, face scarcity of water due to unavailability of ample amount of water sources. Although there is supply of water from OHT supply scheme but is not fully functional. However the village Hathihariyari witnesses optimum amount of water due to presence of two artesian wells. The water flows out continuously from these wells and drains to nearby fields. The situation in summer seasons is also good due to artesian well.

In Jamtara district Beoa village has SVS type drinking water supply scheme. In Beoa samples HH receive optimum amount of water due to multiple sources. Although there is limitation in supply of water from OHT that is

0

20

40

60

80

100


Drinking Water

OHT Supply Hand Pump Open Wells Nearby River Artesian Well

Page | 279


operational twice a day, but presence of hand pumps and open wells have resulted in optimum availability of water. However Bagjuri also witnesses optimum amount of water due to multiple sources of water. The situation gets grave in summer seasons.

f. Quality of Water

Based on the prior knowledge and experience of respondents and their visual and sensory observation of drinking water, the quality of water is classified into two categories: Good (sweet, color less, odorless) and Bad (salty/sour, colored, odor, fluoride content). All the sampled HH of Dumka, Godda and Jamtara perceive that the water is good as it is colorless and odorless. However they feel that the water is heavy and at times they filter the water using cotton cloth or boil the water before use.

g. Water Treatment and Handling Practices

Water treatment practices are not popular at household level. Different types were shown by all three districts but cloth filtering is observed in all the villages.

In Dumka district only 70% sampled HH in Masalia treat water. Nearly 55% residents usecloth filtering and

Fig 2: Water treatment practices

remaining 15%boil water for drinking. Open wells are treated with chlorine or bleaching powder as and when required. Among safe practices more than 95% cover their water filled pots or utensils and the remaining left it open. While another village Haroraydih reflects that nearly 45% of the surveyed HH treat the water before consumption. All the 45% of sampled HH use cloth filtering and no one found the practice of boiling the water. Nearly 55% residents consume drinking water without any treatment. Villagers use lid to cover the stored water and at times use ladle and customized pots for using water.

In Godda district both the villages shown high rate of not filtering water. Nearly 65% sampled HH in Bhatondha and 60% sampled HH in Hathihariyari do not treat water before consumption. Those residents treat water mostly use cloth filtering technique 25% sampled HH in Bahtondha and 40% sampled residents in Hathihariyari use cloth filtering technique for treating the water. Boiling practice was only observed in Bhatondha where 10% sampled residents used to boil water before consumption.

In Jamtara district Beoa village very less number of peoples treats water. Nearly 70% sampled HH do not treat water while in Bagjuri only 20% sampled HH do not treat water. It shows that Bagjuri has a high rate of water treatment. In Beoa and Bagjuri 25% and 75% sampled HH use cloth filtering technique respectively. The boiling practice was shown by 5% sampled HH in both the villages.

0

20

40

60

80

100


Water Treatment


Page | 280


h. Sanitation


Defeaction practices found as usual as the rest of the villages of Jharkhand. People prefer to go in open. Very less percentage of sampled HH has Individual Sanitary Latrines (ISLs).

Masalia and Haroraydih both the villages of Dumka shows same trend of defecation practices. Nearly 15% sampled HH have their own ISLs in and nearly 85% sampled HH practice open defecation in both the villages.

Fig3: Defecation practices


On a regional basis we can say that very less amount of people has ISL facility. Godda shows the worst scene of the sanitation facility in this region where in Bhatondha village only 5% peoples have ISL facility. Beoa shows the highest percentage of ISL facility nearly 25% of sampled HH in Jamtara district. Beoa in Jamtara district shows minimum percentage 75% of open defecation and Bhatondha in Godda district shows highest percentage of open defecation practice with 95%. After the public discussion in all the sampled villages, it reflected that peoples are not much excited about making their own ISLs. The region behind is the cost involved in the construction of ISL facility. Peoples are not so economically strong to pay the funds for construction of ISL facility. They wanted Government to make ISL facility for them. Government started to assist poor peoples of BPL level by giving them funds to make their ISL. But the quality and strength of that constructed structure is very cheap, so peoples prefer to go in open rather than using those ISLs


Peoples generally use soap, mud and ash for cleaning their hands after defecation and before and after taking their foods. This practice was seen in all the three districts of this region. 50% residents of Beoa village use soap for cleaning their hand. Both the villages of Jamtara show good number of peoples using soap with 50% in Beoa and 35% in Bagjuri. In Godda and Dumka districts 80% peoples use mud for cleaning their hands.

0

20

40

60

80

100


Defeaction Practices

ISL Open

Page | 281


Fig4: Hand cleaning practices

Few number of peoples found using ash for cleaning their hands. In both the villages of Jamtara it is 5% and 10% respectively in Beoa and Bagjuri. Another village is Masalia in Dumka district where 5% peoples found using ash for hand cleaning.


Indoor bins are generally not used fot the collection of solid waste. The household wastes are directly thrown to backyards, compost pit, in front of their houses or in streets. Highest number of people throws their solid waste in their backyards. The figures show that Hathihariyari village of Godda district have 85% residents who throw their waste in their backyards. Practice of making compost pit was not seen in Dumka and Godda districts. But in Jamtara district both the villages Beoa and Bagjuri have 20% residents who throw their solid waste in compost pit. Peoples also have habits to throw waste outside on lane or in front of their houses. In Dumka Haroraydih village have the highest number of people i.e.45%, who used to throw their waste outside on lane. Bhataundha in Godda district has lowest 10% residents who throw waste outside on lane.

Fig5: Solid Waste disposal practices

0

20

40

60

80

100


Hand Cleaning Practices

Soap Mud Ash

0

20

40

60

80

100




Page | 282



For waste water disposal generally two methods are practiced in sample districts. First is to use drain and the other is to make a soak pit. In this region nearly all districts show same trends, i.e. most number of peoples use drain for waste water disposal. In Dumka district 90% peoples dispose their waste water in drains.

Fig6: Waste Water disposal practices

These are not concrete drains but temporary drains which lead to Front Street or to their backyards. In Jamtara district 70% peoples found to use darins. In these villages most people’s use soak pit for waste water disposal. In Jamtara district it is 40%and 30% respectively in Beoa and Bagjuri.

k. Sewage Disposal

Sewage disposal is completely absent in the all three district of this region. It is found that generally residents of Jamtara and Dumka who have ISL, dispose the sewage in pit/ septic tank made for ISL.

l. Fodder Waste/ Dung Disposal

Use of compost pits for fodder and dung disposal was practiced among the surveyed HH in all the three districts of this region. People dig a 3x3ft. pit in which they dispose fodder waste time to time, generally daily, and when it filled completely they used to cover it by a thin layer of soil. After 1-2 months they use this manure in their crop fields.

m. Awareness of Water Borne Diseases

Villagers in all the three districts were aware of water borne diseases specially malaria, jaundice and dysentery. However they discussed that special training or awareness programme was not conducted in their village.

n. Conclusion

• There are multiple sources of water supply and different type of schemes. • 100% of the water supply schemes are ground water based. • 50% respondents consume water after further treatment at household level. • Only 13% of sample household have latrines. • Most (99%) wash hands both after defection and before eating food. • 45% household throws solid waste in their backyards. • 10% households have soak pits for wastewater disposal. • A significant number of households (85%) are aware of waterborne diseases.

0

20

40

60

80

100


Waste Water Disposal

Drain Soak Pit

Page | 283


o. Issues identified during Village level Public Consultations

Environmental Science and Engineering department at Birla Institute of Technology, Mesra, Ranchi has conducted the Environmental Analysis for this project preparation. During the fieldwork consultations were conducted in the 2 sample villages using focus group discussions in January 2013. Stakeholders who were involved in public consultation are the Gram Mukhiyas and Sacheev, person nominated from PHED office, members from mahila mandal and common villagers.

The issues brought out in these consultations are listed below:

p. Water Supply Related

Dumka

• Inadequate water supply and sometimes over flow of water in OHT. • Water connection is taken by very less peoples. • Water quality is perceived to be good, only few hand pumps have iron problem. • Problems arise due to power failures as filling up the OHT takes time. • Water stand points do not have concrete base. • Disruptions in Water Supply. • Limited number of hand pumps and open wells are other sources of drinking water. • Water quality is perceived to be good. • More than 25% hand pumps are not in running condition. • Groundwater level reduced to 100ft during last 10 years.

Godda

• Inadequate water supply in OHT supply. • Water connection is taken by very less peoples. • Water quality is perceived to be good, only few hand pumps have iron problem. • Problems arise due to power failures as filling up the OHT takes time. • Water stand points do not have concrete base. • Water supply line not spreads up to all areas of village. • Disruptions in Water Supply. • Limited number of hand pumps and wells are sources of drinking water. • Two number of artesian well are present in a distance of 500m in Hathihariyari village. • Continuously water flows out from the artesian wells. • Water quality is perceived to be good. • Most of the hand pumps are not in running condition. • Groundwater level reduced to 70ft during last 10 years.

Jamtara

• Inadequate water supply and sometimes over flow of water. • Water quality is perceived to be good, only few hand pumps have iron problem. • Location of water stand out points are not adequate. • Problems arise due to power failures as filling up the OHT takes time. • Water stand points do not have concrete base. • Disruptions in Water Supply: Inadequate water supply during summer. • Limited number of hand pumps and open wells are other sources of drinking water. • Water quality is perceived to be good. • Groundwater level reduced to 50-60ft during last 10 years

q. Sanitation Related

Dumka

Page | 284


• Inadequate number of ISLs in both the villages Masalia and Haroraydih. • Open defecation is observed largely. • Poorness is the main reason of not having ISLs. • Low coverage of drains, Stagnation of sullage, wastewater stagnation in streets. • Improper solid waste disposal. • Burning of solid waste. • No awareness generation programmers were conducted by local administration.

Godda

• Inadequate number of ISLs in both the villages Bhatondha and Hathihariyari. • Open defecation is observed largely. • Poorness is the main reason of not having ISLs. • Improper solid waste disposal. • Burning of solid waste. • No awareness generation programmers were conducted by local administration.

Jamtara

• Inadequate number of ISLs in both the villages Beoa and Bagjuri. • Open defecation is observed largely. • Poorness is the main reason of not making ISLs. • Improper solid waste disposal. • No awareness generation programmers were conducted by local administration.

Page | 285


2.1.3 Regional Analysis for Pakur and Sahibganj Districts

a. Introduction

This survey was conducted in January 2013 in about 20 sample households in the sample villages of Pakur and Sahibganj district. The total population of the villages based on questionnaire is 15900. The region is primarily sloping with gravel, rocky and sandy soil. b. Water Supply

c. Type of Scheme

An analysis of source of water supply vis-à-vis SVS, MVS, and HP’s has been made and the results are discussed below. Water supply in Pakur is under SVS and in Sahibgaj it is MVS. All these supply schemes are primarly based on ground water. Among other sources are hand pump, public open wells and individual open wells.. Water is distributed through an OHT to the residents of the villages.

Littipara Sangrampur Tinpahar Kanjigaon

Block Littipara Pakur Rajmahal Rajmahal

District Pakur Pakur Sahibganj Sahibganj

Area (Acres) 247 100 100 100

Population (2011) 2200 6000 4224 3500

DWS* Yes No Yes No

Terrain Plain Plain Hilly Sloping

Soil Rocky Sandy Rocky Gravel

Table1: Village summary *Drinking Water Supply

Water is distributed twice a day in morning and evening. Treatment of OHT supply water is observed in only Littipara village of Pakur district. Filtration using cloth treatment is observed in nearly all the villages. Based on the survey the water quality is perceived to be good. Water problem is observed during summer seasons, when water scarcity arises in some villages due to the low ground water level and absence of alternative water sources. d. Scheme Sources

The drinking water supply schemes in villages are SVS and MVS both type of scheme. These schemes are mainly dependent on ground water source

Page | 286


Fig1: Drinking Water Sources

Among the sampled HH in Pakur district OHT supply and hand pump are found to be the main sources of drinking water. Littipara, which has an existing drinking water supply scheme shows the following trends, nearly 90% sampled HH are dependent on hand pumps as source of water and 10% are dependent on OHT supply. Sangrampur is the proposed village for drinking water supply scheme in Pakur district. In the village majority 99% sampled HH are dependent on hand pumps for drinking water. In Sahibganj district Tinpahar is the sampled village with existing drinking water supply scheme. The scheme is of MVS type. In Tinpahar, only 40% are dependent on OHT supply. Rest of the residents use drinking water from public open wells and individual open wells. Kanjigaon is the village of Sahibganj district which is without drinking water supply scheme. Here majority of the sampled HH nearly 65% use hand pump for obtaining drinking water. e. Quantity of Water

In Pakur, HH receive optimum amount of water due to multiple sources. Although there is limitation in supply of water from OHT supply that is operational twice a day, but presence of hand pumps and open wells have resulted in optimum availability of water. However in Sahibganj district sampled HH of face scarcity of water due to unavailability of ample amount of water sources. Although there is supply of water from OHT supply scheme but is not fairly functional. Presence of hand pump and open wells helps villagers to cope up with water scarcity during summer season. f. Quality of Water

Based on the prior knowledge and experience of respondents and their visual and sensory observation of drinking water, the quality of water is classified into two categories: Good (sweet, color less, odorless) and Bad (salty/sour, colored, odor, fluoride content). All the sampled HH of Pakur and Sahibganj perceive that the water is moderate as it is colorless and odorless. However they feel that the water is heavy and at times they filter the water using cotton cloth. In some are of sampled village of Sahibganj perceive bad water quality. g. Water Treatment and Handling Practices

Water treatment practices are not popular in household level. Different types of methods were shown by both districts but cloth filtering is observed at all the villages. In Pakur district only 20% sampled HH in Littipara treat water. Nearly 80% residents use

0

20

40

60

80

100

Litipara Sangrampur Tinpahar Kozigaon

Drinking Water

OHT Supply Hand Pump Public Open Wells Individual Open Wells

Page | 287



cloth filtering for drinking water. Open wells are treated with chlorine or bleaching powder as and when required. Among safe practices more than 95% cover their water filled pots or utensils and the remaining left it open. While another village Sangrampur also reflects the same trend of treating water. Villagers use lid to cover the stored water and at times use ladle and customized pots for using water. In Sahibganj district both the villages shown low rate of not filtering water then Pakur district. Nearly 65% sampled HH in Tinpahar and only 15% sampled HH in Kanjigaon do not treat water before consumption. Those residents treat water mostly by using cloth filtering technique. Boiling practice was only observed in Kanjigaon where 5% sampled residents used to boil water before consumption. h. Sanitation

h1. Latrine Usage and Open Defecation Defecation practices found as usual as the rest of the villages of Jharkhand. People prefer to go in open. Very less percentage of sampled HH has Individual Sanitary Latrines (ISLs). Littipara and Sangrampur both the villages of Pakur shows nearly same trend of defecation practices. Nearly 10-15% sampled HH have their own ISLs in and remaining 85-90% sampled HH practice open defecation in both the villages. In Sahibganj district no of ISLs are good. In both the sampled villages it is found to be more than 50%. Due to this region the number of people going out for defecation is reduced to 50-60%.

0

20

40

60

80

100


Water Treatment


0

20

40

60

80

100



ISL Open

Page | 288


Fig3: Defecation practices h2. Personal Hygiene Peoples generally use soap, mud and ash for cleaning their hands after defecation and before and after taking their foods. This practice was seen in both districts of this region. Both the villages of Sahibganj show good number of peoples using soap with 40%. In Sahibganj and Pakur districts nearly 60-80% peoples use mud for cleaning their hands.


Few number of peoples found using ash for cleaning their hands. Only in Kanjigaon village Sahibganj district where 5% peoples found using ash for hand cleaning. h3. Solid Waste Disposal The household wastes are directly thrown to backyards, compost pit, in front of their houses or in streets. Highest number of people throws their solid waste in their backyards. The figures show that nearly 60% residents throw their waste in their backyards in this Pakur Sahibganj region. Practice of making compost pit was not seen in Pakur districts. But in Sahibganj district one villages Kanjigaon have 20% residents who throw their solid waste in compost pit. Peoples also have habits to throw waste outside on lane or in front of their houses.


i. Waste Water Disposal

0

20

40

60

80

100



Soap Mud Ash Only Water

0

20

40

60

80

100




Page | 289


For waste water disposal generally two methods are practiced in sample districts. First is to use drain and the other is to make a soak pit. In this region nearly all districts show same trends, i.e. most number of peoples use drain foe waste water disposal. In Pakur district 80% peoples dispose their waste water in drains.


These are not concrete drains but temporary drains which lead to Front Street or to their backyards. In Sahibganj district 90% peoples found to use drains. In these villages few people’s use soak pit for waste water disposal. In Pakur district it is 25% and 15% in Sahibganj. j. Sewage Disposal

Sewage disposal is completely absent in both district of this region. It is found that generally residents of Sahibganj and Pakur who have ISL, dispose the sewage in pit/ septic tank made for ISL. k. Fodder Waste/ Dung Disposal

Use of compost pits for fodder and dung disposal was practiced among the surveyed HH in both districts of this region. After 1-2 months they use this manure in their crop fields. l. Awareness of Water Borne Diseases

Villagers in all the three districts were aware of water borne diseases specially malaria, jaundice and dysentery. However they discussed that special training or awareness programme was not conducted in their village. m. Conclusion

Overall observation hints at good quality groundwater in both the districts, though during summer seasons, water scarcity arises in some villages due to the lowering of ground water level. Problem lies in supply system through pipeline, which can be implemented through proper planning. Another problem faced by villages of Sahibganj is that of Arsenic contamination mainly in the banks of river. Thus there is need for either discarding those sources or opting for proper treatment. Electricity and man-power shortage for supply of OHT water supply through pipeline supply can be effectively improved. There is an acute shortage and insufficiency of Individual Sanitary latrines for villagers in both the districts. Villagers are frustrated with lack of ISL and open defeacation. Though a number of times, construction of ISL has been proposed from Government policies, they have not been implemented in its true sense in these district’s villages. There is no sign of sewerage and drainage system in any of the villages in both the districts. Kucchha drains help in only draining the household water into the roads and backyard, but no proper drainage system with defined source and sink is present. Discrete composting has been observed in some household levels for cowdung, but proper composting for organic waste is basically absent. Absence of sewerage and drainage lead to contamination of the nearby water bodies severly, in turn affecting the health of the villagers using that water for bathing and washing purpose.Environmental awareness programmes need to be organized in these districts.During the fieldwork consultations were conducted

0

20

40

60

80

100



Drain Soak Pit

Page | 290


in the 2 sample villages using focus group discussions in January 2013. Stakeholders who were involved in public consultation are the Gram Mukhiyas and Sacheev, person nominated from PHED office, members from mahila mandal and common villagers. Their opinions have also been incorporated in the above conclusions. PAKUR UWater Supply Related

• Inadequate water supply in many parts of Pakur lacking sufficient OHT supply and limited number of hand pumps.

• Water quality is perceived to be mixed with good at few places and moderate at others with occasional iron, fluoride and suspended solids.

• Problems arise due to power failures as filling up the OHT takes time. • Water supply line not spreads up to all areas of village. • Disruptions in Water Supply due to electricity problems. • Groundwater level reduced slightly in last 10 years.

USanitation Related

• Inadequate number of ISLs in villages • Open defecation is observed largely mainly near abandoned land and water bodies • Poverty and mal implementation of schemes is the main reason of not having ISLs. • Low coverage of drains, Stagnation of sullage, wastewater stagnation in streets. • Improper solid waste disposal. • No awareness generation programmers were conducted by local administration.

SAHIBGANJ UWater Supply Related

Tinpahar • Main sources of water are hand pumps (specifically in Kanjigaon), individual and public wells, but

inadequate water supply via OHT system is prominent. • Water quality is perceived to be more or less good except few places with TDS, arsenic and suspended

solids. In market place of TinPahar the water is hard and water table is low. • Problems arise due to power failures as filling up the OHT takes time. • Water supply line not spreaded to all areas of village. • Groundwater level reduced slightly in last 10 years. • Many handpumps are non-functional

USanitation Related

• Inadequate number of ISLs in both the villages Tinpahar and Kanjigaon. • Open defecation is observed significantly. • In Tinpahar due to large number of open defeacation process iin the slopes of the hills, during monsoon

this becomes a source of contamination in the ndownslope regions and waterbodies. • Low coverage of drains, Stagnation of sullage, wastewater stagnation in streets. • Improper solid waste disposal. • Lack of ISLs is mainly due to poverty in some cases and awareness in others about sanination and health. • No awareness generation programmes were conducted by local administration.

2.1.4 Regional Analysis of Dhanbad, East Singbhum and Saraikela Districts

a. Introduction

This survey was conducted in January 2013 in about 20 sample households in the sample villages of Dhanbad, East Singbhum and Saraikela. The total population of the villages based on 2001 census is 12899. The region is primarily hilly with gravel, rocky and sandy soil. b. Water Supply

Page | 291


c. Type of Scheme

An analysis of source of water supply vis-à-vis SVS, MVS, and HP’s has been made and the results are discussed below. Water supply in Dharma Bandh, Potka and Dugni is under SVS and is primary based on ground water. Among other sources are hand pump, open wells, nearby river and hand pump. Water is distributed through an OHT to the residents of the villages. Water is distributed twice a day in morning and evening. Treatment of OHT supply water is observed in only Dugni village of Saraikela district. In Dharma Bandh and Narayanpur no treatment is being done to the OHT supply water. Sinidih, Jharia and Narayanpur are the proposed villages for drinking water supply schemes respectively from Dhanbad, East Singbhum and Saraikela districts. Water sources are mainly hand pumps and open wells, nearby river and hand pump. Filtration using cloth treatment is observed in nearly all the villages. Based on the survey the water quality is perceived to be good. Water problem is observed during summer seasons, when water scarcity arises in some villages due to the low ground water level and absence of alternative water sources. d. Scheme Sources

The drinking water supply schemes in villages are SVS scheme. These schemes are mainly dependent on ground water source

. Fig1: Drinking Water Sources

Among the sampled HH in Dhanbad district OHT supply, hand pump and open wells are found to be the main sources of drinking water. Dharma Bandh, which has an existing drinking water supply scheme shows the following trends, nearly 70% sampled HH are dependent on OHT supply as source of water, 20% are dependent on public open wells and 5% are dependent on hand pumps. Sinidih is the proposed village for drinking water supply scheme in Dhanbad district. In the village 20% sampled HH are dependent on hand pumps for drinking water. The remaining 30% sampled HH use water from public open well. In East Singbhum district Bhatondh is the sampled village with existing drinking water supply scheme. The scheme is of SVS type. In Potka, nearly 85% are dependent on hand pumps as source of water, 10% are dependent on open wells and 5% are dependent on OHT supply. Jharia is the village of East Singbhum district which is without drinking water supply supply scheme. Here all the sampled HH nearly 85% use hand pump for obtaining drinking water. Open wells are also present in village but people prefer to take water from those hand pump due to easiness in access of water. In Saraikela district Dugni village is with SVS type drinking water supply scheme. Among the sampled HH in Dugni, nearly 70% are dependent on hand pumps as source of water, 15% are dependent on public open wells and 15% are dependent on open wells. Another village of the district with drinking water supply scheme is the Narayanpur. In Narayanpur village majority 90% sampled HH are dependent on OHT supply for water. The remaining 10% sampled HH use water from hand pump.

0

20

40

60

80

100

DharmahBandh

Sinidih Potka Jharia Dugni Narayanpur

Water Source

OHT Supply Hand Pump Open Wells Nearby River

Page | 292



In Dhanbad, HH receive optimum amount of water due to multiple sources. Although there is limitation in supply of water from OHT supply that is operational twice a day, but presence of hand pumps and open wells have resulted in optimum availability of water. However Sinidih also witnesses optimum amount of water due to multiple sources of water. The situation gets grave in summer seasons. In East Singbhum district sampled HH of Potka village, face scarcity of water due to unavailability of ample amount of water sources. Although there is supply of water from OHT supply scheme but is not fully functional. However the village Jharia witnesses optimum amount of water due to presence of two hand pump. The water flows out continuously from these wells and drains to nearby fields. The situation in summer seasons is also good due to artesian well. In Saraikela district Dugni village has SVS type drinking water supply scheme. In Dugni samples HH receive optimum amount of water due to multiple sources. Although there is limitation in supply of water from OHT that is operational twice a day, but presence of hand pumps and open wells have resulted in optimum availability of water. However Narayanpur also witnesses optimum amount of water due to multiple sources of water. The situation gets grave in summer seasons. f. Quality of Water

Based on the prior knowledge and experience of respondents and their visual and sensory observation of drinking water, the quality of water is classified into two categories: Good (sweet, color less, odorless) and Bad (salty/sour, colored, odor, fluoride content). All the sampled HH of Dhanbad, East Singbhum and Saraikela perceive that the water is good as it is colorless and odorless. However they feel that the water is heavy and at times they filter the water using cotton cloth or boil the water before use. g. Water Treatment and Handling Practices

Water treatment practices are not popular in household level. Different types were shown by all three districts but cloth filtering is observed at all the villages. In Dhanbad district only 75% sampled HH in Dharma Bandh treat water. Nearly 65% residents use


cloth filtering and remaining 10% used to boil water for drinking. Open wells are treated with chlorine or bleaching powder as and when required. Among safe practices more than 95% cover their water filled pots or utensils and the remaining left it open. While another village Sinidih reflects that nearly 55% of the surveyed HH treat the water before consumption. All the 35% of sampled HH use cloth filtering and 20% found the practice of boiling the water. Nearly 45% residents consume drinking water without any treatment. Villagers use lid to cover the stored water and at times use ladle and customized pots for using water. In East Singbhum district both the villages shown high rate of not filtering water. Nearly 30% sampled HH in Potka and 65% sampled HH in Jharia do not treat water before consumption. Those residents treat water mostly use cloth

0

20

40

60

80

100

DharmahBandh


Water Treatment


Page | 293


filtering technique 65% sampled HH in Potka and 35% sampled residents in Jharia use cloth filtering technique for treating the water. Boiling practice was only observed in Potka where 5% sampled residents used to boil water before consumption. In Saraikela district Dugni village very less number of peoples treats water. Nearly 40% sampled HH do not treat water while in Narayanpur only 45% sampled HH do not treat water. It shows that Narayanpur has a high rate of water treatment. In Dugni and Narayanpur 40% and 45% sampled HH use cloth filtering technique respectively. The boiling practice was shown by 20% sampled HH in Dugni village.

h. Sanitation


Defeaction practices found as usual as the rest of the villages of Jharkhand. People prefer to go in open. Very less percentage of sampled HH has Individual Sanitary Latrines (ISLs). Dharma Bandh and Sinidih both the villages of Dhanbad shows same trend of defecation practices. Nearly 25% sampled HH have their own ISLs in and nearly 75% sampled HH practice open defecation in both the villages.

Fig3: Defecation practices


On a regional basis we can say that very less amount of people has ISL facility. East Singbhum shows the worst scene of the sanitation facility in this region where in Potka village only 25% peoples have ISL facility. Narayanpur shows the highest percentage of ISL facility nearly 40% of sampled HH . Narayanpur shows minimum percentage 60% of open defecation and Jharia shows highest percentage of open defecation practice with 90%. After the public discussion in all the sampled villages, it reflected that peoples are not much excited about making their own ISLs. The region behind is the cost involved in the construction of ISL facility. Peoples are not so economically strong to pay the funds for construction of ISL facility. They wanted Government to make ISL facility for them. Government started to assist poor peoples of BPL level by giving them funds to make their ISL. But the quality and strength of that constructed structure is very cheap, so peoples prefer to go in open rather than using those ISLs h3. Personal Hygiene

Peoples generally use soap, mud and ash for cleaning their hands after defecation and before and after taking their foods. This practice was seen in all the three districts of this region. 50% residents of Dugni village use soap for cleaning their hand. Both the villages of Saraikela show good number of peoples using soap with 30% in Dugni and 55% in Narayanpur. In East Singbhum and Dhanbad districts 50% peoples use mud for cleaning their hands.

020406080

100

DharmahBandh



ISL Open

Page | 294



Few number of peoples found using ash for cleaning their hands. In both the villages of Saraikela it is 10% each in Dugni and Narayanpur. Another village is Dharma Bandh in Dhanbad district where 10% peoples found using ash for hand cleaning. i. Solid Waste Disposal

Indoor bins are generally not used fot the collection of solid waste. The household wastes are directly thrown to backyards, compost pit, in front of their houses or in streets. Highest number of people throws their solid waste in their backyards. The figures show that. Practice of making compost pit was seen in Dhanbad and East Singbhum districts. But in Saraikela district villages Dugni and have 30% residents who throw their solid waste in compost pit. Peoples also have habits to throw waste outside on lane or in front of their houses. In Dugni village have the highest number of people i.e.75%, who used to throw their waste outside on lane.



For waste water disposal generally two methods are practiced in sample districts. First is to use drain and the other is to make a soak pit. In this region nearly all districts show same trends, i.e. most number of peoples use drain for waste water disposal. In Dhanbad district 55% peoples dispose their waste water in drains.

0

20

40

60

80

100

DharmahBandh



Soap Mud Ash

0

20

40

60

80

100

DharmahBandh




Page | 295



These are not concrete drains but temporary drains which lead to Front Street or to their backyards. In Saraikela district 80% peoples found to use darins. In these villages most people’s use soak pit for waste water disposal. In Saraikela district it is 20%and 15% respectively in Dugni and Narayanpur. k. Sewage Disposal

Sewage disposal is completely absent in the all three district of this region. It is found that generally residents of Saraikela and Dhanbad who have ISL, dispose the sewage in pit/ septic tank made for ISL. l. Fodder Waste/ Dung Disposal

Use of compost pits for fodder and dung disposal was practiced among the surveyed HH in all the three districts of this region. People dig a 3x3ft. pit in which they dispose fodder waste time to time, generally daily, and when it filled completely they used to cover it by a thin layer of soil. After 1-2 months they use this manure in their crop fields. m. Awareness of Water Borne Diseases

Villagers in all the three districts were aware of water borne diseases specially malaria, jaundice and dysentery. However they discussed that special training or awareness programme was not conducted in their village. n. Conclusion

• There are multiple sources of water supply and different type of schemes. • 100% of the water supply schemes are ground water based. • 50% respondents consume water after further treatment at household level. • Only 20% of sample household have latrines. • Most (99%) wash hands both after defection and before eating food. • 45% household throws solid waste in outside on lane. • 20% households have soak pits for wastewater disposal. • A significant number of households (85%) are aware of waterborne diseases.


Environmental Science and Engineering department at Birla Institute of Technology, Mesra, Ranchi has conducted the Environmental Analysis for this project preparation. During the fieldwork consultations were conducted in the 2 sample villages using focus group discussions in January 2013. Stakeholders who were involved in public consultation are the Gram Mukhiyas and Sacheev, person nominated from PHED office, members from mahila mandal and common villagers. The issues brought out in these consultations are listed below:

0

20

40

60

80

100

DharmahBandh



Drain Soak Pit

Page | 296


UWater Supply Related UDhanbad

• Good mine water quality, ground water quality and quantity in Dharmabandh • HH connections missing. Common stand out points are observed. • HHs are satisfied with the performance of common stand out points. • HHs willing to pay for individual HH water connections. • Water quality needs to be checked in Sinidih that has limited water sources, primarily Hand pumps.

Villagers dependant on BCCL colony for water. East Singbhum

• Inadequate water supply in OHT supply. • Water connection is taken by very less peoples. • Water quality is perceived to be good, only few hand pumps have iron problem. • Problems arise due to power failures as filling up the OHT takes time. • Water stand points do not have concrete base. • Water supply line not spreads up to all areas of village. • Disruptions in Water Supply. • Limited number of hand pumps and wells are sources of drinking water. • Two number of artesian well are present in a distance of 500m in Jharia village. • Continuously water flows out from the hand pump. • Water quality is perceived to be good. • Most of the hand pumps are not in running condition. • Groundwater level reduced to 70ft during last 10 years.

Saraikela

• Inadequate water supply and sometimes over flow of water. • Water quality is perceived to be good, only few hand pumps have iron problem. • Location of water stand out points are not adequate. • Problems arise due to power failures as filling up the OHT takes time. • Water stand points do not have concrete base. • Disruptions in Water Supply: Inadequate water supply during summer. • Limited number of hand pumps and open wells are other sources of drinking water. • Water quality is perceived to be good. • Groundwater level reduced to 50-60ft during last 10 years

USanitation Related Dhanbad

• Inadequate number of ISLs • Open defecation is observed largely. • Poverty is the main reason of not having ISLs. • Low coverage of drains, Stagnation of sullage, wastewater stagnation in streets. • Improper solid waste disposal.

East Singbhum

• Inadequate number of ISLs in both the villages. • Open defecation is observed largely. • Poorness is the main reason of not having ISLs. • Improper solid waste disposal. • Burning of solid waste. • No awareness generation programmers were conducted by local administration.

Saraikela

Page | 297


• Inadequate number of ISLs in both the villages. • Open defecation is observed largely. • Poorness is the main reason of not making ISLs. • Improper solid waste disposal. • No awareness generation programmers were conducted by local administration.

Page | 298


2.1.5 Regional Analysis of Data Sheet for Dhanbad

a. Introduction

The objectives of the primary data collection through household survey is to know water supply and sanitation situation in the sample villages, to gauge the extent of quantity and quality issues and to know the people’s perceptions on the services. This survey was conducted in January 2013 in about 40 sample households in the sample villages of Dharmabandh (Existing) and Sinidih (Proposed) in Dhanbad. The total population the sampled villages are approximately 5000 of which 3500 is for Dharmaband and no statistics was provided for Sinidih thus an assumption has been taken into account. Water table in Dharmaband is at around 50-100ft whereas for Sinidih it is observed from 80-200ft.

Plate 1: Questionaire Survey in Progress in Sinidih

b. Water Supply

c. Type of Scheme

The water supply schemes in both the villages is SVS. The existing as well as proposed water supply in the region is based on Mine pit water supply connected to a OHT and then distributed through a gravity based system. d. Scheme Sources

The main source of water supply is through OHT and then stand out points are present across the village of Dharmaband. Nearly 90% region is supplied by OHT/ Tap water.

Fig1: Drinking Water Sources in Dharmaband

The villagers in the proposed village of Sinidih is dependant on BCCL’s water supply points. These water points are available only for BCCL employees but the other villagers too take water from these points. HP are other sources of water.

0%10%20%30%40%50%60%70%80%90%

100%

Tap Hand pump Open well

Page | 299


Fig2: Drinking Water Sources in Sinidih

Plate 1: Water Stand out point in Dharmabandh


The HPs dry up in summers in Sinidih and the water table lowers down. In Dharmabandh the water quanitity is considered good but the villagers were not able to disclose the area where the water table quanitity could be good. f. Quality of Water

The villagers perceive the quality of water as poor in Sinidih due to heaviness whereas in Dharmabandh the water quality is considered good. Water quality test is required for Sinidih village. g. Water Treatment and Handling Practices

In Dhanbad district nearly 75% sampled HH in Dharma Bandh treat water whereas only 45% resort to any kind of treatment in Sinidih village.

Fig 3: Water Treatment in Dharmaband

0%10%20%30%40%50%60%70%80%

Yes No

0%10%20%30%40%50%60%70%80%90%

Tap Hand pump Open well

Page | 300


Fig 4: Water treatment in Sinidih

Cloth filtering is generally employed for tap water and hand pumps but for open wells chlorine tablets are also used. h. Sanitation


Open defecation practices is common in Dharmaband with nearly 75% sampled HH defecating in open. In Sinidih nearly 50% of sampled HH defecated in open and the remaining had ISLs. This could be due to the construction on ISLs for BPL villagers and also due to the presence of BCCL residential area. The HH sampled also had residents of BCCL.

Fig 5: Defecation practices in Dharmabandh

Fig 6: Defecation practices in Sinidih

0%10%20%30%40%50%60%70%80%

ISL Open

0%

10%

20%

30%

40%

50%

60%

ISL Open

0%

10%

20%

30%

40%

50%

60%

Yes No

Page | 301


0%10%20%30%40%50%60%70%80%

Near water Slope ground


In Dharmabandh and Sinidih, HH opted to go near water source for open defecation with nearly 75% and 80% HH going near water source

Fig 7: Site for Open Defecation in Dharmabandh

Fig 8: Site for Open Defecation in Sinidih h3. Personal Hygiene

More than 60% and 70% HH in Dharmabandh and Sinidih use soap for washing their hands and the remaining use mud for washing. Villagers observed good hygiene and cover their water storage utensils with lid.

Plate 3: Water Storage with closed lids in Dharmabandh

0%10%20%30%40%50%60%70%80%90%

Near water Slope ground

Page | 302


Fig 9: Hand cleaning practices in Dharmaband.

Fig 10: Hand cleaning practices in Sinidih.


Indoor bins are generally not used for the collection of solid waste. HH generally collect the waste in any corner of the house. Nearly 50% HH throw waste outside on lane in Dharmabandh. In Sinidih nearly 35% HH opt for throwing wastes in a pit and similar % of HH also opt for composting the wastes.

Fig 11: Waste disposal options in Dharmabandh

Fig 12: Waste disposal in Sinidih j. Waste Water Disposal

0%

10%

20%

30%

40%

50%

60%

70%

Soap Mud

0%

10%

20%

30%

40%

50%

60%

70%

80%

Soap Mud

0%

10%

20%

30%

40%

50%

60%

Outside on lane Field Backyard Infront of house

0%5%

10%15%20%25%30%35%40%

Pit Field Backyard Compost pit

Page | 303


The Dharmabandh the village is inadequately covered by drains. Kutch drainage is observed in the region through which villagers dispose off their wastewater. Being in proximity to BCCL colony, Sinidih had larger proportion of drainage but these drainages where damaged.

Plate 4: Damaged Drainage in BCCL colony Plate 5: Kutcha nalas in Dharmabandh

Most of the wastewater dries up gradually either through kutcha drains or through pits.

Fig 13: Waste Water disposal practices in Dharmabandh

Fig6: Waste Water disposal practices in Sinidih

k. Sewage Disposal

Sewage disposal was completely absent in Dharmaband and Sinidih village. Even the sewage disposal system in BCCL area that adjoins Sinidih was damaged. l. Fodder Waste/ Dung Disposal

Compost pits or pits for fodder waste and Dung waste was not seen in the villages. m. Awareness of Water Borne Diseases

Villagers in both the villages were aware of the water borne diseases such as dysentery, malaria and jaundice. n. Conclusion

Water supply in both the existing and proposed village is based on mine pit water.

0%10%20%30%40%50%60%70%

Drain Soak

0%5%

10%15%20%25%30%35%40%45%50%

Drain Soak

Page | 304


Water quality in the existing village is good whereas water quality tests needs to be conducted in the proposed village.

Sewarage system is absent Waste water drainage is absent or needs to be maintained wherever built. Improper solid waste disposal system exists. Limited ISLs in both villages. Villagers are willing to pay for HH level ISL and drinking water points. Utilising waste in form of compost can be beneficial. Good hygiene practices observed.


Environmental Science and Engineering department at Birla Institute of Technology, Mesra, Ranchi has conducted the Environmental Analysis for this project preparation. During the fieldwork consultations were conducted in the 2 sample villages using focus group discussions in January 2013. Stakeholders who were involved in public consultation are the Gram Mukhiyas and Sacheev, person nominated from PHED office, members from mahila mandal and common villagers. The issues brought out in these consultations are listed below: UWater Supply Related

Dharmabandh • Good water quality and quantity. • HH connections missing. Common stand out points are observed. • HHs are satisfied with the performance of common stand out points. • HHs willing to pay for individual HH water connections. • Good ground water condition..

Sinidih Water quality needs to be checked. Limited water sources, primarily Hand pumps. HH dependant on BCCL colony for water.

USanitation Related Dharmabandh Inadequate number of ISLs

• Open defecation is observed largely. • Poorness is the main reason of not having ISLs. • Low coverage of drains, Stagnation of sullage, wastewater stagnation in streets. • Improper solid waste disposal.

Sinidih

• Inadequate number of ISLs • Open defecation is observed largely. • Poorness is the main reason of not having ISLs. • Low coverage of drains, Stagnation of sullage, wastewater stagnation in streets. • Improper solid waste disposal.

Page | 305


2.1.6 Analysis of Data for Khunti District

a. Introduction

This survey was conducted in January 2013 in about 40 sample households in the sample villages of Kocha (proposed) and Tapkara (existing). The total population of the villages based on 2001 census is 4715. The region is primarily forested with sandy soil. In Tapkara village ground water was available at a dept of 180-500ft, whereas in Kocha it was observed at 20ft (based on questionnaire).

Plate 1: Images from Tapkara

b. Water Supply

c. Type of Scheme

An analysis of source of water supply vis-à-vis SVS, MVS, and HP’s has been made and the results are discussed below. Water supply in Tapkara is under SVS and is primary based on ground water. Among other sources are river and surface water bodies. Water is distributed through an OHT after passing through slow sand filter. Water is distributed daily once in the morning. In the proposed village of Kocha, water supply is mainly through bore wells and thus no treatment is observed. Based on the survey the water quality is perceived to be good. Water problem is observed during summer seasons. d. Scheme Sources

The schemes for Tapkara and Kocha were SVS and mainly dependent on ground water source.

Fig 1: Drinking Water Sources of Tapkara village, Khunti

Among the sampled HH in Tapkara, nearly 52% are dependent on hand pumps as source of water,22% are dependent on individual open wells and 26% are dependent on OHT.

Page | 306


Fig 2: Drinking Water Sources of Kocha village, Khunti

Among the sampled HH in Kocha village majority 69% are dependent on public open wells for water. The remaining HH sampled used water from hand pumps. There were limited number of HH dependant on individual open wells. e. Quantity of Water

In Tapkara village, HH receive optimum amount of water due to multiple sources. Although there is limitation in supply of water from OHT that is operational only once per day, but presence of hand pumps and open wells have resulted in optimum availability of water. However Kocha witnesses water shortages due to limited water point sources. The situation gets grave in summer seasons. f. Quality of Water

Based on the prior knowledge and experience of respondents and their visual and sensory observation of drinking water, the quality of water is classified into two categories: Good (sweet, colour less, odourless) and Bad (salty/sour, coloured, odour, fluoride content). All the HH sampled in Tapkara and Kocha perceive that the water is good as it is colorless and odorless. However they feel that the water is heavy and at times they also resort to boiling and filter the water using cotton cloth. This heaviness could be due to higher percentages of iron present in ground water sources of Jharkhand. g. Water Treatment and Handling Practices

Various practices are used in handling water at the household level. In more than 65% HH sampled in Tapkara water is treated using cloth filtering, sand candle filters or boiling. Open wells are treated with chlorine or bleaching powder as and when required. Among safe practices more than 50% cover there water filled pots or utensils and the remaining use customized pots with taps or ladles to take water. Almost similar results are also obtained from Kocha. Nearly 62% of the surveyed HH treat the water before consumption. 75% of sampled HH use cloth filtering technique and the remaining use chlorination, and alum for open well and boiling as and when required. Villagers use lid to cover the stored water and at times use ladle and customized pots for using water. h. Sanitation


Page | 307


Fig 3: Defecation practice of Tapkara village, Khunti

The phenomenon of owning of individual saniation latrines (ISL) is only 65% across the sampled HH in Tapkara. Villagers prefer to use ISL’s rather than open defecation.

Fig 4: Defecation practice of Kocha village, Khunti

Kocha on the other hand has a bad situation with nearly 94% of surveyed HH depending on open defecation. Thus building ISLs in Kocha should be prioritized. h2. Latrine Usage and Open Defecation

Both the villages in Khunti district have shown interests for usage of ISL’s. Tapkara has higher percentage of ISLs but in few cases family members tend to defecate in open due to feeling of convenience. The survey of Kocha village highlighted an urgent need to build ISLs and people will tend to use ISL rather than open defecation. Villagers tend to defecate on open land and near to fields.


Hand washing practice is observed by all the sampled HH in Tapkara and Kocha both before and after eating and after defecation. The overall hygiene is observed o be good in the region.

Page | 308


Fig 5: Hand cleaning practices in Tapkara village, Khunti

Nearly 83% of sampled HH in Tapkara use soap for washing hands and this practice is accompanied with usage of mud (22%) and ash (4%) by the remaining HH.

Fig 6: Hand cleaning practices in Kocha village, Khunti

Use of soap for hand washing is observed in 75% of HH in Kocha. Mud and ash is also used for washing hands. i. Solid Waste Disposal

Page | 309


Fig 7: Solid Waste disposal practices in Tapkara village, Khunti

In Tapkara, indoor bins are used for storage of wastes in few houses but nearly 17% of surveyed HH dispose the solid waste in front of their houses, and 30% dispose the waste on streets. An absence of a solid waste management plan is observed in the region thus people tend to dispose their wastes in public places.

Fig 8: Solid Waste disposal practices in Kocha village, Khunti

Nearly 69% of surveyed HH in Kocha dispose the solid waste in compost pits and after partial composting its used in the fields. 31% of them dispose in the back yard of the houses and employ waste reduction mechanisms such as burning. Villagers are aware of the harmful effects of plastics on animals and thus they burn it away. There is no drainage system in the village. The use of compost in agricultural field is observed in Kocha that was completely absent in Tapkara. j. Waste Water Disposal

Waste water in Tapkara is disposed off through katcha domestic drainage into open fields, streets and other open land where it dries up gradually in both the villages. Only a very small percentage of the village is covered by drainage, that remains clogged with soil, solid waste and domestic waste water. There is no drainage system in the kocha village Soak pit is found in only few HH(21%) in Tapkara.

Page | 310


Plate 2: Wastewater disposal in Tapkara

k. Sewage Disposal

Sewage disposal is completely absent in the villages. l. Fodder Waste/ Dung Disposal

Use of compost pits for fodder and dung disposal was absent among the HH surveyed in Tapkara. Nearly 52% of HH had compost pits to dispose of fodder and dung waste in Kocha. m. Awareness of Water Borne Diseases

Villagers in Tapkara and Kocha were aware of water borne diseases specially malaria, jaundice and dysentery. However they discussed that special training or awareness program was not conducted in their village. n. Conclusions

• There are multiple sources water supply and different type of schemes. • 100% of the schemes are ground water based. • Most respondents consume water without further treatment at household level. • Drainage is less to negligible in the region. • Solid waste is dumped openly in Tapkara and no compost pits are seen. • Dung waste is used in agricultural areas whereas food waste is given to animal as feed in Kocha. • Villagers are willing to use ISLs thus the scheme of building them should be expanded. • Hygiene status is good.


Environmental Science and Engineering department at Birla Institute of Technology, Mesra, Ranchi has conducted the Environmental Analysis for this project preparation. During the fieldwork consultations were conducted in the 2 sample villages using focus group discussions in January 2013. Stakeholders who were involved in public consultation are the Gram Mukhiyas and Sacheev, person nominated from PHED office, members from mahila mandal and common villagers. The issues brought out in these consultations are listed below: UWater Supply Related

Tapkara • Inadequate water supply and at times over flow of water in Tapkara. • Water quality is perceived to be good in both the sample villages. • Location of water stand out points result in over flooding in certain areas in low lying areas. • Problems arises due to power failures as filling up the OHT takes time. • Water stand points surrounded by drain water. • Disruptions in Water Supply: Inadequate water supply during summer.

Kocha

• Failure of OHT (near hospital) based water supply due to inadequate water source. • Limited HP sources. • Water quality is perceived to be good.

Page | 311


USanitation Related • Inadequate number of ISLs particularly in Kocha • Open defecation is observed only in absence on ISLs. • Low coverage of drains, Stagnation of sullage, Wastewater stagnation in streets; • Improper solid waste disposal. • The project should propose initiatives to prevent new sources from getting contaminated in the future. • As the Electric supply is a major problem, the project should think of alternate energy resources like solar

power. • Littered solid waste is a major source for contamination for ground water. The project should look into this

issue as well.

Page | 312


ANNEXURE-35

MANAGEMENT ACTION PLAN

Page | 313


Annexure-35 MANAGEMENT ACTION PLAN

S NO AREA OF MANAGEMENT PROPOSED SET UP MODE Institutional Capacity

1 Reorganization of field units

To be made as professionally skilled teams rather than administrative units

In-house

2 Knowledge & skills Knowledge & skill gaps to be identified & filled In-house 3 Relocation of units To be made on the basis of location of projects In-house 4 Size of team Cohesion and synergy to be kept in view In-house 5 No of teams Depending on no & size of projects. Block level

workers to be increased. In-house

6 Teams to be equipped with

Delegation of duties In-house

6.1 Codes, standards, rules, regulations In-house 6.2 Understanding of reporting relationship In-house 6.3 Understanding of reporting requirements In-house 6.4 Communicating device (mobile phone) In-house 6.5 Transport In-house 6.6 Equipment, instruments, devices required at site In-house 7 Limits Financial & administrative limits to be defined for

each level In-house

8 Hierarchical levels All operational matters to be divided in max four levels (including the initiating and the accepting levels)

In-house

9 Procedures To keep in view the max levels and be compatible with the objectives & ensure smooth workflow

In-house

10 Performance appraisal Each individual to have a digitized dossier. All work assigned to be, as far as possible, in terms of measurable parameters. Numeral scales to be assigned to parameters not measurable. Each work assigned to be entered in the dossier. Supervisors to make assessment on the basis of prescribed measurable parameters or numerical evaluation.

In-house

11 Coordination On the block, district and state levels. In-house 12 Allocation of resources Resources to be available at the block, district and

state levels to be clearly defined. Resources to be assigned to different levels on the basis of frequency and continuity of use and inevitability for the process, job or project at hand.

In-house

13. Availability of data 13.1 Organising data Collection, compilation, consolidation, sorting/

filtering, formatting, organizing, publishing data Specialised

agency 13.2 Coordinating with official

agencies Coordination with JSAC, CGWB, CPCB etc Specialised

agency 13.3 Collaboration with

private sector Commercial tie up with private sector to build up own data portal for maps, statistical and other data

Specialised agency

13.4 Digital library Setting up digital library, may be on commercial basis Specialised agency

Page | 314


14. Drinking water: 14.1 Selection of source:

ground water or surface water

Detailed study to be made and norms officially prescribed

Specialise agency

14.2 Testing of water samples Existing laboratories to be run in collaboration with private sector agency, or completely outsourced

Outsourced

14.3 Bacterial pollution of ground water

Detailed study to be made. Necessary steps taken accordingly.

Specialised agency

14.4 Locating hand pumps or tube wells

Agency to be put in place to suggest proper locations Specialised agency

14.5 Drilling of hand pumps & tube wells

Expert agencies to be brought in, with expertise in sealing selected strata to prevent pollution

Specialised agency

14.6 Disinfection of water Latest type of chlorinating facilities suitable for rural areas to be used.

Specialised agency

14.7 Corrosion of tube well assemblies

Experts to study cause of tubidity in tube wells, suggest proper material for assembly or protection against corrosion

Specialised agency

14.8 Treatment of iron, manganese, fluoride, arsenic etc

A technology team with selected reputed individuals may be put in place to address this and other issues (like in 14.3) and help in testing, standardization and authenticating the procedures.

Specialised agency

15. Sanitation: 15.1 Designs Proper designs for different areas to be developed,

standardized, authenticated, legalized, published Specialised

agency 15.2 Construction Pre-fabricated units that may be erected within a

short period may be used: Private sector may be brought in for the purpose.

Specialised agency

15.3 Awareness Professional marketing agency may be put in place to launch a nation-wide campaign like that for polio. The campaign may continue till at least 90% households are ODF.

Specialised agency

15.4 Pollution of ground water by effluent from latrines

Detailed study to be made as in 14.3. Specialised agency

16. Control & monitoring 16.1 Construction stage Communication devices available to at least one

worker at village level can be made to have reporting formats on which village level day-to-day information can be communicated. This information can be automatically integrated at the block, district and state levels, depending on the networking system installed.

In-house

16.2 Maintenance stage All those components of any project that run on electric power. Anything that is running on power: tube wells, chlorinators, treatment units can have SCADA devices that can record, communicate and be used to control respective processes. The said processes can be remotely controlled. In the events of breakdown the devices can even notify concerned persons about such breakdowns and then human intervention can be made.

In-house

16.3 Laboratories The working of various laboratories can also be integrated at the state level.

In-house

Page | 315


17. Specialised help in Engineering & Technology, IT, construction industry, & marketing 17.1 Designs & investigations It is desirable to commission a technology team to

address issues in14.3, 14.4, 14.5, 14.6, 14.7, 14.8, 15.1

Specialised agency

17.2 IT SCADA, ERP (16.1, 16.2) Specialised agency

17.3 Construction industry Manufacture of pre-fabricated structures (15.2) Specialised agency

17.4 Data management 13.1, 13.2, 13.3, 13.4 Specialised agency

17.5 Marketing Awareness, sensitization, motivation (15.3) Specialised agency

18. Regulatory issues 18.1 Land-related laws Availability of land in the state for any purpose is

difficult because of special provisions in respect of transfer of adivasi lands. Drinking water is a necessity of life and sanitation has no option it is necessary that exceptions be made for specific category of development works.

Government

18.2 Forest related laws Relaxations for making land available for purposes as above may be considered by the government.

Government

18.3 Income tax laws Government may consider granting relaxations in tax on income earned from investments in rural water supply and/or sanitation.

Government

Page | 316


ANNEXURE-36

GUIDELINES FOR PUBLIC AND WORKER’S HEALTH AND SAFETY

Page | 317


Annexure-36 GUIDELINES FOR PUBLIC AND WORKER’S HEALTH AND SAFETY

These guidelines identify possible hazards and the management and mitigation actions for both workers in the various project stages on site and public who may be in the vicinity of the activities. Pre-construction stage

14.3.1 To ensure the safety, health and reduce possible conflicts with public, the PHED/DPMU and the construction contractor need to provide information on the construction activities to the public in the area. This should include

Location of construction camps, borrow areas and new quarry areas. Extent of work Time of construction Diversions, if any Precaution measures in sensitive areas Involvement of local labours in the road construction Health issues - water stagnation, exposure to dust, communicable disease Mechanism for grievances The Contractor must educate the workers to undertake the health and safety precautions. The contractor

needs to educate the workers on: ▫ Personal safety measures and location of safety devices. ▫ Interaction with the host community ▫ Protection of environment with respect to: ▫ Trampling of vegetation and cutting of trees for cooking ▫ Restriction of activities in forest areas and also on hunting ▫ Water bodies protection ▫ Storage and handling of materials ▫ Disposal of construction waste

Construction Stage

During construction all measures as identified in the bid document will be followed for the safety and health of the construction workers and the neighbourhood. Additionally, safety needs at the construction site would include, Personal safety equipments (such as footwear and

gloves) for the workers Other provisions required:

▫ Adequate lighting arrangement ▫ Adequate drainage system to avoid any

stagnation of water ▫ Lined surface with slope 1:40 (V:H) and

provision of lined pit at the bottom, at the storage site for chemicals and oil and at the location of the generator used for provision of energy.

▫ Also, as required grease trap will be made.

▫ Facilities for administering first aid

First Aid and Safety System The first aid kit should have a clearly marked red cross on all sides and be white in color. The minimum contents of the kit would include

▫ 6 small sterilized dressings ▫ 3 medium and large sterilized dressings ▫ 1 (30 mm bottle) containing 2% solution of iodine ▫ 1 (30 mm bottle) containing an injury disinfectant ▫ 1 snakebite lancet ▫ 1 pair of sterilized scissors ▫ 1 copy of the Government of India, Factory

Services and Labor institute leaflet ▫ 100 tablets of aspirin/painkiller ▫ Burn ointments ▫ Surgical antiseptic solution

Appropriate arrangements for emergencies and taking injured to hospitals should be made at the site

Trained health personal at the site during working hours

Page | 318


The construction contractor will ensure public safety and comfort by ▫ Scheduling of construction work based upon sowing, harvesting and local festival needs ▫ All the cautionary signs as per IRC: 67-2001 and traffic control devices (such as barricades, etc) to be

put in place as soon as construction activity get started and to be kept in place till the activities get completed.

Following case specific measures need to be followed during the progress of the activity:

▫ In case of blasting, the Contractor must follow The Explosives Rules, 1983 ▫ During construction in the settlement, the contractor must ensure there shall not be any unauthorized

parking as well as storage of material, adjacent to road. ▫ Approved chemicals should be sprayed to prevent breeding of mosquitoes and other disease-causing

organisms, at all the water logging areas The DPMU/PHED will need to carry out periodic inspections in order to ensure that all the measures are

being undertaken according to what has been agreed in the contract.

Page | 319


ANNEXURE-37

Brief Report on Consultation Public Hearing for Word Bank Assisted Water Supply Project in Selected Districts of Jharkhand

Page | 320


Annexure-37

Brief Report on Consultation Public Hearing for Word Bank Assisted Water Supply Project in Selected Districts of Jharkhand

Khunti : May 6P

thP, 2013

Garhwa : May 8P

thP,2013

Jamshedpur : May 10P

thP, 2013

Dumka : May 12P

thP, 2013

Regional Workshop

Under National Rural Drinking Water Supply programme of Govt. of India six districts of Jharkhand have been selected for addressing water and sanitation needs of the rural area. In this context public meetings were organized at different places on different dates in which members of the PRI’s, representatives of the Govt. of Jharkhand, project authorities and other members of the public were invited to take part. People were informed about the objectives and components of the projects including the benefits to the society. The views of the public were obtained and discussed for participation of the public in implementation of the projects in all stages.

Ist meeting was held at Kisan Bhawan, Khunti on 6th May 2013. In which 64 participants have deliberated and expressed their views and raised questions. The prominent persons were Chairman and Deputy Chairman of Zila Parishad Khunti, Block Development officer, other dignitaries of PRI’s Govt. officials executing the project and other stake holders.

The executive engineer DWSSD, Khunti welcomed the participants, the SPMU specialist explained the project & subsequently Dr. K Avishek & Mr. Kuldeep Suman of DAS (India) presented the salient points, findings of the study. The questions raised by the participants were mainly about the basis of identification of villages taken in the project for execution. The participants were informed about the main components of the project by way of Power Point presentation by the consultants; the need for public awareness about construction of ISL’s and Hygiene was stressed upon. It was deliberated that the existing system of ground water recharge needs to be strengthened and maintained, identification of Water Dead Zones is necessary and Rain water harvesting should be made mandatory. Site identification for the structures is the main factor for the success of the scheme Gramin Payjal Samiti can assist the DWSD in implementation and strengthening of the scheme prepared.

The second stake holder’s consultation meeting was held at Garhwa at the DC office on 08.05.2013 in which 65 persons had participated. The executive engineer DWSSD, welcomed the participants, the SPMU specialist explained the project & subsequently Dr. K Avishek & Mr. Kuldeep Suman of DAS (India) presented the salient points, findings of the study. The main questions from peoples’ representatives & members of PRI’s were about the selection of only one village in one block i.e. amongst 19 blocks of the district only 19 villages have been selected and water dead zones have been identified as source of water and why existing water supply schemes have not been included for strengthening. Possible solutions were suggested in revival of the old water supply schemes and involvement of Gramin Panchayat in planning process. Old HP’s should be repaired and re-bored.

The third stake holders meeting was convened at Jamshedpur on 10.05.2013 in which 74 persons participated which included villagers, members and office bearers of PRI’s, Engineers executing the project, Deputy Development Commissioner of Jamshedpur and other officers of the Government of Jharkhand.

Mr. Kuldeep Suman & Mr. Dhiraj Chaudhary from the Consultants’ of the Project M/s ENV-DAS, Lucknow gave the power point presentation of the main features of the project, objectives and how to achieve them, present position of drinking water scheme & sources, problem of polluted water, types of contamination and their causes. The participants were apprised of points of consideration in drinking water management of the area and the need for constructions of ISL’s. The public was also apprised of the way in which the project shall be implemented. Iron and nitrate contamination are predominant in the area, at some places radioactive problems also exist. New and latest model Iron removal plants should be installed and maintained properly. It was discussed that before installing hand pumps, ground water level and quality be checked. Water is stored in small tanks at places where Ground Water

Page | 321


table is high by using submersible pumps, cost of tank & electricity charges can be shared by the villagers themselves.

Many natural Reservoirs exist in the area which can be used as source of water for constructing water supply schemes. Regarding sanitation it was stated in the meeting that villagers of the area are very poor and cannot afford to give money for ISL construction. Change of mindset is necessary for ISL construction. The leaders and office bearers of the PRI’s should construct ISL’s in their house first to inspire other members of the society. For creating awareness groups of Ladies, children and Old aged peoples should be formed and give them some incentives to propagate evils of open defecation.

The fourth stake holders meeting was convened at Dumka on 12.05.213 in which 74 stakeholders participated. The Participants were from Public, villagers, members & office bearers of PRI’s, officers of the state executing the project, Engineers and the consultant’s representatives. Mr. Kuldeep Suman & Mr. Dhiraj Chaudhary from the Consultants’ M/S ENV-DAS (India) Lucknow gave the power point presentation of the proposed project, its objectives, components and the specific problems of the project area for drinking water. The participants were told’ how the objectives of the project can be achieved. The present position of drinking water sources and the main points of water –Management were also discussed. The stakeholders were apprised of points of rural cleanliness and the need for construction of ISL’s. The main points which came during discussion are that selection of village should be based on demand of the stakeholders and not on the basis of the population. ISL’s should be made of good construction materials and facility of water supply should be there. Only 10% contribution is collected from users for ISL’s construction. New Schemes should be based on solar Energy. On Small Rivers a series of check dams be constructed to increase the Ground Water recharge. Rain water harvesting is increased at village level. Geographical conditions of the area should also be a point of consideration in selection of villages. Closed coal mines of the area can be a source of storage of water and can be used for drinking after treatment. Schemes should be protected by appointing local people in the security of the plants.

Brief Report on State Level Consultation Meet on 26.06.2013 on EIA and EMF for

Word Bank Assisted Water Supply & Sanitation Projects State Level Consultation Workshop Jharkhand

State Level Workshop

Under National Rural Drinking Water Supply programme of Govt. of India in Jharkhand East Singhbhum, Palamu, Dhumka, Garwa, Khunti and Saraikela have been selected for addressing the water and sanitation needs of their rural areas. In this context district level public meetings were organized earlier at different places on different dates in which members of the PRI’s, representatives of the Govt. of Jharkhand, project authorities and other members of the public were invited to take part. People were informed about the objectives and components of the projects including the benefits to the society. The views of the public were obtained and discussed for participation of the public in implementation of the projects in all stages and communicated to the Government of Jharkhand. In continuation to this a state level consultation meet was organized on 26.06.2013 to discuss the Environmental Assessment & Framework development study for the proposed project. The consultation meet was attended by the Senior Officers of the Jharkhand Govt. and the State Water & Sanitation Department, Consultants, Public Representatives and Stake Holders, comprising about 130 participants.

Mr. Akhil Prasad M.D. DAS (India) Pvt. Ltd., welcomed the participants. Mr Shadendhru Narayan, EnC-DWSD Jharkhand made the introductory address. Mr. Ram Pravesh, Executive Engineer DWSD- Jharkhand introduced the participants to the project and stated that the supply of tap water and access to sanitation is the lowest in Jharkhand as compared to the all India figures. He stated that less than 5% rural households in Jharkhand have access to tap water as against a more than 30% as the all India level. U.P. according to him had coverage of 20%. Sanitation was only 8% as against a plus 30% figure at the all India level. Mr. Ram Pravesh introduced the components of the project and its coverage and the need for the project. It was emphasized that the project has to be handled by the PRI’s and that the community will have to pay for the O&M costs. He said that the project is likely to benefit 11 lakh people in the State. He briefly introduced the agenda for the day. Mr. Shardendu Narain and Mr.

Page | 322


Jabber Singh, Director PMU & Sp. Secy. DWSD, Jharkhand also highlighted the various features of the project emphasizing on the participatory approach. On behalf of the consultants M/s DAS (India) Pvt. Ltd., Dr. Kirti Avishek presented the salient features of the Environmental Assessment and Framework Development study. He explained that the consultants were entrusted the job of carrying out the Environmental Assessment study and prepare an Environmental Management Framework in order to assess and evaluate each sub-project by filling and analyzing the Environmental data sheets separately. He said that the report has been submitted to the Government of Jharkhand and includes the baseline environmental assessment, policy and legal environmental analysis, institutional assessment, environmental issues and impact identification. The report has also suggested proposed mitigation measures, the Environmental Management framework, the Institutional & Monitoring arrangements and Capacity Building. Each issue as above was explained in detail including quantitative and qualitative water quality, lack of adequate waste management systems, rampant open defecation near the water sources along and the serious lack of awareness. The participants were introduced to the expected positive & negative environmental impacts and to the finding that the positive impacts far outweigh the negative impacts which are site specific, short lived, reversible and can be easily mitigated. The participants were informed that in addition to the Environmental Datasheets which the project managers would be required to fill in order to assess the Environmental Impacts and plan mitigation, the report also provides for various codes of practices (ECOP’s) with technical specifications and guidelines which would help to design and implement the project in an environmentally sustainable manner. They were also told that the report also covers the institutional and capacity building aspects.

During the open house a number of issues were raised. Ms. Maya, Zila Parishad, Adhyaksh, Khunti suggested that there should be a provision of solid waste management, rain water harvesting and preventing open defecation. The vice Chairman, Zila Parishad Garhwa pointed out the problems of disposal of plastic wastes and the need of planting trees and revival of existing traditional rainwater structures. The representative from Dumka also emphasized on the need to revive the traditional rainwater harvesting structures and the need to train ladies also on the quantitative and qualitative aspects of water and sanitation because it is they who usually collect water. It was pointed out by some that the horticultural use of sewage should be examined and promoted. Shri Rakesh Kumar, Mukhiya, Garhwa also supported the need for reviving traditional rainwater harvesting systems and plantation. Most of the concerns raised were regarding non-deliverance and poor operation and management of existing schemes and the resultant resistance to payment. A need was stressed to strengthen these.

The participants were informed that most of the issues have already been addressed to in the report through the project components, and the Environmental Management Framework. suggestions as regards the need for revival and use of traditional rainwater harvesting structures and training to ladies shall be conveyed to the Government of Jharkhand. Operation and Maintenance issues have been addressed in the Institutional Assessment and capacity Building Chapter.

In concluding session Mr. Sudhir Prasad, ACS – DWSD discussed the operational aspects of the proposed project vis-à-vis the existing implementation practices.

A vote of thanks concluded the Consultative Workshop.

Page | 323


Page | 324


Page | 325


Page | 326